Home

i / iX Series User Manual

1. INE LOAD 3 p E PC ASSY EMI FILTER 9 0 6 Suen aene ASSY 7000 719 2 AP SOE SCH 7000 092 2 O T3 TO A14 42 2 m ae GROUND ScONT TO At4 4 GND OVERTEMP OVERTEMP GND CURRENT SHARE CURRENT SHARE 5 CURRENT SHARE CURRENT SHARE m 1 2 CND GROUND CURRENT SHARE CURRENT SHARE RE 2 CURRENT SHARE COMMON CURRENT SHARE COMMON 1 2 Spin e CURRENT SHARE COMMON CURRENT SHARE COMMON A 7 2 2 CURRENT SHARE COMMON CURRENT SHARE COMMON 15V SV 5 Pas pasl HEATSINK ASSY AC LE 5 2 REMO ASSY 7000 419 15 j ox rM ee ee MON 5 C 5 Wad S ng 1 e10 ov T2 HOOK UP 5001m
2. PHASE METER COMPUTER DVM REFERENCE SIGNAL IEEE 488 INPUT INPUT Van LO IEEE 488 IEEE 488 DVM Lo IEEE 488 SHUNT HI gg LOAD CLK LEK SENSE OUTPUT HI ae a 488 ck to LN NPUT L1 L1 12 12 3 PHASE f INPUT POWER SND GND OPTION RS232 5001iX i POWER SOURCE MASTER PHASE A 7000 262 1 SYSTEM INTERFACE CABLE CLK LEK SENSE OUTPUT HI 8 Lo 4 IEEE 488 c END SYSTEM NPUT a i 12 E 3 PHASE 13 INPUT POWER GND GND OPTION RS232 5001iX i POWER SOURCE SLAVE PHASE B CLK LEK SENSE OUTPUT A HI EEE 488 2 T SYSTEM er NPUT 1 L1 12 12 3 PHASE L3 f INPUT POWER eno av OPTION RS232 5001iX i POWER SOURCE SLAVE PHASE 118 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Note The Fluke 8506A Digital Multimeter must be used for the following calibration The 8506A must be set to the AC HI ACCUR mode for all AC measurements AC Volt Full scale Program the output
3. Test Section Subject Test Limits Comment File Ref 1 One Phase Power Failures for 7 seconds Table TAC602 2 A F 602 1 2 Two Phase Power Failures OV for 30 mins Table TAC602 2 G J 602 2 TAC603 Phase Reversal N A to Rev C Table LDC Test No Section Subject Test Limits Comment File Ref LDC101 Load Measurements 28V DC CLDC101 LDC102 Steady State Limits for Voltage 22V to 29V DC Apply for 30 mins CLDC102 LDC103 Voltage Distortion Spectrum Requires Additional Equipment LDC104 Total Ripple Requires Additional Equipment LDC105 Normal Voltage Transients 18V to 50V DC 1 Overvoltage Transients Peak Voltage 50V DC Table LDC105 3 AA JJ CLDC105 1 2 Undervoltage Transients Low Voltage 18V DC Table LDC105 3 KK PP CLDC105 2 3 Combined Transients 18V to 50V DC Table LDC105 3 QQ RR CLDC105 3 4 Repetitive Normal Voltage Transient Test 18V to 45V DC Repeat transient for 30 mins CLDC105 4 LDC201 Power Interrupt for 50 msec Table LDC201 2 A L CLDC201 LDC301 Abnormal Steady State Limits for Voltage 20V to 31 5V DC Apply each test for 30 mins CLDC301 LDC302 Abnormal Voltage Transients ZV to 50V DC 1 Overvoltage Transients Peak Voltage 50V DC able LDC302 3 AA FF CLDC302 1 2 Transients Low Voltage 7V DC able LDC302 3 GG LL CLDC302 2 3 Combined Transients ZV to 50V DC Table LDC302 3 MM NN CLDC302 3
4. Table TAC Section Subject Test Limits Comment File Ref TAC101 Three Phase Load and Current Harmonic Measurements 115V RMS 400 Hz ATAC101 TAC102 Steady State Limits for Voltage Including Unbalance and Frequency 1 Balanced Phases 108V to 118V RMS 380 to 420 Hz Apply for 30 mins each test ATAC102 1 2 Unbalanced Phases 108V to 118V RMS 3V Unbalance Apply for 30 mins each test ATAC102 2 TAC103 oltage Phase Difference Phase B 116 to 124 degrees Apply for 30 mins each test IAATAC103 TAC104 oltage Modulation 1 115V Nominal Test 115V RMS 3 5V Vp v mod Apply for 10 mins ATAC104 1 2 109V Nominal Test 109V RMS 3 5V Vp v mod Apply for 10 mins IATAC 104 2 3 117V Nominal Test 117V RMS 3 5V Vp v mod Apply for 10 mins IATAC 104 3 TAC105 Frequency Modulation 1 00 Hz Nominal Test 00 Hz 4 2 mod Apply for 10 mins ATAC105 1 2 395 Hz Nominal Test 395 Hz 4 Hz mod Apply for 10 mins ATAC105 2 3 405 Hz Nominal Test 405 Hz 4 Hz mod Apply for 10 mins ATAC105 3 TAC106 oltage Distortion Spectrum Requires Additional Equipment 107 Total Voltage Distortion oltage Distortion Factor 0 08 Apply for 30 mins IATAC107 108 DC Voltage Component 1 Positive DC Offset 115V RMS 10V DC Apply for 30 mins 108 1 2 Negative DC Offset 115V RMS 10V DC Apply for 30 mins ATAC108 2 109 Normal Voltage Transients 160V RMS to 58V RMS 1
5. Rev A Table SAG Test No Section Subject Test Limits Comment File Ref ISAC101 Load and Current Harmonic Measurements 115V RMS 400 Hz 101 SAC102 Steady State Limits for Voltage and Frequency 108V to 118V RMS 380 to 420 Hz Apply for 30 mins each test IASAC102 103 Test Done so test numbers coincide SAC104 Voltage Modulation 1 115V Nominal Test 115V RMS 3 5V Vp v mod Apply for 10 mins 5 104 1 2 109V Nominal Test 109V RMS 3 5V Vp v mod Apply for 10 mins IASAC104 2 3 117V Nominal Test 117V RMS 3 5V Vp v mod Apply for 10 mins JASAC104 3 SAC105 Frequency Modulation 1 400 Hz Nominal Test 400 Hz 4 Hz mod Apply for 10 mins IASAC105 1 2 395 Hz Nominal Test 395 Hz 4 Hz mod Apply for 10 mins IASAC105 2 3 405 Hz Nominal Test 405 Hz 4 Hz mod Apply for 10 mins 5 105 3 SAC106 Voltage Distortion Spectrum Requires Additional Equipment SAC107 Total Voltage Distortion Voltage Distortion Factor 0 08 Apply for 30 mins IASAC107 SAC108 DC Voltage Component 1 Positive DC Offset 115V RMS 10V DC Apply for 30 mins IASAC 108 1 2 Negative DC Offset 115V RMS 10V DC Apply for 30 mins 108 2 SAC109 Normal Voltage Transients 160V RMS to 58V RMS 1 Overvoltage Transients Peak voltage 160V RMS Table SAC109 2 A G IASAC109 1 2 Undervoltage Transients Low voltage 58V RMS Table SAC109 2 H N IASAC109 2 3 Combined Transient 160V RMS to 58V RM
6. 33 Figure 3 13 Connection With MODE nennen 34 Figure 3 14 Two Phase 10000 VA System 10002i LK Two 35 Figure 3 15 Three Phase 9000 VA System 9003iX i One 36 Figure 4 1 Shuttle Knob niet ee Rt EE ide rte ee nde deni s 38 Figure 4 2 FUNCTION Keypad idadi iaaa xe dedere 39 Figure 4 3 Entering value from decimal keypad ssssssseeeeeeneneen eene 40 Figure 4 4 Cursor UP key movement curre cedet dene ect cesses d oie sees ande ederet e duse Pee d due 41 Figure 4 5 Cursor DOWN key 41 Figure 4 6 Main Menu 1 5 tesi sienne 42 Figure 4 7 Menu 1 through E 42 Figure 4 8 PROGRAM MeRU 1 erre ee dee N db dee tede Tee Ee 46 Figure 4 9 MEASUREMENTS Screen single phase and three phase modes 48 Figure 4 10 HARMONICS TRACE ANALYSIS 50 Figure 4 11 TRANSIENTS Men siiin e a eto ee Dea
7. 6 IEC 1000 4 11 2 73 i Series Series November 2005 327 User Manual Rev Z IEC 61000 4 11 Edition 1 0 ent n adi 180 Edition 2 0 ei ide t m mme retis 180 IGB Sic cet nere 106 109 checking s ii et E ees 128 12 impedance calibration 121 Inrush 2 22277 2 instalation asian iere crt p ter er de 16 Introduction 1 Isolation 2 K keypad i eiue e 38 functione roit het utes hin 38 ie Et ad d 38 L ECD display i de 41 eR enne 105 109 125 129 DGC DG output ether 106 LED aux PS siint re b 128 EED indicatots etc 125 Line Current s asi on 2 Line Frequenoy eee elu t 2 LINO hartedet 2 list transient itid tdt 96 load sharing e tite titre thes 106 M maintenance eese 125 Material CASSIS cct ned 10 MEAS Key cic oi haves eerte teri tetur 39 measurement 75 MENU key 2 rere ene de 39 MIL STD 704D 73 MODE x ess 74 models voltage 15 N NOISE Lagene sende 6
8. Voltage will not reach zero in this test condition Equipment performance standards may require to repeat test 1 with T1 varying from 5 to 200 ms by step defined in the test equipment performance standards step typically comprised between 5 ms and 20 ms depending on equipment design Figure 9 6 Power Interrupt 140 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments T2 T3 Test no 21 1 22 11 23 1 24 IV 25 V 26 VI T1 ms 50 50 100 100 200 200 F1 Hz 360 Fmax 360 Fmax 360 Fmax F2 Hz Fmax 360 Fmax 360 Fmax 360 Fmax 650 Hz for Group 2 Fmax 800 Hz for Group 3 T2 20 msec T3 5 msec Figure 9 7 Power Interrupt for Group 2 and 3 VOLTAGE SURGE This test requires 160 volts output If the power source is set at the low voltage range the high voltage range will be selected before the test starts At the end of the test the power source will be switched back to the low range automatically Voltage Time Seq No RTCA Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 ALL 1 115 115 115 115 5 Minute 2 160 160 160 170 30msec 3 115 115 115 115 5 Sec 4 60 70 70 70 30msec 5 115 115 115 115 5 Sec Table 9 4 Normal VoltageSurge Sequence The output voltage will follow the sequence in Table 9 4 The above sequence will repeat itself three times Each repeat will start from sequence two US
9. 1 Normal Steady State Voltage and fr Voltage each phase 104 to 122v RMS 16 5 1 1 b 1 1 2 3 Apply at 430Hz and 370Hz Average voltage 3 phases 105 5V to 120 5 RMS 16 5 1 1 b 2 test 1 5 Apply at 430Hz and 370Hz Abnormal Steady State Voltage Voltage each phase to 130v AMS 3 Apply for 30 mins iso 5 mins Average voltage 3 phases 96V to 130v RMS 16 5 3 1 c Apply for 30 mins iso 5 mins Voltage Surge Fig 1 Normal Transients 160 for 30ms 71 for 15m 16 5 1 5 1 b Use specified limit iso D0160 Normal Transients 156V for 50 80 for 30m 16 5 1 5 1 b Use specified limit iso D0160 Normal Transients 148V for 100ms 86V for 50r 16 5 1 5 1 b Use specified limit iso D0160 Normal Transients 140 for 200ms 16 5 1 5 1 b No undervoltage test requirec Voltage Surge Fig 1 Abnormal Transients 180 for 100ms 148 for 1 16 5 3 3 1 b Abnormal Transients OV for 5 secs 16 5 3 2 b No undervoltage test requirec Abnormal Transients Disconnects for 5 secs n a Appendix 3 tests Voltage Spike Fig 3 4 Peak voltage 1000 17 4 Requires add equipment Cube Tens EYES Cisl ennt User Data Tested by Test department EUT Temp 258 Hum 95 Comment Test Site Press Test sequence file load completed Select Test Control tab to view test program Figure 9 66 ABD Option Test Selection Screen To access the ABD option select the Airbus ABD Tabl
10. AREA LI a 15 GND gt 3 PHASE INPUT POWER OPTION RS232 5001 1 POWER SOURCE SLAVE PHASE CLK LCK SENSE eo IEEE 488 STEM QUTPUT 10 GND INPUT 12 Ls CND 2 3 PHASE INPUT POWER OPTION RS232 5001iX i POWER SOURCE SLAVE PHASE Ab LOK o Qo IEEE 488 SYSTEM EE OUTPUT 2 3 PHASE INPUT POWER OPTION RS232 o 50011 1 POWER SOURCE SLAVE PHASE B CLK LEK SENSE OUTPUT o o0 HI LO IEEE 488 5 5 u 2 3 PHASE INPUT POWER OND OPTION RS232 5001x i POWER SOURCE SLAVE PHASE i Series iX Series November 2005 231 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 6 6 Operation 9 6 6 1 9 6 6 2 General The OMNI impedance network adds resistive and inductive impedance to the output of selected California Instruments power sources systems to provide power source impedance levels specified for IEC 555 3 flicker testing For normal low impedance power source operation the impedance that OMNI adds may be shunted by bypass relays selected on the OMNI front panel Omni i Front Panel Controls Indicators Power Switch and Lamp power switch turns the OMNI control circuits on
11. 184 T ble 9 21 EOS Versions dereen eta nere 200 Table 9 22 704 Option Test 255 Table 9 23 ABD Option Test 292 Table 10 17 Error Messages 1 ocn onem reed rere pd ene dei 326 X November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 1 Introduction This instruction manual contains information on the installation operation calibration and maintenance of all power systems that use the 3001i 5001i 3001iX and 5001iX power sources with the programmable controller Higher power configurations consisting of multiple units operated in parallel are also covered by this user manual Such models are 10001iX 10002iX 15003iX and 30003iX 1 1 General Description The 3001i 5001i 3001iX and 5001iX are high efficiency lightweight AC power sources that provide precise output with low distortion Older generation i Series have two voltage ranges either 0 135V or 0 270V The iX Series and the newer generation i Series offer two sets of ranges 0 135 0 270 and 0 150 0 300 Full power is available at the maximum output voltage for all ranges Two or three 5001i iX units can be connected in parallel as a single phase system for 10 kVA or 15 respectively Three or six units can be connected as a three phase system They can be operated
12. 86 blinking Finish parameter entry HSS des SOR SEES S 38 paint 10 bridge 102 Frequency Range niente 6 front panel asset gti 37 EE 37 calibration front panels current limit Ac Men 120 blank 26 impedance Lukke etan 121 function strobe 22 211 1 13 117 Function Strobe 9 19 120 Function Strobe BNC Rete ederet tert 114 ACCESSOLY 22 22 calibration factors PAA ROUES 75 76 Functional Test ad 27 CE Bal EE ER 12 Fuse check 128 circuit 37 102 fuses clip level NA 61 functions 128 clock and 26 G clock mode cui edie 47 amin ren 105 gate VE G 106 129 Construction H internal niteat eue 10 Controllers Handles e that aS 13 programable e cate ete tata 13 Hold Up TIME imet 2 Cooling e ANER 10 peak repetitive
13. 1 AC INPUT 1 ej av f m 90 ji 2 25 57 15 AE KEN DANA 5 05 128 27 Ji Hie e Hh s 0 Bode doc o 4 00 101 80 SECTION Figure 9 49 XLS Module Dimensions i Series iX Series November 2005 237 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 7 5 Connection Diagram The following diagrams illustrate both low range and high range connections between the XLS module the i iX Series master power source and the AC Line synchronizing voltage 5001iX POWER SOURCE 80 250V SYNC INPUT FROM iX SOURCE INPUT OR OTHER AC LINE VOLTAGE 7000 262 2 system interface cable 80 250V COM 250 500V SYSTEM INTERFACE Figure 9 50 XLS Connection on Low Range 238 November 2005 i Series Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 5001iX POWER SOURCE 7000 262 2 system interface cable 250 500V SYNC INPUT FROM iX SOURCE INPUT OR OTHER AC LINE VOLTAGE COM 80 250V SYSTEM INTERFACE 250 500V Figure 9 51 XLS Connection on High Range i Series iX Series November 2005 239 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 7 6 Installation The XLS module can be installed inside system cabinet or other vertical structure in the vi
14. 1 1 9 23 repeat oup eine eee 60 replacement 2 2 131 RS232 Cable mt qai tente 21 GOnnNeclor airo tp etel 21 RIGA DOTOOD rte tre 73 5 SAL ei oim oL 12 SENSE cont ox eir ede mne 125 opa n erre 16 SET Key iier rto 40 SET Mode vrak keen 38 SHOCK ata dansa eese 11 Short Circuit 9 Shuttle dam karen tte dean beu 38 SET mode nere b 38 Shuttle IMMEDIATE mode 38 single phase 26 105 to three phase 26 i iX Series User Manual Rev Z slew rates 222 4 4 2 2 1 21 98 Status n eie eee I c 37 step 2 94 system single pliase tie teres 1 three phase 23 tenete 1 system 101 system interface 26 105 T temperature OVER m ke 38 Temperature 10 terminal block 10 three phase 26 26 Three phase 102 Three Ph ase ie
15. 22 0 291 9 10 WHM 319 10 Error Messages tani eed da duet Se pend eet eased 322 11 17959 NE NN MM Ne NE ee ENE 327 vi November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments List of Figures 3 1 The 5001iX Power Sources ede te d ep cL 15 Figure 3 2 RS232C Cable for PC Connection wiring 21 Figure 3 3 Function Strobe 22 Figure 3 4 Function Strobe Trigger Output 22 Figure 3 5 Rear Panel View for the 30011 30011 24 Figure 3 6 Rear Panel View for the 5001 5001 25 Figure 3 7 Connection For Single Power Source 5001iX i 30011 28 Figure 3 8 Functional Test eene ER eee o bu eed 29 Figure 3 9 Single Phase 10000 VA System 10001iX i sse enm eene eren 30 Figure 3 10 Three Phase 15000 VA System 15003iX i LK Three 31 Figure 3 11 Single Phase 15000 VA System 15001iX i sse nemen ene 32 Figure 3 12 Three Phase 15000 VA system 15003iX i One
16. ec iicet rine ee de detta stre bee de 137 Table 9 4 Normal VoltageSurge 141 Table 9 5 Normal Frequency Transient 142 Table 9 6 Normal Frequency Variation 142 Table 9 7 Emergency Voltage and Frequency Minimum essen enne 143 Table 9 8 Emergency Voltage and Frequency 143 Table 9 9 Emergency Voltage 143 Table 9 10 Abnormal Voltage 144 Table 9 11 Abnormal Voltage 144 Table 9 12 Abnormal Frequency 145 Table 9 13 Normal Voltage Minimum cesses 146 Table 9 14 Table 9 15 Table 9 16 Table 9 17 Normal Voltage Maximum Ede eese enter dente edo deter 147 cM EMRM 147 Abnormal Voltage Surge 2 eu pente tree ite db dede EHE Deer d bee edited 149 160 Option Test Coverage 115VAC and 28VDC 151 Table 9 18 160 Option Test Coverage 230VAC and 14 152 Table 9 19 Dips and Interruptions Tests Performed During RUN ALL sse 183 Table 9 20 Voltage Variations Test Performed During
17. CLK LCK o IEEE 488 SYSTEM OUTPUT HI 10 GND INPUT 2 15 3 PHASE INPUT POWER OPTION R5232 5001ix i POWER SOURCE MASTER 7000 262 2 SYSTEM INTERFACE CABLE LEK OUTPUT Lo GND INPUT L1 12 IEEE 488 SYSTEM gt 1 L2 3 PHASE L3 INPUT POWER GND OPTION RS232 5001ix i POWER SOURCE SLAVE 30 November 2005 i Series Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Figure 3 10 Three Phase 15000 VA System 15003iX i LK Three Controllers PHASE PHASE B PHASE gt OUTPUT CLK LEK OUTPUT H LO NEUTRAL 488 SYSTEM 3 PHASE INPUT POWER OPTION RS232 5001iX i POWER SOURCE PHASE 250561 CONNECTOR 250562 CABLE CLK LCK DUTPUT H LO IEEE 488 SYSTEM 5 PHASE INPUT POWER OPTION RS232 5001ix i POWER SOURCE PHASE B CLK LCK OUTPUT HI LO 488 SYSTEM L2 3 PHASE L3 INPUT POWER OPTION RS232 5001iX i POWER SOURCE PHASE i Series iX Series November 2005 31 User Manual Rev Z 32 Figure 3 11 Single Phase 15000 VA System 15001iX i LOK eG
18. Control Display Description Link Number of subsequent rows that are linked to this step This function is required to implement complex transients that require multiple steps with zero time skew When set to a value other than blank or 0 subsequent rows are considered part of the same test step for single step or loop on step execution modes PhsB Phase angle of phase B only visible if phase angle is changed PhsC Phase angle of phase C only visible if phase angle is changed Comment A comment about the specific test step 9 1 2 10 DC Ripple Test Window Section 16 6 1 2 162 DC ripple tests for 28VDC or 14VDC EUT s are provided through a separate control screen This is required to extend the range of the ripple frequency to 5000 Hz The actual requirement for DO160 Rev E is testing up to 150 KHz ripple This is out of the available range of the iX Series power source To test to the full 150 KHz range an external audio generator and coupling transformer as outlined in RTCA DO 160 Section 18 Figure 18 1 is required The DO160 DC Ripple test screen is available from the main screen Applications RTCA DO160 DC Ripple Test menu Once selected the DC ripple test control screen is modal and must be closed before any other tests can be run Opening this screens requires several seconds as the power source is being set up to perform the DC ripple tests This screen also places the power source in AC
19. 22444 22 102 105 custom 79 40 Creating 79 del tllg iren 80 1 downloading eene 80 15003iX MODE 74 D 5 PE uer 47 TOA EE 241 242 DC output 109 DC DC converter 129 9 DIMENSIONS s nere dd 10 9003iX MODE uote la eco 74 Disassembly procedure 130 Distorted 126 A DNM ERE TEN NECEM 105 ABD ect redeo 150 253 291 E 0100 1 8 150 253 291 Switching Transients 305 EfficIe noy ice ten i ertet 2 Test Tables sss 166 269 309 EMISSIONS iu esr tet tire 12 EN 109 EOS ACOUSTIC n i see e 12 Sj 182 active COUP rsa 79 5 065 4 4 322 Airbus F Switching Transients 305 SON MOY Suds 38 LE PTS 102 p Soon tcn ets La bro 105 FFT ANALYSIS rto npe tH 85 B data displays
20. i Series iX Series Sub Tab Description For three phase EUT s any imbalance in power between the three phases is calculated by the GUI program and compared against Figure 9 of the ABD0100 1 8 specification The amount of imbalance is displayed in of total VA to the right of the power readings Inrush Current A Displays peak current detected per phase in Amps since last measurement was taken Power Factor Displays power factor for each phase Power factor measurement data is compared against Figure 10 of the ABD0100 1 8 specification for both leading and lagging power factors If one or more phases is outside the allowable limits a Fail indication is displayed Current Distortion Displays Total Current Distortion for each phase in percent of 96 fundamental current No limits are applied although the user can set a maximum limit for this parameter if needed in the ABD010018 Distortion Limits ini setting file by adding Ithd in either TABLE TABLE G sections The bottom half of the Parameters tab contains user controls and a text entry field for entering observations regarding the EUT operation Test Frequency The frequency selection drop down control is active only for Dropdown control Table C mode Variable Frequency and can be used to set the frequency at which data from the EUT is to be acquired For all other modes it is fixed to either 400 Hz or DC Acquire Data at all This button caused data
21. 488 SYSTEM OPTION R5232 5D01iX i POWER SOURCE MASTER 7000 262 1 SYSTEM INTERFACE CABLE RS232 5001X i POWER SDURCE SLAVE CLK LCK ee IEEE 488 SYSTEM OPTION RS232 5001X i POWER SOURCE SLAVE November 2005 California Instruments i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Figure 3 12 Three Phase 15000 VA system 15003iX i One Controller PHASE PHASE ITPLIT PHASE C NEUTRAL CLK LEK SENSE IEEE 488 SYSTEM DUTPUT HI Lo GND ul 12 L3 GND Li 12 L3 GND 3 PHASE INPUT POWER OPTION RS232 5001ix i POWER SOURCE PHASE MASTER 7000 262 1 SYSTEM INTERFACE CABLE CLK LEK SENSE OUTPUT eo IEEE 488 SYSTEM om ul 12 3 GND 5 PHASE L3 INPUT POWER OPTION R5232 5001ix i POWER SOURCE SLAVE PHASE B CLK LCK SENSE DUTPUT IEEE 488 lt SYSTEM 1 12 13 GND L1 2 3 PHASE L3 INPUT POWER OPTION 5232 500lix i POWER SOURCE SLAVE PHASE i Series iX Series November 2005 33 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Figure 3 1
22. Oe seule eta eee 53 Figure 4 12 VOLTAGE SURGE SAG SETUP screen 54 Figure 4 13 VOLTAGE SWEEP STEP SETUP screen 56 Figure 4 14 FREQUENCY SWEEP STEP SETUP emen nennen nnne 58 Figure 4 15 VOLTAGE FREQUENCY SWEEP STEP SETUP 59 Figure 4 16 START VIEW TRANSIENT SEQUENCE 60 Figure 4 17 WAVEFORMS 61 Figure 4 18 APPLICATIONS menu su 2 5 a a ebd 64 Figure 4 19 SETUP REGISTERS 65 Figure 4 20 UTILITY menu cierre iere tnter e ei ones DR red ape eee a boken dux eus 66 Figure 4 21 GPIB RS232 SETUP men iicet uter dre 68 Figure 4 22 VOLTAGE CURRENT CONTROL SETUP menu eee 69 Figure 4 23 INITIAL SETUP menus tert etm ette b rm Ge P ER E Roe PR emenda 70 Figure 4 24 EIMIT SETUP menu teret de ie deep 72 Figure 4 25 OUTPUT IMPEDANCE 74 Figure 4 26 MEASUREMENT CAL FACTORS menu sss enn 75 Figure 4 27 OUTPUT CAL FACTORS 76 Figure 4 28 Selecting wavefo
23. dio e Rega 186 Application menu tere trt e ERE Ine ptr s ren nerder reir Rn gs 189 IEC 61000 4 13 MenU iere tc ee tee t eb ER eoe e Rocher eges ea eet dd Poe EE rte 189 IEG 61000 4 13 FQUrve 5 3 certc dice aan ut arto vl duket 191 IEG 61000 4 13 OSW g entree ante qe eine te 191 IEG 61000 4 13 SWe8Dp 1 2 1 et eee dit EUR re ge 192 IEC 61000 4 13 193 IEC 61000 4 13 20 5 194 IEC 61000 4 13 Meister Curve 195 IEC 61000 4 13 Test Flowchart Class 1 2 196 IEC 61000 4 13 Test Flowchart Class 3 iiien ienien te etie eonun eio hacen e dea 197 MENU 2 SCREEN me ERE ER RP roe eir RR ERR PEE 199 INTERHARMONICS SQCREEN rcnt ete cere teet iden baee Pee a eene Eee eee E eec eee ipea 199 Example Connection With 5001iX and 5 1 enne 207 Example Connection With Compliance Test System and EOS 1 208 15003iX CTS EOS3 LER39 sect rette eid M Deoque e else 209 150031X 3 E083 TED 210 EOS3 Location of 70 80 Taps for each 214 Example Connection With MODE tennant en 221 Example Connections
24. OPTION RS232 5001ix i POWER SOURCE PHASE C i Series iX Series November 2005 35 User Manual Rev Z CLK LOK IEEE 48B SYSTEM OPTION R5232 7000 282 1 SYSTEM INTERFACE CABLE CLK LCK IEEE 488 SYSTEM OPTION 5252 CLK LCK o IEEE 488 SYSTEM OPTION RS232 36 California Instruments Figure 3 15 Three Phase 9000 VA System 9003iX i One Controller SENSE OUTPUT HI LO SINGLE PHASE INPUT POWER 3001ix i POWER SOURCE PHASE A MASTER A7 TS OUTPUT di HI LO SINGLE PHASE INPUT POWER Jr 3001iX i POWER SOURCE SLAVE PHASE B SENSE OUTPUT HI LO L1 12 SINGLE PHASE INPUT POWER he GND 3001iX i POWER SOURCE SLAVE PHASE C November 2005 PHASE PHASE B gt OUTPUT PHASE C NEUTRAL i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 4 Front Panel Operation 4 1 Tour of the Front Panel The i and iX Series front panels are identical although some of the keys found on the front panel are only used by iX Series models If your unit is an i Series these keys will act as don t cares This chapter provides information on operating the i and iX Series AC sources from the front panel keyboard Befo
25. VOLT PAIR OL MODE TRIP DELAY VOLT SENSE NO OUTPUT PREV SCREEN VOLTAGE VOLTAGE CUR LIMIT CUR LIMIT PREV SCREEN FREQ LO FREQ NO OUTPUT FREQ HI PHASE CLOCK LOCK PHASE C MORE PREVIOUS SCREEN PREVIOUS SCREEN VOLT RANGE DO160C VOLT MODE MIL704 OL MODE IEC1000 4 11 OUTPUT RELAY MORE 55 TEMPERATURE VOLT SENSE WAVE GROUP CLOCK MODE NO OUTPUT PREVIOUS SCREEN November 2005 45 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 4 2 4 PROGRAM Menu PROGRAM 1 PROGRAM 2 VOLTAGE 128 B VAC VOLT RANGE FHASE 178 9 VOLT MODE AC FREG CURR LIMIT DC OFFSET 8 8U PREVIOUS SCREEN gS OSS START c 4 8 PROGRAM Menu The PROGRAM menu is shown in Figure 4 8 It can be reached in one of two ways 1 by selecting the PROGRAM entry the MENU screen and pressing the ENTER key 2 by pressing the PROG key in the FUNCTION keypad The PROGRAM menu is used to change output parameters The most commonly used parameters are all located in PROGRAM 1 The PREVIOUS SCREEN entry when selected will return the user to the most recently selected menu This is normally the MENU screen unless the PROGRAM menu was selected using the PROG key on the FUNCTION keypad Less frequently used parameters are located in PROGRAM 2 which can be reached from the PROGRAM 1 screen using the MORE selection or by pressing the PROGRAM key twice The following choices are available in
26. FUNCTION SINE REPEAT PREVIOUS SCREEN EVENT Figure 4 12 VOLTAGE SURGE SAG SETUP screen The Voltage surge and sag screen shown in Figure 4 12 can be reached from the transient screen as follows 1 Scroll to the VOLT SURGE SAG entry using the and down cursor keys 2 Press the ENTER key to bring up the VOLT SURGE SAG screen The VOLT SURGE SAG screen has several data fields All data fields that are blank to the right of the equal sign must be filled or an error message will occur when trying to leave this screen The EVENT is the last data field to be filled Entering the event data field will cause the display to return to the TRANSIENT screen where a new selection can be made The VOLT SURGE SAG screen has the following fields START GO TO VOLT DUR SCALE DURATION END VOLT END DELAY 54 This field will show the start phase angle of the voltage transient in degrees Only one start phase angle per transient sequence is allowed The start phase angle must be in the first transient event in the list The start phase angle is not valid for DC transients If no start phase angle is required this field can be set to RANDOM by pressing the BACKSPACE lt key on the decimal keypad This field will set the voltage level during the transient duration in volts Duration scale default is time in seconds Use the Shuttle knob to select CYCLES if desired Note that durations expressed in cyc
27. Figure 4 28 Selecting waveform November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments The square wave provides high frequency content waveform with relative fast rise fall times Due to AC amplifier bandwidth limitations the frequency content of the standard square wave has been kept within the amplifier s capabilities As the fundamental frequency is increased the relative contribution of higher harmonics is reduced The clipped sinewave may be used to simulate voltage distortion levels to the unit under test The total harmonic distortion level may be programmed in percent using the CLIP LEVEL field of the WAVEFORMS menu Changing the distortion level of the CLIP waveform forces the AC source to regenerate the CLIPPED sinewave s datapoints and reload the waveform register with the newly requested data This process requires the output to be dropped briefly To avoid interrupting the voltage output to the unit under test select a different waveform such as the standard sinewave first change the clip level and change the waveform back to the CLIPPED sinewave This will avoid any output interruption 4 4 2 Phase Selection WAVEFORMS WAVEFORMS CLIP LEVEL 2 CLIP LEVEL 28 gt SINE GROUP GROUP SUARE PROG MODE PROG PREVIOUS SCREEN PREVIOUS SCREEN HARMY45 Figure 4 29 Selecting waveforms for single phase or all phases If the 9003iX or15003iX different waveform
28. Phs PhsB Phs C Hz Volt RMS VI 0 07 0 06 0 04 400 0 Output OFF RMS 3E App Power V n Inrush Current 4 0 44 z 0 22 z Pass Fail P Factor a Power Factor 0100 f 000 0 000 0 00 0 00 Current Distortion 2 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 Pass Test Frequency 400 Hz bservations User Data Tested by frest department EUT Temp 25 Hum 95 Comment Test Site Press Ready Figure 9 65 704 Option EUT Measurement Data Screen The EUT Performance Measurements tab in the 704 tests window provides measurement data taken by the power source s data acquisition system This tab contains four sub tabs that each present different aspects of the EUT measurement data Additional user controls for measurement updates and graph scaling are provided right next to the four sub tabs The following sub tabs are available for selection Sub Tab Description Parameters This tab displays the parametric measurement data in tabular form This includes voltage current power power factor distortion etc For three phase EUT s data is shown for all three phases For single phase EUT data is shown for phase A only as long as the power source is in single phase mode The top half of the Parameters tab displays all parametric measurement data The following data is available Volt RMS V Displays source voltage pe
29. 2 AG 700027 OMMON 4 2 26 P S 20 4 32 1 En CUR CURRENT SIGNAL 5 5 PC ASSY INDICATOR 12 SCH 7000 80 P x2 303 CURRENT SIGNAL CURRENT SIGNAL 8 EN Bh Y 7000 715 J ye i CUR SIGNAL CURRENT SIGNAL J 000 087 AT 14 i SIE 2 N v j NESE S 1 2345678910 1 2 Ps 1 260 520V T 5 218 260 520V IN 2345678910 2 4541 2 J53 152 4 4 3e 825 VER EE x SM 2 8 eg 111 1 Ag T 20 MRA a 2 2 2 H 1250 PEN 3 COM 35 5 1 L gt 414 4 T DRIVE B DRE B 4 8 15 H ORIVE COMMON 26 2 DRIVE COMMON 22 89 8 3c A 7 7 7 i 260 520V 260 920v E OSC B 513 8 AG 2 2 2 70 S 24 OSC 10 10 TO 01 2 BA TB RINGI ANA COM 7 ni 11 8010 MA 18V RIN 88 IBV RING 25 12 12 12 11 A8 J1 HEV R BC TI RING LB 13115 13 Bb12 dc 20 i 104 BV 2 cl 14 14 3 ENE EN E MEET d d 108 16 18 16 8015 18V 18V BIN 10 1717 2 NE 1 18V RTN 2 118 18V RTN Z 28 RNG Hi 18 18 18 ES a 18V RTN 2 112 18V RTN 2 19 19 1 T2 HOOK UP 5001x 400 Spine TAI 13 134 VIEW S 20 20 56 312VAC 312 21803 138 NE 21 i x u 38 In 1 NES 5 RING 1261 RING FIBV
30. 34 B CURR Hi 50 18 18 98 22 38 82 il 14 TAM NEUT SENSE 37 NEUT SENSE PRINT 23 23 7 BU zo 1s d gt 3 Sole SENSE A1 SENSE ICPIBRQ 24 24 5 ae 0 SENSE 4 SENS 28 s62 2 g AI E TNF C SENSE 48 dE 38 25 O SE 5 SENSE OG SENSE 28 25 e 1173 141517 1925 29 ei 342 1 ES D E ME oe ae 1 ESTEN 1 240V INPU 4BOV INPU DETAIL Figure 5 2 Power Source Module Block Diagram 104 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 5 4 Current Limit Board The current limit board A6 receives the oscillator signal and passes it through an amplifier whose gain is controlled by signal from the overcurrent circuit The overcurrent circuit senses the rms value of the current If the load current exceeds the programmed value the output of this sensing circuit reduces the output of the oscillator amplifier The output of the unit then becomes a constant current output with the output voltage dropping as the load increases When two or three units are connected as a single phase system the MRA output from the master oscillator amplifier drives all the power amplifiers over the system interface cable An overcurrent condition on any amplifier will act to reduce the output voltage and put the entire system
31. Phase Two Phase Power Failures 1 Phase Power Failures for 7 seconds Table TAC602 2 A F IATAC602 1 2 Two Phase Power Failures for 30 mins Table TAC602 2 G J ATACO602 2 288 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual California Instruments Rev Z Test No Section Subject Test Limits Comment File Ref TAC603 Phase Reversal N A to Table LDC Test No Section Subject Test Limits Comment File Ref LDC101 Load Measurements 8v DC ALDC101 LDC102 Steady State Limits for Voltage AV to 28 5V DC for 30 mins IALDC102 LDC103 Voltage Distortion Spectrum Requires Additional Equipment LDC104 Total Ripple Requires Additional Equipment LDC105 Normal Voltage Transients to 70V DC 1 Overvoltage Transients Peak Voltage 70V DC Table LDC105 2 A J IALDC105 1 2 Undervoltage Transients Low Voltage 8V DC Table LDC105 2 IALDC105 2 3 Combined Transients BV to 70V DC Table LDC105 2 U V IALDC105 3 4 Repetitive Normal Voltage Transient Test hav to 45V DC Repeat transient for 30 mins ALDC105 4 LDC201 Power Interrupt lov for 50 msec able LDC201 2 A L IALDC201 LDC301 Abnormal Steady State Limits for Voltage 2 5V to 30V DC Apply each test for 30 mins IALDC301 LDC302 Abnormal Voltage Transients 6V to 80V DC 1 Overvoltage Transients Peak Voltage 80V DC able LDC302 2 A J IALDC302 1 2 Unde
32. 13 top cover removal zio eu Remi 127 transient EXECUTION nennen 100 transient execution 60 transients j MEC 96 PUST 95 slew rate 02222214 98 STEP PE 94 switching waveforms 99 i iX Series January 2005 Transients Input Trigger Out BNC accessory trigger output Trigger output troubleshooting Vibration volt mode voltage drop cables voltage ranges W WAVE waveform data displays Waveform California Instruments 329
33. The following SCPI command will be used to control the WHM functions WHMeter STATe Turn on or of the watt hour function ETIMe Return the elapse time WHOur Return the watt hour in KWH WHmMeter STATe This command will start or stop the watt hour function Command Syntax WHMeter STATe lt bool gt Parameters 0 OFF 1 ON Examples WHM ON Query Syntax WHM STATe Returned Parameters 0 1 WHMeter ETIMe This command will return the total amount of time the watt hour meter accumulated The returned data has four fields separated by commas These fields are hours minutes seconds and milliseconds Command Syntax WHMeter ETIMe Parameters none Query Syntax WHM ETIM Returned Parameters h mm ss ms WHMeter WHOur Phase Selectable This command will return the total accumulated kilowatt hour for the selected phase If coupling is set to all the value returned is the sum of all phases in the system irregardless of the selected phase Command Syntax WHMeter WHOur Parameters none Query Syntax WHM WHO Returned Parameters lt numeric value gt Note If the watt hour meter is active the total power of all phases in the system will be returned when querying the power i Series iX Series November 2005 321 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 10 Error Messages 322 Any errors that occur during operation from either the front panel or the remote control interface will result in error me
34. User Manual Rev Z California Instruments No Description Table Table Table Table Table No Description Table Table SAC TAC SVF TVF SXF LDC HDC 602 One and Two Phase N A Power Failure 603 Phase Reversal M 9 22 m i Series iX Series November 2005 255 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 8 2 3 Specific Test Limitations and Discrepancies While every effort has been made to provide comprehensive coverage of the Mil Std 704 tests some limitations apply largely due to hardware limitations of the iX power source The following table lists specific implementation issues by test number The deviation from the standard requirement is shown in the Actual setting column The reason for the deviation is shown in the last column Rev Test Std requirement Actual setting Reason SAC104 5Vp v modulation 3536V RMS RMS modulation Resolution A SAC104 3 modulation 2 475V RMS 2 4V RMS modulation Resolution A TAC104 5Vp v modulation 3536V RMS RMS modulation Resolution A 104 j3 5Vp v modulation 2 475V RMS 2 4V RMS modulation Resolution A F 106 2 Test skipped Requires additional equipment A F 106 5OkHz Test skipped Requires additional equipment A F LDC103 2 Test skipped Requires additional equipment A F LDC104 16 8 2 Test
35. 3 Combined Transient 45V RMS to 180V RMS Table SAC302 3 OO BSAC302 3 SAC303 Abnormal Frequency Transients 320 Hz to 480 Hz Table SAC303 3 AA EE BSAC303 SAC401 Emergency Steady State Limits for Voltage and Frequency 102V to 124V RMS 360 to 440 Hz Apply for 30 mins each test BSAC401 SAC501 No Tests N A to AC Utilization Equipment SAC601 Power Failure Single Phase for 7 seconds Table SAC601 2 A D BSAC601 SAC602 Power Failure test done so numbers coincide i Series iX Series November 2005 283 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Test No Section Subject Test Limits Comment File Ref SAC603 Phase Reversal N A to Rev B Table Test No Section Subject Test Limits Comment File Ref TAC101 Three Phase Load and Current Harmonic Measurements 115V RMS 400 Hz BTAC101 TAC102 Steady State Limits for Voltage Including Unbalance and Frequency 1 Balanced Phases 108V to 118V RMS 395 to 405 Hz for 30 mins each test BTAC102 1 2 Helicopter Test 108V to 118V RMS 380 to 420 Hz Apply for 30 mins each test BTAC102 2 3 Unbalanced Phases 108V to 118V RMS 3V Unbalance Apply for 30 mins each test BTAC102 3 TAC103 Voltage Phase Difference Phase B 116 to 124 degrees Apply for 30 mins each test BTAC103 104 Voltage Modulation 1 115V Nominal Test 11
36. 8 2 2 Test Perform 8 2 4 Test Frequency Sweep Meister Curve Yes functional lt Any functional gt anomalies anomalies lt Yes No v Perform 8 2 3 Test Individual Harmonics Interharmonics Yes x X Test Completed Test Completed Yes FAIL Any functional PASS RecordResults SE 2 RecordResults Figure 9 32 IEC 61000 4 13 Test Flowchart Class 1 and 2 196 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Start Class 3 Determine appropriate test configuration Perform 8 2 1 Test Harmonic combination Flatcurve and Overswing x Yes Perform 8 2 2 Test anomalies Frequency Sweep c Any functional anomalies Yes Any functional No anomalies No Perform 8 2 4 Test Meister Curve Perform 8 2 3 Test Individual Harmonics Interharmonics di Yes Any functional 4 anomalies 1 Perform 8 2 3 Test Only table 1 Odd non multiple of 3 harmonics ww w Test Completed Y Test Completed FAIL 4 9 Any functional No PASS RecordResults anomalies Record Results Figure 9 33 IEC 61000 4 13 Test Flowchart Class 3 i Series iX Series November 2005 197 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 198 To run the test the IEC 61000 4 13 mode must be selected Ref
37. 8 Frequency excursions abnormal Fig 5 limits 1 and 4 n a Appendix 2 tests A8PO ABNFEXCURS 32 9 Frequency modulation Fig 6 16 5 3 1 A9PO FMOD 33 10 Distorted Voltage Par 2 4 2 6 1 n a Test conditions 1 amp 2 A10PO VDIST i Series iX Series November 2005 311 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Table B Test No Subject Test Limits DO160 Ref Comments Test File 1 16 5 1 1 b 1 test 1 2 3 Apply at 430Hz and 370Hz Replace B1P0 NSSVF 100V amp 122V with 23V amp 28V Abnormal Steady State Voltage 21V to 30V RMS 16 5 3 1 b Apply for 30 mins iso 5 mins B2PO ABN SSV 4 3 1 Normal Transients 36 5V for 30ms 16 1V 16 5 1 5 b Use specified limit iso DO160 NORMVSURGE1 for 15ms 5 3 2 Normal Transients 35 6V for 50ms 18 2V 16 5 1 5 b Use specified limit iso DO160 B3P0 NORMVSURGE2 for 30ms 6 3 3 Normal Transients 33 8V for 19 5ms 86V 16 5 1 5 b Use specified limit iso DO160 NORMVSURGE3 for 50ms 3 4 Normal Transients 32V for 200ms 16 5 1 5 b No undervoltage has to be applied NORMVSURGE4 4 Voltage Surge Fig 1 4 1 Abnormal Transients 41 1V for 100ms 33 8V 16 5 3 3 1 b ABNVSURGE1 for 1 sec 10 4 2 Abnormal Transients OV for 5 secs 16 5 3 2 b ABNVSURGE2 11 4 3 Abnormal Transients Disconnects for 5 secs n a Appendix 3 tests B4P3 APPENDIX3 12 5 Voltage Spike Fig 3 Peak voltage 250V 17
38. Comment Comments concerning this test or its parameters File The test sequence file that is used to implement this test section on Reference the power source November 2005 297 User Manual Rev Z 298 California Instruments Control Display Description User Data The area at the bottom of this tab may be used to enter general information regarding the unit under test the test location and operator and environmental conditions in effect during the test This information will be incorporated in the test reports generated by the GUI November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z 9 9 8 ABD Test Control California Instruments Airbus ABD0100 1 8 Test Tables lal xl File Edit Run Help Pwr Output Test Selection Test Control EUT Performance Measurements Execution Controls BEES Off Start Abort J Execution Options Options Test Status Output Execute all steps Auto acquire EUT Complete test 000 00 03 24 000 00 12 35 Single Step Data after execution Test in CL 6 i 000 00 00 00 02 5 T Active step 000 00 00 46 000 00 02 00 progress Revert to Stead a Bpow hose ve TETT TT TT TT TT TT TT Print Table C Voltage Modulation Figure 44 L Fslew vor Vslew A Func Dwell Loop Link Commet L
39. November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 4 2 6 TRANSIENTS Menu TRRNSIENTS VOLT SURGE SRG VOLT FREQ 5 5 VOLT SWEEP STEP VIEW SEQUENCE FREQ SWEEP STEP Madumi Figure 4 11 TRANSIENTS menu The transient menu provides access to the transient list data Both the i and the iX Series have a transient list of up to 32 data points This is represented by 32 transient step numbers from 1 through 32 From the Transient menu the desired transient step type can be selected Based on the user s choice the relevant transient type sub menu will be shown The START EDIT SEQUENCE sub menu allows the user to review and change any transient step or execute the transient list When executing a transient list transient steps are executed in a ascending numerical order Steps that are not defined are skipped The following entries can be found in the TRANSIENTS menu Eniry Description VOLT SURGE SAG Voltage surges and sags are temporary changes in amplitude The output voltage will change from its present value to a user specified value for a specified duration Sag if the value is lower surge if the value is higher After this period has expired the output voltage returns to a user specified end value This value may or may not be the same as the value present prior to the start of the sag or surge VOLT SWEEP STEP Voltage sweeps cause the output voltage to change from the present value
40. VI Run transient at 360Hz and 800Hz C6PO APP1TransientsT2 VI 47 Voltage Modulation Fig 4 A 16 5 1 2 Replace DO160 Fig 16 1 with Fig 4 A A7P0 VMOD 48 Frequency variations 49 8 1 Normal Frequency variations Fig 5 limits 1 and 4 16 5 1 6 Slew at 100Hz sec C8P0 NORMFREQVARS 50 8 2 Emergency Frequency variations Fig 5 limits 1 and 4 16 5 1 6 Slew at 500Hz sec C8P0 EMERFREQVARS 5119 Frequency modulation Fig 6 16 5 3 1 C9P0 FMOD 52 10 Distorted Voltage 53 10 1 Distorted Voltage 10 Normal Par 2 4 2 6 2 n a Test condition 2 Normal C10PO VDIST10 54 10 2 Distorted Voltage 15 Emergency Par 2 4 2 6 2 n a Test condition 2 Emergency C10PO VDIST15 55 10 3 Distorted Voltage 25 Emergency Par 2 4 2 6 2 n a Test condition 3 Emergency C10PO VDIST25 314 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Table D Test Subject Test Limits DO160 Ref Comments Test File 1 2 1 1 Maximum Voltage Norm and Emer 30 3V DC 16 5 2 1 b 1 D1P0 NORM 3 1 2 25 5V DC 16 5 2 1 b 2 D1P0 NORM 4 1 3 Minimum voltage Emergency 17 DC 16 5 2 1 b 3 D1P0 EMER MINV operation 5 2 Abnormal Steady State Voltage 6 2 1 Maximum 32 5V DC 16 5 4 1 b 1 Apply for 30 mins iso 5 mins D2P0 ABN MAXV 7 22 Minimum 23 5V DC 16 5 4 1 b 2 Apply for 30 mins iso 5 mins D2P0 ABN MINV 8 3 Voltage Surge Fig 2 9 3 1 Normal Transien
41. for 30 mins each test EACF115 1 16 5 1 1c 1 3 Phs Voltage and Frequency ac 100V to 122V 390Hz to 410Hz for 30 mins each test EACF115 VFNORM3P 16 5 1 Emergency Operating Conditions ac 16 5 1 1b 2 1 Phs Voltage and Frequency ac 100V to 122V 360Hz to 440Hz for 30 mins each test EACF115 VFEMER1P 16 5 1 1c 2 3 Phs Voltage and Frequency ac 100V to 122V 360Hz to 440Hz for 30 mins each test EACF115 VFEMER3P 16 5 1 Normal Operating Conditions ac 16 5 1 2 Voltage Modulation ac amp 0 18V to 1 24V Mrate 1Hz to 200Hz Figure 16 1 EACF115 VMOD 16 5 1 3 Frequency Modulation ac Famp 4 9 Hz to 0 2Hz Mrate 0 014Hz to 100HzfFigure 16 2 EACF115 FMOD 16 5 1 4b Momentary Power Interruptions Table 16 1 Equipment with Digital Circuits EACF115 PINTB 16 5 1 4c Momentary Power Interruptions ac Other Equipment EACF115 PINTC 16 5 1 5 Normal Transients 16 5 1 5 1 Normal Voltage Surge ac 160V to 70V 400 Hz EACF115 NVSUR 16 5 1 5 2 Normal Frequency Surge ac 115V 350Hz to 400Hz EACF115 NFSUR 16 5 1 7 Voltage DC Content ac 16 5 1 7 1 Phs Voltage DC Content ac 0 1VDC Apply for 30 mins each test EACF115 DCOFS1P 16 5 1 7 3 Phs Voltage DC Content i 0 1VDC Apply for 30 mins each test EACF115 DCOFS3P 16 5 1 8 Voltage Distortion ac 8 2 0 VTHD Clipped Sine 400Hz for 30 mins each test EACF115 VTHD 16 5 2 Abnormal Operating Conditions ac 16 5 2 1b
42. 3 z PREVIOUS SCREEN EVENT Figure 4 14 FREQUENCY SWEEP STEP SETUP screen The Voltage sweep and step screen shown in Figure 4 14 can be reached from the transient screen as follows 1 Scroll to the FREQ SWEEP STEP entry using the up and down cursor keys 2 Press the ENTER key to bring up the FREQ SWEEP STEP screen The FREQ SWEEP STEP screen has several data fields All data fields that are blank to the right of the equal sign must be filled or an error message will occur when trying to leave this screen The EVENT is the last data field to be filled Entering the event data field will cause the display to return to the TRANSIENT screen where a new selection can be made The FREQ SWEEP STEP screen has the following fields DURATION END FREQ END DELAY FUNCTION REPEAT EVENT Duration is amount of the time the output frequency will take to reach the END FREQ level Duration will define the slew rate of the output frequency for the event A duration of 0 seconds will cause the output frequency to reach the end frequency immediately This is the output frequency at the end of the transient event in Hz This is the time delay the frequency will stay at END FREQ before it proceeds with the next transient event or completes the transient iX Series only This field can be used to select the waveshape to be used during this step of the transient sequence Each step can use a different waveshape from the av
43. AC source However when capturing current waveform data the phase relationship to the voltage can be determined easily by triggering at the 0 point on the voltage This mode performs two functions It programs the output voltage for the selected phase or phases to the rms or DC value specified and it triggers the measurement acquisition at the same moment in time When selecting this trigger source the field below the TRIG SOURCE field changed to SET VOLT Use this field to enter the desired voltage to program the output to and trigger the measurement on If only one phase in a three phase system is selected only that phase s output will be programmed If all phases are selected all three phases outputs will be programmed Use the PHASE key to select the desired phase or all phases Figure 4 36 shows an example of using the SET VOLT trigger source to capture the turn on of the voltage In this case a negative trigger delay was specified and the voltage start phase angle was set to 90 in the PROGRAM 2 screen ACQUISITION VVINDOVV Figure 4 36 SET VOLT trigger source acquisition November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments This mode is appropriate for capturing the inrush current load by programming the voltage to a specified value and capturing the voltage and current at that moment in time A further refinement can be made by specifying the voltage start phase angle in th
44. Electric Power Characteristics Appendix A dated March 2004 Future revisions of the MIL STD 704 directive may be issued over time and updates may be made available to cover any changes in test levels durations procedures etc Furthermore the 704 option is completely data file driven to allow a large degree of customization by the end user if needed so many changes can be supported without the need for software updates This section of the manual covers operation of the 704 option using the CIGui32 program Version 1 25 or higher of the CIGui32 program is required The CIGui32 program is supplied with all IX systems free of charge on CD ROM CIC496 It can also be downloaded from the California Instruments web site www calinst com The information provided in this user manual is aimed at guiding the operator in the use of the 704 option through the use of the CIGui32 program Much of the same information can be found in the on line help system of the CIGUI32 i Series iX Series November 2005 253 User Manual RevZ California Instruments This manual is not intended to elaborate on the intent or purpose of the immunity tests and the expected behavior of the EUT as described in the MIL STD 704 documents the end user is familiar with the content of the MIL STD 704 test standard 9 8 2 2 Test Coverage It is assumed that comprehensiveness of the test that can be performed with the 704 option is determined primar
45. External modulation input 10 volt input will modulate the output 10 Original versions of iX power sources required 100 volt input to modulate the output by 10 If you experience problems using the external modulation input contact California Instruments customer service 18 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments A F STB LO Function Strobe Trigger output Low signal This is the emitter lead of an optically isolated NPN transistor The internal power controller turns this transistor on to indicate a change of programmed values See section 3 6 5 for details EX SYNC LO External Sync Low signal This is the ground return for the TTL external sync input It connects to the cathode of an LED at the input of an optocoupler Refer to J22 32 C1 Overload FLT B Phase B current limit fault control F STB HI Function Strobe Trigger output HI low going pulse gt 400us that indicates voltage or frequency change Isolated output that requires a pull up resistor 22KQ to 5 VDC Use J22 pin 14 F STB LO for common See section 3 6 5 for details EX SYNC HI External Sync input HI This is an input that can be used to synchronize the outputs of the AC Power System This input requires a logic high level of at least 4 5 VDC 5 mA The input should have a duty cycle 50 30 J22 15 is the common input The External Sync input is optically isolated It must be enabled fro
46. FTVF602 360 1 360 2 Two Phase Power Failures OV for 30 mins Table TVF602 2 G J FTVF602 360 2 600 1 Phase Power Failures for 7 seconds Table TVF602 2 A F FTVF602 600 1 600 2 Two Phase Power Failures OV for 30 mins Table TVF602 2 G J FTVF602 600 2 800 1 Phase Power Failures for 7 seconds Table TVF602 2 A F FTVF602 800 1 800 2 Two Phase Power Failures OV for 30 mins Table TVF602 2 G J FTVF602 800 2 TVF603 Phase Reversal Phase reversal done physically FTVF603 Table SXF Test No Section Subject Test Limits Comment File Ref SXF101 Load and Current Harmonic Measurements 115V RMS 60 Hz FSXF101 SXF102 Steady State Limits for Voltage and Frequency 105V to 125V RMS 59 75 to 60 25 Hz Apply for 30 mins each test FSXF102 SXF103 No Test Done so test numbers coincide 276 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Test No Section Subject Test Limits Comment File Ref SXF104 Voltage Modulation 1 115V Nominal Test 115V RMS 2 5V RMS mod Apply for 10 mins FFSXF 104 1 2 M109V Nominal Test 109V RMS 2 5V RMS mod Apply for 10 mins FFSXF 104 2 3 117V Nominal Test 117V RMS 2 5V RMS mod Apply for 10 mins FSXF104 3 SXF105 Frequency Modulation 1 60 Hz Nominal Test 60 Hz 5 Hz mod Apply
47. If not an error prompt will indicate that no supported report format is selected Closes the 160 test window Cuts the selected row from either the Test selection data grid or the Test sequence data grid The data in the row cut is available for a Paste operation Copies the selected row from either the Test selection data grid or the Test sequence data grid Copied rows can be pasted to the same grid at a different location Pastes a copied row from to either the Test selection data grid or the Test sequence data grid Inserts a new blank row at the selected data grid location Deletes the selected row from either the Test selection data grid or the Test sequence data grid The row contents are permanently discarded Save As Print Exit Cut Edit Copy Paste Insert Row Delete Row Run All Run selected test Stop Abort test in progress Help Opens the on line help file i Series iX Series November 2005 157 User Manual Rev Z 9 1 2 8 160 Test Selection California Instruments The Test Selections tab in the 160 test window contains the following controls and displays Control Display Description Select Airframe This drop down control allows the operator to select from one or more libraries of test sequences grouped by airframe This allows multiple sets of test sequences to be organized by application The GUI pro
48. Mechanical Installation The OMNI has been designed for rack mounting in a standard 19 inch rack The unit should be supported from the bottom with a shelf track or supported from the sides with optional rack slides The cooling fans at the rear of the unit must be free of any obstructions that would interfere with the flow of air A 2 5 inch clearance should be maintained between the rear of the unit and the rear panel of the mounting cabinet Also the air intake holes on the sides of the power chassis must not be obstructed November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 6 5 2 Output Wiring The OMNI impedance network is wired in series with the output of specified California Instruments power sources or power source systems The OMNI terminal block marked SOURCE should be wired to the output of the power source system The terminal block marked LOAD is wired to the user s load unit under test UUT Refer to the figures in this section for examples of proper connections Refer to the power source manual to determine the appropriate wire gauge needed for the output wiring 9 6 5 3 External Sense Wiring The external sense wires of the power source must be connected at the output of the power source NOT at the output of the OMNI or at the load If the external sense wires were connected at the load or the OMNI output the power source error amplifier would lower the effective OMNI impedance mak
49. PROGRAM 2 Selects the phase angle between the external clock and the output of the AC source If the clock source is internal this parameter has no effect Selects internal or external clock source The i iX Series uses an open air crystal timebase with an accuracy of 100 ppm To improve output frequency stability and accuracy an external clock generator may be used The iX Series offers three output modes DC and AC DC The VOLT MODE field can be used to toggle between these three output modes Both the Knob and the key may be used to toggle through these three selections In DC mode no frequency selection is possible and all maximum current and power ratings are divided by two The i Series offers AC or DC modes When the AC DC mode is selected the VOLTAGE field in the PROGRAM 1 screen is used to set the AC portion of the output voltage The DC OFFSET field in the PROGRAM 2 screen can be used to set the DC offset level Either the knob or the decimal keypad may be used to set the DC offset level Selects the start phase angle for output changes made to either voltage or frequency This allows changing the output at a specific phase angle The output on key also uses this phase angle setting to program the output voltage up to the set level after the output relay is closed The default value for this field is RANDOM November 2005 47 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 4 25 MEASUREMENTS Screens The i iX Se
50. Pressing the PHASE key will toggle phase A B C or ABC Some screens may not support the ABC or show all phase information in which case this mode is skipped iX Series with three phase controller only The SET key is used to select the mode of operation of the shuttle Refer to section 4 1 1 for details on its operation and the use of the SET key The key can be used to toggle the sign for those parameters for which it is relevant This is typically the output voltage when in DC mode of operation For fields that have only two possible values such as the voltage range field the key can be used to toggle between these two values The decimal keypad may be used to enter any numeric parameter required in any of the menu fields Several fields accept input from either the keypad or the knob Data entered from the keypad is normally accepted once the ENTER key is pressed unless the front panel mode is in the SET mode The following keys are available on the decimal keypad CURSOR UP ENTRY 2 5 19 vee cy E93 96 ooa Figure 4 3 Entering value from decimal keypad ID A zm The UP key moves the cursor position upwards one position to the previous available cursor position If the present cursor position is at the top of the right hand column the cursor is moved to the bottom position of the left hand column If the present cursor is at the top of the left hand column the cursor is moved to the
51. Q m bed E E DRESSER WANVW 3212035 a LINSNOD TINNOSYId 4 3JOIAMES C3NIVYL OL ONIDIANSS 33333 3015 SLYVd 318V3DIAYIS YOLVYadO ON NOLLNYO O O slr 88v 333 8199 ocr 3901 32019 November 2005 i Series iX Series 24 California Instruments User Manual Rev Z X L S9 E S Qa e L 5 D 383H 138 1 NOLLVOISILLNSIGI Hdt OL 7 OVA Ovc 80 303 _G3yIM_AXOLOVA MIMANO SVd 300819313 39NVHO3d anoshi SJAV N ONIOIANSS A 380438 LINN 103NNOOSIG 20 5 30 5SIM NOILOVO AR W M3MOd LNANI 3SN3S 310W33 1ndino N cal e 43 02 ONIAONIY 330438 2 5 5 ONINYVM zez sy 88v 333l 9199 se oer Lor H01v43d0 ON NOILOVO amp WV 9019 25 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 3 7 Single Phase and Three Phase Multiple Box System Configurations Three Phase System The three phase system will be configured ready for use when ordered as such from the factory One unit with the controller will be identified as Phase on the serial number tag The other two units will be identified on their serial nu
52. The VOLTAGE SWEEP STEP screen has the following fields START This field will show the start phase angle of the voltage transient in degrees Only one start phase angle per transient sequence is allowed The start phase angle must be in the first transient event in the list The start phase angle is not valid for DC transient END VOLT This is the output voltage level at the end of the transient event in volts DUR SCALE Duration scale default is time in seconds Use the Shuttle knob to select CYCLES if desired Note that durations expressed in cycles may cause rounding errors if the period of the selected frequency setting is not an integer number of mss Thus for 50 Hz applications no rounding errors occur but for 60 Hz the 16 66 ms period will cause a rounding error when converted The Duration scale selection affects both the DURATION and END DELAY parameters DURATION Duration is the time it will take for the output voltage to reach the END VOLT level As such Duration will define the slew rate of the output voltage for the event duration of 0 seconds will cause the output voltage to reach the end voltage immediately The DUR SCALE defines the time parameter CYCLES or SECONDS END DELAY This is the time delay the voltage level will stay at END VOLT before it proceeds with the next transient event or completes the transient FUNCTION iX Series only This field can be used to select the waveshape to be used during this
53. Undervoltage Transients Low Voltage 45V RMS Table SVF302 2 H N FSVF302 600 2 600 3 00 Hz Combined Transient 45V RMS to 180V RMS Table SVF302 2 O FSVF302 600 3 800 1 800 Hz Overvoltage Transients Peak Voltage 180V RMS Table SVF302 2 A G FSVF302 800 1 800 2 800 Hz Undervoltage Transients Low Voltage 45V RMS Table SVF302 2 H N FSVF302 800 2 800 3 800 Hz Combined Transient 45V RMS to 180V RMS Table SVF302 2 O FSVF302 800 3 SVF303 Abnormal Frequency Transients i Series iX Series November 2005 273 User Manual Rev 4 California Instruments Test No Section Subject Test Limits Comment File Ref 1 Overfrequency Transients High Frequency 800 Hz Table SVF303 2 A D FSVF303 1 2 Underfrequency Transients Low Frequency 360 Hz Table SVF303 2 E H FSVF303 2 3 Combined Transient 360 Hz to 800 Hz Table SVF303 2 I FSVF303 3 SVF401 Emergency Limits for Voltage and Frequency Perform Test SVF102 SVF501 No Tests N A to AC Utilization Equipment SVF601 Power Failure Single Phase 400 1 115V RMS 400 Hz nominal settings OV for 7 seconds Table SVF601 2 FSVF601 400 1 360 1 115 RMS 360 Hz nominal settings OV for 7 seconds Table SVF601 2 FSVF601 360 1 600 1 115 RMS 600 Hz nominal settings OV for 7 seconds Table SVF601 2 FSVF601 600 1 800 1 115 RMS 800 Hz nominal settings OV fo
54. User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Harmonics Generation OF x Odd Harmonics Even Harmonics View m Disk Access Load Save DO RESTENE ee Preview Waveform LASTSAVE Waveforms 1 Preview Transfer Waveform Register Veme 141 8985 V 49 H 5 44 XU cear Delete 22 rss Processing of takle data completed 4 30 Custom waveform creation with GUI program Once downloaded waveforms remain in non volatile memory and will be visible in the WAVEFORMS menu for selection The user can assign 12 character name to each custom waveform Avoid using any of the standard waveform names SINE SQUARE or CLIPPED as these names will not be accepted Waveforms may be deleted using the IEEE 488 or RS232C interface as well Custom waveforms cannot be deleted from the front panel however to avoid accidental erasure 4 4 4 Waveform Groups 80 Waveform groups extend the number of available custom waveform to 200 Each group can contain up to 50 user defined waveforms Groups are numbered 0 through 3 and may be selected from the INITIAL SETUP 3 menu To switch waveform groups proceed as follows 1 2 Press the MENU key three times to select the MENU 3 screen Move the cursor to the UTILITY entry end press ENTER You are now in the UTILITY 1 menu Move the curso
55. current MEASUREMENT 3 iX Series only This readout displays the total voltage distortion for the selected phase This readout displays the total current distortion for the selected phase This readout reflects the instantaneous peak current value detected at the output This value is updated continuously and does not require a reset operation like the PEAK CURR readout The instantaneous peak current does not use a track and hold mechanism like the PEAK CURR measurement in the MEASUREMENT 2 screen Instead it tracks the peak current on a cycle by cycle basis The INST PK CURR typically tracks the rms current and the crest factor Update Program Functions from Measurement Screen The Shuttle can be used to update program parameters such as voltage frequency or current from the measurement screen This can be achieved with the following sequence 1 Select the program 1 screen using the PROG key 2 Usethe up and down key to select the desired function to update Selects parameter that will be changed by the shuttle once the MEAS1 screen Select the measurement 1 screen by pressing the MEAS key The pointer symbol points to the programmed parameter V F or CL that will be affected by turning the shuttle i Series iX Series November 2005 49 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments HARMONICS TRACE ANALYSIS Screen iX Series only The fourth measurement screen is dedicated to the advanced measuremen
56. source system The terminal block marked LOAD is wired to the user s load Refer to Figure 9 36 and Figure 9 37 in this section for examples of proper connections Refer to Section 3 5 to determine the appropriate wire gauge needed for the output wiring Note in Figure 9 36 the sequence of instruments This is the recommended sequence between the source and the equipment under test For systems that do not include all the instruments shown maintain the sequence of the remaining instruments Note also that for all applications the remote sense wiring must be connected before the EOS unit AN Note The output voltage of the iX i series power sources into the EOS box may be at hazardous potentials as high as 300 volts line to neutral 600 volts line to line Wiring used between the power sources and the EOS and between the EOS and the user s load must be insulated to withstand this potential Note The SOURCE and LOAD terminals of the EOS will be at the hazardous live potentials of the iX i series power sources driving it even if EOS box has not been switched on November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z A1 SOURCE LOAD C Hi Hi HI LO LO LO OPTION OPTION IN OUT EOS 1
57. test from the keyboard select the APPLICATIONS screen from the MENU 2 screen The APPLICATIONS screen will appear as shown in Figure 9 24 APPLICATIONS SETUP MIL STD 7 4 RTCA DQ 160C OMNI OPTION IEC 1000 4 11 PREWTOUS SCREEN 1 4 15 Figure 9 24 Application menu Scroll to the IEC 61000 4 13 entry using the up and down cursor keys Press the ENTER key to select the IEC 61000 4 13 main menu The screen will appear as shown in Figure 9 25 IEC 1000 4 15 TESTS eR STATE 0FF 4 5 FRANGE 1888 288080H2 IHFREG 1686H2 RESONANT PREUIQUS SCREEN Figure 9 25 IEC 61000 4 13 Menu 9 3 4 1 IEC 61000 4 13 Screen Parameters The IEC 61000 4 13 screen has the following common fields for all IEC 61000 4 13 test groups STATE The STATE field must be set to ON before the test can run Initial setup conditions must be met to run the test RUN The RUN field has the following selections 1 ALL Run all IEC 61000 4 13 2 GROUP Run the selected group 3 RANGE Run the selected range for the selected group 4 POINT Run the selected frequency for the selected range and selected group Note The RANGE and POINT do not apply to all groups See individual groups for details When the test is running this field will have the following selection 1 ABORT The test will stop running and all parameters will return to the state prior to the start of the test 2 PAUSE The test will pause at the time the ENTER key
58. 1 Phs Voltage ac 97V to 134V 400Hz Apply for 5 mins each test EACF115 VABN1P 16 5 2 1 3 Phs Voltage ac 97V to 134V 400Hz Apply for 5 mins each test EACF115 16 5 2 1d 1 Phs Voltage and Frequency ac 100 to 122 370 2 to 430Hz Apply for 5 mins each test 115 VFABN1P 16 5 2 1e 3 Phs Voltage and Frequency 100V to 122V 370Hz to 430Hz Apply for 5 mins each test EACF115 VFABN3P 16 5 2 2 Momentary Undervoltage ac 10V 60V 400 2 Apply for 7 seconds each test EACF115 VUND 16 5 2 3 Abnormal Transients Figure 16 5 apply at 10 sec 16 5 2 3 1 Abnormal Voltage surge 148V to 180V 400Hz intervals EACF115 AVSUR Figure 16 5 apply at 10 sec 16 5 2 3 1 Abnormal Frequency transients OV to 115V 320Hz to 480Hz intervals EACF115 AFSUR i Series iX Series November 2005 167 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Table A NF 115 Test No Section Subject Test Limits Comment File Ref 16 5 1 Normal Operating Conditions ac 16 5 1 1b 1 1 Phs Voltage and Frequency ac 100V to 122V 360Hz to 650Hz Apply for 30 mins each test EANF115 1 16 5 1 1 1 3 Phs Voltage and Frequency 100V to 122V 360Hz to 650Hz Apply for 30 mins each test EANF115 VFNORM3P 16 5 1 Emergency Operating Conditions ac 16 5 1 1c 2 3 Phs Voltage and Frequency ac 100V to 122V 360
59. 115V RMS 10 DC offset for 30 mins FSVF108 800 2 SVF109 Normal Voltage Transients 400 1 400 Hz Overvoltage Transients Peak Voltage 180V RMS Table SVF109 2 FSVF109 400 1 400 2 400 Hz Undervoltage Transients Low Voltage 80V RMS Table SVF109 2 FSVF109 400 2 400 3 400 Hz Combined Transient 180V to 80V RMS Table SVF109 2 FSVF109 400 3 400 4 400 Hz Repetitive Normal Voltage Transient Test 90V to 140V RMS Figure SVF109 2 FSVF109 400 4 360 1 360 Hz Overvoltage Transients Peak Voltage 180V RMS Table SVF109 2 FSVF109 360 1 360 2 360 Hz Undervoltage Transients Low Voltage 80V RMS Table SVF109 2 FSVF109 360 2 360 3 360 Hz Combined Transient 180V to 80V RMS Table SVF109 2 FSVF109 360 3 360 4 360 Hz Repetitive Normal Voltage Transient Test 90V to 140V RMS Figure SVF109 2 FSVF109 360 4 600 1 600 Hz Overvoltage Transients Peak Voltage 180V RMS Table SVF109 2 FSVF109 600 1 600 2 600 Hz Undervoltage Transients Low Voltage 80V RMS Table SVF109 2 FSVF109 600 2 600 3 00 Hz Combined Transient 180V to 80V RMS Table SVF109 2 FSVF109 600 3 600 4 600 Hz Repetitive Normal Voltage Transient Test 90V to 140V RMS Figure SVF109 2 FSVF109 600 4 800 1 800 Hz Overvoltage Transients Peak Voltage 180V RMS Table SVF109 2 FSVF109 800 1 800 2 800 Hz Undervoltage Transients Low Voltage 80V RMS Table SVF109 2 FSVF109 800 2 800 3 800 Hz Combined Transient 180V to 80V RMS Table SVF109 2 FSVF109 800 3 800 4 800 Hz Repetitive Normal Voltage Transient
60. 135 Normal state D dI ee ED reip ev te 136 Voltage Modulation p 138 Frequency Modulation einer 139 Power Intermpt pL E 140 Power Interrupt for Group 2 141 Em rgency Scre n duett ride 142 Abnormal Sree Me rede 144 200 160 0 Meru uenerit tene i RR RR eheu a nene ERE 146 Normal State 146 Abnormal State 148 160 Option Test Selection Screen eene terne Rente tnr dnt ta inp 156 160 Option Test Control Screen ense ener dentes reden edente odere Iden 160 DO160E DC Ripple Test Window e e e Eee 162 160 Option EUT Measurement Data 163 Application meruit EE EE reme da 181 IEG 1000 451 1 Men ei fette e eti HD ere t ettet RR een 181 IEG Dips and Interr pts Rr Re Ru Len 182 Voltage Variation screen oreet eee ee eder epe he desee ge Yee Reed die 184 EN 61000 4 11 Voltage Variation specification Edition 1 0 185 EN 61000 4 11 Voltage Variation specification Edition 2 0 186 IEG 61000 4 11 GUI Screen iine ri Re bier
61. 16 6 Note The iX Series power source measurement bandwidth is less than required to make full compliance current harmonics measurements This feature is provided for pre compliance assessment purposes only A high bandwidth power analyzer with a 100 KHz sampling rate or better is generally required Harmonics that our outside of the range of the iX measurement system are indicated with a BWL bandwidth limited label instead of a readout No Harmonic number 1 through 40 Freq Hz Frequency of harmonic in Hz Curr A Absolute current rms in Amps Fund Relative current in percent of the fundamental current 11 Limit Allowable current harmonic limits per individual EUT specifications These limits are located in the file named DO160 Distortion Limits ini located in the CIGui32 application directory They are set to correspond with the limits called out in Tables 16 4 and 16 5 of the 160 Standard P F Pass or Fail indication November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Sub Tab Description phase selection is available to the left of the graphs and table which allows each phase to be displayed one at a time Additional user controls located on the EUT Performance Measurements Tab Control Display Description Update Meas Triggers new acquisition cycle and updates measurement data for all tabs For Variable Frequency
62. 2 2 Phase Mode Terminals Voltage 300 volts line to chassis 600 volts line to line Current 37A rms SOURCE B C N 37A rms LOAD B C 112A rms LOAD A N 9 5 2 3 Controls Indicators ON OFF toggle switch Phase mode push button switch Power lamp One Phase Mode lamp Three Phase Mode lamp 216 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 5 2 4 Mechanical Dimensions 3 5 H x 19 W x 22 D 89 mm H x 480 mm W x 560 mm D Weight 14 1 Ibs 6 39 kg Connectors Input mains IEC 320 Source A B C N Phoenix Contact HDFK10 Load A N Phoenix Contact HDFK50 Load B C Phoenix Contact HDFK10 System Interface 3M 3367 1000 mates with 3M 3366 1001 Chassis Slide General Devices 3005 118 0 308 BKT 9 5 2 5 Environmental Temperature to 40 Relative Humidity 80 max to 31 C derate linearly to 5096 max at 40 C Altitude 2000 m max Installation Overvoltage Category Equipment Class i Series iX Series November 2005 217 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments CAUTION Voltages up to 600 VAC are available in certain sections of this product This equipment uses potentially lethal voltages DEATH On contact may result if personnel fail to observe safety precautions Do not touch electronic circuits when power is applied 218 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 5 3 Installation and Acceptance 9 5
63. 2 A G FTVF302 600 1 600 2 600 Hz Undervoltage Transients Low Voltage 45V RMS Table TVF302 2 H N FTVF302 600 2 600 3 600 Hz Combined Transient 5V RMS to 180V RMS Table TVF302 2 O FTVF302 600 3 800 1 800 Hz Overvoltage Transients Peak Voltage 180V RMS Table TVF302 2 A G FTVF302 800 1 800 2 800 Hz Undervoltage Transients Low Voltage 45V RMS Table TVF302 2 H N FTVF302 800 2 800 3 800 Hz Combined Transient 5V RMS to 180V RMS Table TVF302 2 O FTVF302 800 3 TVF303 Abnormal Frequency Transients 1 Overfrequency Transients High Frequency 800 Hz Table TVF303 2 A D FTVF303 1 2 Underfrequency Transients Low Frequency 360 Hz Table TVF303 2 E H FTVF303 2 3 Combined Transient 360 Hz to 800 Hz Table TVF303 2 I FTVF303 3 TVF401 Emergency Limits for Voltage and Frequency Perform Test TVF102 ITVF501 No Tests N A to Utilization Equipment ITVF601 Power Failure Single Phase 400 1 115 RMS 400 Hz nominal settings lov for 7 seconds Table TVF601 2 601 400 1 360 1 115 RMS 360 Hz nominal settings for 7 seconds Table TVF601 2 601 360 1 600 1 115V RMS 600 Hz nominal settings for 7 seconds Table TVF601 2 FTVF601 600 1 800 1 115V RMS 800 Hz nominal settings lov for 7 seconds Table TVF601 2 601 800 1 ITVF602 One Phase and Two Phase Power Failures 400 1 Phase Power Failures lov for 7 seconds Table TVF602 2 A F 602 400 1 400 2 Two Phase Power Failures for 30 mins Table TVF602 2 G J FTVF602 400 2
64. 4 Requires add l equipment 13 6 Switching Transients 17 4 14 6 1 Appendix 1 Figure A Table 1 1 T1 10 B6PO APP1TransientsA msec 15 6 2 1 Appendix 1 Figure 1 B Table 1 1 N 2 1 B6PO APP1TransientsB 1 16 6 2 2 Appendix 1 Figure 1 B Table 1 1 N 22 B6PO APP1TransientsB 2 17 6 2 3 Appendix 1 Figure 1 B Table 1 1 N 3 B6PO APP1TransientsB N3 18 6 2 4 Appendix 1 Figure 1 B Table 1 1 N 24 B6PO APP1TransientsB 4 19 6 2 5 Appendix 1 Figure 1 B Table 1 1 N 5 B6PO APP1TransientsB N5 20 6 2 6 Appendix 1 Figure 1 B Table 1 1 N 2 6 B6PO APP1TransientsB 6 21 6 2 7 Table 1 1 N 27 B6P0 APP1TransientsB 7 22 6 2 8 Appendix 1 Figure 1 B Table 1 1 N 8 B6PO APP1TransientsB 8 23 6 2 9 Appendix 1 Figure 1 B Table 1 1 N 2 9 B6PO APP1TransientsB 9 24 6 2 10 Appendix 1 Figure 1 B Table 1 1 10 B6PO APP1TransientsB N10 25 6 2 11 Appendix 1 Figure 1 B Table 1 1 11 B6PO APP1TransientsB N11 26 7 Voltage Modulation Fig 4 B 16 5 1 2 Replace DO160 Fig 16 1 with Fig 4 B B7P0 VMOD 27 8 Frequency excursions abnormal Fig 5 limits 1 and 4 n a Refer to Appendix 2 for test description B8P0 ABNFEXCURS 28 9 Frequency modulation Fig 6 16 5 3 1 B9PO0 FMOD Table C 312 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev 2 California Instruments Test No Subject Test Limits DO160 Ref Comments Test File 1 2 1 1 V
65. 50V DC Table LDC105 3 AA JJ FLDC105 1 2 Undervoltage Transients Low Voltage 18V DC Table LDC105 3 KK PP FLDC105 2 3 Combined Transients 18V to 50V DC Table LDC105 3 QQ RR FLDC105 3 4 Repetitive Normal Voltage Transient Test 18V to 45V DC Repeat transient for 30 mins FLDC105 4 LDC201 Power Interrupt OV for 50 msec Table LDC201 2 A L FLDC201 LDC301 Abnormal Steady State Limits for Voltage 20V to 31 5V DC Apply each test for 30 mins FLDC301 LDC302 Abnormal Voltage Transients 7V to 50V DC 1 Overvoltage Transients Peak Voltage 50V DC Table LDC302 4 AAA FFF FLDC302 1 2 Undervoltage Transients Low Voltage 7V DC Table LDC302 4 GGG LLL FLDC302 2 3 Combined Transients ZV to 50V DC Table LDC302 4 MMM NNN FLDC302 3 LDC401 Emergency Limits for Voltage 18V to 29V DC Apply each test for 30 mins FLDC401 LDC501 Starting Voltage Transients 12V to 29V DC Table LDC501 3 FLDC501 LDC601 Power Failure OV for 7 seconds Table LDC601 2 A D FLDC601 LDC602 Polarity Reversal Polarity reversal done physically FLDC602 Table Test No Section Subject Test Limits Comment File Ref HDC101 Load Measurements 270V DC FHDC101 HDC102 Steady State Limits for Voltage 250V to 280V DC Apply for 30 mins HDC103 Voltage Distortion Spectrum Requires Additional Equipment HDC104 Total Ripple Requires Additional Equipment HDC105 Normal Voltage Transients 200V to 330V DC 1 Overvoltage Transients Peak Voltage 330V DC Table HDC105 2 AA JJ FHDC105 1 2 Undervo
66. 9 2 The test will last for 30 minutes The test will be repeated for the EURO standard using the Voltage setting from Table 9 1 and the frequency from Table 9 2 The CLR Key in local operation will terminate the test at any time Group execute trigger will terminate the test remotely The unselected phases will remain at 115 volts The lt key backspace will terminate the test at any time VOLT UNBALANCE Standard Group RTCA Group1 Group2 Group3 Voltage offset 6 6 6 9 Frequency 400 400 360 650 360 800 Table 9 3 Normal Voltage Unbalance This test will change the output voltage for each phase from 115 volts to 115V offset Refer to Table 9 3 for the offset value and the Frequency The test will last 30 minutes The test will be repeated for a second Frequency if applicable The test can be terminated at any time The lt key will terminate the test at any time WAVEFORM DISTORTION This test will generate a 596 THD voltage distortion on the output voltage waveform The distortion is generated by using a clipped sinewave The test will last for 30 minutes The lt key backspace will terminate the test at any time VOLTAGE MODULATION This test requires a numeric value entry equal to the modulation rate in Hz This entry value must be between 1 Hz and 200 Hz The amplitude modulation is calculated based on the modulation rate as defined in Figure 9 4 This test will last for 2 minutes i Series iX Series
67. Abnormal Abnormal X X 5 5 Switching Transients 1 Switching Y Ripple Voltage X Transients Appendix 1 Voltage Spikes mo Frequency y y Modulation Distorted Voltage XI Table 9 23 ABD Option Test Coverage November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 9 3 General Test Procedure Generally the following steps are needed to perform an ABD test on an EUT 1 2 gt GEN Yom 11 16 17 18 Connect the EUT to the power source Select the correct mode of operation for the EUT AC or DC mode single or three phase mode Program the relevant nominal voltage and frequency using the ClGui32 main screen Apply power by closing the output relay This be done at later stage or will be done automatically after prompting the operator when a test is started Open the ABD0100 1 8 Tables control screen from the toolbar of Applications menu Select the correct airframe directory or use the default ABD Dbase Select the correct Power Group table through E Select a test from the test table displayed in the bottom part of this screen You can select test by clicking row The selected row will be highlighted Switch to the Test Control tab middle tab along the top of the screen Verify that the test sequence and description shown in the table on the Test Control screen is indeed the desired
68. Block Diagram i Series iX Series November 2005 111 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments CAUTION VOLTAGES UP TO 480 VAC AND 700 VDC ARE PRESENT IN CERTAIN SECTIONS OF THIS POWER SOURCE THIS EQUIPMENT GENERATES POTENTIALLY LETHAL VOLTAGES DEATH ON CONTACT MAY RESULT IF PERSONNEL FAIL TO OBSERVE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS DO NOT TOUCH ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS WHEN POWER IS APPLIED 112 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z 6 Calibration California Instruments The Routine Calibration should be performed every 12 months Non routine Calibration is only required if a related assembly is replaced or if the periodic calibration is unsuccessful All standard models and configurations of the iX i Series be calibrated using PC running Windows 98 2000 XP and the latest version of the CIGUI32 AC source control software Refer to the CIGUI32 online help file of the CIGUI32 software for additional procedures and guidance To download the latest version of the CIGUI32 visit www calinst com 6 1 Calibration Equipment Digital Phase Meter Digital Multimeter 10 milliohm Current Shunt 1 milliohm Current Shunt 10001i iX 15001i ix and 15003iX MODE Load Bank Computer Optional Krohn Hite Model 6620 or equivalent 0 01 resolution 0 02 accuracy Fluke 8506A HP 34401A two required Isotek Model RUG Z R010 0 1 or equivalent Isotek Model RUG Z R001 0 1 Various high
69. Equipment SVF107 Total Voltage Distortion 400 1 115V RMS 400 Hz nominal settings Voltage Distortion Factor 0 05 Apply for 30 mins FSVF107 400 1 360 1 115 RMS 360 Hz nominal settings Voltage Distortion Factor 0 05 Apply for 30 mins FSVF107 360 1 600 1 115 RMS 600 Hz nominal settings Voltage Distortion Factor 0 05 Apply for 30 mins FSVF107 600 1 800 1 115 RMS 800 Hz nominal settings Voltage Distortion Factor 0 05 Apply for 30 mins FSVF107 800 1 SVF108 DC Voltage Component 400 1 400 Hz Positive DC Offset 115V RMS 10 DC offset Apply for 30 mins FSVF108 400 1 400 2 400 Hz Negative DC Offset 115V RMS 10 DC offset Apply for 30 mins FSVF108 400 2 360 1 360 Hz Positive DC Offset 115V RMS 10 DC offset Apply for 30 mins FSVF108 360 1 360 2 360 Hz Negative DC Offset 115V RMS 10 DC offset Apply for 30 mins FSVF108 360 2 600 1 600 Hz Positive DC Offset 115V RMS 10 DC offset Apply for 30 mins FSVF108 600 1 600 2 600 Hz Negative DC Offset 115V RMS 10 DC offset Apply for 30 mins FSVF108 600 2 800 1 800 Hz Positive DC Offset 115V RMS 10 DC offset Apply for 30 mins FSVF108 800 1 272 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev 4 California Instruments Test No Section Subject Test Limits Comment File Ref 800 2 800 Hz Negative DC Offset
70. Figure 5 3 5001i Internal Layout eei inde terrier eet eee de ue a e de 107 i Series iX Series November 2005 vii User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Figure 5 4 Figure 5 5 Figure 5 6 Figure 6 1 Figure 6 2 Figure 6 3 Figure 9 1 Figure 9 2 Figure 9 3 Figure 9 4 Figure 9 5 Figure 9 6 Figure 9 7 Figure 9 8 Figure 9 9 Figure 9 10 Figure 9 11 Figure 9 12 Figure 9 13 Figure 9 14 Figure 9 15 Figure 9 16 Figure 9 17 Figure 9 18 Figure 9 19 Figure 9 20 Figure 9 21 Figure 9 22 Figure 9 23 Figure 9 24 Figure 9 25 Figure 9 26 Figure 9 27 Figure 9 28 Figure 9 29 Figure 9 30 Figure 9 31 Figure 9 32 Figure 9 33 Figure 9 34 Figure 9 35 Figure 9 36 Figure 9 37 Figure 9 38 Figure 9 39 Figure 9 40 Figure 9 41 Figure 9 42 Figure 9 43 Figure 9 44 Figure 9 45 Figure 9 46 Figure 9 47 Figure 9 48 Figure 9 49 Figure 9 50 Figure 9 51 Figure 9 52 Figure 9 53 Figure 9 54 Figure 9 55 Figure 9 56 viii logic 108 AC Power Stage Layout eue ie eden 110 AC Control Logic Block 111 Test Equipment Hookup for Routine Output 114 Test Equipment Hook up for Measurement 118 Adjustment EoCatiOn 124 Application M nu ERR 135 160 E
71. Instruments 4 5 Standard Measurements Standard measurements are always available through the MEAS key on the front panel These measurements are spread across two to four screens to enhance readability Switching between these screens can be done by successively pressing the MEAS button on the front panel This will cause the screen to cycle through all available measurement screens 4 5 1 i Series Measurements For i Series units the following two measurement screens are available Mode pep S VOLTAGE CURRENT Frequency ma MEASUREMENTS 2 Apparent power power Highest AC current Highest DC current FREQUENCY POWER VA POWER PEAK CURR POWER FACT CREST FACT 4 5 2 iX Series Measurements For iX Series the following four measurement screens are available Mode AC DC MEASUREMENTS 1 AC rms current Frequency n a MEASUREMENTS 2 Apparent power AC DC VOLTAGE CURRENT FREQUENCY POWER AC rms voltage VA POWER PEAK CURR power Apparent power Highest AC current Highest DC current found found Crest factor POWER FACT CREST FACT Highest AC current found Power factor Crest factor MEASUREMENTS 3 Voltage distortion n a Voltage distortion Current distortion Current distortion Instantaneous peak Highest DC current Instantaneous current found peak current Phase angle VOLT THD CURR THD INST PK CURR PHASE Series has fourth measurement scre
72. Instruments The following top level menu choices can be accessed from the MENU key Entry Description MENU 1 PROGRAM The PROGRAM menu allows output parameters the be changed MEASUREMENTS The MEASUREMENTS screens are not menus in that no user entries are required TRANSIENTS The TRANSIENTS menu allows output transients to be programmed WAVEFORMS The WAVEFORMS menu allows different waveforms to be selected from the waveform library MORE The MORE selection causes the second part of the MENU ADVANCED MEAS APPLICATIONS SETUP REGISTERS MORE UTILITY OUTPUT IMPEDANCE MEASUREMENT CAL OUTPUT CAL screen to be displayed MENU 2 MENU 2 The ADVANCED MEAS screens are for display only No user entries are required The APPLICATIONS menu provides access to the optional firmware application programs that may be installed in the i iX Series AC source The SETUP REGISTERS menu allows complete instrument settings and transient list programs to be saved to nonvolatile memory The MORE selection causes the third part of the MENU screen to be displayed MENU 3 MENU 3 The UTILITY menu provides access to less commonly used setup screens such as those for the GPIB and RS232C interface settings initial startup values etc The OUTPUT IMPEDANCE menu provides control of the AC source output impedance Available only on 3001iX 5001iX 9003iX and 15003iX models On systems with MODE iX option only available whe
73. LDC401 Emergency Limits for Voltage 16V to 30V DC Apply each test for 30 mins CLDC401 LDC501 Starting Voltage Transients 16V to 30V DC Table LDC501 2 CLDC501 LDC601 Power Failure OV for 7 seconds Table LDC601 2 A D CLDC601 LDC602 Polarity Reversal N A to Rev B Table Test No Section Subject Test Limits Comment File Ref HDC101 Load Measurements 270V DC CHDC101 HDC102 Steady State Limits for Voltage 250V to 280V DC for 30 mins CHDC102 HDC103 Voltage Distortion Spectrum Requires Additional Equipment HDC104 Total Ripple Requires Additional Equipment HDC105 Normal Voltage Transients 125V to 475V DC 1 Overvoltage Transients Peak Voltage 475V DC Table HDC105 1 A J CHDC105 1 2 Undervoltage Transients Low Voltage 125V DC Table HDC105 1 K P CHDC105 2 3 Combined Transients 125V to 475V DC Table HDC105 1 Q R CHDC105 3 4 Repetitive Normal Voltage Transient Test 215V to 315V DC Repeat transient for 30 mins CHDC105 4 HDC201 Power Interrupt for 50 msec Table HDC201 2 A L CHDC201 HDC301 Abnormal Steady State Limits for Voltage 245V to 285V DC Apply each test for 30 mins CHDC301 HDC302 Abnormal Voltage Transients 65V to 475V DC 1 Overvoltage Transients Peak Voltage 475V DC Table HDC302 2 A F CHDC302 1 2 Undervoltage Transients Low Voltage 65V DC Table HDC302 2 G L CHDC302 2 i Series iX Series November 2005 281 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Test No
74. Low of the System Interface connector J22 Negative going pulse on any programmed voltage or frequency change Function strobe output can be reassigned as trigger output when running list transients This output requires a external DC supply and pull up resistor Remote Inhibit Also referred to as Remote On Off Digital input available on pin 36 and pin 27 D Common of the System Interface connector J22 The Remote inhibit input can be used to open the output relay The output relay state is not latching so will return to the closed state when the input is removed 2 1 8 Unit Protection Input Overcurrent Circuit breaker with shunt trip control Input Overvoltage Automatic shunt trip of input circuit breaker Input Overvoltage Surge protection to withstand EN50082 1 IEC 801 4 5 levels Transients Output Overcurrent Adjustable level constant current mode with a maximum set point between 0 and 10 above programmed value Output Short Circuit Peak and rms current limit Overtemperature Automatic shutdown i Series iX Series November 2005 9 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 2 2 Mechanical 2 3 Environmental Parameter Specification Dimensions 19 483 mm wide x 7 178 mm high x 24 610 mm deep chassis size which is available in rack mount or stand alone configuration Unit Weight 61 Ib 28 kg Material Aluminum chassis panels and cover Finish Light textured painted extern
75. November 2005 137 User Manual Rev Z 138 C UD Eye Ke Nes C gt nN A Met California Instruments pi f N 2 REQUENCY TERIS RI y NCY NIU Ns AL V TICS Root 3 VOLTAGE 1 YD A PLANS lef Figure 9 4 Voltage Modulation November 2005 DOAN OO ON i Series Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments FREQUENCY MODULATION This test requires numeric value equal to the modulation rate in Hz This value must be between 0 01 Hz and 100 Hz The frequency modulation is calculated based on the modulation rate as defined in Figure 9 5 This test will last for a minimum of 2 minutes Figure 9 5 Frequency Modulation i Series iX Series November 2005 139 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments POWER INTERRUPT This test requires numeric entry value equal to the test number The tests grouped as follows Test numbers 1 through 15 are for all Standard and Groups See Figure 9 6 for details of the tests Test numbers 16 and 17 for all equipment that does not incorporate digital circuit Test number 16 will drop the output to zero voltage for 50 ms Test number 17 will drop the
76. Offset Voltage DE E 6 Option ABD 150 253 291 OSCIIIatOr iic 102 129 oscillator 5 102 output frequerncys ea c ie tete dns 46 328 January 2005 California Instruments voltage eR RE 46 output calibration 76 output 47 OUTPUT ON OFF 39 2 4 2 2 321 oie eee 126 OVGFrCUITOent 2 ient c dede 105 126 Overcurent ete Rat ere gas 9 overload trei PR EROR Ferd 37 Overtemperature 9 Overvoltage 9 Parallel aceite as cocer esteem ER ees 109 Parallelzsi deter UN 13 phase angle i uice ete 47 PHASE 40 power 102 Power 2 PROG key reete 39 Programmable Impedance 13 MODE option 13 pulse 22 222 95 PNM tet AI US 106 R regiSters icta HE detta nb dot cba 60 regulators 220 dca acie iles 109 relay itid ntt et n 106 109 129 Relay ii i renti ege 13 remote COMMON cess t ct teet b 37 Remote
77. RTCA Group1 Group2 Group3 Voltage offset 8 8 8 12 Frequency 400 400 360 650 360 800 Table 9 9 Emergency Voltage Unbalance This test will change the output voltage for each phase from 115 volts to 115V offset Refer to Table 9 9 for the offset value and the Frequency The test will last 30 minutes The test will be repeated for a second Frequency if applicable The lt key backspace will terminate the test at any time i Series iX Series November 2005 143 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 1 1 5 3 ABNORMAL TEST From the DO160 MENU Scroll to the ABNORMAL AC entry using the up and down cursor keys Press the ENTER key to select the ABNORMAL screens The screen will appear as shown in Figure 9 9 DO 16 C ABNORMAL VOLT SURG VOLT DROP 0 VOLT MIN PREVIOUS SCREEN Figure 9 9 Abnormal Screen The ABNORMAL SCREEN has the following tests 1 VOLT MAX 2 VOLT MIN 3 VOLT SURG 4 VOLT DROP 5 FREQ TRANSIENTS The above test can be selected by scrolling to the highlighted selection using the up and down key and the ENTER key to start the selected test VOLT MAX Standard Group RTCA Group1 Group2 Group3 Voltage 1 97 97 104 97 97 3 98 5 98 5 105 5 98 5 98 5 Frequency 400 400 370 360 360 Table 9 10 Abnormal Voltage Minimum Standard Group RTCA Group1 Group2 Group3 Voltage 1 134 134 122 134 134 3 120 5 132 5 120 5 132 5 132 5 Frequen
78. Rev Z California Instruments 9 8 2 6 CIGui32 704 Control Window E Mil Std 704 Test Tables Iof xi File Edit Run Help Pwr Output Em Test Selection Test Control EUT Performance Measurements A Present Power Source Output Settings Select 5704 DBase RevF Power Group Test T able 34 Phase Phase B Phase Mode C SAC 115V 400 Hz CF AC 1 Phs Volts RMS 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 AE RR AC 3 Phs Current Limit 8 sog 500 500 Freq Het Y z VF AC 1 Phs C 115 380 800 Hz VF AC 3 Phs Phase Ange 00 240 0 1200 54000 SXF 115V 60 Hz CF AC 1 Phs Waveform sne gt Bme z sine z LDC 28 DC HDC 270v DC Ent Three Phase 400 Hz 115 Volt Utilization Equipment Test Methods Three Phase Load and Current Harmoni 115 AMS 400 Hz FTAC101 Steady State Limits for Voltage Includin Balanced Phases 108V to 118v RMS 393 to 4 Apply for 30 mins each test FTAC102 1 Unbalanced Phases 108V to 118v RMS 3v Ur Apply for 30 mins each test FTAC102 2 Voltage Phase Difference Phase 116 to 124 degrees Apply for 30 mins each test FTAC103 Voltage Modulation 115v Nominal Test 115v RMS 2 5 RMS mod ly for 10 mins FTAC104 1 109 Nominal Test 109 AMS 2 5v RMS mod Apply for 10 mins 104 2 117 Nominal Test 117v AMS 2 5v AMS mod Apply for 10 mins FTAC104 3 Frequency Modulatio
79. Table 7 2 for fuse functions Replace any blown fuses Always replace fuses with same type and rating See Table 8 2 128 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments FUSE FUNCTION FUSE VALUE 15V logic power 8V Front panel meter power 8V logic power Table 7 2 Auxiliary Power Supply Fuse Ratings Fuse F9 supplies power to the front panel meter If F9 blows then there is no readout If no LED s are on at all then the auxiliary power supply may have failed Check F11 and replace if necessary If none of these fuses has blown proceed to the next step DC DC Converter The output of the DC DC converter 250V 500V will light the LED that is located directly down between the large storage capacitor and the input output board see Figure 5 3 This LED should be lit If this LED is not lit but the other auxiliary power supply LED s are lit then check F2 on the DC DC board See Table 7 2 and the preceding paragraph If no failures have been found to this point then the AC power board has high power input and gate drive power The gate drives on the AC power board should all be present see Figure 5 5 These are the green LED s DS1 through DS4 They should all be lit If they are not lit then the gate drive has been inhibited Recheck paragraph 7 3 7 Oscillator If the LED s DS1 through DS4 on the AC Power Board are lit and there is still no output then there may be no output from the oscilla
80. User Manual Rev Z 9 9 2 Test Coverage California Instruments This manual is not intended to elaborate on the intent or purpose of the immunity tests and the expected behavior of the EUT as described in the ABD0100 1 8 documents It is assumed that the end user is familiar with the content of the ABD test standard comprehensiveness of the test that can be performed with the ABD options is determined primarily by the capabilities of the power source used Tests that are outside the hardware capabilities of the power source used will not be enabled and cannot be selected For these tests additional equipment may be required as indicated The extent of coverage of the ABD option as implemented on the i iX Series platform is shown in the table below Tests marked with an x generally require additional hardware to be used 292 Description Steady State Voltage Abnormal Steady State Voltage Voltage Surge Normal Voltage Spikes Switching Transients Appendix 1 Voltage 7 Square Wave 7 Starting Current Modulation Normal Frequency Variations Table A Table B Table No Description Table No Description Table D E 1 Steady State Y 1 Steady State Voltage Voltage 2 Abnormal Steady y 2 Voltage Surge State Voltage Normal 3 Voltage Surge 3 Voltage Surge Abnormal Voltage Surge y y 4 Voltage Surge y 4 Voltage Spikes X
81. Variable Frequency Tables acquiring data at all 12 frequency settings can take long time This button allows this process to be aborted Read Meas Data This button reads measurement data from disk Each time from File measurement data is acquired by the GUI it is saved to an ASCII text file A separate file is used for each frequency or DC setting To recall data taken at a specific frequency setting select the desired frequency using the Test Frequency Dropdown control before clicking on this button Note that all measurement data files are saved in the Reports subdirectory of the GUI application directory using file name convention MeasData DO160 nnn Hz txt where nnn is the frequency setting or DC Waveforms This tab displays the voltage and current waveform time domain for each phase The sample rate is automatically set to display about 20 msec of time Cur Graph This tab displays the Current harmonics in a bar graph format Up to 50 harmonics are displayed Cur Spectrum This tab displays the same current harmonics as the Current Graph tab except in a tabular format Data is shown in both absolute and relative from percent of fundamental current A limit table is applied and a pass or fail indication is shown in the last column Values that exceed the allowable limits are shown with a red background in the Pass Fail column Note that the voltage harmonics are used to scale the allowable current limit values per Table
82. Volt after the first burst Move the cursor to the END DELAY field and enter 0 067 for a interval delay of 67 ms Notice that we effectively combined steps 0 and 1 from Figure 4 40 into a single list event If you have an iX Series AC source move down to the FUNCTION field and use the knob to select SINE The knob will allow you to scroll through all available waveshapes in the active WAVE GROUP If you have an i Series AC Source this field will not be visible Move the cursor to the REPEAT field and enter 0 This means this event will be executed once and not repeated Do not confuse this event level repeat capability with the entire list level repeat field which we will use later Move the cursor down to the EVENT field and enter a number from 1 through 99 The transient list will be executed in order of event number Leaving a gap between event numbers allows you to insert events at different places later in the sequence Deleting events is always possible regardless of the event number For the purpose of this exercise we will start with EVENT 5 Enter 5 and press the ENTER key This brings you back to the TRANSIENTS menu VOLT SURGE SAG SETUP START a _ RANDOM END VOLT GO TO VOLT 166 68 END DELAY DURATION 6 8335 DUR SCALE TIME FUNCTION PREVIOUS SCREEN Repeat steps 6 through 16 two more times using 120 V 83 ms and 80 V 150 ms as values for EVENT 10 and EVENT 15 Once you have progr
83. With OMNI 1 181 enne men nennen nennt 228 Example Connections With OMNI 3 18 229 Schematic Showing OMNI 1 37i and1 37iJ Connected to 5001iX 230 Schematic Showing OMNI 3 37i Connected to 30003iX System 231 Applications Screen Mm 232 te i ebb HR ere e de aioe E EEE 233 OMNI Control Screens nrnna oi aee aad 233 XLS Module DIMENSIONS josie 2 De Ve breeze a Ere dv A dec 237 XLS Connection on Low 238 XLS Connection on High Range 239 Application eoe ede e te e epe e nee sre regen ge dte Udo t e ce e greens 243 WIE EIU 244 Steady State Men ici a ederet testes a Tak 244 Transient Ree ote Di Meu e e a e e qoi tete edite dei des 246 Emergency Mer err Step de ean 247 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Figure 9 57 Abnormal S6reern ieiue territi ree bra din te ana ade xen Lg smed 248 Figure 9 58 MIL704 DC Menu Bine ra epe du cde Ee A 249 Figure 9 59 Steady State DC eerte mter r
84. allowable rms voltage for the selected waveform Using the returned value as part of a program will prevent range errors 4 4 6 Frequency Response Restrictions The user may create a waveform that contains any number of harmonic frequencies of the fundamental The AC Source itself however has a finite signal bandwidth and will attenuate higher frequency components of the signal To limit the maximum frequency component of the output signal the iX controller automatically applies a band pass filter to all custom waveforms as they are downloaded This will limit the signal bandwidth to no more than 50 times the fundamental frequency Consequently very fast transients embedded in the user provided waveform data points may be modified as part of the download process The frequency domain VIEW mode in the WAVEFORMS menu may be used to visualize the content of each custom waveform register on the LCD i Series iX Series November 2005 81 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Figure 4 32 Waveform frequency domain view mode 4 4 7 Switching Waveforms 82 Waveforms can be switched as part of the transient system Each transient type setup menu has a FUNCTION field This field allows selection of any of the standard or custom waveforms available in the selected group Refer to the section on transients for more details on using transient list to switch output waveforms November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California
85. effect in this display mode wise Readouts the T left track the vertical cursor position on the wise A DECR INCR Figure 4 35 Scrolling through acquired waveform data The acquisition buffer may be longer than the selected horizontal scale in which case only a portion of the acquisition window will be visible The left portion of the LCD display is used to read out the data under the vertical cursor This cursor is a dotted line that can be moved using the knob If the left or right edge of the display window is reached the entire display will shift so the cursor always remains visible The time from the trigger point to the vertical cursor is displayed in the left hand portion of the LCD in ms Also displayed here are the absolute voltage and or current value under the cursor To change the horizontal display scale without re triggering an acquisition press the ENTER key to return to the HARMONICS TRACE ANALYSIS screen change the SCALE value move the cursor to the VIEW field and press ENTER This will display the same data set at the new scale without triggering a new acquisition November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z 4 6 3 Triggering Measurements California Instruments Both FFT results and waveform acquisitions may have to positioned specific moment in time To allow the data acquisition to coincide with user specified events the measur
86. equal to the phase A voltage if the REF COUPL is turned on 4 VOLTAGE This field programs the Inter harmonic level in percentage of the REF VOLT This value has a range from 0 to 2096 i Series iX Series November 2005 199 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 4 EOS Option 9 4 1 Introduction This section contains information on the installation and operation of the EOS 1 and EOS 3 electronic output switches to be used with the California Instruments i iX series of power sources 9 4 2 EOS Revisions There are two versions of the EOS1 and EOS3 The first generation EOS1 is the original version and has top assembly number 5100 407 1 The second generation EOS1 adds an additional output tap at the 8096 test level selectable through a front panel switch and has top assembly number 5100 410 1 Rev A For the EOS3 the top assembly number remains the same at 5100 407 3 However the revision of the second generation EOS 3 is Rev E First generation EOS 3 units will have an older revision letter The selection between a 7096 tap and an 8096 tap on the EOS 3 must be hard wired which requires removal of the top cover Top assembly number and revision information can be obtained from the model number serial tag Model Generation Assembly Revision EOS1 1 5100 407 1 D or lower 2 5100 410 1 A EOS3 1 5100 407 3 D or lower 2 5100 407 3 E Table 9 21 EOS Versions 9 4 3 General Description 200
87. firmware revision to obtain specific test modes is indicated in this manual Note 2 The 413 option is only available on iX Series AC power sources not i Series It is possible to upgrade most i Series AC source to an iX Series and add the 413 option Contact the California Instruments service department for information support calinst com 9 3 2 Initial Setup The user must set the operating voltage and close the output relay prior to the start of test The following set of parameters must be set before the start of test 1 Frequency to 50 or 60 Hz 2 Voltage mode to AC 3 Waveform to sine wave 9 3 3 Tests Performed The IEC61000 4 13 test consists of several types of tests These tests can be run individually or in sequence ALL The following tests are available 1 Harmonic combination test flat curve and over swing 2 Sweepin frequency and resonance frequency detection 3 Individual harmonics and inter harmonics 4 Meister curve test Firmware revision 2 37 or higher required 188 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 3 4 Front Panel Entry While it is possible to perform IEC 61000 4 13 testing from the front panel of the iX Series AC power source it is recommended to use the provided Cigui32 Windows program for report generation This also provides more convenient way to perform Class 1 User class tests as test levels can be saved to disk To perform
88. for 5 mins each test EZDC14 VABN 16 6 2 3 Momentary Undervoltage 6V Apply for 7 seconds each test EZDC14 VUND 16 6 2 4 Abnormal Transients ac 16 6 2 4b Abnormal Voltage Surge AOVDC Figure 16 4 apply at 10 sec intervals EZDC14 AVSUR For more comprehensive DC tests refer to section 9 1 2 10 November 2005 178 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 1 2 14 160 Option Related Error Messages The CIGui32 program will monitor the power source on regular basis for any run time errors If an error is reported by the power source any test step execution will be aborted Possible errors and error sources are No Description Potential cause 2 Current Limit Fault EUT may require more current than the programmed current limit setting This is possible on constant power loads during reduced voltage low line type test steps If the power source is set to Constant Voltage CV mode the output will trip off when the current limit is exceeded and Current Limit fault is generated In Constant Current CC mode the output voltage will be reduced to reduce the current to the set limit In this case no error message will be generated 113 Undefined Header Generally caused by a communication problem between the PC and the power Source If the RS232 interface is used and these problems persist try using the GPIB interface instead Requires National Instruments
89. hazard A chassis ground is provided at the input terminal block This is located at the back of the cabinet on the lower right hand side The chassis ground must be connected to an electrical ground through an insulated wire of sufficient gauge FUSES Use only fuses of the specified current voltage and protection speed slow blow normal blow fast blow rating Do not short out the fuse holder or use a repaired fuse DO NOT OPERATE IN A VOLATILE ATMOSPHERE Do not operate the power source in the presence of flammable gases or fumes DO NOT TOUCH ENERGIZED CIRCUITS Disconnect the power cable before servicing this equipment Even with the power cable disconnected high voltage can still exist on some circuits Discharge these voltages before servicing Only qualified service personnel may remove covers replace components or make adjustments DO NOT SERVICE ALONE Do not remove covers replace components or make adjustments unless another person who can administer first aid is present DO NOT EXCEED INPUT RATINGS Do not exceed the rated input voltage or frequency Additional hazards may be introduced because of component failure or improper operation DO NOT MODIFY INSTRUMENT OR SUBSTITUTE PARTS Do not modify this instrument or substitute parts Additional hazards may be introduced because of component failure or improper operation MOVING THE POWER SOURCE When moving the power source observe the following 1 Remove all
90. information will be included in the test report Click on the Print button or use File Print to print a test report for this test Return to step 8 as needed The following chapters provide details on the various screens menus displays and controls available to the operator to manage the test process i Series iX Series November 2005 257 User Manual Rev Z 9 8 2 5 Initial Setup 258 California Instruments The 704 option supports both AC and DC modes of operation The correct mode is function of the EUT to be tested and the operator must select the corresponding operating mode first This can be done from the front panel if needed or using the CIGui32 program Use of the ClGui32 program for all settings will be assumed for the remainder of this chapter Seven power groups are covered in the MIL STD 704 directive Group Description SAC Single Phase 115VAC 400 Hz CF TAC Three Phase 115VAC 400 Hz CF SVF Single Phase 115VAC Variable Frequency VF 360 800 Hz TVF Three Phase 115VAC Variable Frequency VF 360 800Hz SXF Single Phase 115VAC 60 Hz CF LDC 28VDC HDC 270VDC The required steady state output settings for each power group must be selected based on the type of EUT to be tested These settings can be made from the front panel of the IX Series power source or from the main CIGui32 control screen November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual
91. into the constant current mode 5 5 Auxiliary Power Supply The auxiliary power supply is mounted on the DC DC power board This assembly generates nine low voltage outputs These outputs from the auxiliary power supply provide logic power to all the modules a 18V to the AC logic board and the oscillator b 8V to the oscillator 15V to the DC DC converter d Three 18V supplies to the AC power amplifier gate drives 24V for the fan and relay power f 8V for the digital front panel meter or GPIB RS232 board All the supplies a b and have a common ground The supplies c and d are all isolated from each other and from a b and e LED s on the AC logic board and the AC power board are lit when each output is in regulation If an overload condition causes the output to drop more than 1096 or the output has failed the corresponding LED will extinguish This feature is helpful in troubleshooting the unit See Service section 7 i Series iX Series November 2005 105 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 5 6 DC DC Power Converter The DC DC power converter is powered from the rectified AC input The converter is PWM pulse width modulated full bridge type that uses IGBT s as the power switches The control logic supply for the DC DC converter is derived from the auxiliary power supply so the DC DC converter does not start switching until after the auxiliary power supply has started
92. is particularly relevant for low current measurements The i and iX Series are high power AC sources optimized for providing and measuring high load currents When powering low power loads measurement inaccuracies on rms and peak current measurements will greatly affect derived measurements such as power power factor and crest factor The measurement system on the i and Series uses data acquisition system with 20 kHz bandwidth This means that high frequency components of the measured signal are filtered out Any contribution to the rms value of voltage and current above this cutoff frequency will not be reflected in the i and iX Series measurements When using an external measurement reference this may account for discrepancies in readings November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 4 6 Advanced Measurements Series only The iX Series offers advanced power analyzer measurement capabilities These functions may be accessed from the MEAS button or the MENU 2 screen The phase for which the analysis or waveform acquisition is done may be selected using the PHASE key in three phase configurations This chapter covers the use and application of these advanced measurement functions 4 6 1 Harmonic Analysis 4 6 1 1 The iX power analyzer performs fast fourrier transformation on both voltage and current on each available phase The resulting frequency spectrum can be displayed on the LCD displ
93. is pressed while the PAUSE field is selected The field will change to RESUME When the ENTER key is pressed again the test will resume from the point it stopped i Series iX Series November 2005 189 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 190 EUT CLASS This field selects the desired product or EUT class There are four EUT classes Class 1 2 and 3 are predefined by the standard and its level parameters cannot be changed The user class can be edited at any time Changing between class 2 and 3 can be done while the state is on Changing to the user class requires the state to be in the off position For Class 1 EUT the user class must be used Only class 2 and 3 test levels are pre programmed When using the provided Cigui32 Windows program class 1 tests are set up by the Cigui32 program automatically GROUP This field selects the test GROUP Selecting a group is required for editing the data fields associated with the group as well as running the individual group if run group is selected The field has the following groups 1 FCURVE This is the first part of harmonic combination test OSWING This is the second part of harmonic combination test SWEEP This is the sweep in frequency and resonance frequency detection HRAM This is the first part of the Individual harmonics and inter harmonics test IHARM This is the second part of the Individual harmonics and inter harmonics test oa MCURVE This is the Meiste
94. key to select the IEC 1000 4 11 main menu The screen will appear as shown in Figure 9 18 JIPS HNL VOLTAGE URRIRTIONS PREVIOUS SCREEN Figure 9 18 IEC1000 4 11 Menu i Series iX Series November 2005 181 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 2 5 1 DIPS AND INTERRUPTIONS TEST Scroll to the DIPS AND INTERRUPTIONS entry using the up and down cursor keys Press the ENTER key to select the DIPS AND INTERRUPTIONS menu The screen will appear as shown in Figure 9 19 IEC pe EN oA NOMINAL Ut 238 8U TO 0 LE EOS ST ACTIVE NO CYCLES 8 5 PREVIOUS SCREEN START ANGLE 8 Figure 9 19 IEC Dips and Interrupts STATE This field enables or disables the 411 test mode If an EOS option is present it will be engaged when the STATE is toggled on This field may also be used to reset a fault condition occurring on the EOS option due to a temperature or over current fault EOS STATE This field can have one of three values N A Indicates no EOS option is present or the EOS option was not powered up when the STATE was enabled ACTIVE The EOS option is active When active the 411 firmware will use the EOS for voltage dips at 0 40 or 70 test levels If a second generation EOS is used and the 70 80 Tap selection on the EOS is set to 8096 you must still program 70 as the DIP TO level to activate the 8096 tap as the firmware only has one control code for this tap Thus the 7096 progr
95. modify edit revise or otherwise update any of these tests to match his her own requirements In this case we recommend you copy the supplied MS704 RevF subdirectory and use this copy to make modifications to This will preserve the original data provided 290 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 9 ABD Option Airbus ABD0100 1 8 Test Use of this option requires the following e i iX Series power source with firmware revision 3 02 or higher ABD option Options installed are listed on unit s serial tag e Windows 2000 PC with RS232C or National Instruments GPIB controller interface California Instruments recommends the use of the GPIB interface for best performance e CIGui32 Windows software revision 1 24 or higher Provided on CI P N CIC496 CD ROM or available for download from California Instruments website Table of Contents ABD Option Manual Section 9 9 1 General 9 9 2 Test Coverage 9 9 3 General Test Procedure 9 9 4 Initial Setup 9 9 5 CIGui32 ABD Control Window 9 9 6 ABD Menus 9 9 7 ABD Test Selection 9 9 8 ABD Test Control 9 9 9 EUT Performance Measurements 9 9 10 Appendix 1 ABD Switching Transients 9 9 11 Test Description Files Creating Custom Tests 9 9 12 Test Tables 9 9 13 ABD Option Related Error Messages 9 9 1 General The ABD option support Airbus ABD0100 1 8 voltage and frequency immunity tests in either of the AC or DC mode This option c
96. of the OMNI is configured using a two pole DIP switch on the DC Supply Relay Board assembly inside the OMNI chassis reconfigure the control feature perform the following steps WARNING Disconnect all sources of power to the OMNI before performing any of these steps Hazardous voltages may be present internally from the AC mains and from AC power source connected to the OMNI rear panel 1 Disconnect all sources of power to the OMNI 2 Remove the OMNI top cover 3 Configure 51 switch setting according to table MODE S1 POSITION 1 S1 POSITION 2 Manual OFF ON Programmable ON OFF Note Position 1 is toward the OMNI front panel position 2 is toward the OMNI rear panel 4 Replace the top cover 5 Reconnect power to the OMNI 234 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 7 LNS Option and XLS Option The Line Sync option and the External Line Sync option both provide the same function namely synchronizing the output to the input line The LNS option is internal to the power source and will sync the output to the iX input line only The XLS option however is external to the power source it can be added to the source as needed and it will sync to any line voltage whether it is connected to the source or not 9 7 1 Specifications The LNS and XLS options meet the following specifications The specifications shown here are for these line sync options
97. or off A lamp above the switch illuminates when power is on Flicker On Off Switch and Lamps The momentary contact push button Flicker On Off switch toggles the OMNI mode between bypass function no added impedance and flicker function IEC 555 3 impedance Lamps above the switch indicate the selected mode NOTE To prevent damage to the OMNI unit the BYPASS mode must be selected when the power source is operated on low output voltage range or if currents in excess of OMNI ratings will be drawn Bypass relays are provided to short out the OMNI impedance so that the power source may be used with its normal low output impedance or whenever the load current will be in excess of the OMNI maximum current rating When the BYPASS mode is selected the OMNI impedance is shorted out When the FLICKER mode is selected the OMNI impedance is added to the power source output impedance Select the BYPASS position when low power source output impedance is required or desirable This is the case for most tests other than IEC 555 3 flicker tests Also select the BYPASS position when the power source is operated on the low voltage output range The low voltage output range can deliver currents well in excess of the OMNI maximum current rating 9 6 6 3 Omni Control Through i iX Front Panel 232 Select the APPLICATIONS screen from the MENU2 screen The following screen will appear as shown in Figure 9 46 APPLICATIONS SETUP MIL STD 7 4 RTCA
98. output to zero voltage for 200 ms Test number 18 is used for DC equipment and will drop the output for 1 sec Test numbers 21 through 26 are applicable for Groups 2 and 3 only Output frequency will be set to the F1 value for 1 second prior to the test The output frequency will remain set to the F2 value when the test is completed This will allow the user to apply sequence of power interrupts See Figure 9 7 for detail of the tests T1 V NOM of V NOMINAL V MIN 0 VOLTS DO160 Table 16 1 Test conditions for equipment with digital circuits NOTES 1 Definitions T1 Power interrupt time T2 Time it would take for the applied voltage to decay from V nom to zero volts T3 Time it would take for the applied voltage to rise from zero to V nom volts VMIN The minimum level expressed as a percentage of V NOMINAL to which the applied voltage is permitted to decay 2 Tolerance to T1 T2 T3 1096 3 Test condition numbers 8 and 15 are for category Z dc powered equipment only Applicable A A Z 2 2 2 2 Category Test T 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Condition No T1 ms 2 10 25 50 75 100 200 1000 10 25 50 75 100 200 1000 T2 ms lt 1 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 T3 ms lt 1 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 V Nom 0 50 15 10 5 0 0 0 80 50 0 15 5 0 0 V min
99. panel as well as removing the input power from the unit WARNING Wait 10 minutes for all internal capacitors to discharge 7 4 2 Removing Top Cover Remove the screws securing the top cover and remove the top cover 7 4 3 Initial Inspection Make a visual inspection of the unit and ensure all the connectors are properly mated and there are no loose or broken wires i Series iX Series November 2005 127 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 7 4 4 Fuse Check See Figure 5 3 and Figure 5 5 Check the fuse F1 on the AC power board at the top of the unit using the ohmmeter If the fuse is open do not replace but check all the IGBT s To check the IGBT s connect the positive lead of the ohmmeter to the collector center leg and measure the resistance to the gate and the emitter outside legs of each IGBT If the resistance reading is lower than 1000 ohms it indicates a blown IGBT The IGBT s are not field replaceable and the module should be returned to the factory for exchange or repair See paragraph 7 4 6 for disassembly instructions If a low resistance reading is not found replace the fuse and proceed with the check procedure Check the fuse F1 on the end of the input output board If the fuse is blown do not replace but proceed to paragraph 7 4 6 for disassembly instructions and remove the AC power board With the AC power board removed check the IGBT s Q2 through Q9 using the procedure detailed in the paragraph above S
100. pre set by the test sequence files provided Using the ABD0100 1 8 Switching Transient control window transient parameters can be set interactively and resulting transient timing is displayed graphically Both Figure A Transparency Tests and Figure B type transients Transient Tests can be selected and parameter permutations for Figure B tests are automatically generated and displayed in the transient permutations table above the time domain display i Series iX Series November 2005 305 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Switching Transients conform Figure Transparency Tt is shown the T1 column of the table This transient is repeated 5 times with delay of 1 second default between transients Tt er gt 4 1ms 0 5 ms 1ms 0 5 ms Switching Transients conform Figure B The T1 T2 and T3 values are shown on screen in the table above the graph Each permutation shown is repeated one time with a 1 second delay default between transients Vnm A 90 96 of Vnm lt gt T2 T3 Table 2 transients with roman numerals I through VI are supported as well be selection Figure B Table 2 F1 and F2 represent the test frequencies before and after the transient F1 frequency of equipment voltage supply when t ta F2 frequency of equipment voltage supply when t tb T1 gt Vnm ta tb t time V nm minimum normal voltage 306 November 2005 i Ser
101. referenced ini file in the test table on the Test Selection tab It is possible to edit this information if needed which allows variations on any of these tests to be made Any changes can be saved to a new file The standard provided test files are write protected however and should not be overwritten The following columns data fields are available in this table for each test step row Step number Sequential number from 1 through end of sequence Freq Test frequency in Hz FSlew Frequency slew rate in Hz sec Volt A Test voltage for phase output A in Vrms or Vdc depending on mode VSlew Voltage slew rate in V sec Func A Waveform function Default is SINE for AC mode and DC for DC mode Arbitrary waveform can be used in AC mode if this capability is supported by the power source Volt B Test voltage for phase output B in Vrms or Vdc depending on mode VSlew B Voltage slew rate in V sec Func B Waveform function Default is SINE for AC mode and DC for DC mode Arbitrary waveform can be used in AC mode if this capability is supported by the power source Volt C Test voltage for phase output C in Vrms or Vdc depending on mode VSlew C Voltage slew rate in V sec Func C Waveform function Default is SINE for AC mode and DC for DC November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments i Series iX Series Control Display D
102. removing the Phillips screws of the top cover Each transformer one per phase has five output tap lugs connected to a wire harness The wire harness routes the output of each tap the electronic switches on the control board There is one control board for each phase mounted to a heat sink The output tap lugs are numbered 1 2 3 5 4 in that order on the transformer The 7096 output tap is available on lug number 3 The 8096 output tap is available on lug number 5 To change taps some hand tools wrench pliers will be required e To switch from 70 to 80 tap disconnect the wire from lug and reconnect it to lug 5 on each of the three transformers e To switch from 80 to 70 tap disconnect the wire from lug 5 and reconnect it to lug on each of the three transformers Replace the top cover Although it is possible to wire each phase for a different tap level this is not recommended It may be advisable to mark the unit to reflect the configured tap after making a configuration change i Series iX Series November 2005 213 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Lug 3 70 Lug 5 80 SL Tes F EL PE NU st ISSN Figure 9 40 EOS3 Location of 70 80 Taps for each phase 214 November 2005 i Series iX Series California Instruments User Manual Rev Z 9 4 7 Service and Maintenance 9 4 7 1 Cleaning The exterior of the instrument may be cleaned with cloth dampened with a mild deterge
103. return to nominal voltage after seven seconds 148 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments VOLT SURGE This test will produce voltage surge defined by Table 9 16 This test will be repeated three times with ten seconds intervals The voltage values are halved for 14 0V category B equipment Surge 1 Volt Ho Br 100 40 100 60 40 2 90 10 48 1000 Table 9 16 Abnormal Voltage Surge 9 1 1 6 3 Emergency Test The Emergency test is selected from the DO 160 DC Main Menu This test will set the output voltage to 18V for 28V equipment and to 9V for 14V equipment The test will last for 30 minutes The key backspace will terminate the test at any time i Series iX Series November 2005 149 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 1 2 Option 160 RTCA DO 160 Rev Tests Software Use of this option requires the following e Series Power Source with firmware version 2 38 or higher e 160 option Options installed are listed on unit s serial tag or shown on Configuration screen e Windows XP 2000 PC with RS232C or National Instruments GPIB controller interface California Instruments recommends the use of the GPIB interface for best performance e CIGui32 Windows software revision 1 26 or higher Provided on CI P N CIC496 CD ROM or available for download from California Instruments website e For specific tests additional test equipment m
104. selection must be made from the Main GUI Options menu Report Format menu before opening the MIL STD 704 test screen If not an error prompt will indicate that no supported report format is selected Exit Closes the 704 test window Edit Cut Cuts the selected row from either the Test selection data grid or the Test sequence data grid The data in the row cut is available for a Paste operation Copy Copies the selected row from either the Test selection data grid or the Test sequence data grid Copied rows can be pasted to the same grid at a different location Paste Pastes a copied row from to either the Test selection data grid or the Test sequence data grid Insert Row Inserts a new blank row at the selected data grid location Delete Row Deletes the selected row from either the Test selection data grid or the Test sequence data grid The row contents are permanently discarded Run Run selected test Stop Abort test in progress Help Opens the on line help file November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 8 2 8 704 Test Selection The Test Selections tab in the 704 test window contains the following controls and displays Control Display Description Select Airframe This drop down control allows the operator to select from one or more libraries of test sequences grouped by airframe This allows multiple sets of test sequences to be organi
105. shelf track or supported from the sides with optional rack slides The cooling fan at the rear of the unit must be free of any obstructions that would interfere with the flow of air A 2 5 inch clearance should be maintained between the rear of the unit and the rear panel of the mounting cabinet Also the air intake holes on the sides of the power chassis must not be obstructed Output Wiring The Mode iX is wired in series with the output of specified California Instruments power source systems The Mode iX terminal block marked SOURCE should be wired to the output of the power source system The terminal block marked LOAD is wired to the user s load unit under test UUT Refer to Figure 9 37 in this section for an example of proper connections Refer to Section Error Reference source not found to determine the appropriate wire gauge needed for the output wiring N Note The output voltage of the iX series power sources into the Mode iX box may be at hazardous potentials as high as 300 volts line to neutral 600 volts line to line Wiring used between the power sources and Mode iX and between the Mode iX and the user s load must be insulated to withstand this potential i Series iX Series November 2005 219 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments AN Note The SOURCE and LOAD terminals of Mode iX will be at the hazardous live potentials of the iX series power sources driving it even if Mode iX box has not been switched on 2
106. shown in Figure 9 57 ABNORMAL RC TEST 6A OVER VULTA G OVER FREQUENCY UNDER VOLTAGE UNDER FREQUENCY PREVIOUS SCREEN Figure 9 57 Abnormal Screen The ABNORMAL SCREEN has the following tests 1 OVER VOLTAGE 2 UNDER VOLTAGE 3 OVER FREQUENCY 4 UNDER FREQUENCY The above test can be selected by scrolling to the highlighted selection using the up and down key and the ENTER key to start the selected test OVER VOLTAGE This test will change the output voltage for the selected phase in the following sequence e 180V for 50msec e The voltage gradually decays with time to 125 volt by the following equation 124 6 2 77 t for 0 05 lt t lt 6 925 e Stay at 125V for 93 seconds before returning to 115V Prior to the test a range change may take place if the power source is set at the low voltage range The lt key backspace will terminate the test at any time Note A range change will result in momentary loss of power to the EUT If this is not acceptable the power source must be left in high range at all times UNDER VOLTAGE This test will change the output voltage for the selected phase in the following sequence e OV for 7 seconds e 100V for 93 seconds e The lt key backspace will terminate the test at any time OVER FREQUENCY This test will change the output frequency in the following sequence 480Hz for 5 seconds e 420Hz for 9 seconds The lt key backspace will terminate the test at any
107. side Available power group selections are shown below the airframe selection field The table shown at the bottom of this tab shows the available test sections that can be selected This table matches the test outline of the RTCA DO 160 test standard Test Control This tab provides information on the test sequence that is presently selected and also contains the execution controls It shows the progress of any test that is executing EUT Performance Measurements This tab may be used to display EUT performance data as measured by the power source s advanced data acquisition system If the source used does not support advanced measurement function such as waveform capture and FFT November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Tab Description some of the information in this tab may not be displayed In addition to the three tab controls the left pane of the 160 window contains set of output on off control buttons and print button The on off buttons may be used to open or close the output relay of the power source at any time If the output relay is opened during a test run the test is automatically aborted when the operator clicks on the Off button The ON button will be shown in red while the output relay is closed The Off button is shown in green if the output relay is open The report print function can be invoked by either clicking on the Print button or us
108. skipped Requires additional equipment B F SAC104 375 RMS modulation RMS modulation Resolution B F SAC104 2 5V RMS modulation 2 4V RMS modulation Resolution B F 104 375V RMS modulation 4V RMS modulation Resolution B F 104 2 5V RMS modulation 2 4V RMS modulation Resolution B F HDC103 2 Test skipped Requires additional equipment B F HDC104 16 8kHz Test skipped Requires additional equipment F SVF104 375V RMS modulation RMS modulation Resolution F SVF104 2 5V RMS modulation 2 4V RMS modulation Resolution F SVF106 j50kHz Test skipped Requires additional equipment F TVF104 375 RMS modulation RMS modulation Resolution F TVF104 2 5V RMS modulation 2 4V RMS modulation Resolution F TVF106 2 Test skipped Requires additional equipment F SXF104 375V RMS modulation 4V RMS modulation Resolution F SXF104 2 5V RMS modulation 2 4V RMS modulation Resolution F SXF106 50kHz Test skipped Requires additional equipment F SXF109 time 1 cycle 16 666667 msec Dwell time 17msec Resolution F SXF201 Dwell time 1 cycle 16 666667 msec Dwell time 17msec Resolution F SXF302 time 1 cycle 16 666667 msec Dwell time 17msec Resolution F HDC105 330VDC 300VDC limit test written but will not run Hardware limit DC range i iX F HDC302 350VDC 300VDC limit test written but will not run Hardware limit DC range i iX HDC105 75VDC 300VDC limit test written but will not run Hard
109. switching power groups the table data shown at the bottom of this tab will be updated to reflect the new selection The first test section of the table will automatically be selected when switching power groups Present Power This section displays the programmed steady state settings that are in effect This Source Output information is updated each time the 704 form regains focus The mode of Settings operation AC DC or AC DC is displayed for reference but cannot be changed from this screen When in DC mode the frequency setting will show Note that changes in steady state settings can only be made from the main GUI screen The operator can toggle between the main screen and the 704 screen for this purpose as needed Table Header The table header is shown against a blue background and contains the table reference designator and a description of the selected power group Test Table Display The data grid at the bottom of the tab displays the selected power group test table It is also used to select the specific test section and number to be executed Thus every test starts by selecting the desired test step from this table Clicking on the desired ROW does this The selected row will be highlighted and the associated file shown in the File Ref Field will be loaded in the Test Control tab For better readability the user can adjust the column widths by dragging the dividers between columns If the windo
110. system impedance up to the levels required of the power source for IEC 555 3 and IEC 1000 3 3 flicker testing 9 6 3 Specifications 9 6 3 1 Input Line Voltage 115 VAC 10 or 115 VAC 10 or 230 VAC 10 230 VAC 10 Line Current lt 0 25 amps at 115 VAC input lt 1 0 amps at 115 VAC input pm 0 125 amps at 230 VAC input 0 5 amps at 230 VAC input Line Frequency 47 to 63 Hz 47 to 63 Hz Fuse Rating 0 25 amp slow acting at 115 VAC input 2 Amp slow acting used for 0 125 amp slow acting at 230 VAC both input ranges input 9 6 3 2 Output 1 37i and 1 37iJ 3 37i OMNI Type iiS 55 Mo NG Phases 11 18 5A per phase 8 5A per phase 37A per phase 37A per phase Current in bypass 37A per phase 37A per phase 74A per phase 74A per phase NOTE To prevent damage to the OMNI unit the BYPASS mode must be selected when the power source is operated on low output voltage range or if currents in excess of OMNI ratings will be drawn 224 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments OMNI Type 1 18i 3 18i 1 37i 3 37i 1 37iJ Impedance 5 in combination with power source output impedance 0 24 ohms 0 15 ohms at 50 Hz 0 24 ohms 0 062 ohms at 50 Hz 0 16 ohms 0 10 ohms at 50 Hz 0 16 ohms 0 054 ohms at 50 Hz 9 6 3 3 Controls Indicators ON OFF toggle switch Flicker On Off push button switch Power Lamp Bypass Lamp Flicker Lamp 9 6 3 4 Mechanic
111. tables data will be acquired at the frequency set by the Test Frequency Dropdown control This button is always available regardless of what sub tab is selected Settings Brings dialog box that allows scaling and color changes for the Waveform or Current harmonics graphs Note that setting changes will apply to graphs for all phases For current harmonics graphs only the absolute bar settings apply The 160 measurement screen does not display relative current harmonic bar charts but relative data is available in tabular format on the Cur Spectrum tab This button is available only if either the Waveforms or Cur Graph sub tab is selected i Series iX Series November 2005 165 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 1 2 12 Test Description Files Creating Custom Tests The 160 option uses a set of configuration files that contain the relevant test descriptions These files are contained in the 00160 RevE subdirectory of the CIGUI32 application directory The contents of these tables is defined by the DO160 Structure Tbl X ini configuration files located in the 00160 RevE directory references the relevant table The test description files used to perform a specific test are listed in the last column labeled Test File These files must be present in the DO160 RevE directory or the user directory For customer created tests these file names can be renamed as needed as long as they are correct
112. test Click the Start button to initiate the test 12 13 14 15 Observe the test progress monitor at the top of the window and observe the EUT Wait for test completion You can Abort test in progress by clicking the Abort button Select the EUT Performance Measurements tab Right tab along top of the screen Click the Update Meas Button located in the top center of the screen This will initiate measurement cycle Measurements in three phase mode may take some time to complete Use the tabs located along the top of the measurement tab Parameters Waveforms Curr Graph and Curr Spectrum to review the EUT data Any anomalies can be noted in the observations tab located on the Parameters screen This information will be included in the test report Click on the Print button or use File Print to print a test report for this test Return to step 8 as needed The following chapters provide details on the various screens menus displays and controls available to the operator to manage the test process i Series iX Series November 2005 293 User Manual Rev Z 9 9 4 Initial Setup 294 California Instruments The ABD option supports both AC and DC modes of operation The correct mode is a function of the EUT to be tested and the operation must select the corresponding operating mode first This can be done from the front panel if needed or using the ClGui32 program Use of the CIGui32 program for all settings wil
113. the LNS If the LNS is not installed a LINE SYNC ERROR will appear after a short period in the top left of the screen This means the LNS option is either not present or not receiving a phase input signal from the line To turn the sync mode back off set the CLK MODE field back to INT Over the bus the LNS is enabled or disabled as follows FREQ MODE SENS Enables LNS FREQ MODE FIX Disables LNS If the LNS is not installed and the FREQ MODE SENS command is issued an error message is generated If done as part of a test program an error check should be done after a 800 msec delay to allow the i iX to sense the presence of a sync signal coming from the LNS board If no error occurs the LNS is active If an error occurs the LNS may not be available or not functioning and the mode has reverted back to internal The LNS option is designed to keep the iX output frequency locked to the line frequency There is a finite phase offset however between the iX source output and the line input to the iX power source This phase offset will vary somewhat with the input line voltage If it is desired to have the iX output in phase with the line input it will be necessary to monitor the iX output voltage as well as the line input to the iX source using a two channel oscilloscope to compare the zero crossings of the voltage waveforms An isolation amplifier must be used when connecting the input line to the o scope input To program an offset an
114. the START field Once the trigger occurs the acquisition holds off the specified 20 ms at which point the data requested is captured Using positive trigger delay value always yields post trigger data START TRIG SOURCE PHASE 180 i TRIGGER E 1 DELAY pri ACQUISITION MY TND ON 200 150 100 50 o 50 Figure 4 37 Positive trigger delay Post trigger data Positive trigger delay values may be set from 0 0 ms to 1000 0 ms 1 second in 0 1 ms increments The value may be entered directly from the keyboard or using the knob 92 November 2005 i Series Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments PRE TRIGGER DELAY Alternatively a negative trigger delay value may be specified up to the maximum time window depth of the acquisition window 104 ms for single phase configurations 312 ms for three phase configurations This situation is shown in Figure 4 38 The example shows a similar scenario as before only this time the trigger delay was set a 20 ms Notice that the data acquisition window now contains data that occurred before the user pressed the ENTER key to start the acquisition START TRIG SOURCE PHASE 0 ACQUISITION WINDOW a TRIGGER DELAY Figure 4 38 Negative trigger delay Pre trigger data For single phase iX configurations negative trigger delay values may be set from 0 0 ms to 104 0 ms 1 second in 0 1 ms increments For three phase iX configurations
115. this frequency is smoothed out by two inductors that are mounted behind the input output board and several smoothing capacitors on the AC power board to provide a precision low frequency 16 500 Hz output See Figure 5 3 and Figure 5 5 Three isolated 18V supplies provide power for the gate drives The 18V is regulated down to 15V by three TO220 regulators that are mounted on three discrete sheet metal heat sinks If the 15V is in regulation an LED will be lit in front of each heat sink There is a red a green and an orange LED one for each supply The other four green LED s will be lit when there is gate drive present at the IGBT s If the green LED s are not lit there will be no gate drive and hence no output 5 9 Input Output Board The input output board holds a lot of the large components and provides interconnection between the AC input the DC DC board the AC power board and the output without the use of heavy cables The output relay and the output current metering circuit are also mounted on this board The output AC inductors the DC DC transformer and the DC output choke are mounted on brackets behind the input output board These brackets also provide support for the input output board i Series iX Series November 2005 109 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Figure 5 5 AC Power Stage Layout 110 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Figure 5 6 AC Control Logic
116. time 248 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments UNDER FREQUENCY This test will change the output frequency in the following sequence e OHzfor 7 seconds 380 7 for 7 seconds The lt key backspace will terminate the test at any time 9 8 1 8 DC TESTS If the output voltage is set for 28V DC or 270V DC the MIL704 DC Main selection screen will appear as seen in Figure 9 58 MIL7 4 DC MENU SIUN TRANSIENT STEADY STATE ABNORMAL Figure 9 58 MIL704 DC Menu 9 8 1 8 1 Steady State Test Scroll to the STEADY STATE entry using the up and down cursor keys Press the ENTER key to select the STEADY STATE screen The screen will appear as shown Figure 9 59 STEADY STATE DC TEST JOLTAG RIPPLE PREVIOUS SCREEN Figure 9 59 Steady State DC The MIL704 STEADY STATE screen has the following tests 1 VOLTAGE 2 RIPPLE The above tests can be selected by scrolling to the highlighted selection using the up and down key and the ENTER key to start the selected test VOLTAGE This test will change the output voltage for the selected phase in the following sequence 1 28V system e 22V for 1 minute e 29V for 1 minute e 28V for 1 minute 2 270V system e 250V for 1 minute e 280V for 1 minute e 270V for 1 minute i Series iX Series November 2005 249 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments The lt key backspace will terminate the test at any time DC RIPPLE T
117. time screen when selected from the UTILITY menu will appear for about 3 seconds The elapsed time shown is the cumulative amount of time the power source has been on from its initial build This value is read only and cannot be changed by the user The same screen also displays the internal AC source ambient temperature in degrees C ELAPSED TIME 4 11 55 TEMPERATURE 32 832 C The viewing angle can be used to change the contrast ratio of the LCD display The range of the viewing angle parameter is from 10 to 10 Setting the right viewing angle is matter of personal taste Set this parameter to a value that is most comfortable for the user November 2005 67 User Manual Rev Z 4 2 11 1 GPIB RS232 SETUP menu 68 GPIB ADDRESS 1 R5232 DATA RS232 38400 RS232 PARITY California Instruments GPIB RS232 SETUP RS232 STPBTS 1 Figure 4 21 GPIB RS232 SETUP menu The GPIB RS232 SETUP menu may be used to change the interface parameter settings for both the IEEE 488 interface and the RS232 serial interface The following parameters can be set from this menu GPIB ADDRESS RS232 BAUDRATE RS232 DATA RS232 PARITY 5232 STPBITS Sets the IEEE 488 address used by the AC source The address value can be set from 0 through 31 Address 0 is often reserved for the IEEE 488 controller The factory setting is address 1 Once changed the IEEE 488 address is retained in nonvolatile mem
118. to be acquired at all frequencies frequencies available in the Test Frequency Dropdown control For all tables other than C this button functions like the Update Meas Button located above the subtabs Abort Meas This button aborts measurements in progress In case of Table C acquiring data at all 12 frequency settings can take a long time This button allows this process to be aborted Read Meas Data This button reads measurement data from disk Each time from File measurement data is acquired by the GUI it is saved to an ASCII text file A separate file is used for each frequency or DC setting To recall data taken at a specific frequency setting select the desired frequency using the Test Frequency Dropdown control before clicking on this button Note that all measurement data files are saved in the Reports subdirectory of the GUI application directory using file name convention MeasData ABD01008 nnn Hz txt where nnn is the frequency setting or DC Waveforms This tab displays the voltage and current waveform time domain for each phase The sample rate is automatically set to display about 20 msec of time Cur Graph This tab displays the Current harmonics in a bar graph format Up to 50 harmonics are displayed Cur Spectrum This tab displays the same current harmonics as the Current Graph tab except in a tabular format Data is shown in both absolute and relative form percent of fundamental current A limit table is applied
119. via a control signal on the system interface connector The signal is generated by the master power source The master power source also automatically configures the complete power system for proper output phase angles and power source current sharing Front Panel Controls Indicators Power Switch and Lamp A power switch turns the phase mode controller on or off A lamp above the switch illuminates when power is on Mode Switch This momentary contact push button switch toggles the phase mode controller between three phase and one phase mode The function of this switch is normally disabled and switching is remotely controlled via a signal on the system interface connector One Phase Lamp This lamp is illuminated when the phase mode controller is operating in single phase mode The power source outputs connected to the SOURCE A B and C terminals are shorted together in the phase mode controller and directed to the LOAD A terminal Three Phase Lamp This lamp is illuminated when the phase mode controller is operating in three phase mode The power source outputs connected to the SOURCE A B C terminals are directed to the LOAD A B C terminals respectively Programmed Control The phase mode controller is normally remotely programmed by the master iX series power source A system interface cable must be connected between the Mode iX and the power sources to carry the control signal to the Mode iX When configured for programmed co
120. 0 0 0 05 volts DC i Series iX Series November 2005 115 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 150 VDC Range Volt Zero Press the PROGRAM key Select VOLT RANGE and program the 150 VDC range with the shuttle Go to the OUTPUT CAL screen and adjust the VOLT ZERO for 0 0 0 005 volts DC on the output 150 VDC Range Full scale Program 120 0 volts Go to the OUTPUT CALIBRATION screen and adjust the VOLT FS parameter for an output voltage of 120 0 0 05 volts DC 150 VDC Range Full scale Program 120 0 volts Go to the OUTPUT CALIBRATION screen and adjust the VOLT FS parameter for an output voltage of 120 0 0 05 volts DC For 9003iX or 15003iX 3 Phase power system with one controller repeat the preceding steps for the Phase B and C outputs Press the PHASE key to select the output to be calibrated Monitor the output of the respective phase by moving the HI input of the Digital Multimeter The LO input should remain connected to the common LO of the sense connector TB3 The following Table is a summary of the preceding calibration steps Program the following values in the table and make the adjustments OUTPUT CALIBRATION screen Select the phase to be calibrated by pressing the PHASE key TITLE PROGRAM VALUES CALIBRATION VALUE ADJUST TO 150 VAC range DC Zero VOLT ZERO 0 5 mv DC 150 VAC range Volt FS VOLT FS 120 0 05 VAC 150 VAC range Volt Hi Freq V HI FREQ 120 0 05
121. 08 240V unit the result could be a severely damaged unit Figure 3 1 The 5001iX Power Source California Instruments MODEL 5001iX i Series iX Series November 2005 15 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 3 3 Mechanical Installation The 3001i iX and 5001i iX are completely self contained power sources They may be used free standing on a bench top or rack mounted using the optional rack mount handle kit The units are fan cooled drawing air in from the sides and exhausting at the rear The sides of each unit must be kept clear of obstruction and a 6 clearance must be maintained to the rear Special consideration of overall air flow characteristics and the resultant internal heat rise must be allowed for with systems installed inside enclosed cabinets to avoid self heating and over temperature problems 3 4 Input Wiring TB1 The input terminal block TB1 is located at the rear of the unit Ground earth wire must be connected to the chassis of the AC power system The mains source must have a current rating equal to or greater than the input circuit breaker and the input wiring must be sized to satisfy the applicable electrical codes The input terminal block cover and strain relief must be installed in table top applications to maintain protection against hazardous voltages AN CAUTION Capacitors in the power source may hold hazardous electrical charge even if the power source has been disconnected from the mai
122. 0Vots 300 Volts osv 5V 0 01 Vot 01 0 01 Vot Peak Current 0 119 Amps 0 001 Amp 0 6 000 kVA 0 2 KVA 0 001 kVA Real Power Power 0 6 000 kW 0 05 kW 0 001 kW CETE Factor 0 1 00 0 02 0 01 gt 0 2KVA Current and Power Accuracy specifications are times ten for 10001i and 15001i For 10001i and 15001i resolution decreases by factor of 10 ranges for current and power increases by factor of ten 2 1 4 AC Measurements iX series Parameter Accuracy Resolution 0 1 to 500 Hz RMS Voltage 0 300 Volts 0 05V 0 02 lt 100 Hz 0 01 Volt RMS Current 0 40 Amps 0 05A 0 02 lt 100 Hz 0 001 Amp Peak Current 0 119 Amps 0 05A 0 02 lt 100 Hz 0 001 Amp VA Power 0 6 000 KVA 0 01kVA 0 02 100 Hz 0 001 kVA 0 02kVa 0 02 100 500 Hz Real Power 0 6 000 kw 0 005kW 0 02 lt 100 Hz 0 001 kW 0 01kW 0 02 100 500 Hz Power Factor 0 1 00 0 01 gt 0 2kVA i Series iX Series November 2005 7 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 2 1 5 DC Measurements iX series Current and Power Accuracy specifications are times two for 10001iX and times three for 15001iX For 10001iX and 15001iX resolution decreases by factor of 10 ranges for current and power increases by factor of three Parameter Current 2 1 6 Harmonic Measurements iX series Harmonic 2 50 0 25V 0 1 0 01V 0 1 kHz Current Fundamental 0 05A 0 01A Harmonic 2 50 0 05A 0
123. 1 0 01 0 1 2 Accuracy specifications times three for three phase mode Harmonics frequency range in three phase mode is 32 Hz 6 67 kHz Resolution decreases by factor of 10 for 10001iX and 15001iX 2 1 7 System Specification Parameter Specification External 0 to 10 Modulation Synchronization Isolated TTL input for external frequency control Requires 5V at 5 ma Input for logic high Trigger Output 400 us pulse for voltage or frequency change Isolated output that requires a pull up resistor 22K O to 5 VDC Non volatile 8 complete instrument setups and transient lists 32 events per list memory storage Waveforms Sine i series Sine square clipped user defined iX series 8 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Transient Voltage drop step sag surge sweep Frequency step sag surge sweep Voltage and Frequency step sweep IEEE 488 Interface SH1 AH1 T6 L3 SR1 RL2 DC1 DT1 IEEE 488 2 and SCPI Response time is 10 ms typical RS232C Interface Bi directional serial interface 9 pin D shell connector Handshake CTS RTS Data bits 7 8 Stop bits 1 2 Baud rate 9600 19200 38400 IEEE 488 2 and SCPI Current Limit Two selectable modes of operation Modes Constant current and constant voltage with hold off time and trip Function Strobe Isolated open collector output available between pin 31 High and pin 14
124. 1 MAX Pre test nominal Voltage 115V for 5 secs Preset voltage 1 Fmod 1 Hz Vpp 0 5 115 0 114 8 115 2 114 8 115 0 114 8 400 0 114 8 115 0 113 8 116 2 113 8 115 0 113 8 116 2 120 0000 1 Fmod 25 Hz 3 5V 113 8 120 0000 Delay between modulations for 5 secs Preset voltage 1 Fmod 1 7 Hz Vpp 0 5V Delay between modulations for 5 secs Preset voltage 1 Fmod 10 Hz Vpp 3 5V Delay between modulations for 5 secs Preset voltage User Data Testedby department EUT Temp 25 95 Comment Test Site Press Executing test steps 7 through 8 of 25 Figure 9 67 ABD Option Test Control Screen The Test Control tab in the ABD tests window is used to display and execute a selected ABD test This tab contains the following controls and displays Control Display Description Execution Controls The Start and Abort buttons are used to start and stop the selected test step The execution mode that will be used is determined by the Execution Options setting The same can be accomplished using the Run menu entries When operating in Single Step or Loop mode make sure the desired test step is selected in the test sequence table at the bottom of this tab as this will be the one used by the program Series Series Execution Options The execution options determine the mode of operation when the Start button is c
125. 1 Note This DO160 Rev E implementation uses arbitrary waveform capabilities harmonic measurements and AC DC mode none of which are supported on i Series models Contact California Instruments for information on upgrading i Series models to iX Series 150 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments This section of the manual covers operation of the 160 option using the CIGui32 program Version 1 26 or higher of the CIGui32 program is required The CIGui32 program is supplied with all iX systems free of charge on CD ROM CIC496 It can also be downloaded from the California Instruments web site www calinst com The information provided in this user manual is aimed at guiding the operator in the use of the 160 option through the use of the CIGui32 program Much of the same information can be found in the on line help system of the CIGUI32 This manual is not intended to elaborate on the intent or purpose of the immunity tests and the expected behavior of the EUT as described in the RTCA DO 160 documents It is assumed that the end user is familiar with the content of the RTCA DO 160 test standard 9 1 2 2 Test Coverage The comprehensiveness of the tests that can be performed with the 160 option is determined primarily by the capabilities of the power source used Tests that are outside the hardware capabilities of the power source used will not be enabled and cannot be selected For these tests additio
126. 1000 4 11 tests No user controls are provided Refer to Section 9 2 for instructions regarding performing IEC1000 4 11 tests with this equipment 9 4 4 Specifications 9 4 4 1 Input Line Voltage 115 VAC 10 user configurable 230 VAC 10 Line Current lt 0 4 amps at 115 VAC input lt 0 2 amps at 230 VAC input Fuse Rating 0 5 amp slow acting at 115 VAC input 0 25 amp slow acting at 230 VAC input 9 4 4 2 Output Phases IEC 1000 4 11 Test Mode Engaged Voltage Range 100 270 Vrms Regulation lt 5 100 output lt 7 80 output EOS Gen 2 only lt 7 70 output lt 10 40 output Over Undershoot lt 5 into a 100 ohm resistive load Rise Fall Times Between ips amp 5 6 into 100 ohm resistive load measured from 10 to 90 of transition Programmable Output Levels 100 70 40 and 0 of Unom Frequency Range 50 Hz 60 Hz Accuracy 0 02 Phase Range 0 0 360 Accuracy 1 09 Maximum Current at 100 18 5 Arus phase at 80 26 4 Arus phase EOS Gen 2 only i Series iX Series November 2005 201 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments at 70 Unom 23 1 Arms 23 1 Armus phase at 40 Unom 46 2 Arms 46 2 Maximum Peak Current 92 5A 92 5 A phase limited by 5001iX 15003iX Bypass Mode Engaged 9 4 4 3 Controls Indicators Control Indicator Comments ON OFF toggle switch 70 80 Tap Select toggle switch EOS1 second generation
127. 101 102 Steady State Limits for Voltage Including Unbalance and Frequency 1 Balanced Phases 108V to 118V RMS 393 to 407 Hz Apply for 30 mins each test CTAC102 1 2 Unbalanced Phases 108V to 118V RMS 3V Unbalance Apply for 30 mins each test 102 2 103 oltage Phase Difference Phase B 116 to 124 degrees Apply for 30 mins each test 103 104 Voltage Modulation 1 115V Nominal Test 115V RMS 2 5V RMS mod Apply for 10 mins CTAC104 1 2 109V Nominal Test 109V RMS 2 5V RMS mod Apply for 10 mins ICTAC104 2 3 117 Nominal Test 117V RMS 2 5V RMS mod Apply for 10 mins ICTAC104 3 TAC105 Frequency Modulation 1 400 Hz Nominal Test 400 Hz 5 Hz mod Apply for 10 mins ICTAC105 1 2 395 Hz Nominal Test 395 Hz 5 Hz mod Apply for 10 mins ICTAC105 2 3 05 Hz Nominal Test 05 Hz 5 Hz mod Apply for 10 mins ICTAC105 3 AC106 oltage Distortion Spectrum Requires Additional Equipment AC107 Total Voltage Distortion Voltage Distortion Factor 0 05 Apply for 30 mins 107 108 DC Voltage Component 1 Positive DC Offset 115V RMS 10V DC Apply for 30 mins 108 1 Negative DC Offset 115V RMS 10V DC Apply for 30 mins 108 2 109 Normal Voltage Transients 180V RMS to 80V RMS 1 Overvoltage Transients Peak voltage 180V RMS Table TAC109 3 AA GG 109 1 2 Undervoltage Transients Low voltage 80V RMS Table TAC109 3 HH LL 109 2 3 Combined Transient 180V RMS to 80V RMS
128. 12 Table IV Figure 18 not supported by the 704 option These tests require the use of additional external equipment Initial Setup Nominal parameters for the AC Power source are as follows Output Voltage 115V L N Output Frequency 400 Hz Nominal parameters for the DC Power source are as follows Output Voltage 28V or 270V L N A setting outside these nominal values will disable the test and will prevent access to its Menu Screens Revision The MIL704 option defaults to Revision E The System is capable of performing 9 8 1 4 Revision D test by changing the selection to Revision D All Revision D tests be performed except for the 270V DC TRANSIENT and ABNORMAL where Revision E level are used despite the revision selection All levels and timing in this document refers to Revision E For Revision D refer to MIL STD 704D date 9 30 1980 Tests Performed 9 8 1 4 1 STEADY STATE 242 AC Mode Steady State Voltage and Frequency test Waveform Distortion test Voltage Modulation test Voltage Unbalance test Phase Unbalance test ON ss co IM c Frequency Modulation test November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 7 Transient Voltage low and high test 8 Transient Frequency low and high test DC Mode 1 Steady State Voltage test 2 Ripple test 9 8 1 4 2 EMERGENCY TEST AC Mode 1 Emergency Voltage minimum and maximum test 2 Emergency Frequency minimum and m
129. 16 6 1 3 Momentary Power Modulation Interruptions 16 5 1 4 Momentary Power d X X 166 14 Normal Surge Interruptions Voltage Normal Surge Engine Starting festes 16 6 2 1 Abnormal Voltage ransients 165 16 Normal Frequency 16 6 2 2 LOW Voltage N A Variations Conditions Voltage DC Momentary Under 16 5 1 8 Voltage Distortion gt BEEN 16 6 2 4 APNOrmal Voltage Surge 16 5 2 1 Abnormal Voltage X X and Frequency Momentary Under 165231 Abnormal Surge Voltage Abnormal 16 5 2 3 2 Frequency Transient Table 9 18 160 Option Test Coverage 230VAC 14VDC Note that the iX Series does not support 800 Hz testing at more than 150Vrms Consequently all 230V nominal tests for A NF and A WF categories are not supported Some A CF tests requiring more than 300V output are also unavailable due to hardware limitations of the iX Series power source Table ZDC 152 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual RevZ 9 1 2 3 Specific Test Limitations and Discrepancies California Instruments While every effort has been made to provide comprehensive coverage of the RTCA DO 160 tests some limitations apply largely due to hardware limitations of the iX power source such as available programming resolution or rounding The following table lists specific implementation issues by test number The deviation from the standard requirement is shown in the Actual setting column The reason for
130. 16 6 2 2 Voltage Conditions dc OV over 10 minutes EBDC14 LVABN 16 6 2 3 Momentary Undervoltage dc ov Apply for 7 seconds each test EBDC14 VUND 16 6 2 4 Abnormal Transients 16 6 2 4d Abnormal Voltage Surge 30VDC Figure 16 4 apply at 10 intervalsEBDC14 AVSUR For more comprehensive DC tests refer to section 9 1 2 10 November 2005 i Series iX Series 177 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Table ZDC14 Test No Section Subject Test Limits Comment File Ref 16 6 1 Normal Operating Conditions dc 16 6 1 1b Voltage Average Value dc 11 0V to 15 2V Apply for 30 mins each test EZDC14 VAVG 16 6 1 Emergency Operating Conditions dc 16 6 1 1b 3 Voltage Average Value dc 9 0V Apply for 30 mins each test EZDC14 VAVGEMER 16 6 1 Normal Operating Conditions dc 16 6 1 2 Ripple Voltage dc p p 0 3V to 8V Freq 10Hz to 200Hz Figure 18 2 EZDC14 VRIP 16 6 1 3b Momentary Power Interruptions dc Table 16 3 Equipment with Digital Circuits EZDC14 PINTB 16 6 1 3 Momentary Power Interruptions dc Other Equipment EZDC14 PINTC 16 6 1 4 Normal Transients dc 16 6 1 4b Normal Voltage Surge dc 25V to 6V EZDC14 NVSUR 16 6 1 5 Engine Starting Under Voltage Operation dc min Slew for 35 sec EZDC14 VENG 16 6 2 Abnormal Operating Conditions dc 16 6 2 1 Voltage Steady State dc 10 3V to 16 1V Apply
131. 20 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Figure 9 41 Example Connection With MODE LOAD SOURCE INTERFACE B CIN N N 115V 230v INPUT POWER PHASE PHASE B PHASE NEUTRAL OUTPUT CLK LCK 488 SYSTEM OUTPUT HI LO 3 PHASE INPUT POWER OPTION RS232 5001iX i POWER SOURCE MASTER PHASE 7000 252 1 SYSTEM INTERFACE CABLE CLK LCK IEEE 488 SYSTEM ENSE OUTPUT 2 3 PHASE L3 INPUT POWER OPTION RS232 e gt 80011 1 POWER SOURCE SLAVE PHASE B CLK LEK ENSE IEEE 488 SYSTEM OUTPUT HI LO L1 2 3 PHASE i3 INPUT POWER GND OPTION RS232 u z e e 5001iX i POWER SOURCE SLAVE PHASE C i Series iX Series November 2005 221 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 5 4 Operation 9 5 4 1 9 5 4 2 222 General The Mode iX phase mode controller switches the three outputs from three California Instruments iX series power sources to one or three sets of outputs on the phase mode controller This allows the three power sources to be operated in either three phase or single phase mode with the system output being taken from the phase mode controller This switching is performed automatically
132. 240 VAC INPUT 7000 438 4 5001i 480 VAC INPUT 7000 438 1 5001iX 240 VAC INPUT 7000 438 2 5001iX 480 VAC INPUT CI PART DESCRIPTION VENDOR A1 240V I O PC ASSEMBLY 480V PC ASSEMBLY 240V DC DC POWER MODULE 3001i iX QTY A2 A2 A3 7000 724 1 CURRENT LIMIT PC ASSEMBLY 7000 43 PROGRAMMABLE OSC FRONT PANEL 8 11 THRU 30 ASSY 0 7000 727 1 IEEE 488 BOARD 241183 FAN 6 INCH JD24B2 F1 270199 FUSE 50A 700V AC BOARD Bussman FWP 50A14F F1 270184 FUSE 30A 700V BOARD Bussman KPB30 K1 245217 RELAY ON CHASSIS KUHP 5DT1 24 Potter amp Brumfield 270183 P C FUSES ON DC DC BD F F 10 Bussman PCC 3 Bussman PCC 1 CB1 INPUT CIRCUIT BREAKER 35A 240V 5001i iX 28051 2 INPUT CIRCUIT BREAKER 35A 250V AIRPAX IELK21 3001i iX 28851 1 V 270207 INPUT CIRCUIT BREAKER 15 480 AIRPAX IELHK 1111 1 5001i iX 30431 1 V Table 8 1 Replaceable Parts 7000 732 2 LOGIC BOARD PC ASSEMBLY 5001iX A3 A4 A4 A6 2 A1 B1 CB1 B1 C i Series iX Series November 2005 131 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments CI PART amp DESCRIPTION DC DC POWER ASSY 7000 729 AND 7000 731 270174 1 amp 250 vac quick acting 270174 1 amp 250 vac quick acting F10 270183 3 amp 250 vac quick acting AC POWER ASSY 7000 730 F1 270199 50 amp 700 vac very quick acting 240 VOLT I O ASSY 7000 725 270184 30 amp 700 vac very quick acting 270183 3 amp 250 vac quick
133. 250702 831 0906 851 A2 CLK LCK SENGE OUTPUT HI IEEE 488 SYSTEM NPUT FAN 7 2 La GND OPTION RS232 500 1 iX i Series iX Series November 2005 California Instruments Figure 9 36 Example Connection With 5001iX and EOS 1 115V 230V POWER INPUT HI gt OUTPUT LO L1 L2 3 PHASE L3 POWER INPUT GND 207 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Figure 9 37 Example Connection With Compliance Test System and EOS 1 eS 831 0006 851 TERMINAL BLOCKS INSIDE PACS 1 HI SINGLE PHASE L OUTPUT 551388 588 N Nf E 115v 230v POWER INPUT 7000 262 2 SYSTEM INTERFACE CABLE OMNI 1 18i 115 230 POWER INPUT 208 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z i Series iX Series California Instruments Figure 9 38 15003iX CTS EOS3 LR3 Al LOAD ale aif Hi 115v 230v NER INPUT 250702 831 0806 851 PHASE B NEUTRAL PHASE C PHASE A SOURCE LOAD alale n INTERFACE Fan 0 FaN JA N OMNI 5 18 A B CINININ 115V 2 INPUT PO OUTPUT 488 seME 2 03 PHASE INPUT POWER 00 s OPTION RS232 CLK LOK OUTPUT N N 10 IEEE 488 SYSTEM 7 12 3 PHASE L3 f INPUT POWE
134. 3 05 Hz Nominal Test 405 Hz 5 Hz mod Apply for 10 mins BSAC105 3 SAC106 Voltage Distortion Spectrum Requires Additional Equipment SAC107 Total Voltage Distortion oltage Distortion Factor 0 05 Apply for 30 mins BSAC107 SAC108 DC Voltage Component 1 Positive DC Offset 115V RMS 10V DC Apply for 30 mins BSAC108 1 2 Negative DC Offset 115V RMS 10V DC Apply for 30 mins BSAC108 2 SAC109 Normal Voltage Transients 180V RMS to 80V RMS 1 Overvoltage Transients Peak voltage 180V RMS Table SAC109 3 AA GG BSAC109 1 2 Undervoltage Transients Low voltage 80V RMS Table SAC109 3 HH LL BSAC109 2 3 Combined Transient 180V RMS to 80V RMS Table SAC109 3 BSAC109 3 4 Repetitive Normal Voltage Transient Test 90V RMS to 140V RMS Run transient for 30 mins BSAC109 4 SAC110 Normal Frequency Transients 375 Hz to 425 Hz 1 Overfrequency Transients High Frequency 425 Hz Table SAC110 3 AA DD BSAC110 1 2 Underfrequency Transients Low Frequency 375 Hz Table SAC110 3 EE HH BSAC110 2 3 Combined Transient 975 Hz to 425 Hz Table SAC110 3 II BSAC110 3 SAC201 Power Interrupt for 50 msec Table SAC201 2 A L BSAC201 SAC301 Abnormal Steady State Limits for Voltage and Frequency 100V RMS to 125V RMS 375 Hz to 425 2 Apply for 30 mins BSAC301 SAC302 Abnormal Voltage Transients 45V RMS to 180V RMS 1 Overvoltage Transients Peak voltage 180V RMS Table SAC302 3 AA GG BSAC302 1 2 Undervoltage Transients Low voltage 45 5 Table SAC302 3 HH NN BSAC302 2
135. 3 Connection With MODE Option LOAD SOURCE INTERFACE AIBICINININ 115 230 INPUT POWER PHASE PHASE B PHASE NEUTRAL OUTPUT CLK LCK IEEE 488 SYSTEM OUTPUT HI 10 3 PHASE INPUT POWER OPTION RS232 5001ix i POWER SOURCE MASTER PHASE 7000 262 1 SYSTEM INTERFACE CABLE CLK LEK SENSE OUTPUT A IEE SYSTEM HI LO E 488 3 PHASE INPUT POWER OPTION RS232 5001ix i POWER SOURCE SLAVE PHASE B CLK LCK SENSE OUTPUT IEEE 488 SYSTEM HI LO L1 2 3 PHASE 13 INPUT POWER GND OPTION RS232 50011 1 POWER SOURCE SLAVE PHASE 34 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Figure 3 14 Two Phase 10000 VA System 10002i LK Two Controllers PHASE iiia DUTPUT NEUTRAL CLK LCK OUTPUT HI LO CND INPUT Li 12 13 488 SYSTEM 3 PHASE INPUT POWER OPTION 5252 50011 1 POWER SOURCE PHASE A 250562 CABLE ELK LEK OUTPUT HI LO CND INPUT ul 12 L3 CND 488 SYSTEM 1 12 5 5 L3 INPUT POWER GND
136. 3 1 9 5 3 2 9 5 3 3 9 5 3 4 Unpacking Inspect the unit for any possible shipping damage immediately upon receipt If damage is evident notify the carrier Do not return an instrument to the factory without prior approval Do not destroy the packing container until the unit has been inspected for damage in shipment Power Requirements The Mode iX uses either 115 or 230 VAC to power the control circuits The user may select the desired input voltage using the small range selector card within the IEC input module The selector card may be removed from the input module by removing the line cord sliding the plastic window to the left and extracting the card Note that attempting to operate the Mode iX from an input range that does not match the actual AC power voltage may cause permanent damage to the unit The selector card is marked 100 220 on one side and 120 240 on the opposite side Mode iX may be operated from a 115 volt line by selecting the 120 volt range It may be operated from 230 volts by selecting the 240 volt range The 100 volt and 220 volt ranges are not active The selected range is the one that is marked on the upper left side of the selector card as the card is slid into the IEC 320 module The power source to the Mode iX must provide protective earth grounding Mechanical Installation The Mode iX has been designed for rack mounting in a standard 19 inch rack The unit should be supported from the bottom with a
137. 3 PHASE INPUT POWER 3 PHASE INPUT POWER L1 is Series Series 5001ix i POWER SOURCE PHASE C November 2005 CND 3 PHASE INPUT POWER 229 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Figure 9 44 Schematic Showing OMNI 1 37i and1 37iJ Connected to 5001iX System 7000 262 2 SYSTEM INTERFACE CABLE OUTPUT INTERFACE SOURCE LINE SOURCE NEUTRAL OMNI 1 37 OMNI 1 37 115 230 POWER INPUT BUTPUT L1 u 3 PHASE LI INPUT POWER OND OPTION RS232 50011X POWER SOURCE PHASE 230 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Figure 9 45 Schematic Showing OMNI 3 37i Connected to 30003iX System 7000 262 3 SYSTEM INTERFACE CABLE OUTPUT LEK ou INTERFACE IEEE 488 SYSTEM SOURCE LINE SOURCE NEUTRAL alalele elet IN N n N N N 3 PHASE INPUT POWER ONNI 3 37 OPTION RS232 50 1ix i POWER SOURCE MASTER 115v 230v 7000 267 1 PHASE POWER INPUT SYSTEM INTERFACE ABLE A3 CLK LEK SENSE GENE o ow A 10 INPUT 12 5 END IEEE 488 SYSTEN 2 3 PHASE INPUT POWER OPTION RS232 5001 1 POWER SOURCE SLAVE PHASE B 4 a 2 a LEK IEEE 488 SYSTEM QUTPUT 10 GND
138. 302 3 AA GG FTAC302 1 2 Undervoltage Transients Low voltage 45V RMS Table TAC302 3 HH NN FTAC302 2 3 Combined Transient 45V RMS to 180V RMS Table TAC302 3 FTAC302 3 TAC303 Abnormal Frequency Transients 320 Hz to 480 Hz Table TAC303 3 AA EE FTAC303 401 Emergency Steady State Limits for Voltage and Frequency Perform Test TAC102 TAC501 No Tests N A to AC Utilization Equipment TAC601 Power Failure Three Phase for 7 seconds Table TAC601 2 A D 601 i Series Series November 2005 271 User Manual Rev 2 California Instruments Test No Section Subject Test Limits Comment File Ref TAC602 Phase and Two Phase Power Failures 1 One Phase Power Failures for 7 seconds Table TAC602 2 A F FTAC602 1 2 Two Phase Power Failures OV for 30 mins Table TAC602 2 G J FTAC602 2 TAC603 Phase Reversal Phase reversal done physically FTAC603 Table SVF Test No Section Subject Test Limits Comment File Ref SVF101 Load and Current Harmonic Measurements 115V RMS 360 800 Hz FSVF101 SVF102 Steady State Limits for Voltage and Frequency 108 118V RMS 360 800 Hz Apply for 30 mins each test FSVF102 SVF103 No Test Done so numbers coincide SVF104 Voltage Modulation 400 1 115V RMS 400 Hz nominal settings 115V RMS 2 5V RMS mod Apply for 10 mins FSVF104 400 1 400 2 109V RMS 400 Hz nom
139. 4 Table TAC109 1 3 a Abort PEPE Uten 10 Options M Test Status Execute all steps r Auto acquire EUT Complete test 000 00 00 48 000 00 03 35 Single Step Data after execution Loop on Step sten Phes EC Active step 000 00 00 07 000 00 00 25 dv das ow 0 peggene Be MS704F Normal Voltage Transients gt Fslew vot A Func A Dwell Loop tink Commet 30 01 d Nominal Settings 0 01 5 2 Preset Voltage Table TAC109 3 Delay between transients for 5 sec 3 Preset Voltage Table TAC109 3 BB Delay between transients for 5 sec 2 Preset Voltage Table 109 3 Delay between transients for 5 sec 3 Preset Voltage Table 109 3 DD 865 3847 MAX Delay between transients for 5 sec 2 Preset Voltage User Data Tested by Test department EUT M Ial Ml Temp 5T Hum 95 Comment Test Site Press Executing test steps 2 through 4 of 31 Figure 9 64 704 Option Test Control Screen The Test Control tab in the 704 test window is used to display and execute a selected 704 test This tab contains the following controls and displays Control Display Description Execution Controls The Start and Abort buttons are used to start and stop the selected test step The execution mode that will be used i
140. 5 Voltage Surge POWER INTERRUPT 40 Refer to section POWER INTERRUPT i Series iX Series November 2005 147 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 1 1 6 2 Abnormal Test From the DO 160 MENU scroll to the ABNORMAL DC entry using the up and down cursor keys Press the ENTER key to select the ABNORMAL screen The screen will appear as shown Figure 9 12 DO 166D ABNORMAL DC 1 VOLT LOW VOLT MIN VOLT DROP Figure 9 12 Abnormal State The Abnormal Test has the following tests VOLT MIN VOLT MAX VOLT LOW VOLT DROP 5 VOLT SURGE The above tests can be selected by scrolling to the highlighted selection using the up and down key and the ENTER key to start the selected test ON VOLT MIN This test will change the output voltage from 28V or 14V to 20 5V or 10V The test will last for 30 minutes The lt key backspace will terminate the test at any time VOLT MAX This test will change the output voltage from 28V or 14V to 32 2V or 16V The test will last for 30 minutes The lt key backspace will terminate the test at any time VOLT LOW This test applies for category B equipment This test will change the output voltage to the voltage minimum for one minute The voltage will decay linearly to zero voltage in a ten minute period before returning to its nominal voltage VOLT DROP This test will change the output to 12V from 28V or to 6V from 14V for seven seconds The output voltage will
141. 5 251 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Prior to the test a range change may take place if the power source is set at the low voltage range Note See Section 9 8 1 7 2 under HIGH VOLTAGE The lt key backspace will terminate the test at any time Note A range change will result in momentary loss of power to the EUT If this is not acceptable the power source must be left in high range at all times UNDER VOLTAGE This test will change the output voltage for the selected phase in the following sequence 1 28V system e OV for 7sec e 20V for 93sec 2 270V system e OV for 7sec 240V for 93sec The lt key backspace will terminate the test at any time 9 8 1 8 4 Emergency Test 252 From the MIL704 DC MENU scroll to the EMERGENCY DC entry using the up and down cursor keys Figure 9 62 Press the ENTER key to start the EMERGENCY TEST MIL7 4 DC MENU SION TRANSIENT STEADY STATE ABNORMAL Figure 9 62 Emergency Test VOLTAGE This test will change the output voltage for the selected phase in the following sequence 1 28V system e 18V for 1 minute e 29V for 1 minute e 28V for 1 minute 2 270V system e 250V for 1 minute e 280V for 1 minute e 270V for 1 minute The key backspace will terminate the test at any time November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 8 2 Option 704 MIL STD 704 rev A B C amp F Tests Software Us
142. 5 sec 407Hz for 4 sec LOW FREQUENCY This test will change the output frequency in the following sequence e 375Hz for 1 sec e 380Hz for 4 sec e 390Hz for 5 sec e 393 2 for 4 9 8 1 7 3 TEST From the MIL704 main menu Figure 9 53 scroll to the EMERGENCY AC entry using the up and down cursor keys Press the ENTER key to select the EMERGENCY screens The screen will appear as shown in Figure 9 56 EMERGENCY RC TEST ULTHG FREQUENCY PREVIOUS SCREEN Figure 9 56 Emergency Menu The EMERGENCY SCREEN has the following tests 1 VOLTAGE 2 FREQUENCY The above tests can be selected by scrolling to the highlighted selection using the up and down key and the ENTER key to start the selected test VOLTAGE This test will change the output voltage in the following sequence e 108V for 1 minute e 118V for 1 minute e 115V for 1 minute The lt key backspace will terminate the test at any time FREQUENCY This test will change the output frequency in the following sequence e 393Hz for 1 minute e 407Hz for 1 minute e 400 2 for 1 minute The key backspace will terminate the test at any time i Series iX Series November 2005 247 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 8 1 7 4 ABNORMAL TEST From the MIL704 main menu Figure 9 53 scroll to the ABNORMAL AC entry using the up and down cursor keys Press the ENTER key to select the ABNORMAL screens The screen will appear as
143. 50 user defined waveforms A waveform group can only be loaded at power up To change groups you must change this field to the desired new group and cycle the power to the AC source or issure a command over one bus Sets the clock source used at power up Available settings are Stand Alone STAND MASTER and SLAVE Series only Sets the phase mode at power up Available options are determined by the presence of the phase mode option If the phase mode option is installed available options are single phase mode ONE three phase mode THREE or last used phase mode LAST If the phase mode option is not installed this field is either fiXed to ONE or THREE November 2005 71 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 4 2 11 4 LIMIT SETUP screen 72 LIMIT SETUP VOLTAGE X 3688 8U FREQ LO 16 88Hz CUR LIMIT 111A FREG HI 588 8Hz PHASE C 2 Figure 4 24 LIMIT SETUP menu The limit setup screen is not a menu but only serves to inform the user of the hardware capabilities of the AC source The cursor can be moved to any of the fields in this screen but none of these fields can be changed The following information is provided on this screen Entry Description VOLTAGE Maximum AC rms or DC voltage available in the high voltage range CUR LIMIT Maximum AC rms current limit available in the low voltage range FREQ LO Lowest possible fundamental frequency that can be programmed FREQ HI Highest poss
144. 5V RMS 2 5V RMS mod Apply for 10 mins 104 1 2 109V Nominal Test 109V RMS 2 5V RMS mod Apply for 10 mins BTAC104 2 3 117V Nominal Test 117V RMS 2 5V RMS mod Apply for 10 mins BTAC104 3 TAC105 Frequency Modulation 1 400 Hz Nominal Test 1400 Hz 5 Hz mod Apply for 10 mins BTAC105 1 2 395 Hz Nominal Test 395 Hz 5 Hz mod Apply for 10 mins BTAC105 2 3 405 Hz Nominal Test 405 Hz 5 Hz mod Apply for 10 mins BTAC105 3 TAC106 Voltage Distortion Spectrum Requires Additional Equipment TAC107 Total Voltage Distortion Voltage Distortion Factor 0 05 Apply for 30 mins BTAC107 108 DC Voltage Component 1 Positive DC Offset 115V RMS 10V DC for 30 mins BTAC108 1 2 Negative DC Offset 115V RMS 10V DC Apply for 30 mins BTAC108 2 109 Normal Voltage Transients 180V RMS to 80V RMS 1 Overvoltage Transients Peak voltage 180V RMS Table TAC109 3 AA GG BTAC109 1 2 Undervoltage Transients Low voltage 80V RMS able TAC109 3 HH LL BTAC109 2 3 Combined Transient 180V RMS to 80V RMS Table TAC109 3 MM BTAC109 3 4 Repetitive Normal Voltage Transient Test 90V RMS to 140V RMS Run transient for 30 mins 109 4 110 Normal Frequency Transients 375 Hz to 425 Hz 1 Overfrequency Transients High Frequency 425 Hz Table TAC110 3 AA DD 110 1 2 Underfrequency Transients Low Frequency 375 Hz Table TAC110 3 BTAC110 2 3 Combined Transient 375 Hz to 425 Hz Table TAC110 3 II BTAC110 3 TAC201 Power Int
145. 6 1 Normal Operating Conditions dc 16 6 1 2 Ripple Voltage dc 0 6V to 1 6V Freq 10Hz to 200Hz Figure 18 2 EADC28 VRIP 16 6 1 30 Momentary Power Interruptions dc Table 16 3 Equipment with Digital Circuits EADC28 PINTB 16 6 1 3c Momentary Power Interruptions dc Other Equipment EADC28 PINTC 16 6 1 4 Normal Transients dc 16 6 1 4b Normal Voltage Surge dc 47V to 17V EADC28 NVSUR 16 6 2 Abnormal Operating Conditions dc 16 6 2 1 Voltage Steady State dc 20 5 to 32 2V Apply for 5 mins each test EADC28 VABN 16 6 2 3 Momentary Undervoltage 12V Apply for 7 seconds each test EADC28 VUND 16 6 2 4 Abnormal Transients 16 6 2 4c Abnormal Voltage Surge 46 3V Figure 16 4 apply at 10 sec intervalsEADC28 AVSUR For more comprehensive DC Ripple tests refer to section 9 1 2 10 172 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Table BDC28 Test No Section Subject Test Limits Comment File Ref 16 6 1 Normal Operating Conditions 16 6 1 1b Voltage Average Value dc 22 0V to 30 3V Apply for 30 mins each test EBDC28 VAVG 16 6 1 Emergency Operating Conditions dc 16 6 1 1b 3 Voltage Average Value dc 18 0V Apply for 30 mins each test EBDC28 VAVGEMER 16 6 1 Normal Operating Conditions dc 16 6 1 2 Ripple Voltage dc p p 1 6V Freq 200Hz Figure 18 2 EBDC28_VRIP 16 6 1 3b Momentary Power Interruptions dc Table 1
146. 6 3 Equipment with Digital Circuits EBDC28_PINTB 16 6 1 3c Momentary Power Interruptions dc Other Equipment EBDC28_PINTC 16 6 1 4 Normal Transients dc 16 6 1 4b Normal Voltage Surge dc 47V to 17V EBDC28 NVSUR Engine Starting Under Voltage Operation 16 6 1 5 10V min Slew for 35 sec EBDC28 VENG 16 6 2 Abnormal Operating Conditions dc 16 6 2 1 oltage Steady State dc 20 5V to 32 2V Apply for 5 mins each test EBDC28 VABN 16 6 2 2 Voltage Conditions dc OV over 10 minutes EBDC28 LVABN 16 6 2 3 Momentary Undervoltage 12V Apply for 7 seconds each test EBDC28 VUND 16 6 2 4 Abnormal Transients ac Figure 16 4 apply at 10 sec 16 6 2 4d Abnormal Voltage Surge GOVDC intervals EBDC28 AVSUR For more comprehensive DC Ripple tests refer to section 9 1 2 10 i Series iX Series November 2005 173 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Table ZDC28 Test No Section Subject Test Limits Comment File Ref 16 6 1 Normal Operating Conditions dc 16 6 1 1b Voltage Average Value dc 02 0 to 30 3V Apply for 30 mins each test EZDC28 VAVG 16 6 1 Emergency Operating Conditions dc 16 6 1 1b 3 Voltage Average Value dc 18 0V Apply for 30 mins each test EZDC28 VAVGEMER 16 6 1 Normal Operating Conditions dc 16 6 1 2 Ripple Voltage dc p p 0 6V to 1 6
147. 60 16 5 1 7 1 Phs Voltage DC Content ac 0 1VDC 650Hz nom Apply for 30 mins each test EANF115 DCOFS1P650 16 5 1 7 Phs Voltage DC Content ac 0 1TVDC 360Hz nom Apply for 30 mins each test EANF115 DCOFS3P360 16 5 1 7 3 Phs Voltage DC Content ac 0 1VDC 650Hz nom Apply for 30 mins each test EANF115 DCOFS3P650 16 5 1 8 Voltage Distortion ac 8 2 0 VTHD Clipped Sine 360Hz Apply for 30 mins each test EANF115 VTHD360 16 5 1 8 Voltage Distortion 8 2 0 VTHD Clipped Sine 650Hz Apply for 30 mins each test EANF115 VTHD650 16 5 2 Abnormal Operating Conditions ac 16 5 2 1b 1 Phs Voltage 97V to 134V 360Hz Apply for 5 mins each test EANF115 VABN1P360 16 5 2 1b 1 Phs Voltage 97V to 134V 650Hz Apply for 5 mins each test EANF115 VABN1P650 16 5 2 1 3 Phs Voltage ac 97V to 134V 360Hz Apply for 5 mins each test EANF115 VABN3P360 16 5 2 1 3 Phs Voltage O7V to 134V 650Hz Apply for 5 mins each test EANF115 VABN3P650 16 5 2 2 Momentary Undervoltage 10V and 60V 360Hz Apply for 7 seconds each test EANF115 VUND360 168 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z 16 5 2 2 Momentary Undervoltage ac 10V and 60V 650Hz California Instruments Apply for 7 seconds each test EANF115 VUND650 16 5 2 3 Abnormal Transients ac 16 5 2 3 1 Abnormal Voltage surge 148V to 180V 360Hz Figure 16 5 apply at 10 sec intervals EAN
148. 8 Cf Figure B Table 1 1 N 8 n a D6PO APP1TransientsB 8 28 6 2 9 Cf Figure B n a D6PO APP1TransientsB 9 i Series iX Series November 2005 315 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Test Subject Test Limits DO160 Ref Comments Test File 29 6 2 10 Table 1 1 N 10 n a D6P0 APP1TransientsB N10 30 6 2 11 Cf Figure B Table 1 1 N 11 n a D6PO APP1TransientsB N11 31 7 Square wave DC load variations Fig 7 A and 7 B n a Apply Fig 7 A or 7 B depending on distribution bus bar 32 7 1 Square wave DC load variations Figure 7 A n a A380 Version D7P0 DCFIG7A A380 33 7 1 Square wave DC load variations Figure 7 A n a Other Airbus D7PO DCFIG7A AIRB 34 7 2 Square wave DC load variations Figure 7 B n a A380 Version D7PO DCFIG7B A380 35 7 2 Square wave DC load variations Figure 7 B n a Other Airbus D7PO DCFIG7B AIRB 36 8 Ripple Voltage 16 5 2 2 Requires additional equipment 316 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Table E Test No Subject Test Limits DO160 Ref Comments Test File 1 2 1 1 Maximum Voltage Norm and Emer 32V DC 16 5 2 1 b 1 E1P0 NORM MAXV 3 1 2 24V DC 16 5 2 1 b 2 E1P0 NORM MINV 4 1 3 Minimum voltage Emergency 18 5V DC 16 5 2 1 b 3 E1P0 EMER MINV operation 5 2 Voltage Surge Figure 13 6 2 1 Normal Transients 36V for 100ms 16 5 2 4 b Use specified limi
149. 8115 4 18v00 KBD ACK 3 KBD ACK F Ove OUT av COMMON 9 17 5 5 DONT 24 24 ONLY S BV COMMONS 9A GR COMMON AY 18 12118 t E 8 25 20 1260 520 BV COMMON 2 98 98 2 8V COMMON 2 19 9 19 8V COMMON 2 7 7 OUT ON 25 26 QUT ON 60 520V OV N fac ge mr EO 2 p 4 f UT O SHUNT TRIP 2 9C COMMON Z COMMON 2 21 21 21 BV COMMON 2 H 3 com 27 3 PISA SHUNT Vrav LOGIC 12 12 3184 LOGIC OSC RIN 23 53 23 RIN 9 3 D COM 28 28 5 UNT 11 LOGG 128 123 18V LOGIC 24 HEH 10 gt 28 38 3280 1965 LOGIG M FAULT 25 25 25 M FAULT 1 n 87 da 35 JG OMMON 26 COMMON 2 12 48V 34 34 OVERTEMP TEMP 13 13 INHIBIT IT 15 15 PARALLEL PARALLEL 17 17 E Hes 18 18 SHUT DOWN SHUT DOWN 18 15082 m PON Sey DOM REM ON 20 130 P30 150KHZ SYNC RE SENSE COM ANP SENSE COM PERS 21 1 j 260 520V RIN 2 22 RE 2 EXT SENSE 3 EXT SEN SER CLK 3 ene y 270 SER N IEEE 488 i SNC XT SYNG LO CPB ACK 5 5 n bes eee lee EEE 5 EXT SY EXT SYNG 8 ii 5 m FUCKER ENPRSS 7 8 5 29 SENSE WERE 9 5 ES 53 25 tus sense 10 10 8 3 z 5 19 EXT SENSE RELAY C CURR 4 C CURR HI BS 12 12 808 8 8 17 CURR Hi 33 CURR HI S0 17 17 RS 232 g 2 CURR
150. A to the right of the power readings Inrush Current A Displays peak current detected per phase in Amps since last measurement was taken November 2005 163 User Manual Rev Z 164 California Instruments Sub Tab Description Power Factor Displays power factor for each phase If one or more phases is outside the allowable limits Fail indication is displayed Current Distortion Displays Total Current Distortion for each phase in percent of fundamental current No limits are applied although the user can set a maximum limit for this parameter if needed in the 0160 Distortion Limits ini setting file by adding Ithd n n in either PHASES 1 or PHASES 3 sections The bottom half of the Parameters tab contains user controls and a text entry field for entering observations regarding the EUT operation Test Frequency The frequency selection drop down control is active only for Dropdown control Variable Frequency tables and can be used to set the frequency at which data from the EUT is to be acquired For all other modes it is fixed to either 400 Hz or DC Acquire Data at all This button causes data to be acquired at all frequencies frequencies available in the Test Frequency Dropdown control For all constant frequency this button functions like the Update Meas Button located above the sub tabs Abort Meas This button aborts measurements in progress In case of
151. ABD0100 1 8 document The notes in the right hand column indicate tests that are either not directly supported or require additional external test equipment Test tables are listed by power groups A through E i Series iX Series November 2005 309 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Table A Test No Subject Test Limits DO160 Ref Comments Test File 1 2 1 1 Voltage each phase 104V to 122V RMS 16 5 1 1 b 1 test 1 2 3 Apply at 430Hz and 370Hz A1P1 NSSVF 3 1 2 105 5V to 120 5V 16 5 1 1 b 2 test 1 to 5 Apply at 430Hz and 370Hz A1P3 NSSVF RMS 4 2 Abnormal Steady State Voltage 5 2 1 Voltage each phase 96V to 130V RMS 16 5 3 1 b Apply for 30 mins iso 5 mins A2P1 ABN SSV 6 22 Average voltage 3 phases 96V to 130V RMS 16 5 3 1 Apply for 30 mins iso 5 mins A2P3 ABN SSV 7 3 Voltage Surge Fig 1 8 3 1 Normal Transients Pod for 30ms 71V for 16 5 1 5 1 b Use specified limit iso DO160 A3PO NORMVSURGE1 ms 9 3 2 Normal Transients 156V for 50ms 80V for 16 5 1 5 1 b Use specified limit iso DO160 A3PO NORMVSURGE2 30ms 10 3 3 Normal Transients 148V for 100ms 86V 16 5 1 5 1 b Use specified limit iso DO160 A3PO NORMVSURGES3 for 50ms 11 3 4 Normal Transients 140V for 200ms 16 5 1 5 1 b No undervoltage test required A3PO NORMVSURGE4 12 4 Voltage Surge Fig 1 13 4 1 Abnormal Transients 180V for 100ms 148V 16 5 3 3 1 b A4P0 ABNVSURGE1 for 1 se
152. AC power to unit 2 Use two people to prevent injury ALLOW CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE Capacitors in the power source may hold a hazardous electrical charge even if the power source has been disconnected from the mains supply Allow capacitors to discharge to a safe voltage before servicing internal circuits or touching exposed pins of mains supply connectors November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments i Series iX Series November 2005 iii User Manual Rev Z California Instruments WARRANTY INFORMATION CALIFORNIA INSTRUMENTS CORPORATION warrants each instrument manufactured by them to be free from defects in material and workmanship for period of one year from the date of shipment to the original purchaser Excepted from this warranty are fuses and batteries that carry the warranty of their original manufacturer where applicable CALIFORNIA INSTRUMENTS will service replace or adjust any defective part or parts free of charge when the instrument is returned freight prepaid and when examination reveals that the fault has not occurred because of misuse abnormal conditions of operation user modification or attempted user repair Equipment repaired beyond the effective date of warranty or when abnormal usage has occurred will be charged at applicable rates CALIFORNIA INSTRUMENTS will submit an estimate for such charges before commencing repair if so requested SERVICE PROCEDURE If a fault
153. Appendix 1 Figure 1 B Table 1 1 N 2 3 Repeat transient at 800Hz C6P0 APP1TransientsB N3 800 33 6 2 4 Appendix 1 Figure 1 B Table 1 1 N 2 4 Repeat transient at 800Hz C6P0 APP1TransientsB 4 800 34 6 2 5 Appendix 1 Figure 1 B Table 1 1 N 2 5 Repeat transient at 800Hz C6P0 APP1TransientsB 5 800 35 6 2 6 Appendix 1 Figure 1 B Table 1 1 N 2 6 Repeat transient at 800Hz C6P0 APP1TransientsB 6 800 36 6 2 7 Appendix 1 Figure 1 B Repeat transient at 800Hz C6P0 APP1TransientsB 7 800 37 6 2 8 Appendix 1 Figure 1 B Table 1 1 N 2 8 Repeat transient at 800Hz C6P0 APP1TransientsB 8 800 38 6 2 9 Appendix 1 Figure 1 B Table 1 1 N 2 9 Repeat transient at 800Hz C6P0 APP1TransientsB 9 800 39 6 2 10 Appendix 1 Figure 1 B Table 1 1 10 Repeat transient at 800Hz C6PO APP1TransientsB N10 800 40 6 2 11 Appendix 1 Figure 1 B Table 1 1 N 11 Repeat transient at 800Hz C6P0 APP1TransientsB N11 800 41 6 3 1 Appendix 1 Table 2 Table2 N 7I Run transient at 360Hz and 800Hz C6PO APP1TransientsT2 1 42 6 3 1 Appendix 1 Table 2 Table2 N 11 Run transient at 360Hz 800 2 C6PO APP1TransientsT2 Il 43 6 3 1 Appendix 1 Table 2 Table 2 111 Run transient at 360Hz and 800Hz C6PO APP1TransientsT2 III 44 6 3 1 Appendix 1 Table 2 Table 2 N IV Run transient at 360Hz and 800Hz C6PO APP1TransientsT2 IV 45 6 3 1 Appendix 1 Table 2 Table2 N V Run transient at 360Hz and 800Hz C6PO APP1TransientsT2 V 46 6 3 1 Appendix 1 Table 2 Table 2 N
154. C 1 Eb MIN VOLT FREG MAX PREVIOUS SCREEN VOLT UNBALANCE Figure 9 8 Emergency Screen The EMERGENCY SCREEN has the following tests 1 VOLT FREQ MIN 2 VOLT FREQ MAX 3 VOLT UNBALANCE The above tests can be selected by scrolling to the highlighted selection using the up and down key and the ENTER key to start the selected test 142 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments VOLT MIN Standard Group RTCA Group1 Group2 Group3 Voltage 19 100 104 104 104 30 101 5 105 5 105 5 105 5 Frequency 360 360 360 360 Table 9 7 Emergency Voltage and Frequency Minimum Standard Group RTCA Group1 Group2 Group3 Voltage 19 122 122 122 122 30 120 5 120 5 120 5 120 5 Frequency 440 440 650 800 Table 9 8 Emergency Voltage and Frequency Maximum This test is test will set the voltage and frequency for a level defined by Table 9 7 The test will last for 30 minutes The test will be repeated using the voltage from Table 9 8 and frequency from Table 9 7 The lt key backspace will terminate the test at any time VOLT FREQ MAX This test will set the voltage and frequency for a level defined by Table 9 8 The test will last for 30 minutes The test will be repeated using the voltage from Table 9 7 and frequency from Table 9 8 The lt key backspace will terminate the test at any time VOLT UNBALANCE Standard Group
155. D0 166C 1800 4 11 PREUIOUS SCREEN Figure 9 46 Applications Screen November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Scroll to the OMNI OPTION entry using the up and down courser key Press the ENTER key The following MENU will appear as shown in Figure 9 47 OMNI OPTION CONTROL MODE BYPHSSEL PREWIOUS SCREEN Figure 9 47 OMNI Control Screen Scroll to the MODE entry using the up and down courser key USE the Shuttle Knob to engage the OMNI The display will indicate that the OMNI mode as shown in Figure 9 48 OMNI OPTION CONTROL ENGHGEL PREVIOUS SCREEN Figure 9 48 OMNI Control Screen Note The output of the AC source will drop for about 50 ms when the OMNI MODE changes state To Bypass the OMNI turn the Shuttle Knob counterclockwise 9 6 6 4 Programmed Control The FLICKER BYPASS mode may be remotely programmed by the power source if the power source and OMNI are configured for this function A system interface cable must be connected between the OMNI and the power source to carry the control signal to the OMNI When configured for programmed control the OMNI may not be controlled by the front panel FLICKER BYPASS switch Refer to the power source manual for details on programming instructions i Series iX Series November 2005 233 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 6 6 5 Control Configuration Manual versus programmable control
156. DC mode Available test settings are 14VDC or 28VDC nominal category A Z or category B and phase output selection For single phase iX systems only phase A can be selected The test pattern is fixed per section 18 3 1 with a ripple frequency range from 16 Hz to 5000 Hz per Figure 18 2 Cat A Z or 18 3 Cat B The frequency slew rate is 30 minutes for each decade covered or one hour and 15 minutes total Tests can be aborted sooner if needed E DO160 DC Ripple Test 18 3 1 Category Phase Pwr Output amp 280Vdc 6 ARZ B Off C 14 Vde B re Test Status Complete test 000 00 01 09 000 01 15 00 B Output ON Transient in progress polling status Figure 9 15 DO160E DC Hipple Test Window November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 1 2 11 160 EUT Performance Measurements RTCA 00160 Test Tables Ele Edit Run Hep Pw Output gt Test Selection Test Conto EUT Performance Measurements Ew Bint Phs A PhsB Volt RMS V J nsan oof oof 3998 RE RE ooms oof 00 Taava App Power oo o oo 00 00 Ish Coret A 00 Pass Fail Power Factor oof oz o20 Pas Curent Distortion 000 0 00 0 00 000 med Daten le Observations User Data Tested by Test department EUT Temp 2552 Hum Test Site Pe
157. Delay after This field sets the time delay between transients in seconds each Default value is 1 second Note that there is a small amount of transient overhead from the GUI program as it reprograms the power Source between transients This time is small compared to the 1 second delay itself however Repeat Sets the number of times each transient is run Default value is 1 For most situations this value should be set to 1 Retrig If repeat count greater than 1 is used and external trigger source is selected setting this check box will require only a single November 2005 307 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Control Display Description trigger input Subsequent repeats will trigger automatically Freq F1 lt ta Sets the frequency before the transient ta for Table 2 type transients Normally this value is set automatically per Appendix A but the operator can change it in this field Freq F2 tb Sets the frequency after the transient tb for Table 2 type transients Normally this value is set automatically per Appendix A but the operator can change it in this field Transient permutations data entry grid Table This data grid displays the T1 T2 and T3 values used for each permutation of the table values from Appendix These values are normally loaded automatically when selecting a table number using the Type No drop down list It is possible however t
158. E mode SET mode 4 3 2 Slewing Output Values with the Knob in IMMEDIATE Mode The default mode of operation is an immediate mode in which changes to output parameters made with the knob or the entry keypad are immediately reflected at the output To change the output voltage Counter Clock Clock wise v PROGRRM 1 5 VOLT RANGE wise INCR 68 8Hz CURR LIMIT PREVIOUS SCREEN MORE 1 Place the cursor on the VOLTAGE entry 2 Rotate the knob clockwise to increase the value counterclockwise to decrease the value These changes take effect immediately To change the output frequency Counter Clock Clock wise wise v INCR v PROGRAM 1 DES VOLTAGE 12 VAC VOLT RANGE Ll 3 OHZ CURR LIMIT MORE 1 Place the cursor on the FREQ entry 2 Rotate the knob clockwise to increase the value counterclockwise to decrease the value These changes take effect immediately i Series iX Series November 2005 77 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 4 3 3 Change Output Values with the Knob in SET Mode The SET mode of operation is a mode in which changes to output parameters made with the knob or the entry keypad do not affect the output until the ENTER key is pressed The AC source is put in this SET mode by pressing the SET key To change the output voltage Counter Clock Clock _ wise wise v Y PROGRAM 1 DESC NER VOLT RANGE 6 Hz CURR LIMIT PREVIOUS SCREEN MORE Press the SET
159. EC 61000 3 3 Flicker testing The OUTPUT IMPEDANCE menu can be accessed from MENU 3 The following fields are available in this menu Entry Description RESISTIVE Sets the resistive component of the output impedance This value can be set from 17 mQ to 1000 The lower limits for the resistive and inductive components may vary on different AC source models and are set as part of the source calibration INDUCTIVE Sets the inductive component of the output impedance This value can be set from 230 uH to 1000 uH The lower limits for the resistive and inductive components may vary on different AC source models and are set as part of the source calibration SET MINIMUM Selecting this field and pressing the ENTER key sets both impedance components to their minimum values SET IEC1000 3 3 Selecting this field and pressing the ENTER key sets the output impedance to the IEC 725 reference impedance values required for IEC 1000 3 3 flicker testing 74 November 2005 i Series Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 4 2 13 MEASUREMENT CAL FACTORS Menu MEASUREMENT CAL FACTORS oA VOLT FS 168 CURR FS 142 123 CURE B 58 VOLT VOLT FS HT 38 CURR FS 39 UDLT HT 63 CURR HT 24 Figure 4 26 MEASUREMENT CAL FACTORS menu The MEASUREMENT CAL FACTORS menu provides access to the measurement calibration parameters For three phase configurations the PHASE keys toggle between the three calibra
160. F115 AVSUR360 16 5 2 3 1 Abnormal Voltage surge 148V to 180V 650Hz Figure 16 5 apply at 10 sec intervals EANF115 AVSUR650 i Series iX Series November 2005 169 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Table A WF 115 Test No Section Subject Test Limits Comment File Ref 16 5 1 Normal Operating Conditions ac 16 5 1 1b 1 1 Phs Voltage and Frequency ac 100V to 122V 360Hz to 800Hz Apply for 30 mins each test EAWF115 VFNORM1P 16 5 1 1c 2 1 3 Phs Voltage and Frequency ac 100V to 122V 360Hz to 800Hz Apply for 30 mins each test EAWF115 VFNORM3P 16 5 1 Emergency Operating Conditions ac 16 5 1 1c 2 2 3 Phs Voltage and Frequency ac 100V to 122V 360Hz to 800Hz Apply for 30 mins each test EAWF115 VFEMER3P 16 5 1 Normal Operating Conditions ac 16 5 1 2 oltage Modulation 360Hz Vamp 0 18V to 1 24V Mrate 1Hz to 200Hz Figure 16 1 EAWF115 VMOD360 16 5 1 2 Voltage Modulation 800Hz ac Vamp 0 18V to 1 24V Mrate 1Hz to 200Hz Figure 16 1 EAWF115 VMOD800 16 5 1 3 Frequency Modulation 360Hz ac Famp 4 9 Hz to 0 2Hz Mrate 0 014Hz to 100HzfFigure 16 2 EAWF115 FMOD360 16 5 1 3 Frequency Modulation 800Hz Famp 4 9 Hz to 0 2Hz Mrate 0 014Hz to 100HzFigure 16 2 EAWF115 FMOD800 16 5 1 4b Momentary Power Interruptions Table 16 1 360Hz nom Equipment with Digital Circuits EAWF115_
161. G Figure 9 3 Normal state DO160 NORMAL 1 and NORMAL 2 screens have the following tests 1 VOLT FREQ MIN VOLT FREQ MAX VOLT UNBALANCE WAVEFORM DISTORTION VOLT MODULATION FREQ MODULATION POWER INTERRUPT VOLTAGE SURGE FREQ TRANSIENT group 1 FREQ VARIATION group 2 amp 3 o ON A2 CO DR The above tests can be selected by scrolling to the highlighted selection using the up and down key and the ENTER key to start the selected test For some of these tests numeric data entry may be required to define the test number or the modulation rate VOLT FREQ MIN Standard Group RTCA Group1 Group2 Group3 Voltage 1 100 104 104 104 3 101 5 105 5 105 5 105 5 Frequency 380 390 360 360 Table 9 1 Normal Voltage and Frequency minimum Standard Group RTCA Group1 Group2 Group3 Voltage 1 122 122 122 122 3 120 5 120 5 120 5 120 5 Frequency 420 410 650 800 Table 9 2 Normal Voltage and Frequency Maximum 136 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments This test will set the voltage and frequency to levels defined by Table 9 1 The test will last for 30 minutes The test will be repeated for the Group 2 and 3 using the Voltage setting from Table 9 2 and the frequency from Table 9 1 The lt key backspace will terminate the test at any time VOLT FREQ MAX This test will set the voltage and frequency to levels defined by Table
162. GPIB controller 15 Slew exceeds dwell The power source transient system was programmed to slew to a voltage and or frequency value that would take longer to accomplish than the slew time set This error can result in single step mode if the steps are executed out of order or one or more steps are skipped The voltage frequency values may no longer line up Try running the test from the first step 16 Illegal during transient A transient step is still in progress Try using the Abort button to abort any test in progress If other ClGui32 screens other than the Main GUI screen are open they may have initiated a transient which conflicts with the 160 option Try closing all other CIGui32 windows Great efforts have been made to check all test sequence files provided as part of the 160 option However due to the breadth and complexity of the 160 database an occasional error may occur while using these files If an error cannot be resolved turn on the ClGui32 bus monitor window and rerun the test that yields the error and save the bus trace to a text file using the File Save All menu in the bus monitor window This file can be emailed to support Qcalinst com along with a description of the error Furthermore test files were developed making reasonable assumptions concerning the intent of the RTCA DO 160 directive The user is free to modify edit revise or otherwise update any of these tests to match his her own requi
163. Hz Apply for 5 mins each test EAWF115 VABN1P360 16 5 2 1b 11 Phs Voltage 97V to 134V 800Hz Apply for 5 mins each test EAWF115 VABN1P800 16 5 2 16 3 Phs Voltage 97V to 134V 360Hz Apply for 5 mins each test EAWF115 VABN3P360 16 5 2 1 3 Phs Voltage 97V to 134V 800Hz Apply for 5 mins each test EAWF115 VABN3P800 16 5 2 Momentary Undervoltage ac 10V and 60V 360Hz Apply for 7 seconds each test EAWF115 VUND360 170 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z 16 5 2 2 Momentary Undervoltage ac 10V and 60V 800Hz California Instruments Apply for 7 seconds each test EAWF115 VUND800 16 5 2 3 Abnormal Transients ac 16 5 2 3 1 Abnormal Voltage surge 148V to 180V 360Hz Figure 16 5 apply at 10 sec intervals EAWF115 AVSUR360 16 5 2 3 1 Abnormal Voltage surge 148V to 180V 800Hz Figure 16 5 apply at 10 sec intervals EAWF115 AVSUR800 i Series iX Series November 2005 171 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Table ADC28 Test No Section Subject Test Limits Comment File Ref 16 6 1 Normal Operating Conditions dc 16 6 1 1b Voltage Average Value dc 22 0V to 30 3V Apply for 30 mins each test EADC28 VAVG 16 6 1 Emergency Operating Conditions dc 16 6 1 1b 3 Voltage Average Value dc 18 0V Apply for 30 mins each test EADC28 VAVGEMER 16
164. Hz to 650Hz Apply for 30 mins each test EANF115 VFEMER3P 16 5 1 Normal Operating Conditions ac 16 5 1 2 Voltage Modulation 360Hz amp 0 18V to 1 24V Mrate 1Hz to 200Hz Figure 16 1 EANF115 VMOD360 16 5 1 2 Voltage Modulation 650Hz 0 18V to 1 24V Mrate 1Hz to 200Hz Figure 16 1 EANF115 VMOD650 16 5 1 3 Frequency Modulation 360Hz ac Famp 4 9 Hz to 0 2Hz Mrate 0 014Hz to 100Hz Figure 16 2 EANF115 FMOD360 16 5 1 3 Frequency Modulation 650Hz ac Famp 4 9 Hz to 0 2Hz Mrate 0 014Hz to 100Hz Figure 16 2 EANF115 FMOD650 16 5 1 4b Momentary Power Interruptions ac Table 16 1 360Hz nom Equipment with Digital Circuits EANF115 PINTB360 16 5 1 4b Momentary Power Interruptions ac Table 16 1 650Hz nom Equipment with Digital Circuits 115 PINTB650 16 5 1 4 Momentary Power Interruptions ac 360Hz nom Other Equipment EANF115 PINTC360 16 5 1 4 Momentary Power Interruptions ac 65 2 nom Other Equipment EANF115 PINTC650 16 5 1 44 Momentary Power Interruptions ac Table 16 2 Additional Requirement Var Freq EANF115 PINTD 16 5 1 5 Normal Transients ac 16 5 1 5 1 Normal Voltage Surge ac 160V to 70V 360 Hz EANF115 NVSUR360 16 5 1 5 1 Normal Voltage Surge ac 160V to 70V 650 Hz EANF115 NVSUR650 16 5 1 6 Normal Frequency Surge ac 115V 360Hz to 650Hz EANF115 NFSUR 16 5 1 7 Voltage DC Content ac 16 5 1 7 1 Phs Voltage DC Content ac 0 1VDC 360Hz nom Apply for 30 mins each test EANF115 DCOFS1P3
165. MS704 Distortion Limits ini setting file by adding Ithd n n in either PHASES 1 or PHASES 3 sections The bottom half of the Parameters tab contains user controls and a text entry field for entering observations regarding the EUT operation Test Frequency The frequency selection drop down control is active only for Dropdown control Table SVF and TVF modes Variable Frequency and can be used to set the frequency at which data from the EUT is to be acquired For all other modes it is fixed to either 400 Hz or DC Acquire Data at all This button causes data to be acquired at all frequencies frequencies available in the Test Frequency Dropdown control For all tables other than SVF and TVF this button functions like the Update Meas Button located above the sub tabs Abort Meas This button aborts measurements in progress In case of Tables SVF and TVF acquiring data at all 12 frequency settings can take a long time This button allows this process to be aborted Read Meas Data This button reads measurement data from disk Each time from File measurement data is acquired by the GUI it is saved to an ASCII text file A separate file is used for each frequency or DC setting To recall data taken at a specific frequency setting select the desired frequency using the Test Frequency Dropdown control before clicking on this button Note that all measurement data files are saved in the Reports subdirectory of the GUI application directory usi
166. Manual Rev Z Output Parameter Current Limit Frequency Range Frequency Accuracy DC Offset Voltage Output Impedance Range Resolution Output Noise 20 kHz to 1 MHz Peak Rep AC Current 300 1i iX 5001i iX 9003i iX 15003i iX 10001i iX 15001i iX Crest Factor California Instruments iX Series programmable 0 to 100 of range for all ranges 16 00 81 91 Hz 0 01 Hz resolution 81 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz resolution 0 01 of programmed value Less than 20 mV with linear load n a n a n a 400 mVrms max 135 V range Rmin to 1000 MQ Lmin to 1000 uH 4 mQ 2 F S at 796 uH and 400 250 mV rms typ 500 mV rms max A t I 800 mVrms max 270 V range 110 A for 135 V range 92 A for 270 V range 220 A for 135 V range 184 A for 270 V range 330 A for 135 V range 276 A for 270 V range November 2005 110 A for 135 V range 100 A for 150 V range 92 A for 270 V range 83 A for 300 V range 220 A for 135 V range 200 A for 150 V range 184 A for 270 V range 166 A for 300 V range 330 A for 135 V range 300 A for 150 V range 276 A for 270 V range 249 A for 300 V range Up to 5 1 Up to 5 1 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 2 1 3 Measurements i series Parameter Range Accuracy Resolution ae 00 99 99 Hz 0 02 2 FE d Hz CE 500 0 Hz DULL 0 1 Hz Rms Voltage 0 30
167. Measurement Data Screen The EUT Performance Measurements tab in the ABD tests window provides measurement data taken by the power source s data acquisition system It also analyzes the data where applicable and compares against performance limits set by the ABD test standard This tab contains four sub tabs that each present different aspects of the EUT measurement data Additional user controls for measurement updates and graph scaling are provided right next to the four sub tabs The following sub tabs are available for selection Sub Tab Description Parameters This tab displays the parametric measurement data in tabular form This includes voltage current power power factor distortion etc For three phase EUT s data is shown for all three phases For single phase EUT data is shown for phase A only as long as the power source is in single phase mode The top half of the Parameters tab displays all parametric measurement data The following data is available Volt RMS V Displays source voltage per phase in Volt RMS or DC depending on power source mode of operation Curr RMS A Displays EUT current per phase in amps RMS or DC depending on power source mode of operation App Power VA Displays the apparent power for each phase as well as the total power for all three phases 302 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments
168. NCTION REPEAT SEQUENCE PREVIOUS SCREEN START PAUSE REPEAT 0 CLEAR SEQ 98 99 PREVIOUS SCREEN November 2005 i Series Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 4 2 3 Overview of Menu 2 and 3 level 1 level 2 MENU 2 ADVANCE MEAS ANALYSIS FUNCTION VIEW DATA MODE SCALE TRIG MODE TRIG SOURCE TRIG PHASE TRIG DELAY START APPLICATIONS MIL STD 704D OMNI OPTION RTCA DO160C IEC 1000 4 11 PREVIOUS SCREEN SETUP REGISTERS SAVE REGISTER ft VIEW EDIT REG RECALL REGISTER PREVIOUS SCREEN MORE MENU 3 UTILITY UTILITY 1 GPIB RS232 SETUP VOLT CURR CONTROL PREVIOUS SCREEN INITIAL SETUP LIMIT SETUP MORE UTILITY 2 CONFIGURATION ELAPSED TIME VIEWING ANGLE PREVIOUS SCREEN OUTPUT IMPEDANCE RESISTIVE INDUCTIVE FLICKER MINIMUM MEASUREMENT VOLT FS CAL VOLT 0 VOLT FS HT VOLT FS 0 CURR FS CURR 0 CURR FS HT CURR 0 HT PREVIOUS SCREEN OUTPUT CAL VOLT FS V HI FREQ VOLT ZERO PHASE OFST IMP REAL FS IMP REACT FS IMP REAL MIN IMP REACT MIN PREVIOUS SCREEN i Series iX Series HARMONICS TRACE level 3 STEADY STATE MODE TRANSIENTS EMERGENCY ALL MIL704 TESTS PREVIOUS SCREEN NORMAL STATE EMERGENCY ABNORMAL PREVIOUS SCREEN VOLTAGE DIPS VOLT VARIATIONS INRUSH CURRENT PREVIOUS SCREEN GPIB ADDRESS RS232 BAUDRATE RS232 DATA RS232 PARITY RS232 STOPBITS PREVIOUS SCREEN
169. NTS Group 1 only Seq No Frequency Time 1 400 5 minutes 2 480 5 sec 3 400 10 sec 4 320 5 sec 5 400 10 sec Table 9 12 Abnormal Frequency Transient This test will set the voltage at 115V and will remain at this voltage through out the test The test will cycle the frequency three times as shown in Table 9 12 Each repeat will start from sequence 2 i Series iX Series November 2005 145 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 1 1 6 DC TESTS If the output voltage is set for 24V DC or 14V DC the DO 160 DC Main selection screen will appear as seen in Figure 9 10 RTCA DO 16 D DC STANDARD E NORMAL STATE CATEGORIES A ABNORMAL Figure 9 10 DO 160 DC Main Menu Note Prior to test selection the Standard selection and Category selection are required Use the shuttle to select Standard RTCA or EUROCAE Also select equipment category A B or Z 9 1 1 6 1 Normal State Test Scroll to the NORMAL STATE entry using the up and down cursor keys Press the ENTER key to select the NORMAL STATE screen The screen will appear as shown in Figure 9 11 DO 16 D NORMAL DC VOLT UNDER VOLT MAX VOLT SURGE Figure 9 11 Normal State The DO 160 NORMAL screen has the following tests VOLT MIN VOLT MAX VOLT UNDER VOLT SURGE 5 POWER INTERRUPT The above tests can be selected by scrolling to the highlighted selection using the up and down key and the ENTER key to start the selected
170. OAD CURRENT WIRE GAGE 22 AMPS 10 AWG 37 AMPS 8 AWG 74 AMPS 4 AWG 111 AMPS 2 AWG i Series iX Series November 2005 17 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 3 6 Connectors Rear Panel number of connectors are located along the top rear covers These connectors recessed area to protect them from shipment damage 3 6 1 System Interface Clock and Lock Connectors WARNING system interface connector and Clock Lock connectors may be at hazardous voltages These connections may not be used in table top applications In table top applications the safety cover must be in place These connections may only be used when the equipment is enclosed in rack only within one rack only with California Instruments supplied cables and only between California Instruments equipment J21 and J20 are the Clock and Lock connectors and are used to synchronize and control the phase shift between the three outputs when 3 units are operating as a three phase system with the 15003iX LK option The System Interface connector J22 is used to connect the slave power sources to the Master power source the one with the controller in multiple box systems The connector is also used for the external sync input external modulation input and trigger output Table 3 2 System Interface Connector J22 Description 0 gt gt CT Common Current transformer common CL B Phase B current limit reference MOD
171. OT VIC BSE EEA EE 125 ree m EE 125 General en ttt tertie da 125 7 3 Basic 2 125 7 4 Advanced Troubleshooting resorin ae se e Ree PE 127 i Series iX Series November 2005 V User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 8 Top Assembly Replaceable Parts rnnnnnvnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnenn 131 9 E E 133 160 ek 133 9 2 61000 451 Eesti ed 180 9 3 61000 4 13 Ga standen a chet 188 9 4 EOS Option neri st shad EN 200 9 5 Mode iX Option ere nie tei te eerte ieee ce cede pe e e nee 216 9 6 OMNOPON S 2 pe E 224 9 7 LNS Option and XLS Option a t e cece ce cce cece ce ee 235 9 8 Option 704 MilStd704 241 9 9 ABD Option Airbus ABD0100 1 8
172. Option 704 MilStd704 Tests The MIL704 option is made up of both firmware that resides in the power source and the CIGui32 Windows application program The firmware covers revision D and E of the Mil Std704 standard The CIGui32 covers the remaining revisions and This provides coverage of all available standard revisions The user interface for each implementation is different however The revision D and E tests can be operated directly from the power source s front panel or through the supplied CIGui32 program The revision A C F tests can only be operated through the supplied ClGui32 program Thus for rev A C and F a Windows PC and interface is required Section 9 8 1 covers operation of the firmware based revision D and E tests Section 9 8 2 covers operation of the revision A C and F tests Note that future updates of the CIGui32 include overlapping coverage for revisions D and E in the software as the ClGui32 program is designed to support all revisions For now revisions D and E have no associated data files in the CIGui32 i Series iX Series November 2005 241 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 8 1 Option 704 MIL STD 704 rev D amp E Tests Firmware 9 8 1 1 General The MIL704 option is capable of performing most sections of MIL STD 704 rev D and E in either 9 8 1 2 9 8 1 3 of the AC or DC mode Note The Distortion Spectrum tests Table I and Il Figure 7 Table Ill Figure
173. Overvoltage Transients Peak voltage 160V RMS Table TAC109 2 A G ATAC109 1 2 Undervoltage Transients Low voltage 58V RMS Table TAC109 2 H N IATAC 109 2 3 Combined Transient 160V RMS to 58V RMS Table TAC109 2 ATAC109 3 4 Repetitive Normal Voltage Transient Test 90V RMS to 140V RMS Run transient for 30 mins ATAC109 4 TAC110 Normal Frequency Transients 350 Hz to 450 Hz 1 Overfrequency Transients High Frequency 450 Hz Table TAC110 2 A D ATAC110 1 2 JUnderfrequency Transients Low Frequency 350 Hz Table TAC110 2 E H 110 2 3 Combined Transient 350 Hz to 450 Hz Table TAC110 2 I 110 3 TAC201 Power Interrupt for 50 msec Table TAC201 2 A L ATAC201 TAC301 Abnormal Steady State Limits for Voltage and Frequency 102V RMS to 124V RMS 370 Hz to 430 Hz Apply for 30 mins ATAC301 2 Abnormal Voltage Transients 45V RMS to 180V RMS 1 Transients Peak voltage 180V RMS Table TAC302 2 A G ATAC302 1 2 Transients Low voltage 45V RMS Table TAC302 2 H N ATAC302 2 3 Combined Transient 5V RMS to 180V RMS Table TAC302 2 ATAC302 3 TAC303 Abnormal Frequency Transients 320 Hz to 480 Hz Table TAC303 2 A E 401 Emergency Steady State Limits for Voltage and Frequency 104V to 122 V 360 to 440 Hz Apply for 30 mins 401 501 Tests N A to Utilization Equipment ITAC601 Power Failure Three Phase for 7 seconds Table TAC601 2 A D IATAC601 602
174. PINTB360 16 5 1 4b Momentary Power Interruptions Table 16 1 800Hz nom Equipment with Digital Circuits EAWF115 PINTB800 16 5 1 4c Momentary Power Interruptions ac 360Hz nom Other Equipment EAWF115 PINTC360 16 5 1 4c Momentary Power Interruptions ac 800Hz nom Other Equipment EAWF115 PINTC800 16 5 1 4d Momentary Power Interruptions ac Table 16 2 Additional Requirement Var Freq EAWF115 PINTD 16 5 1 5 Normal Transients ac 16 5 1 5 1 Normal Voltage Surge 160V to 70V 360 Hz EAWF115 NVSUR360 16 5 1 5 1 Normal Voltage Surge ac 160 to 70V 800 Hz EAWF115 NVSUR800 16 5 1 6 Frequency Surge 115V 360Hz to 800Hz EAWF115 NFSUR 16 5 1 7 oltage DC Content ac 16 5 1 7 1 Phs Voltage DC Content ac 0 1VDC 360Hz nom Apply for 30 mins each test EAWF115 DCOFS1P360 16 5 1 7 1 Phs Voltage DC Content ac 0 1VDC 800Hz nom for 30 mins each test EAWF115 DCOFS1P800 16 5 1 7 3 Phs Voltage DC Content ac 0 1VDC 360 2 nom Apply for 30 mins each test EAWF115 DCOFS3P360 16 5 1 7 3 Phs Voltage DC Content ac 0 1VDC 800Hz nom Apply for 30 mins each test EAWF115 DCOFS3P800 16 5 1 8 Voltage Distortion ac 10 2 0 VTHD Clipped Sine 360 2 for 30 mins each test EAWF115 VTHD360 16 5 1 8 Voltage Distortion ac 10 2 0 VTHD Clipped Sine 800Hz for 30 mins each test EAWF115 VTHD800 16 5 2 Abnormal Operating Conditions ac 16 5 2 1b 1 Phs Voltage 97V to 134V 360
175. R SND J OPTION RS232 OWER SOURCE SLAVE HASE B OUTPUT Nr 1 5001iX i POWER 50 November 2005 209 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Figure 9 39 15003iX 3 EOS3 SOURCE LOAD B C In A B C HI LO LO LO HI Hi a HI hr OPTION 115 250 POWER INPUT 831 0906 851 gt OUTPUT PHASE A J OUTPUT GND INPU 12 L3 GND OPTION RCE MASTER PHASE A 7000 2 SYSTEM INTERFACE CABLE SENSE IEEE 488 SYSTEM OUTPUT HI A GND INPUT 12 OPTION 5252 SLAVE IEEE 488 SYSTEM TE 12 3 PHASE L3 NPUT POWER GND WER SOURC PHASE 003iX 3 E0OS3 210 November 2005 i Series Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 4 6 Operation 9 4 6 1 General The EOS 1 is used with California Instruments i iX power source to perform testing compliant with the requirements of IEC1000 4 11 The EOS routes the voltage from the power source to an internal tapped power transformer Voltage from each of four taps is sent through an electronic switch to the EOS 1 output During IEC1000 4 11 testing the controlling California Instruments power source selects which voltage
176. RCE field Immediate IMM Phase PHASE A i Series iX Series This mode causes a trigger to occur as soon as the ENTER key is pressed with the cursor on the START field No trigger source needs to be specified for this trigger mode This mode is equivalent to the INIT IMM ACQ bus command This trigger source is appropriate if no trigger condition is known or desired When using this trigger source the acquisition is always triggered This mode causes the iX acquisition system to wait for a specified phase angle on the phase voltage output This allows the acquisition to be positioned in time with respect to any phase angle on phase or Note that phase B and are typically at 0 240 and 120 with respect to the specified trigger phase in this field An example of this trigger source mode is shown in Figure 4 37 When selecting this trigger source the field below the TRIG SOURCE field changed to TRIG PHASE Use this field to enter the desired voltage phase angle to trigger the measurement on November 2005 89 User Manual Rev Z 90 Voltage step SET VOLT California Instruments This mode is appropriate when capturing analyzing events at specific phase angle such as the zero crossing of the voltage Note that the phase angle of the current with respect to the voltage is determined by the load so triggering specific phase current angle is not possible as it is not controlled by the
177. RINGS 1481 RINGS m BH x 5 SSY LINE SYNC J38 USED ON PENE FEDBACK 1 LO SYNC a 7 7 3 3 480 VAC INPUT DEAE Air SHARE 2 UNIT ONLY Al AMP SHARE RE 8 SHARE MP SHARE g i 2 PARALLEL PARALLEL 5 240 VAC INPUT SES vare INPUT OUTPUT us REMOTE ON REMOTE ON ASSY 7000 72 SCH 7000 098 I dene SR LESE 1 A3 428 EN J4 P 5 BV COM 2 we 480 VAC INPUT 3 POPE REM ON OFF 2 ADCC TO A6 J1 2 1 260 5320v IN INPUT OUTPUT 240 INPUT A4 SV RIN VOLT METER 4 ADG_RST dog ASSY 7000 726 300V RTN lt gt 300V RTN HEATSINK ASSY DC 240V PC ASSY AC LOGIC VOLT METER RTN 6 O A6 J1 1 SCH 7000 089 ASSY 7000 420 55 7000 732 VOLT METER i 8 7000 7351 SCH 7000 605 2s pog FOR BOHESABON 2 260P 5 SCH 7000 604 gt D 301 400 ev 190 2 VAC INPUT THESE CONNECTIONS DC 480V J ps FOR 240V INPUT Day 2 421 GRAV FOR 2 AEN V GRAVMABLE i PHASE A I 0 ag QUTPGT AC oU 7000 729 OSCILLATOR 3 OUTPUT AG QUT 7000 602 ASSY 7000 418 250 OUTPUT OUTPUT a ele CHASE 5 AC OUTPUT OVP QuTeUT nay e 5 PIER 258 AC OUTPUT Ove RIN EMULATION rik AC OUTPUT OUTPUT EA PHASE 2280 2200 119V SELEC E 19 10 PE t 118V SELECT 38 38 115V SELECT D HIE J
178. S Table SAC109 2 ASAC109 3 4 Repetitive Normal Voltage Transient Test 90V RMS to 140V RMS Run transient for 30 mins JASAC109 4 ISAC110 Normal Frequency Transients 350 Hz to 450 Hz 1 Transients High Frequency 425 Hz Table SAC110 2 A D IASAC110 1 2 Underfrequency Transients Low Frequency 350 Hz Table SAC110 2 E H IASAC110 2 3 Combined Transient 350 Hz to 450 Hz Table SAC110 2 I ASAC110 3 ISAC201 Power Interrupt OV for 50 msec Table SAC201 2 A L 201 ISAC301 Abnormal Steady State Limits for Voltage and Frequency 102V RMS to 124V RMS 370 Hz to 430 Hz Apply for 30 mins JASAC301 SAC302 Abnormal Voltage Transients 45V RMS to 180V RMS 1 Overvoltage Transients Peak voltage 180V RMS Table SAC302 2 A G IASAC302 1 2 Undervoltage Transients Low voltage 45V RMS Table SAC302 2 H N IASAC302 2 3 Combined Transient 45V RMS to 180V RMS Table SAC302 2 O 02 3 SAC303 Abnormal Frequency Transients 320 Hz to 480 Hz Table SAC303 2 A E 5 03 ISAC401 Emergency Steady State Limits for Voltage and Frequency 104V to 122V RMS 360 Hz to 440 Hz Apply for 30 mins 401 ISAC501 No Tests N A to AC Utilization Equipment ISAC601 Power Failure Single Phase OV for 7 seconds Table SAC601 2 A D JASAC601 ISAC602 Power Failure No test done so numbers coincide ISAC603 Phase Reversal N A to revA i Series iX Series November 2005 287 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments
179. Section Subject Test Limits Comment File Ref 3 Combined Transients 65V to 475V DC Table HDC302 2 M N CHDC302 3 HDC401 Emergency Limits for Voltage 240V to 290V DC Apply each test for 30 mins CHDCA01 HDC501 Starting Voltage Transients 155V to 280V DC Table HDC501 2 A CHDC501 HDC601 Power Failure for 7 seconds Table HDC601 2 A D CHDC601 HDC602 Polarity Reversal N A to Rev B 282 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Rev B Table SAC Test No Section Subject Test Limits Comment File Ref SAC101 Load and Current Harmonic Measurements 115V RMS 400 Hz BSAC101 SAC102 Steady State Limits for Voltage and Frequency 1 Regular Test 108V to 118V RMS 395 to 405 Hz Apply for 30 mins each test BSAC102 1 2 Helicopter Test 108V to 118V 5 380 to 420 Hz Apply for 30 mins each test BSAC102 2 SAC103 Test Done so test numbers coincide SAC104 Voltage Modulation 1 115V Nominal Test 115V RMS 2 5V RMS mod Apply for 10 mins BSAC104 1 2 109V Nominal Test 109V RMS 2 5V RMS mod Apply for 10 mins BSAC104 2 3 117V Nominal Test 117V RMS 2 5V RMS mod Apply for 10 mins BSAC104 3 SAC105 Frequency Modulation 1 400 Hz Nominal Test 400 Hz 5 Hz mod Apply for 10 mins BSAC105 1 2 395 Hz Nominal Test 395 Hz 5 Hz mod Apply for 10 mins BSAC105 2
180. Table TAC109 3 MM 109 3 4 Repetitive Normal Voltage Transient Test 90V RMS to 140V RMS Run transient for 30 mins ICTAC109 4 ITAC110 Normal Frequency Transients 375 Hz to 425 Hz 1 Overfrequency Transients High Frequency 425 Hz Table TAC110 3 AA DD 110 1 2 Underfrequency Transients Low Frequency 375 Hz Table TAC110 3 EE HH 110 2 3 Combined Transient 375 Hz to 425 Hz Table TAC110 3 II 110 3 TAC201 Power Interrupt for 50 msec Table TAC201 2 A L 201 01 Abnormal Steady State Limits for Voltage and Frequency 100V RMS to 125V RMS 380 Hz to 420 Hz Apply for 30 mins 01 TAC302 Abnormal Voltage Transients 45V RMS to 180V RMS 1 Transients Peak voltage 180V RMS Table TAC302 3 AA GG ICTAC302 1 2 Undervoltage Transients Low voltage 45V RMS Table TAC302 3 HH NN ICTAC302 2 3 Combined Transient 45V RMS to 180V RMS Table TAC302 3 02 3 AC303 Abnormal Frequency Transients 320 Hz to 480 Hz Table TAC303 3 AA EE ICTAC303 AC401 Emergency Steady State Limits for Voltage and Frequency 104V to 122V RMS 360 to 440 Hz Apply for 30 mins each test 401 AC501 Tests N A to AC Utilization Equipment AC601 Power Failure Three Phase for 7 seconds Table TAC601 2 A D 601 602 Phase Two Phase Power Failures 280 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments
181. Test 90V to 140V RMS Figure SVF109 2 FSVF109 800 4 SVF110 Normal Frequency Transients 1 Overfrequency Transients High Frequency 800 Hz Table SVF110 2 FSVF110 1 2 Underfrequency Transients Low Frequency 360 Hz Table SVF110 2 FSVF110 2 3 Combined Transient 360 Hz to 800 Hz Table SVF110 2 FSVF110 3 SVF201 Power Interrupt 400 1 115V RMS 400 Hz nominal settings OV for 50 msec Table SVF201 2 FSVF201 400 1 360 1 115 RMS 360 Hz nominal settings OV for 50 msec Table SVF201 2 FSVF201 360 1 600 1 115 RMS 600 Hz nominal settings OV for 50 msec Table SVF201 2 FSVF201 600 1 800 1 115V RMS 800 Hz nominal settings OV for 50 msec Table SVF201 2 FSVF201 800 1 SVF301 Abnormal Steady State Limits for Voltage and Frequency 100V to 125V RMS 360Hz to 800 Hz for 30 mins FSVF301 SVF302 Abnormal Voltage Transients 400 1 400 Hz Overvoltage Transients Peak Voltage 180V RMS Table SVF302 2 A G FSVF302 400 1 400 2 400 Hz Undervoltage Transients Low Voltage 45V RMS Table SVF302 2 H N FSVF302 400 2 400 3 400 Hz Combined Transient 45V RMS to 180V RMS Table SVF302 2 O FSVF302 400 3 360 1 360 Hz Overvoltage Transients Peak Voltage 180V RMS Table SVF302 2 A G FSVF302 360 1 360 2 360 Hz Undervoltage Transients Low Voltage 45V RMS Table SVF302 2 H N FSVF302 360 2 360 3 360 Hz Combined Transient 45V RMS to 180V RMS Table SVF302 2 O FSVF302 360 3 600 1 600 Hz Overvoltage Transients Peak Voltage 180V RMS Table SVF302 2 A G FSVF302 600 1 600 2 600 Hz
182. Test Number of the test from the RTCA DO 160 standard For sub sections of a test number this field will be blank Section Test section Some tests may only have one section in which case this field is blank Subject Description of the type of test Test Limits A summary of the test limits that will be applied by this test Comment Comments concerning this test or its parameters November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Control Display Description File The test sequence file that is used to implement this test section on Reference the power source User Data The area at the bottom of this tab may be used to enter general information regarding the unit under test the test location and operator and environmental conditions in effect during the test This information will be incorporated in the test reports generated by the GUI i Series iX Series November 2005 159 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 1 2 9 160 Test Control E RTCA 00160 Test Tables Piel ES Fie Edt Bun Help p Pwr Output Test Selection Test Control EUT Performance Measurements Execution Controls T eek Desin 00160 rev E section 16 5 1 4b Start Execution Options Options Test Status Output ON Execute all steps r Auto acqure EUT Complete test 000 00 00 00 000 00 05 47 Single Step Data after ex
183. The EOS 1 and EOS 3 electronic output switches are used with the IEC1000 4 11 option option 411 to perform IEC1000 4 11 voltage dips and interruptions tests The 411 option must be installed in the iX I power source for the EOS to function It is configured if the EOS was ordered with the iX i AC source If the 411 option is not present contact California Instruments at support calinst com for support The tests are fully compliant as long as the equipment under test draws less than 70 of the peak current drive capability of the controlling power source The EOS 1 may be used with a 5001iX power source for single phase tests The EOS 3 may be used with a 15003iX power system for three phase tests During IEC1000 4 11 testing the EOS directs power from the iX source to a multi tap power transformer and a set of electronic switches The switches are opened and closed as required to select the appropriate tap from the transformer to send to the EOS output During standard operation the transformer and switches are bypassed within the EOS unit control of the EOS unit is performed automatically by the controlling California Instruments iX power source The controlling power source automatically detects whether an EOS is operating in the system or not If the EOS unit is not powered on and active the controlling source will still November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments perform non compliant IEC
184. This allows different waveforms to be used during transient execution Waveforms may be switched without the output of the source being turned off For three phase configurations each phase has its own waveform list so different waveforms may be programmed on different phases during transient execution Figure 4 41 illustrates the concept of using different waveforms at different steps in a transient list In this case the change was programmed to occur at the zero crossing Any phase angle can be used to start a transient step however Figure 4 41 Switching waveforms in a transient list i Series iX Series November 2005 99 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 4 7 8 Transient Execution STRRTA UIEM TRANSIENT SEQUENCE VOLTAGE SURG SAG VOLTAGE SURG SAG VOLTAGE SURG SAG Figure 4 42 START VIEW TRANSIENT SEQUENCE menu A transient list can be executed from the START VIEW TRANSIENT SEQUENCE menu start a transient list position the cursor on the START field as shown in Figure 4 42 and press the ENTER key Transients may be aborted by pressing the ENTER key again while on the same field as the field changes to ABORT while a transient execution is in progress For short duration transients this will likely not be visible as the transient will complete before the screen is updated Longer duration transients however may be aborted in this fashion Longer duration transients may also be suspended using the PAUSE fiel
185. UNT TRIP 20 20 SHUNT TRIP I 115 SELEC C gt 115v SELECT 451 ASSY 5100 707 12 12 NEUTRAL at SHUNT TRIP 22E 225 SHUNT TRIP OVE RIN RIN A SCH 5100 075 292 2285 OVP RIN RIN AG 1 13 OVP RIN ove RIN T I 18 15 J ove 5 ASSY CURRENT LIMIT 17117 260 520 lt ove ASSY 7000 724 18108 Ovi so HOC J i 18001 SCH 7000 0 Er 15 ERU svp 18V RING 18 TUNC STE HSV 1 BV DUTPUT ON 7 5 NEU ev 2 8 2 3 Bevon GER REMOTE 2 2 oes Se 2 2 12 OVERTEME 255 2 SS EEE EEE 18V 812 BV RING CL ENA an 7 1 18V 18 RINI2 P7 P7 17 18V VDC 17 18V voc E 18v RING 18v RINGS VDC 18 48 VDC 5 600 600V RIN 18V13 18v 3 HI RNG 1 1 5 COM 19 18 10 1 600V 1800v RIN 18V 3 1842 01 2 2 11 600V 600V RIN 3 3 2 12 1 600V 18V RIN S PWR GND 4 22 15 600v HBV RINGS 18 RINGS 5 1 2 IE 18V RINGS 146 18V RINGS CURR LIMIT 6 8 iE 24V V RTN AUX SYNG RIN 168 168 AUX SYNC RTN OUTPUT ON 7 7 e 18 24v V RIN AUX SYNC 16C 160 AUX SYNC OVERLOAD 8 8 17 ZEN BVDC 2 11 11 u171P17 P17 18 AG OUTPUT AC QUIPUT ove rave 12 2 1 1 19 AG OUTPUT OVP 8V COMMON 12 5 E t 20 TH CTIONS OUTPUT OUTPUT OVP 2 ete E 2 p SE CONNECTIONS a AE 0 10002 E 15 5 3 5 com RST 22 22 FOR 480V INPUT AG OUTPUT Ove AG OUT BY LO 8V 100002 18 1
186. Undervoltage Transients Low voltage 50V RMS Table SXF302 3 F J FSXF302 2 3 Combined Transient 50V RMS to 180V RMS Table SXF302 3 K FSXF302 3 SXF303 Abnormal Frequency Transients 50 Hz to 61 Hz Table SXF303 3 A E FSXF303 SXF401 Emergency Steady State Limits for Voltage and Frequency Perform Test SXF102 SXF501 Tests N A to AC Utilization Equipment SXF601 Power Failure Single Phase for 2 seconds Table SXF601 2 A C FSXF601 SXF602 Power Failure test done so numbers coincide SXF603 Phase Reversal Phase reversal done physically FSXF603 Table LDC Test No Section Subject Test Limits Comment File Ref LDC101 Load Measurements 28V DC FLDC101 LDC102 Steady State Limits for Voltage 22V to 29V DC Apply for 30 mins FLDC102 LDC103 Voltage Distortion Spectrum Requires Additional Equipment LDC104 Total Ripple Requires Additional Equipment i Series iX Series November 2005 277 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Rev E This test should be performed using the firmware version of the 704 option Rev D This test should be performed using the firmware version of the 704 option 278 November 2005 i Series iX Series Test No Section Subject Test Limits Comment File Ref LDC105 Normal Voltage Transients 18V to 50V DC 1 Overvoltage Transients Peak Voltage
187. V Freq 10Hz to 200Hz Figure 18 2 EZDC28 VRIP 16 6 1 3b Momentary Power Interruptions dc Table 16 3 Equipment with Digital Circuits EZDC28 PINTB 16 6 1 3 Momentary Power Interruptions dc Other Equipment EZDC28 PINTC 16 6 1 4 Normal Transients dc 16 6 1 4b Normal Voltage Surge dc 50V to 12V EZDC28 NVSUR 16 6 1 5 Engine Starting Under Voltage Operation dc 10 min Slew for 35 sec EZDC28 VENG 16 6 2 Abnormal Operating Conditions dc 16 6 2 1 Voltage Steady State dc 20 5 to 32 2V Apply for 5 mins each test EZDC28 VABN 16 6 2 3 Momentary Undervoltage 12V Apply for 7 seconds each test EZDC28 VUND 16 6 2 4 Abnormal Transients ac 16 6 2 4b Abnormal Voltage Surge BOVDC Figure 16 4 apply at 10 sec intervals EZDC28 AVSUR For more comprehensive DC tests refer to section 9 1 2 10 November 2005 174 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Table A CF 230 Test No Section Subject Test Limits Comment File Ref 16 5 1 Normal Operating Conditions ac 16 5 1 1b 1 1 Phs Voltage and Frequency ac 200V to 244V 390Hz to 410Hz for 30 mins each test EACF230 VFNORM1P 16 5 1 1 1 3 Phs Voltage and Frequency ac 200V to 244V 390Hz to 410Hz Apply for 30 mins each test EACF230 VFNORM3P 16 5 1 Emergency Operating Conditions ac 16 5 1 1b 2 1 Phs Voltage and Fre
188. V RMS Table TVF109 2 FTVF109 400 3 400 4 1400 Hz Repetitive Normal Voltage Transient Test 90V to 140V RMS Figure TVF109 2 FTVF109 400 4 360 1 360 Hz Overvoltage Transients Peak Voltage 180V RMS Table TVF109 2 109 360 1 360 2 360 Hz Undervoltage Transients Low Voltage 80V RMS Table TVF109 2 FTVF109 360 2 360 3 360 Hz Combined Transient 180V to 80V RMS Table TVF109 2 FTVF109 360 3 360 4 360 Hz Repetitive Normal Voltage Transient Test 90V to 140V RMS Figure TVF109 2 109 360 4 600 1 600 Hz Overvoltage Transients Peak Voltage 180V RMS Table TVF109 2 FTVF109 600 1 600 2 600 Hz Undervoltage Transients Low Voltage 80V RMS Table TVF109 2 FTVF109 600 2 600 3 600 Hz Combined Transient 180V to 80V RMS Table TVF109 2 FTVF109 600 3 600 4 600 Hz Repetitive Normal Voltage Transient Test 90V to 140V RMS Figure TVF109 2 FTVF109 600 4 800 1 800 Hz Overvoltage Transients Peak Voltage 180V RMS Table TVF109 2 FTVF109 800 1 800 2 800 Hz Undervoltage Transients Low Voltage 80V RMS Table TVF109 2 FTVF109 800 2 800 3 800 Hz Combined Transient 180V to 80V RMS Table TVF109 2 FTVF109 800 3 800 4 800 Hz Repetitive Normal Voltage Transient Test 90V to 140V RMS Figure TVF109 2 FTVF109 800 4 TVF110 Normal Frequency Transients 1 Overfrequency Transients High Frequency 800 Hz Table TVF110 2 FTVF110 1 2 Underfrequency Transients Low Frequency 360 Hz Table TVF110 2 FTVF110 2 3 Combined Transient 360 Hz to 800 Hz Table TVF110 2 FTVF110 3 TVF201 P
189. VAC Repeat the adjustments at 60 and 400 Hz until the output is within 0 05 volts 300 range Zero 0 5 mv DC 300 range Volt FS 240 0 05 VAC 300 range Volt Hi Freq VOLT HI FREQ 240 0 05 VAC Repeat the adjustments at 60 and 400 Hz until the output is within 0 05 volts 150 VDC range DC Zero VOLT ZERO 0 5 mv DC 150 VDC range Volt FS 120 0 05 VDC 150 VDC range Volt FS VOLT FS 120 0 05 VDC 300 VDC range DC Zero VOLT ZERO 0 5 mv DC 300 VDC range Volt 240 0 05 VDC 300 VDC range Volt FS 240 0 V VOLT FS 240 0 05 VDC Table 6 1 Output Calibration Table For multi phase power system that uses one controller 9003iX or 15003iX repeat paragraph 6 4 for each phase Move the external multimeter to the phase being calibrated Make sure that the phase being calibrated is programmed to the correct voltage While viewing the calibration Screen press the PHASE key to select the respective key 116 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 6 5 Routine Measurement Calibration Connect the test equipment to the power source as shown in Figure 6 2 If the power system is a multi phase system with one controller the DVM for calibrating the measurement voltage should always be connected to the Remote Sense connector TB3 on the Phase A power source The shunt must be connected to the power source as shown in Figure 6 2 If the Current measurement can t be successf
190. W California Instruments Revision 2 November 2005 Copyright 1998 2005 by California Instruments All rights reserved P N 7000 970 i Series iX Series AC Power Source User Manual User Manual Rev Z User s Manual AC Power Source California Instruments Models 3001i 5001i 5001i 400 9003i 10001i 10001i 400 15001i 15001i 400 15003i 150031 400 30003i 30003i 400 3001iX 5001iX 5001iX 400 9003iX 10001iX 10001iX 400 15001iX 15001iX 400 15003iX 15003iX 400 30003iX 30003iX 400 O Copyright 1998 2005 California Instruments Rev Z November 2005 i Series iX Series November 2005 California Instruments User Manual Rev Z California Instruments SAFETY SUMMARY This power source contains high voltage and current circuits which are potentially lethal Because of its size and weight mechanical stability must be ensured The following safety guidelines must be followed when operating or servicing this equipment These guidelines are not a substitute for vigilance and common sense California Instruments assumes liability for the customer s failure to comply with these requirements If the power source is used in a manner not specified by California Instruments the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired BEFORE APPLYING POWER 1 Verify the correct voltage is applied to the unit for example 240V 2 The chassis and cabinet of this power source must be grounded to minimize shock
191. W9 Standard CLK amp LK 2 Master CLK amp LK Slave November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 5 3 2 Keyboard Display Board The keyboard display assembly is assembly A9 It is mounted to the front panel and holds the 23 rubber keys It also has the LCD graphics display shaft encoder is mounted on the board that is used for shuttle input 5 3 3 Phase B and C Board This assembly 8 has the waveform measurement impedance programming components for the Phase B and C outputs This board is only installed for a 15003iX power system with one controller for the Master Phase A power source 5 3 4 GPIB RS232 Board This board assembly is identified as A10 It has the IEEE 488 and RS232 transceivers It also has optocouplers for both interfaces i Series iX Series November 2005 103 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments
192. XLS If the XLS is not installed and the FREQ MODE SENS command is issued an error message is generated If done as part of a test program an error check should be done after a 800 msec delay to allow the i iX to sense the presence of a sync signal coming from the XLS module If no error occurs the XLS is active If an error occurs the XLS may not be available or not functioning and the mode has reverted back to internal The XLS option is designed to keep the iX output frequency locked to the line frequency There is a finite phase offset however between the iX source output and the line input to the External Sync Module This phase offset will vary somewhat with the line voltage going to the XLS module If it is desired to have the iX output in phase with the line input it will be necessary to monitor the iX output voltage as well as the line input to the XLS module using a two channel oscilloscope to compare the zero crossings of the voltage waveforms An isolation amplifier must be used when connecting the sync input line to the o scope input To program an offset angle on the iX source go to PROGRAM 2 screen and select PHASE Typically 25 30 of phase angle will put the line input and the source output in phase but the exact angle to program can only be determined by monitoring the iX source and the line input voltage and comparing the waveforms 240 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 8
193. a Instruments Designed to meet EN50081 2 and EN50082 2 European Emissions and Immunity standards as required for the CE mark 65 dBA maximum at 096 to 5096 load 75 dBA maximum greater than 5096 load to 10096 load Measured at one meter Designed EN61010 1 European safety standards as required for the CE mark Allows continuous change of all values including output calibration and range change A conventional decimal keypad facilitates quick entry of numerical values such as voltage current limit etc The large blue enter key will make the value you enter effective Using the SET key allows the user to preset all parameter values and update them all at once by pressing the Enter key A set of up and down arrow keys is used to move the cursor position in all menus This allows quick selection of the desired function or parameter Measure key will display most measurement values Program key will show all program parameters Output on off key for output relay control Phase key will switch display to show program and measured values for each phase A large high contrast LCD display with backlight provides easy to read guidance through all setup operations An adjustable viewing angle makes it easy to read from all practical locations Large and bright status indicators inform the user of important power source conditions The Remote lamp informs the user that the unit is under remote control The Overload lamp indicates th
194. ables shown on the next few pages list the test sections covered by the 704 option Where relevant the numbering used matches that of the MIL STD 704 document The notes in the right hand column indicate tests that are either not directly supported or require additional external test equipment Test tables are listed by rev and then by power group The list starts with the most current rev to date rev F i Series iX Series November 2005 269 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments RevF Table SAC Test No Section Subject Test Limits Comment File Ref SAC101 Load and Current Harmonic Measurements 115V RMS 400 Hz FSAC101 SAC102 Steady State Limits for Voltage and Frequency 108V to 118V RMS 393 to 407 Hz Apply for 30 mins each test FSAC102 SAC103 No Test Done so test numbers coincide SAC104 Voltage Modulation 1 115V Nominal Test 115V RMS 2 5V RMS mod Apply for 10 mins FSAC104 1 2 109V Nominal Test 109V RMS 2 5V RMS mod Apply for 10 mins FSAC104 2 3 117V Nominal Test 117V RMS 2 5V RMS mod Apply for 10 mins FSAC104 3 SAC105 Frequency Modulation 1 400 Hz Nominal Test 400 Hz 4 Hz mod Apply for 10 mins FSAC105 1 2 395 Hz Nominal Test 395 Hz 4 Hz mod Apply for 10 mins FSAC105 2 3 405 Hz Nominal Test 405 Hz 4 Hz mod Apply for 10 mins FSAC105 3 SAC106 Voltage Distortion Spectrum Requires Additional Equipm
195. ackground and contains the table reference designator and a description of the selected power group Test Table Display i Series iX Series The data grid at the bottom of the tab displays the selected power group test table It is also used to select the specific test section and number to be executed Thus every test starts by selecting the desired test step from this table Clicking on the desired ROW does this The selected row will be highlighted and the associated file shown in the File Ref Field will be loaded in the Test Control tab For better readability the user can adjust the column widths by dragging the dividers between columns If the window is too small to display all rows and columns scroll bars will appears at the bottom and or right of the data grid The following fields are displayed in the test data tables Test Number of the test from the ABD0100 1 8 standard For sub sections of a test number this field will be blank Section Test section Some tests may only have one section in which case this field is blank Subject Description of the type of test Test Limits A summary of the test limits that will be applied by this test DO160 A cross reference to the relevant RTCA DO 160 Section 16 tests Reference after which this test is patterned Generally ABD tests deviate in one or more ways from these specific RTCA DO 160 tests If there is no equivalent DO 160 test this field will be blank
196. acting ick acti 400 VOLT I O ASSY 7000 726 Table 8 2 Fuses 132 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 Options 9 1 RTCA DO 160 Option The RTCA DO 160 Option is made up of both firmware that resides in the power source and the CIGui32 Windows application program The firmware covers revision D and the CIGui32 covers revision E The user interface for each implementation is different however The revision D tests can be operated directly from the power source s front panel or through the supplied CIGui32 program The Revision E tests can only be operated through the Cigui32 windows software Thus for Rev E use Windows and interface is required Section 9 1 1 covers operation of the firmware based revision D tests Section 9 1 2 covers operation of the revision E test Note that future updates of the CIGui32 may include overlapping coverage for revision D in the software as the CIGui32 program is designed to support all revisions For now revision D has no associated data files in the CIGui32 9 1 1 Option 160 RTCA DO160 rev D Tests Firmware 9 1 1 1 9 1 1 2 General The RTCA DO 160D option is capable of performing all sections of RTCA DO 160D Section 16 and EUROCAE 14D RTCA DO160D Section 16 for the AC Source signal A selection is made available to specify the type of standard and groups Throughout this document Groups 1 through 3 will be used to
197. age or frequency change occurs on the AC source This output generates a low going pulse gt 400 6 in duration that indicates voltage or frequency change Since this is an isolated output an external DC supply and pull up resistor 22KO 1 8 W is required To create a TTL level output a 5V or 3 3V DC supply is required To create a signal for viewing on a scope a higher DC voltage such as a 9V battery may be used Connect the DC supply and pull up resistor as shown gt 400 uS d System 5 Interface 0 22 31 Function Strobe High J22 14 Function Strobe Centronics Connector Figure 3 3 Function Strobe Connection When running list transients on the AC source the LIST TTLTrigger SCPI command may be used reassign the operation of the Function Strobe output as a trigger output An output pulse is generated for each logic 1 in the TTLTrigger list See the iX i Series Programming Manual P N 7000 982 for details on the transient list system Trigger BNC Breakout Box convenient trigger BNC breakout box is available from California Instruments which facilitates connection to the Function Strobe Trigger Output signal on the system interface connector 9V DC battery is used to provide the required DC supply This small box can be ordered through customer service or sales under P N 7000 481 1 for 300 1i X and 5001i iX or P N 7000 481 2 for all multi chassis system
198. ailable in this menu VOLT PAIR OL MODE TRIP DELAY VOLT SENSE NO OUTPUT i Series iX Series iX Series only The iX Series can be operated in either a 135 270 voltage range pair or a 150 300 voltage range pair The amount of current available in the 135 270 range pair setting is about 1096 higher Unless the extra voltage range is needed the maximum current can be attained in the 135 270 volt mode This field allows the selection of the most optimal voltage and current combination for the application at hand This field is used to select constant current CC or constant voltage CV mode The constant current mode will limit the maximum amount of current drawn by the load to the set value The voltage will be reduced as needed after the trip delay time to maintain the level of programmed current The constant voltage mode will maintain the set voltage as long as the current drawn by the load does not exceed the current limit programmed If the current limit is exceeded the output will be shut off after the trip delay time The trip delay field may be used to set the amount of time to hold off the current limit trip point The minimum amount of time is 100 ms or 0 1 sec The maximum amount of time is 5 00 sec This field selects the internal or external sense line inputs Internal sense does not require the external sense lines to be connected as sensing occurs at the output relay of the AC source For best results conn
199. ailable library of 50 user defined waveforms or the three standard waveforms The output waveshape changes upon entry into each step and remains in effect for the duration of the step The default waveshape is always the SINE sinewave This is the number of times the FREQUENCY SWEEP STEP transient will repeat before it will proceed to the next event or exit the transient The number of times the transient event is generated is equal to the REPEAT 1 Leave this value at zero if only one execution of this event in the list is required This must be the last item in the transient edit screen All data fields must be entered before inserting the EVENT The EVENT takes value from 1 to 99 The EVENT defines the order of execution of the transient events in a multiple event transient It is a good practice to enter spaced EVENT 5 to allow insertion of an EVENT later if needed For example space them by 5 Entry of a sequence EVENT number will cause the display to return to the TRANSIENT screen November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 4 2 6 4 VOLTAGE FREQUENCY SWEEP STEP sub menu VOLTAGE FREGUENCY SHEEPA STEP SETUP DURATION 8 8815 END DELAY 0 0815 PREVIOUS SCREEN FUNCTION SINE REPEAT B Figure 4 15 VOLTAGE FREQUENCY SWEEP STEP SETUP screen The Volt freq sweep step screen shown in Figure 4 15 can be reached from the transient screen as fol
200. al Dimensions Omni 1 18i and 3 18i Omni 1 37i 1 37iJ and 3 37i 3 5 H x 19 W x 22 D 5 25 H x 19 W x 22D 89mmH x 480mmW x 560mmD 133mmH x 480mmW x 560mmD Weight OMNI 1 18i 31 Ib 14 kg OMNI 3 18i 37 Ib 17 kg OMNI 1 37iJ 55 Ib 25 kg OMNI 3 37i 55 Ib 25 kg Connectors Input AC IEC 320 Impedance Kulka 9 85 series Network Input and Output 3M 3367 1000 mates with 3M 3366 1001 System Interface Chassis Slide General Devices C300S 118 U B308 BK 9 6 4 Installation and Acceptance 9 6 4 1 Unpacking Inspect the unit for any possible shipping damage immediately upon receipt If damage is evident notify the carrier Do not return an instrument to the factory without prior approval Do not destroy the packing container until the unit has been inspected for damage in shipment i Series iX Series November 2005 225 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 6 4 2 Power Requirements The 1 18 and 3 18i use either 115 or 230 to power the control circuits The user may select the desired input voltage using the small range selector card within the IEC input module The selector card may be removed from the input module by removing the line cord sliding the plastic window to the left and extracting the card For the Omni 1 18i and 3 18i the selector card is marked 100 220 on one side and 120 240 on the opposite side OMNI 1 18i and 3 18i may be operated from 115 volt line by s
201. al surfaces Front and rear panels semi gloss polyurethane color no 26440 medium gray Top bottom and sides semi gloss polyurethane color no 26622 light gray Cooling Fan cooled with air intake on the sides and exhaust to the rear Internal Construction Modular sub assemblies Rear Panel see section 3 for description of connections Connections Input terminal block with cover Output terminal block with cover Remote voltage sense terminal block System interface not for table top use use only in rack enclosed systems Clock and Lock not for table top use use only in rack enclosed systems RS232 GPIB 10 Parameter Specification Operating Temp 0 to 40 C Storage Temp 40 to 85 Altitude lt 2000m Relative Humidity 80 maximum for temperatures up to 31 decreasing linearly to 50 at 40 Installation Over voltage Category Indoor Use Only Vibration Designed to meet NSTA 1A transportation levels November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev 2 California Instruments Designed to meet NSTA 1A transportation levels i Series iX Series November 2005 11 User Manual Rev Z 2 4 Regulatory Electromagnetic Emissions and Immunity Acoustic Noise Safety 2 5 Front Panel Controls Controls Shuttle knob Decimal keypad Up down arrow keys Function keys Displays LCD graphics display Status indicators 12 Californi
202. alinst com CALIFORNIA INSTRUMENTS will prepare an estimate of repair cost and repair the instrument when authorized by the claim agent Please include model number and serial number when referring to the instrument SPARE PARTS To order spare parts user manuals or determine the correct replacement part for your California Instruments products please contact the Customer Service department by phone at 1 858 677 9040 press 2 or by email support calinst com iv November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Table of Contents 15 Introduetonaavrsrkuee M Lr LED IT ET EE DIU 1 1 4 General Descrption e foc eae tette et qe be e 1 2 unite aa a anoeie aaiae 2 2 1 Electrical srete ea enge ae cd eee 2 2 2 Mechanical ioo ttt eX 10 2 3 Envirotimental ccrte n miele recor pedet ie beer d cae eate te exeo eia dene 10 2 4 REQUIALORY asset 12 2 5 Front Panel Gontrols neret rrr t ERR EE ORE 12 2 6 Special Features Options and 13 3 Unpacking and Installation aaea et dc ea ee dritter nee enne 15 UMPAGCKING 15 3 2 Power Re
203. ammed level will activate the 70 80 tap The actual level will be determined by the setting of the EOS in this case OFF The EOS option is in Bypass mode 182 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments RUN ALL The RUN ALL selection will cause the following automated test sequence suggested by the standard to be run Output in No of Cycles Start angle Repeat Delay deg rees i between repeats s 2 Ep a 0 45 90 4 0 5 Lp 4590135 2 v 90 135 180 a aeos a NEN NE DER Se ET SCT RES EE ENE Ne ee peso rm 1 f 10 90 135 180 3 at diff 180 225 270 3 at diff 270 315 0 3 at diff Table 9 19 Dips and Interruptions Tests Performed During RUN ALL The user can change the NOMINAL Ut voltage for this The RUN ALL Command line will change to ABORT during the test Selecting ABORT and pressing the ENTER key will terminate the test at any time and the output voltage will return to the nominal value RUN SINGLE RUN SINGLE command will run single test once The or Interrupt test is defined by the DIP TO NO CYCLES and START ANGLE parameters These parameters must be set before starting the test The following is description of these parameters DIP TO The dip voltage level as percentage of the nominal voltage NO CYCLES The dip duration in cycles START ANGLE The start phase an
204. ammed these three events move the cursor in the TRANSIENTS menu to the START VIEW SEQUENCE field and press the ENTER key This will get you to the START VIEW TRANSIENT SEQUENCE menu from which you can run transient programs This screen shows all available events in the transient list on the right hand side If more than five events are programmed you can scroll through the list using the UP and DOWN arrow keys To edit an existing event move the cursor to the relevant event number and press the ENTER key Move the cursor to the REPEAT 0 field and enter 1 This will cause the transient program to repeat once and thus run two times total Do not confuse this global list level repeat capability with the list event level repeat field we skipped in step 15 Make sure the output relay is closed using the OUTPUT ON OFF key If you start a transient program with the relay open an error message will appear Move the cursor to the START field and press the ENTER key The transient program you just created will execute two times If you have an oscilloscope connected to the output you may be able to see the output voltage change per Figure 4 40 i Series iX Series November 2005 97 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments TRANSIENT SEQUENCE VOLTAGE SURG SAG VOLTAGE SURG SAG VOLTAGE SURG SAG Note AC source output remains at the last programmed values at the completion of the list In three pha
205. an only be used in conjunction with the provided CIGui32 Windows application software only due to the amount of selections and data presentation involved As such these tests require the use of a PC running Windows XP 2000 and cannot be operated from the front panel The ABD option is based on Airbus Directive 0100 Part 1 Chapter 8 Section 2 ABD0100 1 8 dated August 2002 Section 1 refers to wiring installation and connectors and is outside the scope of the ABD option for the i iX Series Future revisions of the ABD0100 1 8 directive may be issued over time and updates may be made available to cover any changes in test levels durations procedures etc Furthermore the ABD option is completely data file driven to allow a large degree of customization by the end user if needed so many changes can be supported without the need for software updates This section of the manual covers operation of the ABD option using the CIGui32 program Version 1 24 or higher of the CIGui32 program is required The CIGui32 program is supplied with all i iX systems free of charge on CD ROM CIC496 It can also be downloaded from the California Instruments web site www calinst com The information provided in this user manual is aimed at guiding the operator in the use of the ABD option through the use of the ClGui32 program Much of the same information can be found in the on line help system of the CIGui32 i Series iX Series November 2005 291
206. and Group 1 will run at 400 Hz Group 2 and Group 3 will run at 360 Hz and 650 Hz for Group 2 and 800 Hz for Group 3 The frequency will return to the nominal setting when the test is completed The key backspace will terminate the test at any time i Series iX Series November 2005 141 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments FREQUENCY TRANSIENTS Group 1 only Seq No Frequency Time 1 400 5 Minute 2 440 150msec 3 400 5Sec 4 350 150msec 5 400 5Sec Table 9 5 Normal Frequency Transient Sequence This test applies to Group 1 only At 115 voltage change the frequency per sequence listed in Table 9 5 The test will cycle 5 times starting from sequence 2 FREQUENCY VARIATION Group 2 and 3 only Seq No Initial Frequency Slew rate Final Frequency Group2 Group3 Hz Sec Group2 Group3 1 360 100 800 2 650 100 360 3 360 Pause 5 sec 360 Table 9 6 Normal Frequency Variation Sequence This test will apply to Group 2 and 3 only At 115 voltage the frequency is set to 360Hz for 5 minutes The frequency is slowed per sequence listed in Table 9 6 The test will cycle 3 times The frequency will return to nominal after the test is completed 9 1 1 5 2 EMERGENCY TEST From the DO160 MENU scroll to the EMERGENCY entry using the up and down cursor keys Press the ENTER key to select the EMERGENCY screens The screen will appear as shown in Figure 9 8 00 1600 EMERGENCY R
207. and a pass or fail indication is shown in the last column Values that exceed the allowable limits are shown with a red background in the Pass Fail column No Harmonic number 1 through 50 Freq Hz Frequency of harmonic in Hz Curr A Absolute current rms in Amps Fund Relative current in percent of the fundamental current 11 Limit Allowable current harmonic limits per Table F for single phase EUT s or Table for three phase EUT s of ABD0100 1 8 Distortion limits per tables F and G are contained in the ABD010018 Distortion Limits ini file located in the ABD Dbase directory or the selected airframe directory P F Pass or Fail indication November 2005 303 User Manual Rev Z 304 California Instruments Sub Tab Description phase selection is available to the left of the graphs and table which allows each phase to be displayed one at a time Additional user controls located on the EUT Performance Measurements Tab Control Display Description Update Meas Triggers new acquisition cycle and updates measurement data for all tabs For table C mode Variable Frequency data will be acquired at the frequency set by the Test Frequency Dropdown control This button is always available regardless of what sub tab is selected Settings Brings up dialog box that allows scaling and color changes for the Waveform or Current harmonics gra
208. and has no effect on the actual test execution Table Header The table header is shown against a yellow background and shows the table from which this test sequence was selected Test Sequence Data The test sequence data grid displays the specific parameters used to program the Grid power source This data implements the required tests The parameters are loaded for the referenced ini file in the test table on the Test Selection tab It is possible to edit this information if needed which allows variations on any of these tests to be made Any changes can be saved to a new file The standard provided test files are write protected however and should not be overwritten The following columns data fields are available in this table for each test step row Step number Sequential number from 1 through end of sequence Freq Test frequency in Hz FSlew Frequency slew rate in Hz sec Volt A Test voltage for phase output A in Vrms or Vdc depending on mode VSlew Voltage slew rate in V sec Func A Waveform function Default is SINE for AC mode and DC for DC mode Arbitrary waveform can be used in AC mode if this capability is supported by the power source Volt B Test voltage for phase output B in Vrms or Vdc depending on mode VSlew B Voltage slew rate in V sec Func B Waveform function Default is SINE for AC mode and DC for DC mode Arbitrary waveform can be used in AC mode if t
209. armonics from the second harmonics to the harmonics number specified by the HARM NO field See Figure 9 29 To run individual harmonics or individual inter harmonics set the harmonic number or the inter harmonics frequency and select RUN POINT prior to running the test November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 3 4 4 INTERHARMONICS A single inter harmonic frequency may be generated using the INTERHARMONICS screen This screen allows insertion of any inter harmonic from 1Hz to 2400Hz in 1Hz steps The amplitude level of the harmonics range is from 0 to 20 of the programmed voltage To select the inter harmonics screen press the menu screen until the MENU 2 screen appears as shown in Figure 9 34 Select INTERHARMONICS using the up or down key RDURNCE MERS RPPLICRTIONS Figure 9 34 MENU 2 SCREEN INTERHARMONICS SCREEN The inter harmonics screen will appear as shown in Figure 9 35 This screen has the following parameters INTER HRRMONICS 4 a FREQUENCY 4 HZ REF COUPL 0N Figure 9 35 INTERHARMONICS SCREEN 1 REFERENCE This field will enable the Inter harmonics generator if ON is selected and will disable the inter harmonics generation if OFF is selected REF COUPL If turned on the REF VOLT will follow the programmed voltage value REF VOLT This field must be programmed to value if REF COUPL is off This value has range from 0 to 230 volts This value is set to value
210. asurement screens Entry Description MEASUREMENT 1 VOLTAGE When in AC or AC DC mode this value is the true rms output voltage measured at the voltage sense lines In DC only mode the voltage is the DC voltage including polarity CURRENT When in AC or AC DC mode this value is the true rms output current drawn by the load In DC only mode the current is the DC current including polarity FREQ When in AC or AC DC mode the output frequency is measured at the sense lines When in DC only mode this value always reads POWER In both AC and DC mode this value is the real rms power consumed by the load MEASUREMENT 2 VA POWER In AC or AC DC mode this value is the apparent rms power consumed by the load In DC mode this value is always the same as the POWER readout 48 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z PEAK CURR POWER FACTOR CREST FACTOR VOLT THD CURR THD INST PK CURR California Instruments This readout reflects the peak current value detected at the output To measure inrush current for unit under test open the output relay and reset the peak current value using the PEAK CURR RESET entry Then program the output voltage and frequency and turn on the output relay The peak current measurement will continuously track the maximum current value detected until reset This readout shows the power factor of the load This readout displays the ratio between peak current and rms
211. at excessive current is being drawn at the output The Over temperature lamp illuminates when internal heat sink temperatures are too high The Hi Range indicator is lit any time the unit is switched to high output voltage range The Output On Off indicator is on when the power source output relays are closed November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 2 6 Special Features Options and Accessories Programmable Output impedance programming available on models 3001iX Impedance 5001iX 9003iX and 15003iX only Parallel Operation Up to three units can be paralleled single phase configuration with one master controller and one or two slave units 10001iX and 15001iX Three Phase Output Three units all with single phase controllers can be connected in a three phase configuration using CLOCK and LOCK connections Requires LKM option in master and LKS option in auxiliary units Recommended is use of 9003iX 15003iX or 30003iX three phase system however Rack Mount Handles Available rack mounting kit with slides and handles Handles also Version available as a separate option Controller Programmable controller front panel assembly Output Relay Standard output relay feature to isolate AC source from the load Output On Off The output relay can be used to quickly disconnect the load A green status indicator displays the status of the output relay Three Phase Output Three power so
212. ated about once per second You can return to the HARMONICS TRACE ANALYSIS screen by pressing the ENTER key To display the data in a different format change to the selections you want and move the cursor to the VIEW field Pressing the ENTER key will re display the data without triggering a new acquisition This is true even if you were in CONT trigger mode To start a new acquisition you must go through the START field instead i Series iX Series November 2005 85 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 4 6 1 2 Analyzing FFT data The data displays available for FFT data allow you to scroll through the entire data set For table displays the UP and DOWN arrow keys may be used to scroll through the table data vertically The knob has no function while in this display mode The triangle on the left edge of the LCD screen points to the current position in the table Arrow indicator can be moved up BRS B _ PHASE or down using B aH HH UP DOWN di 5 H 4 k rsor E a cursor Keys 1 E Bar chart format FFT data displays show the same data in a graphical format While the amplitude information is shown graphically phase data is only displayed in numeric form to the left for the currently selected harmonic component The display can show up to 24 components at a time The triangle at the bottom of the display shows the currently selected component for which numeric data is shown on the
213. aximum test DC Mode 1 Emergency Voltage minimum and maximum test 9 8 1 4 3 ABNORMAL TEST AC Mode 1 Abnormal Voltage under 2 Abnormal Voltage over 3 Abnormal Frequency under 4 Abnormal Frequency under DC Mode 1 Abnormal Voltage under 2 Abnormal Voltage over 9 8 1 5 Front Panel Entry To perform a test from the keyboard from the MENU 2 screen select the APPLICATIONS screen The APPLICATIONS screen will appear as shown in Figure 9 52 RPPLICRTIONS SETUP RTCA DO 16 D OMNI OPTION IEC 1000 4 11 PREVIOUS SCREEN IEC 1000 4 15 Figure 9 52 Application Menu Scroll to the MIL STD 704 entry using the up and down cursor keys Press the ENTER key to select the MIL704 main menu One of the screens will appear as shown in Figure 9 53 The voltage mode and setting will define which menu to select Refer to Section 9 8 1 2 Note The user has to turn on the Output relay before starting a test and set the steady state setup for the test i Series iX Series November 2005 243 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments MIL7 4 AC MENU an MIL7 4 DC MENU SIUN TRANSIENT EVISTUN TRANSIENT STEADY STATE ABNORMAL STEADY STATE ABNORMAL Figure 9 53 MIL704 Menu 9 8 1 6 Revision Selection The default Revision is E Revisions supported are D and E The Revision can be changed from the front panel Scroll to the REVISION entry using the up and down cursor keys see Figure 9 53 Use the shuttle to change the s
214. ay is open The report print function can be invoked by either clicking on the Print button or using the File Print menu If the GUI program is used in demo mode the DEMO MODE ONLY banner will be displayed in this area as well In Demo mode all test runs and all measurements are simulated This mode may be used to develop new test sequences off line but any run time errors will not be detected until executed with an actual power source 9 8 2 7 704 Menus 260 The top of the 704 window contains a standard Windows menu bar Available menus are Menu Sub Menu Description File New The selected clears all data from the Test Control data grid This operation is not normally recommended unless a complete new test sequence is to be entered manually Open Opens a specific test sequence file This menu may be used to directly select a test file without using the Test Selection table tab Save Saves the contents of the test sequence data grid to the selected test file Save As Saves the contents of the test sequence data grid to a user defined file name A file dialog box will appear enabling selection of the directory and file name under which to store the contents of the test sequence data rid Print Prints a test report using MS Word format Only data for the presently selected test sequence is printed The test reports also include EUT performance measurement data Note To print reports the MS Word report format
215. ay be required to perform all section 16 tests Table of Contents 160 Option Manual Section 9 1 2 1 General 9 1 2 2 Test Coverage 9 1 2 3 Specific Test Limitations and Discrepancies 9 1 2 4 General Test Procedure 9 1 2 5 Initial Setup 9 1 2 6 CIGui32 160 Control Window 9 1 2 7 160 Menus 9 1 2 8 160 Test Selection 9 1 2 9 160 Test Control 9 1 2 10 EUT Performance Measurements 9 1 2 11 Test Description Files Creating Custom Tests 9 1 2 12 Test Tables 9 1 2 13 160 Option Related Error Messages 9 1 2 1 General The 160 option supports RTCA DO 160 rev E Section 16 voltage and frequency immunity tests in either of the AC or DC modes This option can only be used in conjunction with the provided ClGui32 Windows application software due to the amount of selections and data presentation involved As such these tests require the use of a PC running Windows XP 2000 and cannot be operated from the front panel The 160 option is based on the RTCA DO 160 Environmental Conditions and Test Procedures for Airborne Equipment Section 16 Power Input dated December 9 2004 Future revisions of the RTCA DO 160 directive may be issued over time and updates may be made available to cover any changes in test levels durations procedures etc Furthermore the 160 option is completely data file driven to allow a large degree of customization by the end user if needed so many changes can be supported without the need for software updates
216. ay in a tabular as well as a graphical mode Acquiring FFT data To perform an FFT analysis on the output of the AC source proceed as follows 1 Press the MEAS button four times or until the HARMONICS TRACE ANALYSIS screen appears 2 Move the cursor to the FUNCTION field and select VOLT or CURR The BOTH selection will default to CURR as only one FFT result can be displayed at a time 3 Move the cursor to the VIEW field and select the TABLE or BAR display mode The TRACE display mode does not apply to FFT results 4 Move the cursor to the DATA MODE field and select ABS or REL Absolute display mode will show all harmonic components in volts or amps Relative display mode will use the fundamental as a 100 reference and display all harmonics as a percentage of the fundamental Phase angles are always shown with respect to the fundamental frequency The phase angle of the fundamental is always shown with respect to phase A Skip the SCALE field as it only applies to the TRACE display mode Move the cursor to the TRIG MODE and select SINGLE or CONT The SINGLE mode will acquire the data once and show the result If you select CONT the data will be updated continuously 7 Move the cursor to the TRIG SOURCE field and select IMM We will cover additional trigger modes later 8 Move the cursor to the START field and press the ENTER key The display that you selected will be shown If you are in CONT trigger mode the data will be upd
217. bleshooting procedure is divided into two sections The first section deals with basic operation and connection of the equipment The second section requires opening the unit and using the LED indicators and a simple multimeter to troubleshoot the unit down to the module level Only a qualified electronic technician should attempt this level troubleshooting 7 3 Basic operation Table 7 1 Basic Symptoms PARAGRAPH PROBLEM Excessive Output Voltage Poor Output Voltage Regulation Overload Light On 7 31 Excessive Output Voltage CAUSE SOLUTION External sense not connected Connect the external sense to the AC power outlet TB2 7 3 2 Poor Output Voltage Regulation CAUSE SOLUTION Unit is overloaded Remove overload Unit is programmed to wrong voltage Select correct voltage range range Input line has fallen below spec limit Check supply voltage 7 3 3 Overload Light is On CAUSE SOLUTION Unit is overloaded Unit is switched to high voltage range Select correct voltage range i Series iX Series November 2005 125 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 7 3 4 Distorted Output SOLUTION Power source is grossly overloaded Reduce load The crest factor of the load exceeds 3 1 on Reduce load current peaks by reducing the low range or 5 1 on the high range load 7 3 5 Unit Shuts Down after 1 2 Seconds CAUSE SOLUTION Output shorted Remove output short Output grossly overloaded Remove ove
218. bottom of the right hand column Figure 4 4 depicts the cursor movement through a two column menu November 2005 i Series Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments MENU 1 PROGRAM TRANSIENTS MEASUREM WAVEFORMS Figure 4 4 Cursor UP key movement CURSOR DOWN The DOWN key moves the cursor position downwards one position to the next available cursor position If the present cursor position is at the bottom of the left hand column the cursor is moved to the top position of the right hand column If the present cursor is at the bottom of the right hand column the cursor is moved to the top of the left hand column Figure 4 5 depicts the cursor movement through a two column menu MENU 1 PROGRAM TRANSIENTS WAVERORMS MEASUPREM FIRE Figure 4 5 Cursor DOWN key movement The decimal keypad can be used at any time in lieu of the shuttle knob to change output parameters Direct data entry is often faster to effect large changes in values than using the shuttle knob Note that pressing the ENTER key while in SET mode of operation will cause the AC source to revert back to IMMEDIATE mode Thus to change all parameters in SET mode enter a value for each field and then proceed to the next field without pressing the ENTER key 0 through 9 The numeric keys provide all decimal number for entry of parameters DECIMAL POINT The decimal point key is used to enter fractional parts of values fo
219. c 14 4 2 Abnormal Transients OV for 5 secs 16 5 3 2 b No undervoltage test required A4P0 ABNVSURGE2 15 4 3 Abnormal Transients Disconnects for 5 secs n a Appendix 3 tests A4P3 APPENDIXS3 16 Voltage Spike Fig 3 A Peak voltage 1000V 17 4 Requires add l equipment 17 Switching Transients n a Appendix 1 DC Switching Transients 18 6 1 Appendix 1 Figure A Table 1 1 T1 gt 10 A6PO APP1TransientsA msec 19 6 2 1 Appendix 1 Figure 1 B Table 1 1 N 1 A6PO APP1TransientsB 1 20 6 2 2 Appendix 1 Figure 1 B Table 1 1 N 22 A6PO APP1TransientsB 2 21 6 2 3 Table 1 1 N A6PO APP1TransientsB N3 22 6 2 4 Appendix 1 Figure 1 B Table 1 1 N 24 A6PO APP1TransientsB 4 23 6 2 5 Appendix 1 Figure 1 B Table 1 1 N 5 A6PO APP1TransientsB 5 24 6 2 6 Appendix 1 Figure 1 B Table 1 1 N 2 6 A6PO APP1TransientsB N6 25 6 2 7 Appendix 1 Figure 1 B Table 1 1 N 2 7 A6PO APP1TransientsB 7 26 6 2 8 Appendix 1 Figure 1 B Table 1 1 N 8 A6PO APP1TransientsB N8 27 6 2 9 Appendix 1 Figure 1 B Table 1 1 N 2 9 A6PO APP1TransientsB 9 28 6 2 10 Appendix 1 Figure 1 B Table 1 1 10 A6PO APP1TransientsB N10 29 6 2 11 Table 1 1 N 11 A6PO APP1TransientsB N11 310 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev 2 California Instruments Test No Subject Test Limits DO160 Ref Comments Test File 30 7 Voltage Modulation Fig 4 A 16 5 1 2 Replace DO160 Fig 16 1 with Fig 4 A A7P0 VMOD 31
220. cinity of the iX power source Refer to Figure 9 50 and Figure 9 51 for connection details The input voltage can be applied to the AC input terminal strip as shown or banana jacks can be used to secure the line voltage to the XLS module The system interface ribbon cable can be connected to either of the two connectors on the XLS module The extra connector is provided for pass through connectivity 9 7 7 XLS Option Operation The External Line Sync option XLS allows the output of the AC Source to be synchronized to any line input whether it is the line powering the iX source or any other line voltage not necessarily hooked up to the iX source This capability may be needed to support tests that require the use of additional equipment The XLS Option once installed and connected can be turned on from the iX front panel as follows Select the PROGRAM 2 screen and move the cursor to the CLK MODE field The default value for the field is INT for internal clock mode Use the knob to select the SYNC mode in order to enable the XLS If the XLS is not installed a LINE SYNC ERROR will appear after a short period in the top left of the screen This means the XLS option is either not present or not receiving a phase input signal from the line To turn the sync mode back off set the CLK MODE field back to INT Over the bus the XLS is enabled or disabled as follows FREQ MODE SENS Enables XLS FREQ MODE FIX Disables
221. com Queue overflow Message queue full Too many message Read status using SYST ERR query until 0 No Error is received indicating queue empty 400 Query error Unable to complete Check programming manual for query correct query format and parameters Query Query issued but Check application program for correct INTERRUPTED response not read flow Response must be read after each query to avoid this error 420 Query Query incomplete Check for terminator after query UNTERMINATED command 430 Query Query cannot be Check application program for DEADLOCKED completed multiple queries 440 Query Query incomplete Check for terminator after query UNTERMINATED command 1 Output volt fault Output voltage does Load exceeds current limit and unit is not match in Constant Voltage CV mode of programmed value operation Reduce load or increase CL setting Output voltage is driven above programmed voltage by external influence Load voltage kickback etc 2 Current limit fault Current limit Load exceeds current limit and unit is exceeded in Constant Voltage CV mode of operation Reduce load or increase CL setting Temperature fault Temperature of heat Reduce load Ensure proper air flow sink too high and exhaust clearance Check fan s for operation External sync error Could not sync to External sync signal missing external sync signal disconnected or out of range Initial memory lost Power on set
222. cted MODE If the mode is set to PROG pressing ENTER while the cursor is on the user defined entry will select the custom waveform for the phase shown in the top right corner of the display If the MODE is set to either VIEW option the waveform data under the cursor will be displayed when the ENTER key is pressed Press the ENTER key again to return to the WAVEFORMS menu November 2005 63 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 4 2 8 ADVANCE MEAS Menu iX Series only This entry in the MENU 2 screen displays the HARMONICS TRACE ANALYSIS screen which is covered in section 4 This field can be used in lieu of the MEAS key to directly bring up the advanced measurements screens 4 2 9 APPLICATIONS Menu RPPLICRTIONS MICSSTD RTCA DO 16 C PREVIOUS SCREEN 1666 11 4 Figure 4 18 APPLICATIONS menu The APPLICATIONS menu provides access to the optional application specific pre programmed test sequences Since these test sequences are optional this menu may have no choices if none of the options are installed The following entries may be found in the APPLICATIONS menu Entry Description MIL STD 704 Test sequence for MIL standard 704 AC and DC tests OMNI OPTION This entry selects the OMNI control menu The OMNI option provides a lumped reference impedance for use in IEC 1000 3 3 Flicker test applications The iX Series also provides programmable impedance so in most cases the OMNI option is not requir
223. cted phase in the following sequence 1 28V System e 18Vfor 15 msec e Linearly increase to 22V in 85msec Stay at 22V for 75msec before returning to 28V 2 270V System 200V for 10 msec Linearly increase to 250V in 30msec e Stay at 250V for 135msec before returning to 270 The lt key backspace will terminate the test at any time 9 8 1 8 3 Abnormal Test From the MIL704 DC MENU scroll to the ABNORMAL DC entry using the up and down cursor keys Press the ENTER key to select the ABNORMAL screen The screen will appear as shown in Figure 9 61 RBNORMRL DC TEST PREUIOUS SCREEN Figure 9 61 Abnormal Test Screen The Abnormal Test has the following tests 1 OVER VOLTAGE 2 UNDER VOLTAGE The above tests can be selected by scrolling to the highlighted selection using the up and down cursor keys and the ENTER key to start the selected test OVER VOLTAGE This test will change the output voltage for the selected phase in the following sequence 1 28V system e 50V for 50msec e The voltage gradually decays with time to 31 5 volts by the following equation V 31 38 0 93 t for 0 05 tx 7 758 e Stay at 31 5V for 92 242 seconds before returning to 28V 2 270V system e 350 for 50msec e The voltage gradually decays with time to 290 volts by the following equation V 289 6 3 02 t 0 05 lt 1 lt 7 55 e Stay at 290V for 92 45 seconds before returning to 270 i Series iX Series November 200
224. current Figure 14 n a Refer to ABD0100 1 8 par 2 4 2 3 2 2 E7P0 DCINRUSH i Series iX Series November 2005 317 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 9 13 ABD Option Related Error Messages The CIGui32 program will monitor the power source regular bases for any run time errors If an error is reported by the power source any test step execution will be aborted Possible errors and error sources are No Description Potential cause 2 Current Limit Fault EUT may require more current than the programmed current limit setting This is possible on constant power loads during reduced voltage low line type test steps If the power source is set to Constant Voltage CV mode the output will trip off when the current limit is exceeded and a Current Limit fault is generated In Constant Current CC mode the output voltage will be reduced to reduce the current to the set limit In this case no error message will be generated 113 Undefined Header Generally caused by a communication problem between the PC and the power source If the RS232 interface is used it may be necessary to increase the command delay setting of the CIGui32 program See Interface Settings topic of CIGui32 on line help If these problems persist try using the GPIB interface instead Requires National Instruments GPIB controller 15 Slew exceeds dwell The power source transient system was programmed to slew to a voltage and or frequency
225. cy 400 400 430 650 800 Table 9 11 Abnormal Voltage Maximum This test will set the voltage and frequency to levels defined by Figure 9 10 for 5 minutes The test will be repeated for Group1 only as indicated in Table 9 10 for voltage and Table 9 11 for frequency All Groups will repeat the test using Table 9 10 for the voltage setting and Table 9 10 or Table 9 11for the frequency setting The lt key backspace will terminate the test at any time 144 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments VOLT MIN This test will set the voltage and frequency to levels defined by Table 9 11 for 5 minutes The test will be repeated for Group1 only as indicated in Table 9 11 All Groups will repeat the test using Table 9 11 for the voltage setting and Table 9 10 for the frequency setting The lt key backspace will terminate the test at any time VOLT UNDER This test will drop the output voltage from 115 volts to 60 volts for 7 seconds VOLT SURGE This test requires 180 volts output If the power source is set at the low voltage range the high voltage range will be selected before the test starts At the end of the test the AC source will be switched back to the low range The output voltage will surge to 180 volts for 100 ms followed by drop to 148 volts for 1 sec before it returns to 115 volts The key backspace will terminate the test at any time FREQUENCY TRANSIE
226. d this field will show N A not available MIL704D Indicates the presence of the MIL STD 704D test option If this option is installed this field will show ON If this option is not installed this field will show N A not available 1000 4 11 Indicates the presence of the IEC 1000 4 11 test option If this option is installed this field will show ON If this option is not installed this field will show N A not available IEC1000 4 13 Indicates the presence of the IEC 1000 4 13 test option If this option is installed this field will show ON If this option is not installed this field will show N A not available i Series iX Series November 2005 73 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 4 2 12 OUTPUT IMPEDANCE Menu iX Series only OUTPUT IMPEDANCE RESISTIVE 358mi SET MINIMUM SET IEC1S88 3 3 Figure 4 25 OUTPUT IMPEDANCE menu The iX Series offers programmable output impedance on selected models This allows the user to simulate line impedance conditions by programming resistive and inductive elements of the AC source s output impedance Models on which this function is available are 3001iX 5001iX 9003iX 15003iX Note On 9003iX MODE and 15003iX MODE systems programmable impedance function is only available in 3 phase mode of operation Alternative one of the available OMNI lumped reference impedance options may be used to increase the AC source output impedance for applications such as I
227. d to change the level for the selected range Also an individual range sweep is possible by selecting the desired range and selecting RUN RANGE from the RUN field The step size defines the inter harmonics sweep points Step size is fixed for the entire sweep range The STEP size can be changed when the test state is off This field will show the current inter harmonic frequency when the test is running An inter harmonic frequency can be selected using the shuttle To run a frequency without sweeping through the entire range a RUN POINT can be selected This field is used to report the resonant points if any after running the sweep test No editing is allowed in this field When the test is completed a display of harmonics current versus frequency plot is available To view the graph select the field and press the ENTER key November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments HARMONICS GROUP If the Harmonics group is selected the screen will appear as shown in Figure 9 29 The screen has the following parameters that are unique to the group 1 LEVEL 2 HARM NO 3 PHASE 4 PAUSE i Series iX Series IEC 1000 4 15 TESTS STATE 0F Figure 9 29 IEC 61000 4 13 Harmonics Sets the percentage level of the harmonic relative to the fundamental Each level is associated with harmonic number To change levels the test state must be off and user class must be selected Selecting harm
228. d frequency using the ClGui32 main screen Apply power by closing the output relay This can be done at a later stage or will be done automatically after prompting the operator when a test is started Open the MIL STD 704 Tables A F control screen from the toolbar of Applications menu Select the correct airframe directory or use the default MS704 RevF Select the correct Power Group table SAC through HDC Select a test from the test table displayed in the bottom part of this screen You can select a test by clicking on a row The selected row will be highlighted Switch to the Test Control tab middle tab along the top of the screen Verify that the test sequence and description shown in the table on the Test Control screen is indeed the desired test Click the Start button to initiate the test Observe the test progress monitor at the top of the window and observe the EUT Wait for test completion You can Abort a test in progress by clicking the Abort button Select the EUT Performance Measurements tab Right tab along top of the screen Click the Update Meas Button located in the top center of the screen This will initiate a measurement cycle Measurements in three phase mode may take some time to complete Use the tabs located along the top of the measurement tab Parameters Waveforms Curr Graph and Curr Spectrum to review the EUT data Any anomalies can be noted in the observations tab located on the Parameters screen This
229. d located below the START ABORT field Pressing the ENTER key while on the PAUSE field will suspend the transient execution Once suspended it can be resumed using the same field as the field changes to RESUME while the transient execution is suspended Suspending a transient may be useful when running slowly changing output transients to hold the output at a specific setting while observing the effect on the unit under test 4 7 9 Saving Transient List Programs When the AC source is turned off the transient list that was programmed is not automatically retained Thus if you turn the unit off you will loose your programmed transient list However transient programs may be saved in nonvolatile memory for later recall This allows multiple transient list programs to be recalled quickly without the need to enter all parameters each time Transient lists are stored as part of the overall instrument front panel setup in any of the available setup registers To save the transient list you created in the previous example proceed as follows SETUP REGISTERS RECALL REGISTER PREWIOUS SCREEN UIEH EDIT REG REGISTER 5 SAVED 1 Press the MENU key two times to bring up the MENU 2 screen 2 Move the cursor to the SETUP REGISTERS entry and press the ENTER key 3 The cursor will default to the SAVE REGISTER position Enter a number from 0 through 7 and press the ENTER key 4 Amessage will appear at the bottom of the screen indicat
230. d to a user defined file name A file dialog box will appear enabling selection of the directory and file name under which to store the contents of the test sequence data grid The ABD0100 1 8 file extension is automatically appended Print Prints a test report using MS Word format Only data for the presently selected test sequence is printed Note To print reports the MS Word report format selection must be made from the Main GUI Options menu Report Format menu before opening the ABD0100 1 8 test screen If not an error prompt will indicate that no supported report format is selected Exit Closes the ABD Transients test window Edit Cut Cuts the selected row from the Transient permutations data entry grid The data in the row cut is available for a Paste operation Copy Copies the selected row from the Transient permutations data entry grid Copied rows can be pasted to the same grid at a different location Paste Pastes a copied row from to the Transient permutations data entry grid Run Run selected test Stop Abort test in progress Help Opens this help file Save As 308 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 9 11 9 9 12 Test Description Files Creating Custom Tests The ABD option uses set of configuration files that contain the relevant test descriptions These files are contained in the ABD Dbase subdirectory of t
231. develops notify CALIFORNIA INSTRUMENTS at support Qcalinst com or its local representative giving full details of the difficulty including the model number and serial number On receipt of this information service information or a Return Material Authorization RMA number will be given Add the RMA number furnished to the shipping label Pack the instrument carefully to prevent transportation damage affix label to shipping container and ship freight prepaid to the factory CALIFORNIA INSTRUMENTS shall not be responsible for repair of damage due to improper handling or packing Instruments returned without RMA No or freight collect may be refused at California Instruments discretion Instruments repaired under Warranty will be returned either via prepaid surface freight or low cost airfreight at California Instruments discretion Instruments repaired outside the Warranty period will be returned freight collect Ex Works CALIFORNIA INSTRUMENTS 9689 Towne Centre Drive San Diego CA 92121 1964 If requested an estimate of repair charges will be made before work begins on repairs not covered by the Warranty DAMAGE IN TRANSIT The instrument should be tested when it is received If it fails to operate properly or is damaged in any way a claim should be filed immediately with the carrier The claim agent should obtain a full report of the damage and a copy of this report should be forwarded to us by fax or email Fax 858 677 0940 Email support Qc
232. displays the AC power source settings that are in effect on the right hand side Available power group selections are SAC TAC SVF TVF and SXF for AC products and LDC and HDC for DC products The table shown at the bottom of this tab shows the available test sections that can be selected This table matches the test tables of the MIL STD 704 test standard Test Control This tab provides information on the test sequence that is presently selected and also contains the execution controls It shows the progress of any test that is executing EUT Performance This tab may be used to display EUT performance data as measured by the i Series iX Series November 2005 259 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Tab Description Measurements power source s advanced data acquisition system If the source used does not support advanced measurement function such as waveform capture and FFT some of the information in this tab may not be displayed In addition to the three tab controls the left pane of the 704 window contains a set of output on off control buttons and a print button The on off buttons may be used to open or close the output relay of the power source at any time If the output relay is opened during a test run the test is automatically aborted when the operator clicks on the Off button The ON button will be shown in red while the output relay is closed The Off button is shown in green if the output rel
233. djust the resistive output impedance using the shuttle until the measured output is as close as possible to 400 mOhm Make sure the correct phase is selected or use the PHASE key if not Do the same with the IMP REACT FS field Note that the adjustment range for R is 0 to 100 for L is 0 to 300 If there is not enough range in the full scale calibration coefficient for either resistive or inductive portion it may be necessary to tweak the adjustment pots on the iX controller These pots were originally adjusted at the factory and normally do not have to be adjusted again The Full Scale calibration coefficients should have enough adjustment range Double check the connections and phase measurements if this is not the case to make sure the measurement readings you get are indeed correct If itis necessary to adjust the pots see Table 6 7 for the corresponding pot designators The top cover has to be removed to access these pots They are located along the top edge of the controller board s Adjustments for phase A are on the phase A CPU board 5100 707 adjustments for phase B and C are on the phase B C board 7000 722 Repeat steps 2 through 10 for phase B and C Phase Board Assembly R resistive Xl inductive Phase A CPU 5100 707 R121 R122 Phase B 7000 722 R112 R111 Phase C 7000 722 R114 R115 Table 6 7 Programmable Z adjustment pots Definitions Vu Measured RMS voltage under no load V Measured RMS voltage und
234. e 20 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 3 6 3 RS232C Serial Interface Connector J18 Table 3 4 RS232C Connector RxD Receive data TxD Transmit data DTR Data Terminal Ready e RTS Request to Send 8 N C To connect the 5001iX to a PC s 9 pin DB9 serial port a special RS232 cable is required A 6 foot 2 meter long cable CI P N 7000 263 1 is supplied in the iX Series ship kit The wiring diagram for this cable is shown below in case longer cable has to be constructed Alternatively a generic straight thru DB9 male to DB9 female cable can be used to extend the supplied cable DB 9 PC DB 9 AC Source Pin Pin Direction Description 1 1 output reserved 2 2 input Receive data RxD 3 3 output Transmit data TxD 4 4 output Data Terminal Ready DTR 5 5 Signal Ground input Data Set Ready DSR 7 7 no connect 8 L 8 E no connect 9 9 output reserved Figure 3 2 RS232C Cable for PC Connection wiring diagram 3 6 4 Option J58 This connector is reserved for control of the EOS option Do not connect anything else to this connector i Series iX Series November 2005 21 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 3 6 5 Function Strobe Trigger Out J22 31 J22 14 A function strobe output is available on the System Interface connector This open collector output may be used to trigger external equipment when volt
235. e 3 3 Remote Sense 20 Table 3 4 RS232C Connector sil eed Idee reduc dore dp tee dene eds inde deeds 21 T ble 5 1 Logic Board LED S ierit Rte eni tme ct ERA eene 109 Table 6 1 Output Calibration Table 1 cri reiten ea snes me eed sede dade od aspe ct d dudes 116 Table 6 2 Calibration Load For Each 117 Table 6 3 Measurement Calibration 119 Table 6 4 Gain 120 Table 6 5 Current Limit Calibration 1 cocer e ine ee teret e Rn ee oed eene 120 Table 6 6 GPIB addresses for impedance 121 Table 6 7 Programmable Z adjustment 122 Table 6 8 Formulas to calculate 122 Table 7 1 Basic 125 Table 7 2 Auxiliary Power Supply Fuse 129 Table 8 1 Replaceable Parts en iet red e tete bek uere ed Ree Dee snc ec de Dee ct d enter 131 IECIT DAZU E 132 Table 9 1 Normal Voltage and Frequency 136 Table 9 2 Normal Voltage and Frequency 136 Table 9 3 Normal Voltage Unbalance
236. e 80 position Note When using the Cigui32 Windows GUI program to run IEC 61000 4 11 tests select the EOS1 tap setting on the IEC 61000 4 11 test screen to match the toggle switch position The GUI has no way to determining the switch setting on its own If set correctly the Cigui32 program will use the EOS when the correct dip level is programmed in the voltage dips data grid November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 4 6 4 EOS3 70 80 Tap setting change Second generation EOS3 units are equipped with both 70 80 output tap The default EOS3 configuration shipped from the factor is set to the 70 tap This is the most commonly used dip level for product standards However Edition 2 0 of the IEC 61000 4 11 test standard does allow for a 80 dip level for which the alternate tap setting may be used If testing for 80 dips is required the EOS3 must be reconfigured This can only be done by removing the top cover and changing the connections on the three transformer taps inside the EOS3 one for each phage As such this configuration change should be avoided as much as possible Should a configuration change be required follow the procedure outlined below 1 5 Remove all input power from the EOS3 first Make sure the 15001iX is turned off Then disconnect the output of the 15003iX power source from the EOS input With the 53 completely disconnected remove the top cover by
237. e PROGRAM 2 screen If this field is changed from RANDOM to 90 the inrush current can be captured under worst case conditions In this case the voltage should be programmed to 0 volt before triggering the acquisition using the START field Note When using the SET VOLT trigger source the output relay MUST be closed to generate a trigger If the output is open the acquisition will be armed when the START ENTER key is pressed but will wait for the trigger event Closing the output relay will generate the trigger event If the output relay was already closed when the START ENTER key is pressed the trigger will occur immediately i Series iX Series November 2005 91 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 4 6 3 3 Trigger delay The trigger delay field allows the user the set the amount of pre or post trigger data that should be used when positioning the data acquisition window with respect to the trigger moment POST TRIGGER DELAY positive trigger delay value means the acquisition window is delayed by the amount of time specified In this case the actual trigger moment itself is no longer present in the acquisition buffer This situation is shown in Figure 4 37 where a 20 ms trigger delay is used after triggering on phase 180 The fundamental frequency of the output is 50 Hz The trigger point is indicated by the dashed line It occurs on the first 180 degree point that occurs after the user presses the ENTER key while on
238. e of this option requires the following e i iX Series Power Source with firmware version 2 1 or higher e 704 option Options installed are listed on unit s serial tag e Windows XP 2000 PC with RS232C or National Instruments GPIB controller interface California Instruments recommends the use of the GPIB interface for best performance e CIGui32 Windows software revision 1 25 or higher Provided on CI P N CIC496 CD ROM or available for download from California Instruments website Table of Contents 704 Option Manual Section 9 8 2 1 General 9 8 2 2 Test Coverage 9 8 2 3 Specific Test Limitations and Discrepancies 9 8 2 4 General Test Procedure 9 8 2 5 Initial Setup 9 8 2 6 CIGui32 704 Control Window 9 8 2 7 704 Menus 9 8 2 8 704 Test Selection 9 8 2 9 704 Test Control 9 8 2 10 EUT Performance Measurements 9 8 2 11 Test Description Files Creating Custom Tests 9 8 2 12 Test Tables 9 8 2 13 704 Option Related Error Messages 9 8 2 1 General The 704 option supports MIL STD 704 revs A B C and F voltage and frequency immunity tests in either of the AC or DC mode This option can only be used in conjunction with the provided ClGui32 Windows application software only due to the amount of selections and data presentation involved As such these tests require the use of a PC running Windows XP 2000 and cannot be operated from the front panel The 704 option is based MIL STD 704 Department of Defense Interface Standard Aircraft
239. e problem with the unit has not been isolated contact the factory for assistance i Series iX Series November 2005 129 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 7 4 6 Disassembly Procedure 130 Disconnect mains power to the source and wait 10 minutes to allow the capacitors to discharge before attempting to disassemble the unit Remove the top cover unplug P7 from the current limit board and unplug the fan from the AC logic board connector Then carefully unplug the AC logic board from the AC and the DC power boards The AC logic board can then be lifted from the unit Using 5 16 inch socket driver remove the four bolts that hold the AC power module heatsink There is one bolt at each corner Carefully remove all the hardware from the unit The AC power module can now be unplugged from the input output board and removed from the unit The DC DC module can be unplugged by first removing the two nuts holding the clamp that secures the heatsink to the chassis See Figure 6 1 Care must be taken in unplugging the two connectors P4 and J12 To reassemble reverse the above procedure taking care to ensure J12 on the DC DC board and J8 on the AC board are properly mated This may entail supporting the connector from behind with a screwdriver November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 8 Top Assembly Replaceable Parts TOP ASSEMBLY No 7000 439 4 3001i 7000 439 1 3001iX 7000 438 3 5001i
240. e programmed value 300 VAC Range DC Zero Program the output to the 300 VAC Range by pressing and selecting the 300 Range with the shuttle Go the OUTPUT CAL screen select the VOLT ZERO parameter and adjust the output to 0 0 0 005 VDC 300 VAC Range Volt Full scale Program the output to 240 0 volts and 60 Hz Go to the OUTPUT CAL screen and adjust VOLT FS parameter for an output of 240 0 0 05 volts 300 VAC Range Volt HI Freq Program the output to 240 0 volts and 400 Hz Go to the OUTPUT CAL screen and select the V HI FREQ parameter Adjust the output with the shuttle for an output of 240 0 0 05 volts Repeat the 60 and 400 Hz adjustments until the output is within 0 05 volts of the programmed value 300 VDC Range Volt Zero Press the PROGRAM key Select the MORE option to go to the PROGRAM 2 screen Highlight the VOLT MODE parameter and select the DC Mode by moving the shuttle Press the PROGRAM key and program the 300 Range and 0 0 volts Go to the OUTPUT CAL screen by pressing the MENU key three times followed by pressing the ENTER key to display the OUTPUT CAL screen Adjust the VOLT ZERO for 0 0 0 005 volts DC 300 VDC Range Full scale Program 240 0 volts Go to the OUTPUT CALIBRATION screen and adjust the VOLT FS parameter for an output voltage of 240 0 0 05 volts DC 300 VDC Range Full scale Program 240 0 volts Go the OUTPUT CALIBRATION screen and adjust the VOLT FS parameter for an output voltage of 24
241. e unit ID and serial number self check routine screen with follow and finally the system will display the main Menu 1 screen with the cursor highlighting the Program selection Press ENTER and the unit will display the Program selection screen Set the following output parameters output voltage 150 volts frequency 60 Hz voltage range 150 volts and current limit 20 0 amps 3001iX 33 3 amps 5001iX Press ENTER Enable the output by pressing the output on off button below the front panel display screen The green LED next to the button will light green when the output is on The output should be a clean 150 volt AC sinewave having less than 1 distortion Apply full load to the output of the source and verify the output remains within 296 of the initial 150 volt value The output should still be clean and the distortion should still be less than 1 at 60 Hz Using the PROGRAM screen set the output current limit value to 17 amps The system should go into current limit Return the current value to 20 0 amps 3001iX or 33 3 amps 5001iX and press the output on off button to turn the output off Disconnect the load Repeat steps 4 through 7 but set the output for the following output voltage 300 volts output range 300 volts current limit 10 0 amps 3001iX or 16 7 amps 5001iX For step 7 the current limit value can be set to 8 amps In the unlikely event the power source does not pass the functional t
242. ect the external sense lines and select the EXT sense mode in this field This will compensate for voltage drop in the cables to the load The measurements are also taken at the sense points so the external sense mode should be used for best measurement results This field is only accessible if the phase mode option is installed It allows the number of output phases to be toggled between single and three phase mode In single phase mode all power is available on phase A The Mode iX option is available to route all power to a single output terminal pair November 2005 69 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 4 2 11 3 INITIAL SETUP menu 70 INITIAL SETUF 1 INITIAL SETUP 2 oe EVAL FREQ 123 8Hz VOLT RANGE 158u OL MODE CC 2 8 PHASE 8 8 VOLT MODE AC OUTPUT RELAY 0FF PREVIOUS SCREEN MORE REY 5 SLREER MORE INITIAL SETUP 3 VOLT SENSE INT CLOCK MODE EAT HAVE GROUP NO OUTPUT LAST Figure 4 23 INITIAL SETUP menus Any time the AC source is powered up the output will reflect the values stored as the INITIAL setup values This allows the unit to be powered up in known state at all times The INITIAL values can be set in the INITIAL SETUP menus The initial setup be used to power up the AC source with the output on and high voltage present at the output For normal situations this is not recommended due to the potential danger to the operator It is recommended that the initial voltage be
243. eculion Loop on Step y VALE Selected step 000 00 00 00 000 00 00 05 Revert to Steady T eHow Pioren c State on Abort Em 2 1 low unit to stabilze 2 est 2 1 Allow unit to stabilize 2 Test 3 1 Allow unit to stabilze 2 Test 4 1 Allow unit to stabilize 2 Test5 1 Allow unit to stabilze 2 Test 1 Allow unit to stabilze 2 Test 7 1 Allow unit to stabilze 2 1 Test 8 User Data Testedbyr Test department Emp fot Hunf 5 wl Test Site sil Press Test sequence load completed Select Test Control tab to view test program Figure 9 14 160 Option Test Control Screen The Test Control tab in the 160 test window is used to display and execute a selected 160 test This tab contains the following controls and displays Control Display Description Execution Controls The Start and Abort buttons are used to start and stop the selected test step The execution mode that will be used is determined by the Execution Options setting The same can be accomplished using the Run menu entries When operating in Single Step or Loop mode make sure the desired test step is selected in the test sequence table at the bottom of this tab as this will be the one used by the program Execution Options The execution options determine the mode of operation when the Start button is clicked Available execution modes and settings are Execute all In this mode all steps in the test s
244. ed For the i Series the OMNI impedance is available as an option If the OMNI option is installed this screen allows the impedance to be ENGAGED or BYPASSED RTCA DO 160 Test sequence for RTCA DO160 commercial aviation AC and DC tests 1000 4 11 Test sequences for IEC 1000 4 11 Voltage Dips and Variations test standard IEC 1000 4 13 Test sequence for IEC 1000 4 13 Harmonics and Interharmonics test standard 64 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 4 2 10 SETUP REGISTERS Menu SETUP REGISTERS SH RECRLL REGISTER 5 PREVIOUS SCREEN VIEW EDIT REG 5 REGISTER 5 SAVED Figure 4 19 SETUP REGISTERS menu The SETUP REGISTERS menu allows the user to store and recall complete instrument setups including transient program lists A total of 8 non volatile setup registers is available numbered sequentially from 0 through 7 The following entries can be found in the SETUP REGISTERS menu Entry Description SAVE REGISTER Save present instrument setup to register number selected by the user The numeric data entry keypad should be used to enter number between 0 and 7 Once the ENTER key is pressed all settings are saved message will appear at the bottom of the screen to confirm the save operation RECALL REGISTER Recall instrument setup from a register number selected by the user The numeric data entry keypad should be used to enter number betw
245. edit eor Ee aae a aaa edaran 249 Figure 9 60 Transient Menu cen alee Mane ge e bee de Re E aie 250 Figure 9 61 Abnormal Test Seren miiia iiie iae iietra dead ble dn 251 Figure 9 62 Emergency Test n esten tine can terere nn Pe ERR Esa d eI kake canals 252 Figure 9 63 704 Option Test Selection 259 Figure 9 64 704 Option Test Control 263 Figure 9 65 704 Option EUT Measurement Data 266 Figure 9 66 ABD Option Test Selection Screen 295 Figure 9 67 ABD Option Test Control 299 Figure 9 68 ABD Option EUT Measurement Data 302 Figure 9 69 ABD0100 1 8 Switching Transient Control 305 Figure 9 70 ApplicatioriSCreern eiecti Hem Piin 319 Figure 9 71 Watt Hour Meter Screen recessed ede duces date da deinde Lea dee da deine 319 Figure 9 72 WH Meter Screen With Function 320 i Series iX Series November 2005 ix User Manual Rev Z California Instruments List of Tables Table 3 1 Wire SIZOS 5 ss tee dee ip eet ape svi o Ep de ved esL EEG E eve cid sette d edd uere qn depend 17 Table 3 2 System Interface Connector 92 18 Tabl
246. ee Figure 6 1 Internal Top View of DC DC Converter Board If one or more IGBT s show a low resistance reading do not replace the fuse but return the module to the factory for exchange or repair If a low resistance is not found replace the fuse and carry on with the check procedure 7 4 5 Power on Troubleshooting Using the LED s If no fuses were blown or if fuses were found blown but all the IGBT s checked out as good replace blown fuses and reconnect power to the unit WARNING Do not touch any parts inside the unit during this test as they will be live and dangerous Always wear safety glasses Auxiliary PS Turn the main breaker on and check the LED s on the AC logic board see Figure 5 4 The 15V DS2 red 15V DS3 green and the 24V DS7 amber LED s located at the top right of the board should all be lit The 8V logic supply LED DS4 red should be lit On the AC power board see Figure 5 5 the three gate drive power supply lights DS5 green DS6 amber and DS7 red should all be lit If any of these LED s are not lit then the most likely cause is a blown fuse These logic power fuses are all located on the DC DC board Switch the unit off at the front panel breaker and remove the input power Wait 10 minutes to allow the capacitors to discharge before attempting to disassemble the unit Proceed to paragraph 7 4 6 for disassembly instructions Remove the AC power board and locate the P C mount fuses F2 through F10 see
247. ee calibration screens for each phase Refer to the calibration section in this manual for details on performing a calibration The following calibration factors are available from this menu Entry Description VOLT FS Full scale voltage output calibration factor V HI FREQ High frequency full scale voltage output calibration factor VOLT ZERO Zero offset voltage calibration factor PHASE OFST Phase offset calibration factor Compensates for phase shift caused by AC amplifier IMP REAL FS Full scale resistive output impedance calibration factor IMP REACT FS Full scale inductive output impedance calibration factor IMP REAL MIN Minimum resistive AC source output impedance The AC source has an output impedance greater than zero This value determines the minimum resistive component of the AC source output impedance IMP REACT MIN Minimum reactive AC source output impedance The AC source has an output impedance greater than zero This value determines the minimum inductive component of the AC source output impedance 76 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 4 3 Output Programming 4 3 1 Set the Output Output parameters are all set from the PROGRAM screen 1 Use the MENU key and select the PROGRAM entry 2 Press the ENTER key to bring up the PROGRAM menu or 2 Use the PROG key to directly bring up the PROGRAM menu There are two methods for programming output parameters IMMEDIAT
248. een 0 and 7 Once the ENTER key is pressed all settings are recalled message will appear at the bottom of the screen to confirm the recall operation VIEW EDIT REGISTER The View Edit entry can be used to display the contents setup register before it is recalled After the user enters register number to view or edit and presses the ENTER key the PROGRAM screen will appear All parameters that will be changed by recalling the register will be blinking If ENTER is pressed again the register will be recalled and the new values take effect To edit the register content change all parameters that need to be changed Pressing ENTER will save the new values and make them active i Series iX Series November 2005 65 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 4 2 11 UTILITY Menus UTILITY 1 UTILITY 2 GPIB RS232 SETUP INITIAL SETUP CONF I GURAT I ON ELAPSED TIME VOLTACURR CONTROL LIMIT SETUP 1 ANGLE 4 PREVIOUS SCREEN Figure 4 20 UTILITY menu The UTILITY menu provides access to less frequently used setup items There is no connection between the various entries in the UTILITY menu other than there is no other logical place to put them The following entries can be found in the UTILITY menu Entry Description UTILITY 1 GPIB RS232 SETUP This entry provides access to the setup parameters for either the IEEE 488 bus or the RS232C bus All parameters are saved in non volatile me
249. efore unit is not in remote issuing GPIB commands state Command protected Command is locked Some commands are supported by out the unit but are locked out for protection of settings and are not user accessible 210 Trigger error Problem with trigger Unit could not generate trigger for system transient execution or measurement Trigger ignored Trigger request has Trigger setup incorrect or unit was not been ignored armed when trigger was received Check transient system or measurement trigger system settings Init ignored Initialization request Unit was told to go to armed state but has been ignored was unable to do so Could be caused by incorrect transient system or measurement acquisition setup Parameter error Parameter not Incorrect parameter or parameter allowed value Check programming manual for allowable parameters Setting conflict Requested setting Check other settings E g trying to conflicts with other program a DC offset while in AC setting in effect mode Data out of range Parameter data Check programming manual for outside of allowable allowable parameter values range Too much data More data received Check programming manual for than expected number of parameters or data block size Illegal parameter Parameter value is Check programming manual for value not suppored correct parameters Lists not same length One or more transient All lists must be of same length or lists program
250. elay This can be done at a later stage or will be done automatically after prompting the operator when a test is started Open the RTCA DO 160 Revision E control screen from the Applications menu or click on the 160 toolbar icon Select the correct airframe directory or use the default D0160 RevE Select the correct Power Group Test Category Select a test from the test table displayed in the bottom part of this screen You can select a test by clicking on a row The selected row will be highlighted Switch to the Test Control tab middle tab along the top of the screen Verify that the test sequence and description shown in the table on the Test Control screen is indeed the desired test Click the Start button to initiate the test Observe the test progress monitor at the top of the window and observe the EUT Wait for test completion You can Abort a test in progress by clicking the Abort button Select the EUT Performance Measurements tab Right tab along top of the screen Click the Update Meas Button located in the top center of the screen This will initiate a measurement cycle Measurements in three phase mode may take some time to complete Use the tabs located along the top of the measurement tab Parameters Waveforms Curr Graph and Curr Spectrum to review the EUT data Any anomalies can be noted in the observations tab located on the Parameters screen This information will be included in the test report Click on
251. elected or the rms capability for the waveshape selected on the phase or phases programmed The trigger delay field allows the trigger point to be positioned anywhere in the acquisition window A negative value will provide pre trigger information on data leading up to the trigger event The pre trigger delay can not exceed the length of the acquisition buffer 104 ms in single phase mode 312 ms in three phase mode A positive trigger delay positions the data window after the trigger event Positive trigger delays can exceed the length of the acquisition buffer in which case the trigger event itself will not be in the buffer any more The maximum value of the trigger delay is 1000 ms The default trigger delay value is 0 0 ms which puts the trigger event at the beginning of the acquisition window The START field is used to start a new acquisition run To start an acquisition place the cursor on the START field and press the ENTER key Once the ENTER key is pressed the display toggles to the data display mode selected in the VIEW field as Soon as the selected trigger event occurs To return to the HARMONICS TRACE ANALYSIS menu press the ENTER key while in the data display mode To change display modes without triggering a new acquisition make the desired changes in the menu and move the cursor to the VIEW field Once on the VIEW field press the ENTER key This will not trigger a new acquisition which means the original data is retained
252. electing the 120 volt range It may be operated from 230 volts by selecting the 240 volt range The 100 volt and 220 volt ranges are not active The selected range is the one that is marked on the upper left side of the selector card as the card is slid into the IEC 320 module The OMNI 1 37i 1 37iJ and 3 37i are designed to operate on either 115V or 230V AC power The input voltage is user selectable by orienting the input selector module inside the rear panel power entry module To change input voltage proceed as outlined below Note that attempting to operate the OMNI from an input range that does not match the actual AC power voltage may cause permanent damage to the unit 9 6 5 Voltage Range Configuration for the OMNI 1 37i 1 37iJ and OMNI 3 37i 9 6 5 1 226 To change input range 1 Remove power cord from input module 2 Pry cover loose with a small screwdriver 3 Pull out fuse holder prying with a screwdriver will be necessary 4 Orient the red fuse holder so that the desired voltage shows through the window It is necessary that the fuse always sits on the top side of the fuse holder when it is re inserted into the module Likewise the shorting clip must always be on the bottom of the fuse holder For example if the input voltage is being changed from 115 to 230 the fuse holder must first be removed and then the clip and the fuse must swap location The fuse assembly can then be inserted back into the input module
253. election 9 8 1 7 AC MODE TESTS 9 8 1 7 1 Steady StateTest Scroll to the STEADY STATE AC entry using the up and down cursor keys Press the ENTER key to select the STEADY STATE screens The screen will appear as shown in Figure 9 54 STEADY STRTE2 RC TEST an STEADY STRTE1 RC TEST 6A i DISTORTION UL THU FREQUENCY UNBALANCE PHASE DIFFERENCE PREVIOUS SCREEN PREVIOUS SCREEN MORE Figure 9 54 Steady State Menu The MIL704 Steady state 1 and Steady state 2 screens have the following tests 1 VOLTAGE FREQUENCY VOLT UNBALANCE PHASE DIFFERENCE VOLT MODULATION FREQ MODULATION DISTORTION 0c 2 NM The above tests can be selected by scrolling to the highlighted selection using the up and down cursor keys and the ENTER key to start the selected test VOLTAGE This test will change the output voltage in the following sequence e 108V for 1 minute e 118V for 1 minute e 115V for 1 minute The lt key backspace will terminate the test at any time FREQUENCY 244 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments This test will change the output frequency in the following sequence 393 2 for 1 minute e 407 2 for 1 minute e 400 2 for 1 minute The key backspace will terminate the test at any time VOLT UNBALANCE This test will change the output voltage for the selected phase only in the following sequence e 112V for 1 minute e 118V for 1 minute e 115V for 1 minu
254. ement system can be triggered in different ways Trigger modes are available from both the bus and the front panel If the 488 or RS232C bus is used acquisitions may also be triggered from the transient list system Refer to the programming manual for details on this mode of operation 4 6 3 1 Trigger mode The following trigger modes are supported by the iX Series Single SINGLE Continuous CONT 4 6 3 2 Trigger source This mode causes the acquisition system to be armed only once The iX source waits for the user to press the ENTER key while on the START field As soon as the trigger event specified occurs data is acquired and the acquisition system is put in an idle state new user initiated START event must be given to trigger an new acquisition This mode is appropriate for capturing events that occur only once such as the inrush current when turning on a load This mode causes the trigger system to re arm itself after each trigger event Every time new trigger event occurs new data is acquired and the LCD display is updated No user intervention is required after the initial START event This mode is appropriate for capturing repetitive events or to monitor the source output continuously Display updates will occur about once per second Series offers choice of trigger sources in front panel operation mode The following trigger sources are available from the HARMONICS TRACE ANALYSIS TRIG SOU
255. en for harmonics and trace analysis measurements This subject is covered in the next chapter Measurements are always running in the background When the user selects a measurement screen for display the AC source first updates all the measurement parameters before displaying the requested screen This process may take up to a second Consequently pressing i Series iX Series November 2005 83 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments the MEAS key may not always bring up the selected screen immediately There will be perceptible delay This will prevent the screen from appearing with invalid or blank readouts The measurement method for voltage and current will depend on the power source operating mode The following table shows the return value type rms or average and method of coupling when the measurement command is initiated with a different extension at various operating modes DC or AC DC Measurement Operating Mode Extension and Coupling AC DC AC DC AC rms rms rms DC rms rms average Coupling AC DC DC 4 5 3 Accuracy Considerations 84 Any measurement system has a finite accuracy specification Measurement specifications are listed in Section 2 When using the AC source for measurement purposes always consider these specifications when interpreting results Measurement inaccuracies become more pronounced as the signal being measured is at the low end of the measurement range This
256. ent SAC107 Total Voltage Distortion Voltage Distortion Factor 0 05 Apply for 30 mins FSAC107 SAC108 DC Voltage Component 1 Positive DC Offset 115V RMS 10V DC Apply for 30 mins FSAC108 1 2 Negative DC Offset 115V RMS 10V DC Apply for 30 mins FSAC108 2 SAC109 Normal Voltage Transients 180V RMS to 80V RMS 1 Overvoltage Transients Peak voltage 180V RMS Table SAC109 3 AA GG FSAC109 1 2 Undervoltage Transients Low voltage 80V RMS Table SAC109 3 HH LL FSAC109 2 3 Combined Transient 180V RMS to 80V RMS Table SAC109 3 MM FSAC109 3 4 Repetitive Normal Voltage Transient Test 90V RMS to 140V RMS Run transient for 30 mins FSAC109 4 SAC110 Normal Frequency Transients 375 Hz to 425 Hz 1 Overfrequency Transients High Frequency 425 Hz Table SAC110 3 AA DD FSAC110 1 2 Underfrequency Transients Low Frequency 375 Hz Table SAC110 3 EE HH FSAC110 2 3 Combined Transient 375 Hz to 425 Hz Table SAC110 3 II FSAC110 3 SAC201 Power Interrupt OV for 50 msec Table SAC201 2 A L FSAC201 Abnormal Steady State Limits for Voltage and SAC301 Frequency 100V RMS to 125V RMS 380 Hz to 420 Hz Apply for 30 mins FSAC301 SAC302 Abnormal Voltage Transients 45V RMS to 180V RMS 1 Overvoltage Transients Peak voltage 180V RMS Table SAC302 3 AA GG FSAC302 1 2 Undervoltage Transients Low voltage 45V RMS Table SAC302 3 HH NN FSAC302 2 3 Combined Transient 45V RMS to 180V RMS Table SAC302 3 FSAC302 3 SAC303 Abnormal Frequency Transients 320 Hz to 480 Hz Table SAC303 3 AA EE FSAC303 Em
257. equence will be executed steps sequentially until the end of the table is reached Single Step Runs only the selected test step When operating in Single Step mode make sure the desired test step is selected in the test sequence table at the bottom of this tab before clicking on the Start button Loop on Step In this mode the same step will be executed repeatedly until the operator clicks on the Abort button In this mode the Complete test progress status bar may run past its maximum and will no longer update as the total test time is determined by the operator now and not the program Revert to When selected the output of the power source will be set back to Steady State the steady state settings in effect before the start of the test when 160 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Control Display Description on Abort the operator aborts a test Normally the output of the source at the end of a test run is determined by the settings in the test sequence file loaded Options This section contains additional options that can be set by the operator as needed The following options are available Auto Acquire When set this option causes the GUI program to initiate an EUT EUT Data performance data measurement sequence automatically at the after end of a test normal mode or test step single step mode execution Show Phase For three phase EUT
258. equires Additional Equipment TVF107 Total Voltage Distortion 400 1 115V RMS 400 Hz nominal settings oltage Distortion Factor 0 05 Apply for 30 mins FTVF107 400 1 360 1 115V RMS 360 Hz nominal settings oltage Distortion Factor 0 05 Apply for 30 mins FTVF107 360 1 600 1 115V RMS 600 Hz nominal settings oltage Distortion Factor 0 05 Apply for 30 mins FTVF107 600 1 800 1 115V RMS 800 Hz nominal settings oltage Distortion Factor 0 05 Apply for 30 mins FTVF107 800 1 TVF108 DC Voltage Component 400 1 1400 Hz Positive DC Offset 115V RMS 10 DC offset Apply for 30 mins FTVF108 400 1 400 2 1400 Hz Negative DC Offset 115V RMS 10 DC offset Apply for 30 mins FTVF108 400 2 360 1 360 Hz Positive DC Offset 115V RMS 10 DC offset Apply for 30 mins FTVF108 360 1 360 2 360 Hz Negative DC Offset 115V RMS 10 DC offset Apply for 30 mins FTVF108 360 2 600 1 600 Hz Positive DC Offset 115V RMS 10 DC offset Apply for 30 mins FTVF108 600 1 600 2 600 Hz Negative DC Offset 115V RMS 10 DC offset Apply for 30 mins FTVF108 600 2 800 1 1800 Hz Positive DC Offset 115V RMS 10 DC offset Apply for 30 mins FTVF108 800 1 800 2 800 Hz Negative DC Offset 115V RMS 10 DC offset Apply for 30 mins FTVF108 800 2 TVF109 Normal Voltage Transients 400 1 400 Hz Overvoltage Transients Peak Voltage 180V RMS Table TVF109 2 FTVF109 400 1 400 2 400 Hz Undervoltage Transients Low Voltage 80V RMS Table TVF109 2 FTVF109 400 2 400 3 400 Hz Combined Transient 180V to 80
259. er Group Test Category Phase Phase B PhaseC Mode C 115V 380 E50Hz A NF 230V 360 650H2 C AICFETIBV AQHz A CF 230v 400H2 AC C AWF 115V 360 800H2 WF 230V 360 800H2 Volts RMS 0 0 n a n a Current Limit 16 6 n a n a Freq Hz Phase Angle 7 0 0 n a n a 400 0 B NBPT 28V DC 2 Other 28V DE swe Subiect i Comment File Ref Normal Operating Conditions ac 16 5 1 1b 1 1 Phs Voltage and Frequency 200V to 244V 390Hz to 410H Apply for 30 mins each test EACF230 VFNI 16 5 1 1c 1 3 Phs Voltage and Frequency 200V to 244V 390Hz to 410H Apply for 30 mins each test EACF230 Emergency Operating Conditions ac 16 5 1 1b 2 1 Phs Vokage and Frequency 200V to 244V 350Hz to 440H Apply for 30 mins each test EACF230 VFE 18 5 1 1c 2 3 Phs Voltage and Frequency 200V to 244 350H2 to 440H Apply for 30 mins each test EACF230 VFE Normal Operating Conditions Voltage Modulation ac Vamp 0 36V to 2 48V Mrate Figure 16 1 EACF230 1851 3 Frequency Modulation 4 9 Hz to 0 292 Figure 16 2 EACF230 0 16 5 1 4b Momentary Power Interruptions Table 16 1 Equipment with Digital Cec EACF230 165 1 4c Momentary Power Interruptions Other Equipment 1551 5 Normal Trans
260. er load Measured RMS current F Source frequency 50 Hz Phase angle shift between load and no load conditions Record phase angle from phase meter under NL and L condition and determine phase shift Formulas to calculate R and L component of output impedance R Vu cos A Vi I X sin A L X 1 2 Pi F Table 6 8 Formulas to calculate R and L November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 6 6 4 Current Monitor Offset Adjustment 1 Program the 300 Vac range zero volts and turn the Output ON 2 the current limit board monitor TP5 with respect to TP1 Adjust R23 on the input output board for 0 0 mVDC 0 5 mVDC CAUTION Use extreme care in adjusting R23 Do not touch any connections on the Input Output Board Assy Dangerous voltages exist on most exposed connections i Series iX Series November 2005 123 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Figure 6 3 Adjustment Location 124 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 7 Service 7 1 Cleaning The exterior of the power source may be cleaned with cloth dampened with a mild detergent and wrung out Disconnect mains power to the source before cleaning Do not spray water or other cleaning agents directly on the power source 7 2 General This section describes the suggested maintenance and troubleshooting procedures The trou
261. er to paragraph 9 3 4 for access to the screen The following conditions have to be met before running the test 1 Prior to the test set the nominal voltage frequency and phase angle The frequency must be 50 or 60 Hz Function must be set to sine wave Select EUT CLASS 2 3 or USER The default parameters for the USER class are identical to those for class 3 If USER class is selected the level and phase parameters can be edited For Class 1 EUT s the USER class must be used as well In this case set the levels to those called out in the test document Set the STATE to ON It will take few seconds to initialize data required to perform the test If it is desired to run all tests select ALL form the RUN parameter with the shuttle knob and press the ENTER key The tests will run in the following sequence FCURVE OSWING SWEEP HARM IHARM MCURVE Note The test for class 3 will take about 25 minutes class 2 slightly less 5 While the test is running the ABORT and PAUSE selection is accessible from the RUN field by rotating the shuttle If it is desired to run a specific group the group must be selected from the group screen Also the RUN GROUP must be selected prior to the start of test To run an individual range applicable for sweep and individual harmonics only the desired range and the RUN RANGE mode must be selected prior to the start of the test In case the harmonics group is selected RUN RANGE will run the h
262. ergency Steady State Limits for Voltage and SAC401 Frequency Perform Test SAC102 SAC501 Tests N A to AC Utilization Equipment SAC601 Power Failure Single Phase OV for 7 seconds Table SAC601 2 A D FSAC601 SAC602 Power Failure No test done so numbers coincide 270 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev 2 California Instruments Test No Section Subject Test Limits Comment File Ref SAC603 Phase Reversal Phase reversal done physically FSAC603 Table TAC Test No Section Subject Test Limits Comment File Ref TAC101 Three Phase Load and Current Harmonic Measurements 115V RMS 400 Hz FTAC101 102 Steady State Limits for Voltage Including Unbalance and Frequency 1 Balanced Phases 108V to 118V RMS 393 to 407 Hz Apply for 30 mins each test FTAC102 1 2 Unbalanced Phases 108V to 118V RMS 3V Unbalance Apply for 30 mins each test FTAC102 2 TAC103 oltage Phase Difference Phase 116 to 124 degrees Apply for 30 mins each test FTAC103 ITAC104 Voltage Modulation 1 115V Nominal Test 115V RMS 2 5V RMS mod Apply for 10 mins FTAC104 1 2 109V Nominal Test 109V RMS 2 5V RMS mod Apply for 10 mins FTAC104 2 3 117 Nominal Test 117V RMS 2 5V RMS mod Apply for 10 mins FTAC104 3 TAC105 Frequency Modulation 1 400 Hz Nominal Test 400 Hz 4 Hz mod App
263. errupt OV for 50 msec Table TAC201 2 A L BTAC201 TAC301 Abnormal Steady State Limits for Voltage and Frequency 100V RMS to 125V RMS 375 Hz to 425 Hz Apply for 30 mins BTAC301 2 Abnormal Voltage Transients 45V RMS to 180V RMS 1 Overvoltage Transients Peak voltage 180V RMS Table TAC302 3 AA GG BTAC302 1 2 Undervoltage Transients Low voltage 45V RMS able TAC302 3 HH NN BTAC302 2 3 _ Transient 45V RMS to 180V RMS able TAC302 3 OO BTAC302 3 TAC303 Abnormal Frequency Transients 320 Hz to 480 Hz able TAC303 3 AA EE BTAC303 TAC401 Emergency Steady State Limits for Voltage and Frequency 102V to 124V RMS 360 to 440 Hz Apply for 30 mins each test BTAC401 TAC501 Tests N A to AC Utilization Equipment 601 Power Failure Three Phase OV for 7 seconds able TAC601 2 A D BTAC601 284 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Test No Section Subject Test Limits Comment File Ref TAC602 One Phase and Two Phase Power Failures 1 One Phase Power Failures for 7 seconds Table TAC602 2 A F BTAC602 1 2 Two Phase Power Failures for 30 mins Table TAC602 2 G J BTAC602 2 TAC603 Phase Reversal N A to Rev B Table LDC Test No Section Subject Test Limits Comment File Ref LDC101 Load Measurements 28V DC BLDC101 LDC102 Steady S
264. ers coincide SAC104 Voltage Modulation 1 115V Nominal Test 115V RMS 2 5V RMS mod Apply for 10 mins CSAC104 1 2 109V Nominal Test 109V RMS 2 5V RMS mod Apply for 10 mins 5 104 2 3 117V Nominal Test 117V RMS 2 5 RMS mod Apply for 10 mins 5 104 3 SAC105 Frequency Modulation 1 400 Hz Nominal Test 400 Hz 5 Hz mod Apply for 10 mins 5 105 1 2 1395 Hz Nominal Test 395 Hz 5 Hz mod Apply for 10 mins 5 105 2 3 05 Hz Nominal Test 405 Hz 5 2 mod Apply for 10 mins 5 105 3 Requires Additional SAC106 Voltage Distortion Spectrum Equipment SAC107 Total Voltage Distortion Voltage Distortion Factor 0 05 Apply for 30 mins ICSAC107 SAC108 DC Voltage Component 1 Positive DC Offset 115V RMS 10V DC Apply for 30 mins 5 108 1 2 Negative DC Offset 115V RMS 10V DC Apply for 30 mins CSAC108 2 SAC109 Normal Voltage Transients 180V RMS to 80V RMS 1 Overvoltage Transients Peak voltage 180V RMS Table SAC109 3 AA GG 5 109 1 2 _ Undervoltage Transients Low voltage 80V RMS Table SAC109 3 HH LL ICSAC109 2 3 Combined Transient 180V RMS to 80V RMS Table SAC109 3 MM ICSAC109 3 4 Repetitive Normal Voltage Transient Test 90V RMS to 140V RMS Run transient for 30 mins CSAC109 4 ISAC110 Normal Frequency Transients 375 Hz to 425 Hz 1 Overfrequency Transients High Frequency 425 Hz Table SAC110 3 AA DD 5 110 1 2 Transients Low Frequency 375 Hz Table SAC110 3 EE HH 5 110 2 3 Co
265. es from the Applications menu of the CIGui32 main screen or click on the ABD button in the toolbar The ABD Tables control window will open selecting the power group that most closely matches the steady state values set It may still be necessary to select the desired power group first however Also verify that the selected power group in the ABD screen is the correct one for the EUT being tested The ABD tests can be operated from the ABD test screen This screen contains three main tabs located along the top edge of the window The following tabs are available Click on the tab name for additional help on how to use each tab Tab Description Test Selection This tab allows the operator to select the library of test files to use Select Airframe and the relevant Power group It also displays the AC power source settings that are in effect on the right hand side Available power group selections are A B and C for AC products and D and E for DC products The table shown at the bottom of this tab shows the available test sections that can be selected This table matches the test tables A through E of the ABD0100 1 8 test standard Test Control This tab provides information on the test sequence that is presently selected and also contains the execution controls It shows the progress of any test that i Series iX Series November 2005 295 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Tab Description is execut
266. escription mode Arbitrary waveform can be used in AC mode if this capability is supported by the power source Dwell Dwell time in seconds Loop Repeat count for each step Default is 1 Link Number of subsequent rows that are linked to this step This function is required to implement complex transients that require multiple steps with zero time skew When set to value other than blank or 1 subsequent rows are considered part of the same test step for single step or loop on step execution modes Comment comment about the specific test step November 2005 301 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 9 9 ABD EUT Performance Measurements T Airbus ABD0100 1 8 Test Tables E File Edit Run Help x Par Output Test Selection Test Control EUT Performance Measurements Parameters Waveforms Curr Graph Cur Spectrum Update Meas Off Phs Phs B Phs C Hz Volt RMS V wusw oof oof Cur RMS Al ons oof 00 App Power o0 500 50 foo Inrush Current 006 o oo Limits Pass Fail Power Factor ow 000 000 0 20 0 20 Pass Lem Current Distortion 000 oof Pas Abort Read Meas Data from File Observations User Data Tested by Test department EUT Temp 25 Hum 955 Comment Test Site Press Test Completed Figure 9 68 ABD Option EUT
267. est refer to the calibration procedure in Section 6 or call California Instrument s customer satisfaction department for further assistance i Series iX Series November 2005 27 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 28 Figure 3 7 Connection For Single Power Source 5001iX i 3001iX i HI OUTPUT 25 CLK LEK OUTPUT LE IEEE 488 t OPTION RS232 Le 3 PHASE 15 INPLIT POWER CND 5001 POWER SOURCE HI 1 t8 LEK IEEE 488 l OFTON RS232 L1 2 SINGLE PHASE INPUT POWER OND 3001ix POWER SOURCE November 2005 i Series Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Figure 3 8 Functional Test Setup RANGE LOAD A 14 6 OHM 5KW LO RANGE LOAD AN 3 6 OHM SKW QSCILLOSCOPE OR DISTORTION ANALYZER LO TT HI DVM LO R LOAD ON OFF SWITCH CLK LCK SENSE OUTPUT A LO IEEE 488 C S SYSTEM N NPUT L L1 3 PHASE T T 208 240 OR ES i 400 480 CAE OND POWER INPUT OPTION R5232 UNIT UNDER TEST 5001iX i i Series iX Series November 2005 29 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Figure 3 9 Single Phase 10000 VA System 10001iX i OUTPUT
268. for 10 mins FSXF105 1 2 59 75 Hz Nominal Test 59 75 Hz 5 Hz mod Apply for 10 mins FFSXF 105 2 3 60 75 Hz Nominal Test 60 75 Hz 5 Hz mod Apply for 10 mins FSXF105 3 SXF106 Voltage Distortion Spectrum Requires Additional Equipment SXF107 Total Voltage Distortion oltage Distortion Factor 0 05 Apply for 30 mins FSXF107 SXF108 DC Voltage Component 1 Positive DC Offset 115V RMS 10V DC Apply for 30 mins FSXF108 1 2 Negative DC Offset 115V RMS 10V DC Apply for 30 mins FSXF108 2 SXF109 Normal Voltage Transients 152V RMS to 31V RMS 1 Overvoltage Transients Peak voltage 152V 5 Table SXF109 3 A D FSXF109 1 2 Transients Low voltage 31V RMS Table SXF109 3 E H FSXF109 2 3 Combined Transient 130V RMS to 70V RMS Table SXF109 3 I FSXF109 3 4 Repetitive Normal Voltage Transient Test 100V RMS to 128V RMS Run transient for 30 mins FSXF109 4 SXF110 Normal Frequency Transients 59 Hz to 61 Hz 1 Overfrequency Transients High Frequency 61 Hz Table SXF110 3 A B FSXF110 1 2 Underfrequency Transients Low Frequency 59 Hz Table SXF110 3 C D FSXF110 2 3 Combined Transient 59 Hz to 61 Hz Table SXF110 3 E FSXF110 3 SXF201 Power Interrupt for 50 msec Table SXF201 2 A L FSXF201 100V RMS to 128V RMS 59 5 Hz to 60 5 SXF301 Abnormal Steady State Limits for Voltage and Frequency Hz Apply for 30 mins FSXF301 SXF302 Abnormal Voltage Transients 50V RMS to 180V RMS 1 Overvoltage Transients Peak voltage 180V RMS Table SXF302 3 A E FSXF302 1 2
269. g Pulse transients and triggers i Series iX Series November 2005 95 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 4 7 5 List Transients 96 List transients provide the most versatile means of controlling the output in specific manner as they allow series of parameters to be programmed in timed sequence The following figure shows a voltage output generated from a list The output shown represents three different AC voltage pulses 160 volts for 33 milliseconds 120 volts for 83 milliseconds and 80 volts for 150 milliseconds separated by 67 millisecond zero volt intervals Transient list programming is supported from the front panel and may be accessed by selecting the TRANSIENTS entry in the MENU 1 screen Transient lists can also be programmed over the bus Refer to the SCPI Programming Manual for more information about programming List transients and triggers over the bus Figure 4 40 List Transients The list specifies the pulses as three voltage points point 0 2 and 4 each with its corresponding dwell point The intervals are three zero voltage points point 1 3 and 5 of equal intervals The count parameter causes the list to execute twice when started by a single trigger To set up this type of transient list proceed as follows 1 Press the PROG key to bring up the PROGRAM 1 menu 2 Move the cursor to the VOLTAGE field and enter 0 Volt Press ENTER to confirm your setting 3 Make sure you a
270. gle of the dip Note After each individual run a 10 second delay is inserted i Series iX Series November 2005 183 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 2 5 2 VOLTAGE VARIATION TESTS From the IEC1000 4 11 Main Menu screen shown in Figure 9 18 scroll to the VOLTAGE VARIATIONS entry using the up and down cursor keys Press the ENTER key to select the VOLTAGE VARIATIONS menu The screen will appear as shown in Figure 9 20 IEC 1000 4 11 VOLTAGE VARIATIONS NOMINAL ut Figure 9 20 Voltage Variation screen RUN ALL The RUN ALL selection will cause the following automated test sequence suggested by the standard to be run EE Start V in 96 of V of Delay between Ur Ur steps 5 0 1 VSweep 10 2 40 2 Hod 40 11 40 0 40 2 10 2710 0 18 VSwep 0 2 100 10 Table 9 20 Voltage Variations Test Performed During RUN ALL The user can change the NOMINAL Ut voltage for this test The RUN ALL Command line will change to ABORT during the test Selecting ABORT and pressing the ENTER key will terminate the test at any time and the output voltage will return to the nominal value 184 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments RUN SINGLE RUN SINGLE command will run the test once The Variation test is defined by the REDUCE TO FALL TIME HOLD TIME and RISE TIME parameters These parameters mu
271. gle on the iX source go to PROGRAM 2 screen and select PHASE Typically 25 30 of phase angle will put the line input and the source output in phase but the exact angle to program can only be determined by monitoring the iX source output and the line input voltage and comparing the waveforms 9 7 3 XLS Option 236 The External Line Sync option XLS is housed in a small metal enclosure that interfaces to the power source using a system interface cable This module has a pass through connector for the System interface so this interface remains available for other purposes The external line sync module provides two input voltage ranges a low range from 80 V to 250 V RMS and a high range from 250 V to 500 V RMS The AC line voltage can be connected using standard sheathed banana jacks or a screw terminal strip The XLS option provides full safety isolation from input to interface connector The AC line to synchronize the source output to can be the same as the one feeding the source itself or a different one altogether for greater flexibility November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 7 4 Mechanical Dimensions 5 50 139 70 8 i 3 00 76 20 EN 66 16 76 4 75 120 65
272. gram is supplied with generic DO160 RevE set of test sequences Power Group Test Table A library can contain up to twelve power group test tables labeled ACF 115 ANF115 AWF115 ACF230 ANF230 AWF230 ADC28 BDC28 ZDC28 ADC14 BDC14 or ZDC14 These table names correspond to the Power Groups identified in the RTCA DO 160 standard The operator cannot select a group that is not supported by the present mode of operation of the power source Thus if the power source is in AC mode an error message will be displayed when trying to select a DC group Operating modes such as AC or DC must be changed from the main GUI screen The 160 screen can remain open while switching back to the main screen Upon return to the 160 screen the relevant power groups can be selected Available power groups are A CF 115V 400 Hz CF AC Power tests A NF 115V 360 650 Hz VF AC Power tests A WF 115V 360 800 Hz VF AC Power tests A 28 VDC Power Tests B 28 VDC Power Tests Z 28 VDC Power tests A CF 230V 400 Hz CF AC Power tests A 14 VDC Power Tests B 14 VDC Power Tests Z 14 VDC Power tests The operator needs to determine what the relevant power group selection is for the unit under test EUT When switching power groups the table data shown at the bottom of this tab will be updated to reflect the new selection The first test section of the table will automatically be selected when swi
273. gure A or Figure B of Appendix 1 In case Figure B is selected the parameter table to be used can be selected as well Some choices may not be available depending on the mode of operation of the power source For examples Table 1 2 applies only to DC transients and will be grayed out if the power source is in AC mode Mode changes can only be made from the main GUI screen Note that the size of the Transient permutations table will vary depending on the Figure and Table selection made in this control Type No For Figure A Transparency Transients This drop down list control contains drop times in msec Select the desired drop time from this list Rise and fall times will be set to 1 msec Each transient will be run 5 times with a 1 second delay between transients per ABD0100 1 8 Appendix 1 For Figure B Switching Transients This drop down list contains the numbers from the selected table 1 1 1 2 or 2 Select the number for the transient you want to run The GUI will automatically load all available permutations for the selected table entry For tables 1 1 and 1 2 these numbers are Arabic For table 2 they are Roman numerals Unom Sets the nominal voltage at which these transients are to be run Recommended nominal voltages to use per Appendix 1 are shown here Network Type Voltage applied at equipment terminals Unom 115 VAC 104 Vrms 26 VAC 23 Vrms Conventional DC 25 5 Vdc NBPT DC 24 Vdc
274. hapes with higher crest factors Reduce programmed RMS value Check dwell times in transient list settings Increase dwell time or change slew rate for affected parameter Wait till transient execution is completed or abort transient execution first Close relay before attempting operation E g transient execution requires output relay to be closed Trans duration less Dwell time below Increase dwell time to at least 1 then 1msec minimum or 1 msec msec Clock and sync must be internal Operation not possible with external clock Switch to internal sync Default 20 Input buffer full Too much data Break up data in smaller blocks received EOS Fault Hardware error reported by EOS option Waveform harmonics Harmonic contents of limit user defined wave shape is too high and could damage amplifier output stage November 2005 Cycle power on EOS to reset error If error persist contact Contact Cl service department at support calinst com for repair Reduce harmonic content or reduce fundamental frequency programmed 325 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments ALC or Impedance Conflict between ALC Turn off ALC to use programmable must be off and programmable impedance Turn off programmable impedance mode impedance to use ALC Table 10 1 Error Messages 326 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 11 Index
275. harmonic amplitudes are shown in absolute volts or amperes This mode does not apply to the TRACE view display mode and is ignored when this mode is selected Sets the horizontal time axis for the TRACE view display mode The field can range from 4 ms to 104 ms in single phase mode or 12 ms to 312 ms in three phase mode This parameter is ignored when the TABLE or BAR view display mode is selected This field sets the trigger mode for the acquisition Available options are SINGLE single shot acquisition or CONT continuous acquisition In SINGLE shot mode the acquisition is triggered once each time the START field is selected and the ENTER key is pressed The selected trigger source is used to determine the trigger point Once the acquisition has been triggered the data are displayed and do not change until the next acquisition is triggered This mode is most appropriate for single shot events such as start up currents In the CONT mode acquisitions occur repeatedly and the data is updated on screen after each trigger occurs This provides a continuous update of the data and is most appropriate for repetitive signals The trigger source selects the event that will trigger a measurement acquisition Available options for this field are IMM immediate PHASE A or SET VOLT The IMM trigger source causes the acquisition to trigger immediately when the ENTER key is pressed on the START field Essentially this is an asynchronous trigge
276. he CIGUI32 application directory The contents of these tables is defined by the ABD Structure Tbl X ini configuration files located in ABD Dbase directory references the relevant table The test description files used to perform specific test are listing in the last column labeled Test File These files must be present in the ABD Dbase directory or the user directory For customer created tests these file names can be renamed as needed as long as they are correctly referenced in the ABD Structure Tbl X ini configuration files Tests can be customized as needed by editing these table configuration and test sequence files do so create new subdirectory under the application directory To access any new sub directory from within the ABD test window the directory name must be added to the ABDUserTestLibraries txt file located in the CIGui32 application directory This is a simple text file listing all test description directories available Example ABDUserTestLibraries txt file content A350 DBase Dummy Dir Entry Directories listed will be available for selection from the AirFrame selection in the ABD Test Setup screen To facilitate creating new test directories it is easiest to create a copy of the ABD Dbase first and rename it as required Test Tables The tables shown on the next few pages list the test sections covered by the ABD option Where relevant the numbering used matches that of the
277. his capability is supported by the power source Volt C Test voltage for phase output C in Vrms or Vdc depending on mode VSlew C Voltage slew rate in V sec Func C Waveform function Default is SINE for AC mode and DC for DC mode Arbitrary waveform can be used in AC mode if this 264 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Control Display Description capability is supported by the power source Dwell Dwell time in seconds Loop Repeat count for each step Default is 1 Link Number of subsequent rows that are linked to this step This function is required to implement complex transients that require multiple steps with zero time skew VWhen set to value other than blank or 0 subsequent rows are considered part of the same test step for single step or loop on step execution modes PhsB Phase angle of phase B only visible if phase angle is changed PhsC Phase angle of phase only visible if phase angle is changed Comment comment about the specific test step i Series iX Series November 2005 265 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 8 2 10 704 EUT Performance Measurements Mil Std 704 Test Tables Iof xi File Edit Run Help Pwr Output Teast Selection Test Control EUT Performance Measurements On 7 EE f is Waveforms Curr Graph Curr Spectrum Update Meas Settings 1 EUT Category
278. his test will impose 400Hz frequency component to the output voltage The test will last for 2 minutes The level of the ripple is as follows 1 28V system 1 5V 2 270V system 6 0V The lt key backspace will terminate the test at any time 9 8 1 8 2 Transient Test From the MIL704 DC MENU scroll to the TRANSIENT DC entry using the up and down cursor keys Press the ENTER key to select the TRANSIENT screen The screen will appear as shown in Figure 9 60 TRANSIENT DC TEST PREVIOUS SCREEN Figure 9 60 Transient Menu The Transient Test has the following tests 1 HIGH VOLTAGE 2 LOW VOLTAGE HIGH VOLTAGE This test will change the output voltage for the selected phase in the following sequence 1 28V System e 50V for 12 5 msec e Linearly reduce to29V in 70msec e Stay at 29V for 92 5msec before returning to 28V 2 270V System e 330V for 20 msec e Linearly reduce to280V in 20msec e Stay at 280V for 135msec before returning to 270 Prior to the test a range change may take place if the power source is set for the low voltage range The lt key backspace will terminate the test at any time Note A range change will result in momentary loss of power to the EUT If this is not acceptable the power source must be left in high range at all times 250 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments LOW VOLTAGE This test will change the output voltage for the sele
279. ible fundamental frequency that can be programmed PHASE C Phase angle of phase C with respect to phase A in three phase mode If the AC source is a single phase model this field will shown 0 If the AC source is a split phase model this field will shown 180 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 4 2 11 5 CONFIGURATION SETUP screen The configuration setup screen is not a menu but only serves to inform the user of the software options installed in the AC source The cursor can be moved to any of the fields in this screen but none of these fields can be changed The following information is provided on this screen Entry Description NO OUTPUT iX Series only Displays the phase mode option SELECT indicates the phase mode option is installed and the user can select between single and three phase modes of operation The phase mode option is only available on the 15003iX model FIXED indicates the phase mode option is not installed and only single phase or three phase mode of operation is possible ADVANCE iX Series only For iX Series models this field is always set to ON to indicate the advanced capabilities for waveform generation and measurement analysis are present On i Series AC sources this field is always set to N A not available DO160D Indicates the presence of the RTCA DO160D test option If this option is installed this field will show ON If this option is not installe
280. ically at the after end of a test normal mode or test step single step mode execution Show Phase For three phase EUT s data for phases B and C can be B C data displayed as well In most cases the settings for all three phases are the same and there is no need to display them all as it takes up screen space However this is not the case for voltage imbalance tests This is a display feature only and has no effect on the actual test Note however that if the power source is in single phase mode settings for phase B and C will be ignored The phase mode of the power source can only be changed from the main GUI screen This area of the Test Control tab displays test execution status for each individual test step as well as the complete test The top section shows the complete test time and what part has been completed so far The bottom section shows the same information for the present test step The area at the top of the Test Control tab is used to display additional information about the selected test tab It is for information purposes only and has no effect on the actual test execution Table Header The table header is shown against a yellow background and shows the table from which this test sequence was selected Test Sequence Data Grid 300 The test sequence data grid displays the specific parameters used to program the power source This data implements the required tests The parameters are loaded for the
281. ide holdover storage energy to ride through line dropouts The AC power board takes the DC input and puts out isolated direct coupled AC power The DC bus is regulated at 250 volts for the 135 150 VAC output and 500 volts for the 270 300 VAC output The oscillator assembly generates the reference waveforms and provides frequency amplitude and impedance control The current limit board in conjunction with the oscillator board provides the current limit function The assemblies are described in more detail in the following paragraphs Refer to Figure 5 1 for an overall block diagram 5 3 Oscillator Assembly The oscillator assembly consists of three printed circuit board assemblies connected by ribbon cable The oscillator generates the sine wave signal setting the frequency amplitude and current limit level It also senses the output voltage to provide closed loop control of the output 5 3 1 CPU Phase Board 102 This board assembly A7 consists of the components for the DSP generating the input signal for the power amplifier programmable impedance and all of the memory In addition the waveform board contains the circuits for all measurements and remote sense The clock and lock circuit for 3 phase operation is also on this board assembly This board has several jumpers that are used to enable various option Refer to the following table for the options See Figure 5 2 JUMPER in out W3 W4 W5 6 w W8
282. ients 16 5 1 5 1 Normal Voltage Surge 320 to 140V 400 Hz 16 5 1 5 2 Normal Frequency Surge a 230 350Hz to 400Hz Voltage DC Content 16 5 1 7 1 Phs Voltage DC Content 0 2VDC Apply for 30 mins each test EACF230 DCO 16 5 1 7 3 Phs Voltage DC Content ac 0 2VDC Apply for 30 mins each test EACF230 DCO User Data Tested by Test department EUT 25 c Hum 95 Comment 0000 Testsits Figure 9 13 160 Option Test Selection Screen To access the 160 option select the RTCA DO 160 Revision E from the Applications menu of the CIGui32 main screen or click on the 160 button in the toolbar The 160 Tables control window will open selecting the last power group that was selected in previous instance It may still be necessary to select the desired power group first however Also verify that the selected power group in the 160 screen is the correct one for the EUT being tested The 160 tests can be operated from the 160 test screen This screen contains three main tabs located along the top edge of the window The following tabs are available Click on the tab name for additional help on how to use each tab Tab Description Test Selection This tab allows the operator to select the library of test files to use Select Airframe and the relevant Power group It also displays the AC power source settings that are in effect on the right hand
283. ies iX Series User Manual Rev Z Controls California Instruments The following controls and displays are available in this window Control Display Description Start button Start selected transient test This button will be disabled while a test is running and re enabled at the end of a test Abort button Phase Checkbox Aborts a test in progress This button will be disabled unless test is running and enabled as soon as a test is started The Phase selections may be used to include one or more or all phases in a test run Only phases with a check mark will be included in a test Phases that are not checked remain unchanged during the test Graph Preview This text field displays the currently selected Row from the Transient indicator permutations grid that is shown in the graph display in the lower half of the window Normally this is the row that is highlighted in the grid and or the row that is presently executing Output On Off Indicates the status of the output relay of the power source Normally the output relay should remain closed during and between tests To toggle the state of the output relay the main GUI screen must be used Test Selection i Series iX Series This section contains the settings and control to determine the type and duration of the transient tests to be run Figure This selection sets the type of transient to be run as either Table no conform Fi
284. ily by the capabilities of the power source used Tests that are outside the hardware capabilities of the power source used will not be enabled and cannot be selected For these tests additional equipment may be required as indicated The extent of coverage of the 704 option as implemented on the IX Series platform is shown in the table below Tests marked with n x generally require additional hardware to be used Tests marked N A are not applicable to the corresponding table Tests marked with a V are covered by at least one rev of the MIL STD 704 No Description Table Table Table Table Table No Description Table Table LDC HDC Load and Current 101 Harmonic Load Measurements Measurements Steady State Limits e 102 for Voltage and Steady State Limits for J E Voltage requency 103 Voltage Phase N A N A N N A 103 Voltage Distortion X X Difference Spectrum 104 Voltage Modulation Voltage Modulation Y 104 Total Ripple x X Normal Voltage pectrum Total Voltage Abnormal Steady State DC Voltage Abnormal Voltage Normal Voltage Emergency Limits for Normal Frequency Starting Voltage 201 Power Interrupt Power Interrupt 601 Power Failure Abnormal Steady 301 State Limits for Polarity Reversal Voltage and Freq Abnormal Voltage Transients Emergency Steady 401 State Limits for Voltage and Freq aa 254 November 2005 i Series iX Series
285. in Edition 2 0 This is an effort to normalize both 50 Hz and 60 Hz voltage variations Refer to Figure 9 21 and Figure 9 22 for an illustration of how these parameters affect the V RMS output under the different standard revisions Repeat 1 Falltime Holdtime Rise time Figure 9 21 EN 61000 4 11 Voltage Variation specification Edition 1 0 i Series iX Series November 2005 185 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments td Time for decreasing voltage ti Time for increasing voltage ts Time at reduced voltage gt Figure 9 22 EN 61000 4 11 Voltage Variation specification Edition 2 0 9 2 6 Using the CIGui32 Windows Program for IEC 61000 4 11 Testing EN IEC 61000 4 11 Voltage Dips Interruptions and Variations Test File Edit Run Help Test Setup Test Levels Operator Observations Test mode Unom v e Dips and Interruptions 230 0 2 Fnom 50 00 Hz Test Options Standard Revision p C Voltage Variations Include Peak Current test 0 000 1 61000 4 11 Ed 1 0 1994 Use only EOS option levels 61000 4 11 Ed 2 0 2004 EOS Hardware Setting Tap set to 70 8096 mL User Data Tested by Test department Temp 250 95 Comment Test Site Press Ready 05 26 2004 11 55 AM Figure 9 23 IEC 61000 4 11 GUI screen CIGui32 Windows control program will detect the presence of the 411 opti
286. inal settings 109V RMS 2 5V RMS mod Apply for 10 mins FSVF104 400 2 400 3 117V RMS 400 Hz nominal settings 117V RMS 2 5V RMS mod Apply for 10 mins FSVF104 400 3 360 1 115 RMS 360 Hz nominal settings 115V RMS 2 5V RMS mod Apply for 10 mins FSVF104 360 1 360 2 109V RMS 360 Hz nominal settings 109V RMS 2 5V RMS mod Apply for 10 mins FSVF104 360 2 360 3 117V RMS 360 Hz nominal settings 117V RMS 2 5V RMS mod Apply for 10 mins FSVF104 360 3 600 1 115 RMS 600 Hz nominal settings 115V RMS 2 5V RMS mod Apply for 10 mins FSVF104 600 1 600 2 109 RMS 600 Hz nominal settings 109V RMS 2 5V RMS mod Apply for 10 mins FSVF104 600 2 600 3 M417V RMS 600 Hz nominal settings 117V RMS 2 5V RMS mod Apply for 10 mins FSVF104 600 3 800 1 115V RMS 800 Hz nominal settings 115V RMS 2 5V RMS mod Apply for 10 mins FSVF104 800 1 800 2 109V RMS 800 Hz nominal settings 109V RMS 2 5V RMS mod Apply for 10 mins FSVF104 800 2 800 3 117V RMS 800 Hz nominal settings 117V RMS 2 5V RMS mod Apply for 10 mins FSVF104 800 3 SVF105 Frequency Modulation 400 1 115V RMS 400 Hz nominal settings 400 Hz 4 Hz mod Apply for 30 mins FSVF105 400 1 360 1 115 RMS 360 Hz nominal settings 360 Hz 4 Hz mod Apply for 30 mins FSVF105 360 1 600 1 115 RMS 600 Hz nominal settings 600 Hz 4 Hz mod Apply for 30 mins FSVF105 600 1 800 1 115 RMS 800 Hz nominal settings 800 Hz 4 Hz mod Apply for 30 mins FSVF105 800 1 SVF106 oltage Distortion Spectrum Requires Additional
287. ing EUT Performance This tab may be used to display EUT performance data as measured by the Measurements power source s advanced data acquisition system If the source used does not support advanced measurement function such as waveform capture and FFT some of the information in this tab may not be displayed In addition to the three tab controls the left pane of the ABD windows contains a set of output on off control buttons and a print button The on off buttons may be used to open or close the output relay of the power source at any time If the output relay is opened during a test run the test is automatically aborted when the operator clicks on the Off button The ON button will be show in red while the output relay is closed The Off button is shown in green if the output relay is open The report print function can be invoked by either clicking on the Print button or using the File Print menu If the GUI program is used in demo mode the DEMO MODE ONLY banner will be displayed in this area as well In Demo mode all test runs and all measurements are simulated This mode may be used to develop new test sequences off line but any run time errors will not be detected until executed with an actual power source 9 9 6 ABD Menus The top of the ABD window contains a standard Windows menu bar Available menus are Menu Sub Menu Description File New The selected clears all data from the Test Control data grid This operati
288. ing the File Print menu If the GUI program is used in demo mode the DEMO MODE ONLY banner will be displayed in this area as well In Demo mode all test runs and all measurements are simulated This mode may be used to develop new test sequences off line but any run time errors will not be detected until executed with an actual power source 9 1 2 7 160 Menus The top of the 160 window contains a standard Windows menu bar Available menus are Sub Menu New Menu File Description The selected clears all data from the Test Control data grid This operation is not normally recommended unless a complete new test sequence is to be entered manually Open Opens a specific test sequence file This menu may be used to directly select a test file without using the Test Selection table tab Save Saves the contents of the test sequence data grid to the selected test file Saves the contents of the test sequence data grid to a user defined file name A file dialog box will appear enabling selection of the directory and file name under which to store the contents of the test sequence data grid Prints a test report using MS Word format Only data for the presently selected test sequence is printed The test reports also include EUT performance measurement data Note To print reports the MS Word report format selection must be made from the Main GUI Options menu Report Format menu before opening the 160 test screen
289. ing that the front panel settings and the transient list data have been saved in the setup register you selected 100 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 5 Principle of Operation 5 1 General An explanation of the circuits in the 3001iX and 5001iX is given in this section Refer to Figure 5 1 for block diagram of the system Figure 5 2 shows the system interconnect OUTPUT CHOKE BRIDGE RECT CUR LIMIT BOARD 3 PHASE INPUT OSC Figure 5 1 AC Power System Block Diagram i Series iX Series November 2005 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 5 2 Overall Description Three or single phase input power is routed in from the back panel through an EMI filter and the circuit breaker to the input bridge rectifier The DC output from the bridge rectifier is smoothed by small amount of capacitance in order to keep the input power factor as high as possible This DC output supplies the converter on the DC power board The DC converter turns the unregulated rectified AC into smoothed isolated tightly regulated DC supply Also mounted on the DC power board is the auxiliary power supply The auxiliary power supply creates low voltages to operate the control logic board the oscillator board the power board and the fan The output of the DC converter is fed to two large electrolytic capacitors on the board These capacitors also prov
290. ing the system unsuitable for IEC 555 3 or IEC 1000 3 3 flicker testing Refer to the figures in this section for examples of proper external sense connections i Series iX Series November 2005 227 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Figure 9 42 Example Connections With OMNI 1 18i 7000 262 2 5 5 CABLE LOAD Lo INTERFACE OMNI 1 18i 115V 230V POWER INPUT gt OUTPUT L CLK LEK OUTPUT HI LO GND IEEE 488 SYSTEM L1 L1 12 2 3 PHASE Ls L3 POWER INPUT GND GND OPTION R5232 5001i 228 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z Figure 9 43 Example Connections With OMNI 3 18i BOB INTERFACE OMNI 3 18i 115 250 POWER INPUT PHASE PHASE B PHASE NEUTRAL f OUTPUT California Instruments SYSTEM CLK LCK IEEE 488 OPTION FS232 L3 7000 252 1 SYSTEM INTERFACE CABLE 5001iX i POWER SOURCE PHASE SYSTEM CLK LCK IEEE 488 OPTION RS232 SENSE z ojw gt OUTPUT HI Lo OND INPUT 1 L1 5 5001ix i POWER SOURCE PHASE B SYSTEM CLK LCK IEEE 488 OPTION PRS232 SENSE z o o gt OUTPUT
291. ins each test EACF230 VFABN1P 16 5 2 1e 3 Phs Voltage and Frequency ac 200V to 244V 370Hz to 430Hz ly for 5 mins each test EACF230 VFABN3P 16 5 2 2 Momentary Undervoltage ac 20V and 120V 400Hz Apply for 7 seconds each test EACF230 VUND 16 5 2 3 Abnormal Transients ac 16 5 2 3 1 Abnormal Voltage surge 296V to 360V 400Hz Figure 16 5 apply at 10 sec intervals 230 AVSUR 16 5 2 3 1 Abnormal Frequency transients to 230V 320Hz to 480Hz Figure 16 5 apply at 10 sec intervals EACF230 AFSUR i Series iX Series November 2005 175 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Table ADC14 Test No Section Subject Test Limits Comment File Ref 16 6 1 Normal Operating Conditions 16 6 1 1b Voltage Average Value dc 11 0V to 15 2V Apply for 30 mins each test EADC14 VAVG 16 6 1 Emergency Operating Conditions dc 16 6 1 1b 3 Voltage Average Value dc 9 0V Apply for 30 mins each test EADC14 VAVGEMER 16 6 1 Normal Operating Conditions dc 16 6 1 2 Ripple Voltage dc p p 0 3V to 8V Freq 10Hz to 200Hz Figure 18 2 EADC14 VRIP 16 6 1 3b Momentary Power Interruptions dc Table 16 3 Equipment with Digital Circuits EADC14_PINTB 16 6 1 3c Momentary Power Interruptions dc Other Equipment EADC14_PINTC 16 6 1 4 Normal Transients dc 16 6 1 4b Normal Voltage Surge dc 23 5V to 8 5V EADC14_NVSUR 16 6 2 Abnormal Operating Conditions dc 16 6 2 1 o
292. ion test screen refer to the on line help of the Cigui32 program available from the Help menu i Series iX Series November 2005 187 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 3 IEC 61000 4 13 Option 9 3 1 General The 413 option is capable of performing IEC 61000 4 section 13 Harmonics and inter harmonics low frequency immunity tests The tests are based on IEC 61000 4 13 2002 03 First Edition It is assumed that the user has copy of the test standard available This manual section only cover operation of the 413 option from the front panel of the iX Series power source Note 1 The initial release of the 413 option for the iX Series power sources was based on a draft version CDV of the IEC 61000 4 13 standard Minor changes were made between the CDV draft and the final released version Units with firmware revision 2 37 or higher conform to the official released IEC standard Units with older firmware conform to the draft version A firmware upgrade can be ordered through California Instruments service department by contacting support calinst com and requesting part number 463 Provide the model and serial number of the unit master unit in multi box systems to ensure the correct firmware is provided The firmware revision is displayed on the LCD screen immediately after power up for a few seconds It can also be queried over the bus using the IDN command Where relevant the requirement for the correct
293. key Place the cursor on the VOLTAGE entry Rotate the knob clockwise to increase the value counterclockwise to decrease the value PF gt The VOLTAGE field will be blinking to indicate a change in settings but the output remains unchanged e Place the cursor on the FREQ entry 6 Rotate the knob clockwise to increase the value counterclockwise to decrease the value 7 The FREQ field will be blinking to indicate a change in settings but the output remains unchanged 8 Press the ENTER key Both new voltage and frequency output values are now present at the output The unit has returned to immediate mode of operation until the SET key is pressed again 4 4 Waveform Management Series only The iX Series employs independent arbitrary waveform generators for each phase This allows the user to create custom waveforms In addition the iX offers three standard waveforms that are always available This chapter covers issues that relate to defining downloading and managing custom waveforms 4 4 1 Standard Waveforms 78 For many AC applications a sinewave shape is used The sinewave is one of the standard waveforms provided on the iX Series The standard sinewave is always available and is the default waveform at power on In addition to the sinewave two more standard waveforms are available square and clipped WAVEFORMS CLIP LEVEL 28 gt SINE GROUP SUARE MODE SPROG FREVIOUS SCREEN HARM4S
294. key is a shortcut to access the PROGRAM menu directly The PROGRAM menu is one of the most frequently used menus Thus instead of going through the main menu to reach the PROGRAM menu it can be accessed directly by pressing the PROG key The WAVE key is a shortcut to access the WAVEFORM screen directly The WAVEFORM screen is used to select a user defined arbitrary waveform iX Series only The MEAS key is a shortcut to access the MEASUREMENT screen directly The MEASUREMENT screen is one of the most frequently used screens Thus instead of going through the main menu to reach the MEASUREMENT screen it can be accessed directly by pressing the MEAS key The OUTPUT ON OFF key toggles the output relay on or off The state of the output relay is reflected by the green LED located directly to the left of the OUTPUT ON OFF key If the green LED is lit the output relay is enabled closed and the programmed output voltage is present at the output terminals If the green LED is off the output relay is open and both the HIGH and LO terminal of the output terminal block are disconnected from the power source In this mode the output is floating The ON OFF button provides a convenient way to disconnect the load without having to remove any wires November 2005 39 User Manual Rev Z 4 1 6 DECIMAL KEYPAD 40 PHASE SET California Instruments The PHASE key is used to select the phase on a three phase 9003iX or 15003iX unit
295. l appear as shown in Figure 9 55 TRANSIENT RC TEST 6A HIGH FREQUENCY LOW FREQUENCY PREVIOUS SCREEN Figure 9 55 Transient Menu The MIL704 Transient screen has the following tests 1 HIGH VOLTAGE 2 LOW VOLTAGE 3 HIGH FREQUENCY 4 LOW FREQUENCY The above tests can be selected by scrolling to the highlighted selection using the up and down key and the ENTER key to start the selected test HIGH VOLTAGE This test will change the output voltage for the selected phase in the following sequence e 180V for 10 msec e Linearly reduced to118V 78msec e Stay at 118V for 87msec before returning to 115 Prior to the test a range change may take place if the power source is set for the low voltage range The lt key backspace will terminate the test at any time Note A range change will result in momentary loss of power to the EUT If this is not acceptable the power source must be left in high range at all times LOW VOLTAGE This test will change the output voltage for the selected phase only in the following sequence e 80V for 10 msec e Linearly increase to108V in 70msec e Stay at 108V for 95msec before returning to 115 The lt key backspace will terminate the test at any time HIGH FREQUENCY This test will change the output frequency in the following sequence 425Hz for 1 sec 420Hz for 4 sec 246 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 410Hz for
296. l preserve the original data provided 318 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 10 WHM Option 9 10 1 9 10 2 9 10 3 General This section describes the WHM option for the i Series Power Source Specification All specifications are the same as the standard i iX Power Source specifications in addition to the following specifications Watt hour 0 6 000KW 0 01KWH 0 1 100Hz 0 02KWH 0 1 100 500 2 gt 6 000KW Times three of the above specification Local Operation From the Menu screen 2 select the APPLICATIONS SETUP 2 screen The screen will appear as shown in Figure 9 70 Use the up and down key to position the cursor to the WH METER field Press the Enter Key APPLICATIONS SETUP 2 1000 4 15 METER PERUIOUS SCREEN Figure 9 70 Application Screen The WATT HOURS METER screen shown in Figure 9 71 has the following fields WATT HOUR METER aH WATT HR amp 8 88B8KHH ETIME POWER 6 BBBKH FREVIOUS SCREEN CURR 6 8808 Figure 9 71 Watt Hour Meter Screen START This field will activate the watt hour measurements Moving the shuttle clockwise when the field is highlighted will activate the watt hour function and the field will change to STOP as shown in Figure 9 72 ETIME This field will accumulate the time in hours minutes and seconds WATT HR This field will accumulate the watt hour in KWH POWER Thi
297. l be assumed for the remainder of this chapter Five power groups are covered in the ABD0100 1 8 directive Group Description A 115VAC 400 Hz CF B 26 400 Hz 115VAC Variable Frequency VF 360 800 Hz D 28VDC Conventional DC network E 28VDC No Break Power Transfer NBPT DC network The required steady state output settings for each power group must be selected based on the type of EUT to be tested These settings can be made from the front panel of the Series power source or from the main CIGui32 control screen November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 9 5 CIGui32 ABD Control Window Airbus ABD0100 1 8 Test Tables E lol File Edit Run Help Pwr Output Test Selection Test Control EUT Performance Measurements Select Airframe D DBase Present Power Source Dutput Settings Power Group Test Table Phase Phase B Phase Mode F Table A 115V 400 Hz CF AC Power Volts RMS 1040 n a wa Output OH Table B 26V 400 Hz CF AC Power Current Limit A 37 0 n a n a Freq Hz Table C 115 360 800 Hz VF AC Power Phase Angle oo na 4000 Table D Conventional 28V DC Network Power Waveform Table E NBPT 28V DC Network Power SINE M Table Tests for AC equipment connected to 115V 400H2 supply source _ Tes Sectio Subject
298. laeti aec cere 94 5 Principle of Operation 101 5 4 General qe ee e e d pepe tarte ee ea 101 5 2 Overall Description 2 2 hse eee qud pude 102 5 3 Oscilator Assembly issiskiria 102 5 4 Gurrent Eimit Board 2 0 T T e me Ee E 105 5 5 Auxiliary Power aa Eite Donap iniedi rF 105 5 6 DC DC Power Converter nera eee e ee AEE E dne EE E E ERS 106 5 7 AC Control LOGIC iras iets hata e Ere N eter ele 106 58 AC Power Board peasair 109 5 9 Inp t OutpubBOard zan Dose eee UR e ee aae aA els debeo Dite 109 6 Calibration EE 113 6 7 Calibration Equipment awa ha ein cb iu eA 113 6 2 The Output Calibration Screen dte a edet ev e deo cue di cre a 113 6 3 The Measurement Calibration Screen rennen nter 113 6 4 Routine Output Calibration 2 114 6 5 Routine Measurement 117 6 6 2 ee eel ieee idee e dee nene 120 Psp S
299. left This data includes the harmonic number DC through 50 the absolute or relative amplitude depending on selected VIEW mode and the phase angle with respect to the fundamental The knob can be used to scroll through the display horizontally The UP and DOWN cursor keys have no effect in this display mode Arrow indicator points to me Clock harmonic for wet which readout is CURRENT INCR Figure 4 34 Scrolling through bar chart FFT data 86 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 4 6 2 Waveform Acquisition 4 6 2 1 The waveform acquisition mode allows voltage and or current data waveforms to be captured and displayed This mode is selected by choosing the VIEW TRACE mode in the HARMONICS TRACE ANALYSIS screen Voltage and current may be viewed separately or combined into a single display using the FUNCTION field Acquiring waveform data To perform a waveform acquisition on the output of the AC source proceed as follows 1 Press the MEAS button four times or until the HARMONICS TRACE ANALYSIS screen appears Move the cursor to the FUNCTION field and select VOLT CURR or BOTH Move the cursor to the VIEW field and select the TRACE display mode Skip the DATA MODE field as it only applies to the TABLE and BAR display modes Move the cursor to the SCALE field and select a horizontal time base value to allows you to see at least one cycle of the output waveform If the out
300. les may cause rounding errors if the period of the selected frequency setting is not an integer number of mss Thus for 50 Hz applications no rounding errors occur but for 60 Hz the 16 66 ms period will cause a rounding error when converted The Duration scale selection affects both the DURATION and END DELAY parameters Duration is the time the output voltage level will dwell at the GO TO VOLT level The DUR SCALE defines the time scale of this parameter in CYCLES or SECONDS This is the output voltage level at the end of the transient EVENT and after a time specified by the DURATION This is the time delay the voltage level will stay at the END VOLT level before it proceeds with the next transient event or completes the transient November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z FUNCTION REPEAT EVENT i Series iX Series California Instruments iX Series only This field can be used to select the waveshape to be used during this step of the transient sequence Each step can use different waveshape from the available library of 50 user defined waveforms or the three standard waveforms The output waveshape changes upon entry into each step and remains in effect for the duration of the step The default waveshape is always the SINE sinewave This is the number of times the SURGE SAG transient event will repeat before it will proceed to the next event or exit the transient program Note that the number of time
301. librated on the 135 volt range The same is true for the 270 and 300 volt range Figure 6 1 Test Equipment Hookup for Routine Output Calibration HI DIGITAL LG CLK L K e IEEE 488 OPTION 5252 3ofx i POWER SOURCE November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments The Output Calibration Table is a summary of the output calibration procedure The following text is a detailed explanation of the procedure 150 VAC Range DC Zero Press the PROGRAM key and select the 150 Range with the shuttle Program the output to 0 0 volts Go to the Output Calibration press the PHASE key for the phase to be calibrated and select the VOLT ZERO parameter Close the Output Relay by pressing the OUTPUT ON OFF key Monitor the DC output voltage with the external DVM With shuttle control adjust the output voltage for 0 0 0 005 VDC 150 VAC Range Full scale Press the PROGRAM key and program 120 0 volts and 60 Hz Go to the OUTPUT CAL screen by choosing the PREVIOUS screen selection Select the VOLT FS parameter and adjust the output to 120 0 0 05 volts 150 VAC Range Freq Press the PROGRAM key and program the output to 120 0 volts and 400 Hz Go the OUTPUT CAL screen and select the V HI FREQ parameter Adjust the output with the shuttle for an output of 120 0 0 05 volts Repeat the 60 Hz and 400 Hz adjustments until the output is within 0 05 volts of th
302. licked Available execution modes and settings are Execute all In this mode all steps in the test sequence will be executed steps sequentially until end of the table is reached Single Step Runs only the selected test step When operating in Single Step mode make sure the desired test step is selected in the test sequence table at the bottom of this tab before clicking on the Start button Loop on Step In this mode the same step will be executed repeatedly until the operator clicks on the Abort button In this mode the Complete test progress status bar may run past November 2005 299 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Control Display Description is maximum and will no longer update as the total test time is determined by the operator now and not the program Revert to When selected the output of the power source will be set back to Steady State the steady state settings in effect before the start of the test when on Abort the operator aborts a test Normally the output of the source at the end of a test run is determined by the settings in the test sequence file loaded Options This section contains additional options that can be set by the operator as needed The following options are available Test Status Test Description Auto Acquire When set this option causes the GUI program to initiate an EUT EUT Data performance data measurement sequence automat
303. llows variations on any of these tests to be made Any changes can be saved to a new file The standard provided test files are write protected however and should not be overwritten The following columns data fields are available in this table for each test step row Step number Sequential number from 1 through end of sequence Freq Test frequency in Hz FSlew Frequency slew rate in Hz sec Volt A Test voltage for phase output in Vrms or Vdc depending on mode VSlew Voltage slew rate in V sec Func A Waveform function Default is SINE for AC mode and DC for DC mode Arbitrary waveform can be used in AC mode if this capability is supported by the power source Volt B Test voltage for phase output B in Vrms or Vdc depending on mode VSlew B Voltage slew rate in V sec Func B Waveform function Default is SINE for AC mode and DC for DC mode Arbitrary waveform can be used in AC mode if this capability is supported by the power source Volt C Test voltage for phase output C in Vrms or Vdc depending on mode VSlew C Voltage slew rate in V sec Func C Waveform function Default is SINE for AC mode and DC for DC mode Arbitrary waveform can be used in AC mode if this capability is supported by the power source Dwell Dwell time in seconds Loop Repeat count for each step Default is 1 i Series iX Series November 2005 161 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments
304. lows 1 Scroll to the VOLT FREQ SWEEP STEP entry using the up and down cursor keys 2 Press the ENTER key to bring up the VOLT FREQ SWEEP STEP screen The VOLT FREQ SWEEP STEP screen has several data fields All data fields that are blank to the right of the equal sign must be filled or an error message will occur when trying to leave this screen The EVENT is the last data field to be filled Entering the event data field will cause the display to return to the TRANSIENT screen where a new selection can be made The VOLT FREQ SWEEP STEP screen has the following fields DURATION END FREQ END VOLT END DELAY FUNCTION REPEAT Series Series Duration is the amount of time the output voltage frequency will take to reach the END FREQ and END VOLT levels Duration will define the slew rate of the output voltage and frequency for the event duration of 0 seconds will cause the output voltage and frequency to reach their end value immediately This is the output frequency at the end of the transient event in Hz This is the output voltage at the end of the transient event in volts This is the time delay the output frequency and voltage will stay at END FREQ and END VOLT before proceeding with the next transient event or completing the transient iX Series only This field can be used to select the waveshape to be used during this step of the transient sequence Each step can use a different waveshape f
305. ltage Steady State dc 10 3V to 16 1V Apply for 5 mins each test EADC14 VABN 16 6 2 3 Momentary Undervoltage 6V Apply for 7 seconds each test EADC14 VUND 16 6 2 4 Abnormal Transients 16 6 2 4c Abnormal Voltage Surge 23 2V Figure 16 4 apply at 10 sec intervalsEADC14 AVSUR For more comprehensive DC Ripple tests refer to section 9 1 2 10 176 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Table BDC14 Test No Section Subject Test Limits Comment File Ref 16 6 1 Normal Operating Conditions dc 16 6 1 1b Voltage Average Value dc 11 0V to 15 2V Apply for 30 mins each test EBDC14 VAVG 16 6 1 Emergency Operating Conditions dc 16 6 1 1b 3 Voltage Average Value dc 9 0V Apply for 30 mins each test EBDC14 VAVGEMER 16 6 1 Normal Operating Conditions dc 16 6 1 2 Ripple Voltage dc Vp p 8V Freq 200 2 Figure 18 2 EBDC14 VRIP 16 6 1 3b Momentary Power Interruptions dc Table 16 3 Equipment with Digital Circuits EBDC14 PINTB 16 6 1 3c Momentary Power Interruptions dc Other Equipment EBDC14 PINTC 16 6 1 4 Normal Transients dc 16 6 1 4b Normal Voltage Surge dc 23 5 to 8 5V EBDC14 NVSUR 16 6 1 5 Starting Under Voltage Operation dc 5V min Slew for 35 sec EBDC14 VENG 16 6 2 Abnormal Operating Conditions dc 16 6 2 1 Voltage Steady State dc 10 3V to 16 1V Apply for 5 mins each test EBDC14 VABN
306. ltage Transients Low Voltage 200V DC Table HDC105 2 KK PP FHDC105 2 3 Combined Transients 200V to 330V DC able HDC105 2 QQ RR ET 4 Repetitive Normal Voltage Transient Test 215V to 315V DC Repeat transient for 30 mins FHDC105 4 HDC201 Power Interrupt for 50 msec Table HDC201 2 A L FHDC201 HDC301 Abnormal Steady State Limits for Voltage 240V to 290V DC pply each test for 30 mins FHDC301 HDC302 Abnormal Voltage Transients 180V to 350V DC 1 Overvoltage Transients Peak Voltage 350V DC Table HDC302 4 AAA FFF FS 2 Undervoltage Transients Low Voltage 180V DC Table HDC302 4 GGG LLL FHDC302 2 3 Combined Transients 180V to 350V DC Table HDC302 4 MMM NNN FHDC302 3 HDC401 Emergency Limits for Voltage 250V to 280V DC Apply each test for 30 mins FHDC401 HDC501 Starting Voltage Transients 115V to 280V DC Table HDC501 3 IFHDC501 HDC601 Power Failure for 7 seconds Table HDC601 2 A D FHDC601 HDC602 Polarity Reversal Polarity reversal done physically FHDC602 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Table SAG Test No Section Subject Test Limits Comment File Ref ISAC101 Load and Current Harmonic Measurements 115V RMS 400 Hz ICSAC101 SAC102 Steady State Limits for Voltage and Frequency 108V to 118V RMS 393 to 407 Hz Apply for 30 mins each test CSAC102 ISAC103 No Test Done so test numb
307. ly for 10 mins FTAC105 1 2 395 Hz Nominal Test 395 Hz 4 Hz mod Apply for 10 mins FTAC105 2 3 05 Hz Nominal Test 05 Hz 4 Hz mod Apply for 10 mins FTAC105 3 AC106 oltage Distortion Spectrum Requires Additional Equipment AC107 otal Voltage Distortion oltage Distortion Factor 0 05 Apply for 30 mins FTAC107 AC108 IDC Voltage Component 1 Positive DC Offset 115 RMS 10V DC Apply for 30 mins FTAC108 1 2 Negative DC Offset 115V RMS 10V DC Apply for 30 mins FTAC108 2 TAC109 Normal Voltage Transients 180V RMS to 80V RMS 1 Transients Peak voltage 180V RMS Table TAC109 3 AA GG FTAC109 1 2 Undervoltage Transients Low voltage 80V RMS Table TAC109 3 HH LL FTAC109 2 3 Combined Transient 180V RMS to 80V RMS Table TAC109 3 MM FTAC109 3 4 Repetitive Normal Voltage Transient Test 90V RMS to 140V RMS Run transient for 30 mins FTAC109 4 ITAC110 Normal Frequency Transients 375 Hz to 425 Hz 1 Overfrequency Transients High Frequency 425 Hz Table TAC110 3 AA DD FTAC110 1 2 Underfrequency Transients Low Frequency 375 Hz Table 110 3 EE HH FTAC110 2 3 Combined Transient 375 Hz to 425 Hz Table TAC110 3 II FTAC110 3 TAC201 Power Interrupt for 50 msec Table TAC201 2 A L FTAC201 100V RMS to 125V RMS 380 Hz to 420 TAC301 Abnormal Steady State Limits for Voltage and Frequency Hz Apply for 30 mins FTAC301 302 Abnormal Voltage Transients 45V RMS to 180V RMS 1 Transients Peak voltage 180V RMS Table TAC
308. ly referenced in the DO160 Structure Tbl X ini configuration files Tests can be customized as needed by editing these table configuration and test sequence files To do so create a new subdirectory under the application directory To access any new sub directory from within the 160 test window the directory name must be added to the DO160UsSserTestL ibraries txt file located in the CIGui32 application directory This is a simple text file listing all test description directories available Example DO160UserTestLibraries txt file content MyNew DBase Dummy Dir Entry These two directories listed will now be available for selection from the AirFrame selection in the 160 Test Setup screen To facilitate creating new test directories it is easiest to create a copy of the DO160 RevE directory first and rename it as required 9 1 2 13 Test Tables 166 The tables shown on the next few pages list the test sections covered by the 160 option Where relevant the numbering used matches that of the RTCA DO 160 document Test tables are listed by power group November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Table 115 Test No Section Subject Test Limits Comment File Ref 16 5 1 Normal Operating Conditions ac 16 5 1 1b 1 1 Phs Voltage and Frequency ac 100V to 122V 390Hz to 410Hz
309. m can be useful if you are unsure about the nature of the waveform that was stored HARM L4 VIEW F This mode can be used to display any of the available user defined waveforms in a frequency domain display Waveform data is shown by harmonic amplitude and phase relative to the fundamental frequency Previewing waveform can be useful if you are unsure about the nature of the waveform that was stored The SINE is standard waveform that is always available It does not consume any of the user defined waveform registers and is always displayed in the waveform list right arrow indicates the waveform is presently selected for the phase the cursor is moved to this field the ENTER key will execute the selected MODE If the mode is set to PROG pressing ENTER while the cursor is on the SINE entry will select the sinewave for the phase shown in the top right corner of the display Note that the VIEW modes are not available for any of the three standard waveforms The SQUARE is a standard waveform that is always available It does not consume any of the user defined waveform registers and is always displayed in the waveform list A right arrow indicates the waveform is presently selected for the phase If the cursor is moved to this field the ENTER key will execute the selected MODE If the mode is set to PROG pressing ENTER while the cursor is on the SQUARE entry will select the square wave for the phase shown in the t
310. m the SNC screen AMP SHARE C AMP SHARE A FLICKER REMOTE ON This is a logic input that can be used to remove the programmed output voltage A logic low on this pin will cause the output voltages to be programmed to 0 0 volts and the output relays to open A logic high will cause the programmed output voltage to be restored at the output terminals A contact closure between this pin and J22 27 D COM will simulate a logic low state m i Series iX Series November 2005 19 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 3 6 2 Remote Sense Connector TB3 When selecting external sense mode it is important that the remote sense connections are hooked up at the EUT or at the sense point For single phase systems connect Phase A to phase and neutral to neutral For three phase system configurations connect all three phase NOTE Do not reverse or swap sense connection phasing or damage to the unit may result All 3001iX and 5001iX AC Sources are shipped with the sense connections wired to the output terminals This will prevent a voltage fault when the external sense mode is selected On systems consisting of multiple 3001iX or 5001iX chassis the end user has to connect the external sense inputs to allow the system to operate Some system configuration do not support Internal sense mode in which case the sense connection must always be present at TB3 Table 3 3 Remote Sense Connector TB3 mn ___ eess
311. mber tags as either Phase or Phase power sources must be installed in the system according to the phase markings on the serial number tags There will be one master unit that will have full controller and the slaves will have blank front panels except for the circuit breaker and indicator lights The three units must be interconnected using the system Interface cable The three LO outputs must also be connected together before applying power If the units were purchased as single phase units and have not been configured for a three phase system please consult the factory Single Phase System In a single phase system consisting of two or three units there will be one master unit that will have a full controller and the slaves will have blank front panels except for the circuit breaker and indicator lights The units must all be connected with the system interface cable but not the clock and lock cables The outputs on all the terminal blocks should be connected together The LO outputs should all be connected together and a heavy duty cable run to the load from the HI and LO outputs See Table 3 1 for cable sizing The appropriate jumpers have been installed at the factory before shipment If it becomes necessary to change the system to three phase output please consult the factory 3 8 Output Voltage Ranges 26 The iX Series power sources have four voltage ranges 0 to 135 150 270 or 300 volts These ranges are
312. mbined Transient 375 Hz to 425 Hz Table SAC110 3 II CSAC110 3 ISAC201 Power Interrupt OV for 50 msec Table SAC201 2 A L 5 201 100V RMS to 125V RMS 380 Hz to 420 ISAC301 Abnormal Steady State Limits for Voltage and Frequency Hz Apply for 30 mins ICSAC301 ISAC302 Abnormal Voltage Transients 45V RMS to 180V RMS 1 Overvoltage Transients Peak voltage 180V RMS Table SAC302 3 AA GG ICSAC302 1 2 Transients Low voltage 45V RMS Table SAC302 3 HH NN ICSAC302 2 3 Combined Transient 45V RMS to 180V RMS Table SAC302 3 CSAC302 3 ISAC303 Abnormal Frequency Transients 320 Hz to 480 Hz Table SAC303 3 AA EE ICSAC303 ISAC401 Emergency Steady State Limits for Voltage and Frequency 104V to 122V RMS 360 to 440 Hz Apply for 30 mins each test CSAC401 N A to AC Utilization ISAC501 Tests Equipment ISAC601 Power Failure Single Phase OV for 7 seconds Table SAC601 2 A D 5 601 ISAC602 Power Failure No test done so numbers coincide i Series iX Series November 2005 279 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Test No Section Subject Test Limits Comment File Ref ISAC603 Phase Reversal N A to Rev C Table TAC Test No Section Subject Test Limits Comment File Ref 101 Three Phase Load Current Harmonic Measurements 115V RMS 400 Hz CTAC
313. med has transient cannot be compiled and different length executed Media full No storage space left Delete other settings or data to make to save settings or room data 255 Directory full Too many waveform Delete one or more waveforms from directory entries waveform memory to make room 256 File name not found Waveform requested Check waveform directory for not in directory waveform names present 257 File name error Incorrect filename Too many or non ASCII characters Fyr in waveform file definition 283 Illegal variable name Variable name illegal Use ASCII characters Use ASCII characters only mn 263 i Series iX Series November 2005 323 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Hardware related Check hardware for proper operation error Memory error Waveform memory May be the result of incomplete user checksum error defined waveform download Check interface and try downloading waveform again Successful download may clear this error condition Alternatively use TRAC DEL ALL command to clear waveform memory 314 Save recall memory User setup register Store setup in same register again lost contents lost Configuration memory Hardware Contact CI service department at configuration settings support calinst com to obtain lost instructions on restoring configuration data 330 Self test failed Internal error Contact service department at support Qcalinst
314. ments 6 6 1 Power Source Gain Adjustment To make this adjustment the top cover must be removed and voltages must be monitored at various test points The test point used depends upon the phase to be adjusted Refer to Table 6 4 for the test point The adjustment is R14 on the Current Limit Board Refer to Figure 6 3 for the location R14 on the Current Limit Board On the Phase A CPU board monitor TP31 with respect to TP1 Program 300 VDC Adjust R14 on the Current Limit Board so that the voltage at TP31 is 13 0 VDC Program 300 VDC Check voltage at TP31 If itis greater than 13 0 VDC adjust R14 for 13 0 VDC If itis less than 13 0 VDC do nothing For multiphase power systems with one controller 15003iX the adjustment for Phase B and C must be made to R14 on the Current Limit Board for the power source of the respective phase PHASE Controller in Phase A Power Source Table 6 4 Gain Adjustments 6 6 2 Current Limit Calibration Program the output to the 150 VAC range and the current limit to IPROG in Table 6 5 Program the output to the constant current mode CC Apply full load for the 150 volt range to the output Adjust R38 on the Current Limit Board for an output current of ISET in Table 6 5 If the current is less than the set value observe the Front Panel Overload Indicator for each power source Adjust R38 on the Current Limit Board of the Power Sources with the Indicator illuminated Adjus
315. ments The cursor position can be moved by using the UP and DOWN keys located in the DECIMAL keypad MENU 1 PROGRAM TRANSIENTS MEASUREMENTS WAVEFORMS Figure 4 6 Main Menu 1 screen 4 2 Menu Structure The next few pages show a map of the available menus in the i iX Series There are three main level level 1 menus from which all other menus can be reached Frequently used level 2 menus have short cut key that provides direct access Examples of such menus are Program Measurements and Waveform In any case there are never more than three levels of menus although some menus may be spread across more than one screen 4 2 1 MAIN Menus MENU 1 MENU 2 PROGRAM TRANSIENTS ADVANCED MEAS SETUP REGISTERS MERSUREMENTS WAVEFORMS APPLICATIONS Bini m MENU 3 UTILITY MEASUREMENT CAL OUTPUT IMPEDANCE OUTPUT CAL Figure 4 7 Menu 1 through 3 The top level menu is split in three parts MENU 1 through MENU 3 to allow spacing between menu entries MENU 2 and 3 can be reached from MENU 1 by selecting the MORE entry or by pressing the MENU key repeatedly which will toggle from MENU 1 to 2 to 3 and back to 1 The division of menu choices between the two screens is graphically illustrated in 4 2 2 by the boxes in level 1 Each box represents one screen Subsequent screens can be reached using the MORE entry November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California
316. mory so their is rarely a need to change these values VOLT CURR CONTROL The voltage and current control menu can be used to select the voltage range pair the current limit method the voltage sense source and the number of output phases only in three phase systems with Mode iX option The standard available voltage range pairs are 135 270 and 150 300 The 135 270 pair gives higher current capability and the 150 300 gives higher voltage capability The two current limit choices are Constant Voltage and Constant Current Constant Voltage mode will maintain the set voltage at the output until the load current exceeds the current limit setting at which time the voltage will be dropped to zero This effectively shuts off the AC source output in case of an overload condition This mode has user programmable trip delay which is located in the same menu Constant Current mode will maintain the load current at the maximum level set by the current limit value even if the maximum power level is exceeded This is done by reducing the voltage as needed As such the voltage will be reduced from the set level down to zero depending on the load requirement This mode is useful for starting up motor or capacitor loads that may require a high inrush current This mode also has a user programmable trip delay Voltage sensing for regulation and measurement can be selected for internal or external External voltage sensing can compensate for voltage dro
317. mum go ROEN Abnormal Voltage maximum Abnormal Voltage low Voltage Drop BG D EE Voltage Surge November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 1 1 4 Front Panel Entry To perform test from the keyboard from the MENU 2 screen select the APPLICATIONS screen The APPLICATIONS screen will appear as shown in Figure 9 1 APPLICATIONS SETUP MIL STD 7 4 TER DO 16690 OMIN OPTION IEC 1000 4 11 Figure 9 1 Application Menu Scroll to the RTCA DO 160D entry using the up and down cursor keys Press the ENTER key to select the RTCA DO 160D main menu The screen will appear as shown in Figure 9 2 Note The user has to turn on the Output relay before starting a test RTCR DO 168D RC STRNDRRD RTCR NORMAL STRIE GROUP ABNORMAL PREVIOUS Figure 9 2 DO160 Main Menu i Series iX Series November 2005 135 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 1 1 5 AC TESTS Note Prior to test selection the standard and the group selection are required Use the shuttle to select the standard and the group if applicable 9 1 1 5 1 Normal state test Scroll to the NORMAL STATE AC entry using the up and down cursor keys Press the ENTER key to select the NORMAL STATE screens The screen will appear as shown in Figure 9 3 DO 16 D NORMAL RC 1 DO 16 D NORMAL RC 2 VOLT UNBALANCE u 2 POHER INT VOLT FREQ MAX HAVE DISTORTION FREQ MOD VOLT SUR
318. n 400 Hz Nominal Test 400 Hz 4 Hz mod Apply for 10 mins FTAC105 1 395 Hz Nominal Test 395 Hz 4 Hz mod Apply for 10 mins FTAC105 2 405 Hz Nominal Test 405 Hz 4 Hz mod Apply for 10 mins 105 3 Voltage Distortion Spectrum Requires Additional E quipm Total Voltage Distortion Voltage Distortion Factor 0 05 Apply for 30 mins FTAC107 DC Voltage Component User Data Testedby Test depatmen EUR fast Mum 5 Comment Test Site Press Test sequence file load completed Select Test Control tab to view test program Figure 9 63 704 Option Test Selection Screen To access the 704 option select the MIL STD 704 Tables A F from the Applications menu of the CIGui32 main screen or click on the 704 button in the toolbar The 704 Tables control window will open selecting the power group that most closely matches the steady state values set It may still be necessary to select the desired power group first however Also verify that the selected power group in the 704 screen is the correct one for the EUT being tested The 704 tests can be operated from the 704 test screen This screen contains three main tabs located along the top edge of the window The following tabs are available Click on the tab name for additional help on how to use each tab Tab Description Test Selection This tab allows the operator to select the library of test files to use Select Airframe and the relevant Power group It also
319. n control of the front panel This prevents accidental change of settings in ATE applications OVERLOAD The OVERLOAD LED indicates an output overload condition This condition can be controlled by setting the current limit value in the PROGRAM menu Removing the load using the OUTPUT ON OFF button will recover from an overload condition i Series iX Series November 2005 37 User Manual Rev Z OVER TEMPERATURE HI RANGE 4 1 4 The Shuttle Knob California Instruments The OVER TEMPERATURE LED indicates an overheating problem inside the unit This is an abnormal condition which will cause the unit to shut off Check the air openings to make sure they are not blocked The HI RANGE LED is on when the high voltage output range has been selected Counter Clock Clock p wise wise v Y DECR INCR Figure 4 1 Shuttle Knob The shuttle knob is located to the right of the LCD screen and is used to change setup parameters Note that it cannot be used to move the cursor position between menu fields Use the UP and DOWN arrow keys in the FUNCTION keypad for this The shuttle knob can operate in one of two distinct modes of operation MODE IMMEDIATE mode DESCRIPTION Any time the ENTER key is pressed the i iX Series returns to SET mode 4 1 5 FUNCTION Keypad its normal mode of operation In this mode changes made with the shuttle knob or the data entry keypad will take immediate effect The IMMEDIATE mode is usef
320. n in 3 phase mode The MEASUREMENT CAL menu allows for calibration of the AC source measurement system The OUTPUT CAL menu allows for calibration of the AC source output Following the Menu overview pages is a detailed description of each menu and sub menu i Series iX Series November 2005 43 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 4 2 2 Overview of Menu 1 MENU 1 44 level 1 PROGRAM MEASUREMENTS TRANSIENTS WAVEFORMS MORE level 2 PROGRAM1 VOLTAGE FREQ VOLT RANGE CURR LIMIT MORE PROGRAM2 PHASE CLOCK MODE VOLT MODE DC OFFSET START MEASUREMENTS1 VOLTAGE CURRENT FREQ POWER MORE MEASUREMENTS 2 VA POWER PEAK CURR POWER FACT CREST FACT PEAK CURR RESET MEASUREMENTS 3 VOLT THD CURR THD INST PK CURR PHASE HARMONICS TRACE ANALYSIS FUNCTION VIEW DATA MODE SCALE TRIG MODE TRIG SOURCE TRIG PHASE TRIG DELAY START VOLT SURGE SAG VOLT SWEEP STEP FREQ SWEEP STEP VOLT FREQ SWEEP STEP START VIEW SEQUENCE PREVIOUS SCREEN CLIP LEVEL GROUP MODE SINE SQUARE CLIPPED USER WAVE USER WAVE level 3 START START GO TO VOLT END VOLT DUR SCALE DUR SCALE DURATION DURATION END VOLT END DELAY END DELAY FUNCTION FUNCTION REPEAT REPEAT EVENT EVENT PREVIOUS SCREEN PREV SCREEN DURATION END FREQ END DELAY FUNCTION REPEAT EVENT PREVIOUS SCREEN DURATION END VOLT END FREQ END DELAY FU
321. n use the File Open menu to load the test parameters Test parameters can be a function of the EUT class The different files provided with the program cover the various EUT classes The relevant EUT class 1 2 3or X is listed in the file names When using front panel operation the user has to set levels for each individual test step in SINGLE mode 9 2 3 Initial Setup The user must set the operating frequency and voltage and close the output relay prior to the start of test It is possible to change the normal voltage Ut from the 1000 4 11 menus before running each test To run any IEC 61000 4 11 test the IEC411 state must be turned on If an EOS1 or EOS3 is detected it will be put in ACTIVE mode as long as the 411 state is ON 9 2 4 Tests Performed DIPS AND INTERRUPTIONS 1 RunAII Run predefined sequence of tests 2 Run Single Run user defined test VOLTAGE VARIATIONS 1 RunAII Run predefined sequence of tests 2 Run Single Run user defined test 180 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 2 5 Front Panel Entry perform test from the keyboard select the APPLICATIONS screen from the MENU 2 screen The APPLICATIONS screen will appear as shown in Figure 9 17 APPLICATIONS SETUP MIL STD 7 4 RTCA DO 16 C OMNI OPTION EU EE PREUIOUS SCREEN Figure 9 17 Application menu Scroll to the IEC 1000 4 11 entry using the up and down cursor keys Press the ENTER
322. nal equipment may be required as indicated The extent of coverage of the 160 option as implemented on the iX Series platform is shown in the table below Tests marked with an x generally require additional hardware to be used Tests marked N A are not applicable to the corresponding table Tests marked with a V are covered by the 160 option Tests marked with a P are limited in scope and may require additional equipment to perform completely No 115V Tests Table Table Table No 28 VDC Tests Table Table Table Description A CF A NF A WF Description ADC BDC ZDC Voltage and 16 5 1 2 Voltage Modulation 16 6 1 2 Ripple Voltage Frequency Momentary Power 16 39 13 Modulation 16 6 1 3 Interruptions y V Momentary Power Normal Surge Normal Surge Engine Starting Normal Frequency 16 5 1 5 2 Transients 16 6 2 1 Abnormal Voltage Y Normal Frequency Low Voltage Voltage DC Momentary Under urge Abnormal Voltage Momentary Under Abnormal Surge 16 9231 Voltage pp l1 l e Abnormal 16 5 2 3 2 Frequency Transient Table 9 17 160 Option Test Coverage 115VAC and 28VDC i Series iX Series November 2005 151 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments No 230V Tests Table Table Table No 14 VDC Tests Table Description A CF A NF A WF Description ADC 16 5 14 Voltage and Frequency 16 5 1 2 Voltage Modulation Ripple Voltage 16 5 1 3 Frequency
323. nd 50Hz 2 Program the output impedance resistance and inductance to the lowest values from the OUTPUT IMPEDANCE screen This will be the IMP REAL MIN and IMP REACT MIN values that have been set in the OUTPUT CAL screen Press the PHASE key to select the phase to be calibrated A B or C Measure the output voltage of the power source with no load and record this value Vy 4 Using a resistive load bank load the output of the power source to about 16 amps Measure the output voltage of the power source under load and record this value V Also measure the load current and record this value 1 i Series iX Series November 2005 121 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 122 10 11 Calculate the resistive and inductive component R and L using the formulas shown in Table 6 8 Alternatively use the 16 bit CIGUI Enter these values in the OUTPUT CAL screen for the IMP REAL MIN and IMP REACT MIN value respectively Make sure the correct phase is selected or use the PHASE key if not Remove or turn off the load From the MENU 3 screen select OUTPUT IMPEDANCE Press the PHASE key to select the phase to be calibrated Program the output inductance to 796 uH and the resistance to 400 mOhms Select the Calibration Output screen and move the cursor to the IMP REAL FS field Measure the R and L by removing and applying the load as described before and calculating the R and L using the formula s in Table 6 7 A
324. ng 1 LEVEL The level of the harmonics relative to the fundamental in percent There are two levels one for harmonic 3 and the other for harmonic 45 The harmonic number must be selected prior to the harmonic level entry To change levels the test state must be off and USER class must be selected 2 HARM NO There are only two harmonic numbers This field is used to set the harmonics level that corresponds to the harmonics number 3 PHASE Sets the phase angle of the harmonics relative to the fundamental The phase can be set when the test state is off and USER class is selected 4 PAUSE Sets the time in seconds The test will pause prior to proceeding to the following test This field may be changed at any time as long as the test is not running i Series iX Series November 2005 191 User Manual Rev Z 192 SWEEP GROUP California Instruments If the SWEEP group is selected the screen will appear as shown in Figure 9 28 The screen has the following parameters that are unique to the group 1 LEVEL 2 FRANGE 3 STEP 4 5 RESONANT IEC 1000 4 15 TESTS oA Figure 9 28 IEC 61000 4 13 Sweep Sets the percentage level of the inter harmonics relative to the fundamental The level is fixed for the entire frequency range which is defined by FRANGE To change level the test state must be off and user class must be selected The range is selected by rotating the shuttle The range selection is require
325. ng file name convention MeasData MS704 nnn Hz txt where nnn is the frequency setting or DC Waveforms This tab displays the voltage and current waveform time domain for each phase The sample rate is automatically set to display about 20 msec of time Cur Graph This tab displays the Current harmonics in a bar graph format Up to 50 harmonics are displayed Cur Spectrum This tab displays the same current harmonics as the Current Graph tab except in a tabular format Data is shown in both absolute and relative from percent of fundamental current A limit table is applied and a pass or fail indication is shown in the last column Values that exceed the allowable limits are shown with a red background in the Pass Fail column No Harmonic number 1 through 50 Freq Hz Frequency of harmonic in Hz Curr A Absolute current rms in Amps Fund Relative current in percent of the fundamental current 11 Note Rev B data is compared against the Rev C spec per Appendix A of the MIL STD 704 standard The rev C graph was not available at the time of this writing and was assumed to be the same as the rev D graph Contact support calinst com if you have information to the contrary i Series iX Series November 2005 267 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Sub Tab Description Limit Allowable current harmonic limits per individual EUT specifications These limits must be entered manually into the provided tem
326. nge 74 0 135 VAC range 37 0 270 VAC range 51 8 135 VDC range 25 9 270 VDC range November 2005 California Instruments iX Series 10000 VA AC 7000 W DC 15000 VA AC 10500 W DC 22 2 135 VAC range 20 0 150 VAC range 11 1 270 VAC range 10 0 300 VAC range 15 5 135 VDC range 14 0 150 VDC range 7 77 270 VDC range 7 00 300 VDC range 37 0 135 VAC range 33 3 150 VAC range 18 5 270 VAC range 16 7 300 VAC range 25 9 135 VDC range 23 3 150 VDC range 12 95 270 VDC range 11 69 300 VDC range 74 0 135 VAC range 66 7 150 VAC range 37 0 270 VAC range 33 3 300 VAC range 51 8 135 VDC range 46 6 150 VDC range 25 9 270 VDC range 23 3 300 VDC range i Series Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Output Parameter iSeries Series 15001i iX 111 135 VAC range 111 135 range 55 5 270 range 100 150 range 55 5 270 range 50 0 300 range 77 7 135 VDC range 77 7 135 VDC range 38 8 270 VDC range 70 0 150 VDC range 38 8 270 VDC range 35 0 300 VDC range Derated linearly from 50 of voltage to 10 of specified current at 5 of voltage range Note For the iX series the current output in the AC amp DC mode is equal to the current in the AC mode if the DC voltage is less than 20 of the fullscale voltage It is equal to the DC current for DC voltages more than 20 of fullscale i Series iX Series November 2005 User
327. ngs 109V RMS 2 5V RMS mod Apply for 10 mins FTVF104 360 2 360 3 117 RMS 360 Hz nominal settings 117V RMS 2 5V RMS mod Apply for 10 mins FTVF104 360 3 600 1 115 RMS 600 Hz nominal settings 115V RMS 2 5V RMS mod Apply for 10 mins FTVF104 600 1 600 2 109V RMS 600 Hz nominal settings 109V RMS 2 5V RMS mod Apply for 10 mins FTVF104 600 2 600 3 117 RMS 600 Hz nominal settings 117V RMS 2 5V RMS mod Apply for 10 mins FTVF104 600 3 800 1 115V RMS 800 Hz nominal settings 115V RMS 2 5V RMS mod Apply for 10 mins FTVF104 800 1 800 2 109 RMS 800 Hz nominal settings 109V RMS 2 5V RMS mod Apply for 10 mins FTVF104 800 2 800 3 117 RMS 800 Hz nominal settings 117V RMS 2 5V RMS mod Apply for 10 mins FTVF104 800 3 TVF105 Frequency Modulation 400 1 115V RMS 400 Hz nominal settings 00 Hz 4 Hz mod Apply for 30 mins 105 400 1 360 1 115V RMS 360 Hz nominal settings 360 Hz 4 Hz mod Apply for 30 mins FTVF105 360 1 600 1 115 RMS 600 Hz nominal settings 600 Hz 4 Hz mod Apply for 30 mins 105 600 1 274 November 2005 i Series Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Test No Section Subject Test Limits Comment File Ref 800 1 115 RMS 800 Hz nominal settings 800 Hz 4 Hz mod Apply for 30 mins 105 800 1 TVF106 Voltage Distortion Spectrum R
328. ns supply Allow capacitors to discharge to safe voltage before touching exposed pins of mains supply connectors 3 5 Output Power Connections TB2 The output terminal block TB2 is located at the rear of the unit The external sense inputs allow the power system output voltages to be monitored directly at the load and must be connected either at TB2 or the load when the sense is programmed for external The external sense input does not have to be connected when Internal Sense is programmed The external sense wires are to be connected to TB3 on the rear panel and should be run as twisted pair for short lengths Sense leads over three 3 feet long should be run as twisted shielded pair Refer to Figures 3 2 through 3 12 for all connections Note The output of the power source is isolated from the input line and floating from chassis ground If needed either side or LO be grounded 16 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments The output power cables must be large enough to prevent total voltage drop exceeding 1 of the rated output voltage between the power source and the load Table 3 1 shows the AWG size of the cables that may be used Cable lengths must not exceed twenty five 25 feet For lengths greater than 25 feet calculate the voltage drop from the following formula 2 X DISTANCE X CABLE RESISTANCE PER FT X CURRENT VOLT DROP Table 3 1 Wire Sizes L
329. nt and wrung out Disconnect all sources of power mains i iX power sources etc before cleaning Do not spray water or other cleaning agents directly on the instrument 9 4 7 2 Fuses There are two fuses used in the EOS 1 or EOS 3 They are located in the mains connector For continued protection against fire hazard replace fuses with same type and rating Stock Mains Voltage Fuse Rating Fuse Type Number 3AG slow acting 270064 5x20mm slow acting 115 230 nominal 0 25 i Series Series November 2005 215 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 5 Mode iX Option 9 5 1 Introduction This section contains information on the installation and operation of the Mode iX phase mode controller to be used with the California Instruments iX series of power sources GENERAL DESCRIPTION The Mode iX phase mode controller accepts three outputs from California Instruments iX series power systems and directs them to one output for a single phase system or three outputs for three phase system This switching action is performed automatically via a control signal from the power system to the Mode iX phase mode controller 9 5 2 Specifications 9 5 2 1 Input Line Voltage 115 VAC 10 Line Current lt 0 25 amps at 115 VAC input BEEN C 5 2 Line Frequency 47 to 63 Hz Fuse Rating 0 25 amp slow acting at 115 VAC input 0 125 amp slow acting at 230 VAC input 9 5
330. ntrol the Mode iX may not be controlled by the front panel MODE switch Refer to Section 4 2 11 2 for details on controlling the number of output phases with the Mode iX option November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 5 5 Service and Maintenance 9 5 5 1 Cleaning The exterior of the instrument may be cleaned with a cloth dampened with mild detergent wrung out Disconnect all sources of power mains iX power sources etc before cleaning Do not spray water or other cleaning agents directly on the instrument 9 5 5 2 Fuses There is one fuse used in the Mode iX phase controller It is located in the mains connector For continued protection against fire hazard replace fuse with same type and rating Mains Voltage Fuse Rating Fuse Type CI Stock Number 115 v rms nominal 0 25 amp 3AG slow acting 270117 230 v rms nominal 0 125 amp 3AG slow acting 270109 i Series iX Series November 2005 223 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 6 Omni Options 9 6 1 Introduction This section contains information on the installation and operation of the OMNI Output Matching Network Impedance impedance network to be used with the California Instruments i or iX series of power sources 9 6 2 General Description The OMNI impedance network adds inductive and resistive impedance to California Instruments i or iX series power sources This additional impedance brings the combined
331. ntsB N1 360 20 6 2 2 Appendix 1 Figure 1 B Table 1 1 N 22 Run transient at 360Hz C6P0 APP1TransientsB 2 360 21 6 2 3 Table 1 1 N 2 3 Run transient at 360Hz C6P0 APP1TransientsB N3 360 22 6 2 4 Appendix 1 Figure 1 B Table 1 1 N 2 4 Run transient at 360Hz C6P0 APP1TransientsB 4 360 23 6 2 5 Appendix 1 Figure 1 B Table 1 1 N 2 5 Run transient at 360Hz C6P0 APP1TransientsB 5 360 24 6 2 6 Appendix 1 Figure 1 B Table 1 1 N 2 6 Run transient at 360Hz C6P0 APP1TransientsB 6 360 25 6 2 7 Appendix 1 Figure 1 B Table 1 1 N 2 7 Run transient at 360Hz C6P0 APP1TransientsB 7 360 26 6 2 8 Appendix 1 Figure 1 B Table 1 1 N 2 8 Run transient at 360Hz C6P0 APP1TransientsB 8 360 27 6 2 9 Appendix 1 Figure 1 B Table 1 1 N 2 9 Run transient at 360Hz C6P0 APP1TransientsB 9 360 28 6 2 10 Appendix 1 Figure 1 B Table 1 1 10 Run transient at 360Hz C6P0 APP1TransientsB N10 360 29 6 2 11 Table 1 1 11 Run transient at 360Hz C6P0 APP1TransientsB N11 360 30 6 2 1 Appendix 1 Figure 1 B Table 1 1 N 1 Repeat transient at 800Hz C6P0 APP1TransientsB 1 800 i Series iX Series November 2005 313 User Manual Rev 2 California Instruments Test No Subject Test Limits DO160 Ref Comments Test File 31 6 2 2 Appendix 1 Figure 1 B Table 1 1 N 22 Repeat transient at 800Hz C6P0 APP1TransientsB 2 800 32 6 2 3
332. o edit these values and save them to disk User defined transients can be recalled using the File Open menu See Menu help below The graph shows each transient type on a time scale from 20 msec to 350 msec Note that for AC mode only the envelope of the AC waveform is shown for clarity Thus the type of display is the same for AC and DC modes The graph can be zoomed using the left mouse button Double click on the graph to unzoom The area at the bottom of this tab may be used to enter general information regarding the unit under test the test location operator and environmental conditions in effect during the test This information will be incorporated in the test reports generated by the GUI Graph User Data Menus The top of the ABD Transients window contains a standard Windows menu bar Available menus are Menu Sub Menu File New Description The selected resets all data from the Transient permutations data entry grid to the selected Type No entry This operation may be used to undo any edits made by the user Open Opens a specific transient test file with ABDO100 1 8 extension This menu may be used to directly select a test file without using the Type No drop down list Save Saves the contents of the Transient permutations data entry grid to the selected test file The ABD0100 1 8 file extension is automatically appended Saves the contents of the Transient permutations data entry gri
333. o provides an overview of available transient list events This list appears in the order they were assigned event numbers Editing an existing event can be accomplished from this screen by positioning the cursor on the event to be edited and pressing the ENTER key This method can also be used to review the parameters of a previously entered event The START VIEW TRANSIENT SEQUENCE screen has the following fields START ABORT PAUSE RESUME REPEAT CLEAR SEQ The START field is used to start a transient execution When the cursor is positioned on the START field and the ENTER key is pressed transient execution starts The output relay must be closed or an error message will appear and the transient will not start Once a transient is in progress this field changes to ABORT and can be used to abort a transient in progress If the transient completes execution the field reverts back to START The PAUSE field may be used to suspend execution of a transient list in progress If the cursor is on the PAUSE field and the ENTER key is pressed the transient is suspended and this field changes to RESUME Pressing the ENTER key again will cause the transient list to resume execution from the point where it was suspended This field determines the number of times a transient list is repeated The default value is zero which means the programmed list runs only once The range for this field is from 0 through 99999 This repeat function sh
334. oltage each phase 104V to 122 RMS 16 5 1 1 d 1 test 1 and 2 Apply at 800Hz and 360Hz NSSVF 3 1 2 105 5V to 120 5V 16 5 1 1 d 2 test 1 to 4 Apply at 800Hz and 360Hz C1P3 NSSVF RMS 4 2 Abnormal Steady State Voltage 5 2 1 Voltage each phase 96V to 130V RMS 16 5 3 1 b Apply for 30 mins iso 5 mins C2P1 ABN SSV 6 2 2 Average voltage 3 phases 96V to 130V RMS 16 5 3 1 c Apply for 30 mins iso 5 mins C2P3 ABN SSV 7 3 Voltage Surge Fig 1 8 3 1 Normal Transients 160V for 30ms 71V for 16 5 1 5 1 b Use specified limit iso DO160 C3PO NORMVSURGE1 15ms 9 3 2 Normal Transients 156V for 50ms 80V for 16 5 1 5 1 b Use specified limit iso DO160 C3P0 NORMVSURGE2 30ms 10 3 3 Normal Transients 148V for 100ms 86V 16 5 1 5 1 b Use specified limit iso DO160 C3P0 NORMVSURGE3 for 50ms 11 3 4 Normal Transients 140V for 200ms 16 5 1 5 1 b No undervoltage test required C3P0 NORMVSURGE4 12 4 Voltage Surge Fig 1 13 4 1 Abnormal Transients 180V for 100ms 148V 16 5 3 3 1 b A4P0 ABNVSURGE1 for 1 sec 14 4 2 Abnormal Transients OV for 5 secs 16 5 3 2 b No undervoltage test required A4P0 ABNVSURGE2 15 4 3 Abnormal Transients Disconnects for 5 secs n a Appendix 3 tests A4P3 APPENDIX3 16 Voltage Spike Fig 3 A Peak voltage 1000V 17 4 Requires add l equipment 17 Switching Transients n a 18 6 1 Appendix 1 Figure A Table 1 1 T1 10 At 360Hz and 800Hz C6P0 APP1TransientsA msec 19 6 2 1 Appendix 1 Figure 1 B Table 1 1 N 2 1 Run transient at 360Hz C6P0 APP1Transie
335. oltage range If the user selects a custom waveform with a crest factor that is higher than 1 414 the peak voltage would exceed this maximum if the rms voltage were to be programmed at 300 V rms The iX Series automatically limits the maximum allowable programmed rms voltage of a any custom waveform by calculating the crest factor of the selected waveform and controlling the rms limit accordingly Thus each custom waveform may have a different maximum rms value The iX controller will prevent the user from programming the rms voltage above this limit If a value is entered in the PROGRAM 1 menu above this value a Voltage peak error message is generated Preview Waveform NEW 362 Vrms 167 8785 V Preview Waveform 0 Vrms 299 8539 Vv Figure 4 31 Waveform crest factor affects max rms voltage The figure shown here illustrates the relationship between the crest factor of the waveshape or its peakiness and the maximum peak voltage allowed for a given voltage range Since the peak voltage cannot exceed the AC source s capabilities the programmable rms voltage has to be restricted in this case to only 167 8785 volt for the waveform on the left The sinewave on the right can be programmed to the full 300 V rms as this still falls within the same peak voltage limitation of the AC source If the iX Series is used through the bus the VOLT MAX query be used to determine the maximum
336. on is not normally recommended unless a complete new test sequence is to be entered manually Open Opens a specific test sequence file This menu may be used to directly select a test file without using the Test Selection table tab Save Saves the contents of the test sequence data grid to the selected test file Save As Saves the contents of the test sequence data grid to a user defined file name A file dialog box will appear enabling selection of the directory and file name under which to store the contents of the test sequence data grid Print Prints a test report using MS Word format Only data for the presently selected test sequence is printed The test reports also include EUT performance measurement data Note To print reports the MS Word report format selection must be made from the Main GUI Options menu Report Format menu before opening the ABD0100 1 8 test screen If not an error prompt will indicate that no supported report format is selected Exit Closes the ABD test window Edit Cut Cuts the selected row from either the Test selection data grid or the Test sequence data grid The data in the row cut is available for a Paste operation Copy Copies the selected row from either the Test selection data grid or the Test sequence data grid Copied rows can be pasted to the same grid at a different location Paste Pastes a copied row from to either the Test selection data grid o
337. on on the iX i AC power source It will also detect the presence of an EOS1 or EOS3 and use the EOS for the appropriate test levels Test reports can be generated at the end of a test for documentation purposes To support Edition 2 0 of the IEC 61000 4 11 test standard version 1 20 of the CIGui32 or higher is required Older versions of the Cigui32 will only support Edition 1 0 tests The desired Edition can be selected by the user and provides the relevant data entry mode for the Edition selected Generic tests files are distributed with the CIGui32 program for both editions of the test standard Files applicable to Edition 2 0 have ED20 in their file name Do not mix these files as 186 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments the data setup will not be correct if you do To load a test file select the Mode Dips or Vars and test standard revision first then use the File Open menu to load the test parameters Test parameters can be a function of the EUT class The different files provided with the program cover the various EUT classes The relevant EUT class 1 2 3or X is listed in the file names The user must select the desired test type before executing the test Since both test types require a number of test parameters the test sequence parameters must be entered in the data entry grid or loaded from disk using the File Open menu entry For complete details on how to use the Cgui32 411 opt
338. onic number using the shuttle knob will allow examination of the LEVEL and PHASE of each harmonic and changing the level and phase angle when USER class is selected Sets the phase angle of the harmonics relative to the fundamental To change phase the test state must be off and user class must be selected Sets the pause time in seconds between harmonics tests There is only one value for the entire test The PAUSE value can be changed when the test is not running November 2005 193 User Manual Rev Z 194 California Instruments INTERHARMONICS GROUP If the Harmonics group is selected the screen will appear as shown in Figure 9 30 The screen has the following parameters that are unique to the group 1 LEVEL 2 FRANGE 3 STEP 4 IHFREQ 5 PAUSE 1000 4 15 TESTS r 4 0 1888 20080H2 IHFREG 16 6HZ PAUSE 165 Figure 9 30 IEC 61000 4 13 Inter harmonics Sets the percentage level of the inter harmonics relative to the fundamental The level is fixed for the entire frequency range defined by FRANGE To change levels the test state must be off and user class must be selected The range is selected by rotating the shuttle The range selection is required to change the level An individual range step can be run by selecting the desired range followed by RUN RANGE from the RUN field The step size defines the inter harmonics sweep points This step size is fixed for the entire range of the
339. only Power On lamp Active lamp Fault lamp 9 4 4 4 Mechanical 178 mm H x 483 mm W x 610 mm D 70 Ibs 32 kg 160 Ibs 73 kg Connectors Input mains IEC 320 Source Compression Load Compression Option In Out 9 pin D subminiature Chassis Slide General Devices 3005 120 308 9 4 4 5 Environmental Temperature 0 to 40 C Relative 80 to 31 derate linearly to 50 max at 40 C Altitude 2000 m max 202 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments i Series iX Series November 2005 203 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments CAUTION Voltages up to 600 VAC are available in certain sections of this product This equipment uses potentially lethal voltages DEATH On contact may result if personnel fail to observe safety precautions Do not touch electronic circuits when power is applied 204 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 4 5 Installation and Acceptance 9 4 5 1 9 4 5 2 9 4 5 3 Unpacking Inspect the unit for any possible shipping damage immediately upon receipt If damage is evident notify the carrier Do not return an instrument to the factory without prior approval Do not destroy the packing container until the unit has been inspected for damage in shipment Power Requirements The EOS 1 and EOS 3 electronic switches use either 115 or 230 to power the control circui
340. only All other power source specifications for i Series and iX Series power systems are covered in their respective data sheets Internal Line Sync LNS AC Line Voltage input Taken from AC input Internally in power source Frequency 45 66 2 Phase offset 0 0 360 0 Phase error 1 0 External Line Sync XLS AC Line Voltage input Low range 80 250 V RMS High range 250 500 V RMS Frequency 45 66 Hz Phase offset 0 0 360 0 Phase error 1 0 Input connectors Banana Jacks Screw Terminals Interface to Power Source 36 Pin System Interface Note During external sync mode operation some features such as clock and lock mode external sync and frequency transients are disabled i Series iX Series November 2005 235 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 7 2 LNS Option The Line Sync Option LNS allows the output of the AC Source to be synchronized to the line input This capability may be needed to support tests that require the use of additional equipment The LNS option needs to be ordered at the time of purchase and cannot be installed in the field The LNS Option if installed can be turned on from the front panel as follows Select the PROGRAM 2 screen and move the cursor to the CLK MODE field The default value for the field is INT for internal clock mode Use the knob to select the SYNC mode in order to enable
341. op right corner of the display Note that the VIEW modes are not available for any of the three standard waveforms November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z CLIPPED USER DEFINED i Series iX Series California Instruments The CLIPPED is standard waveform that is always available It does not consume any of the user defined waveform registers and is always displayed in the waveform list right arrow indicates the waveform is presently selected for the phase the cursor is moved to this field the ENTER key will execute the selected MODE If the mode is set to PROG pressing ENTER while the cursor is on the CLIPPED entry will select the clipped sinewave for the phase shown in the top right corner of the display The amount of clipping is determined by the CLIP LEVEL field Note that the VIEW modes are not available for any of the three standard waveforms A list of user defined waveforms appears immediately below the three standard waveforms If no user defined waveforms were downloaded to the iX Series AC source this list will be blank User defined waveforms can be given a symbolic name of up to twelve characters The use of any of the three standard waveform names SINE SQUARE and CLIPPED should be avoided as it will be rejected by the iX controller A right arrow indicates the waveform is presently selected for the phase If the cursor is moved to this field the ENTER key will execute the sele
342. or and the EOS unit will be programmed to normal bypassing EOS mode The overtemperature condition will be released when the internal circuits have sufficiently cooled An overcurrent condition may be reset by reactivating the EOS option from the iX controller 4 11 option screen Tap Select Switch Second generation EOS1 only The 51 tap selection between the 70 and the 80 dip level taps is made using a toggle switch on the front panel of the EOS1 If this toggle switch is not present the EOS1 is a first generation version See Table 9 21 for revision details To use the 70 dip level set the toggle switch in the70 position To use the 80 dip level set the toggle switch in the 8096 position EOS1 70 80 Tap setting change Second generation EOS1 units are equipped with both 70 and an 80 output tap The default configuration shipped from the factor is set to the 70 tap This is the most commonly used dip level for product standards However Edition 2 0 of the IEC 61000 4 11 test standard does allow for 80 dip level for which the alternate tap setting may be used The EOS1 tap selection between the 70 and the 80 dip level taps is made using a toggle switch on the front panel of the EOS1 If this toggle switch is not present the EOS1 is a first generation version See Table 9 21 for revision details To use the 70 dip level set the toggle switch in the70 position To use the 80 dip level set the toggle switch in th
343. or DC must be changed from the main GUI screen The ABD screen can remain open while switching back to the main screen Upon return to the ABD screen the relevant power groups can be selected Available power groups are Table 115V 400 Hz constant frequency CF AC Power tests Table B 26V 400 Hz constant frequency CF AC Power tests Table C 115V 360 to 800 Hz variable frequency VF AC Power tests Table D Conventional 28 VDC Network Power tests Table E No Break Power Transfer 28 VDC Network Power tests The operator needs to determine what the relevant power group selection is for the unit under test EUT When switching power groups the table data shown at the bottom of this tab will be updated to reflect the new selection The first test section of the table will automatically be selected when switching power groups Present Power Source Output Settings This section displays the programmed steady state settings that are in effect This information is updated each time the ABD from regains focus The mode of operation AC DC or AC DC is display for reference but cannot be changed from this screen When in DC mode the frequency setting will show Note that changes in steady state settings can only be made from the main GUI screen The operator can toggle between the main screen and the ABD screen for this purpose as needed Table Header The table header is shown against a blue b
344. organized in two pairs 135 270 and 150 300 When operating on the 135 volt AC range the current limit can be programmed to a maximum value of 37 amps for the 5001iX or 22 2 amps for the 3001iX The standard power source defaults to the 150 300 range pair To change voltage range pairs perform the folowing steps 1 Press the MENU key 2 times 2 The cursor should point to UTILITY Press the ENTER key to display the UTILITY 1 screen In the UTILITY 1 screen select VOLT CURR control by moving the cursor by pressing the v key Press ENTER 4 Inthe VOLT CURR control screen select VOLT PAIR Press the key to change the range pair to 135 270 Pressing the key again will program the 150 300 range pair November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 3 9 Functional Test AN CAUTION Work carefully when performing these tests hazardous voltages are present on the input and output during this test Refer to Figure 3 8 for the test set up 1 Connect an oscilloscope voltmeter and or distortion analyzer to the AC source output at the output terminal block TB2 With the AC mains verified as being off apply the correct three phase AC power input voltage connections to the AC source input terminals barrier TB1 Apply the AC mains power and turn on the main circuit breaker on the AC source front panel Verify the front panel LCD display lights up with the initial start up screen showing th
345. ory This field can be used to set the RS232 baudrate to either 9600 19200 or 38400 baud The baudrate set on the AC source must match the one programmed for the communications port of the controller This field is used to set the number of databits to either 7 or 8 Factory setting is 8 bits This value must match the number of data bits set on the communications port of the controller This field is used to set the parity Available options are Even E Odd O or no parity N Factory setting is No parity This value must match the parity set on the communications port of the controller This field is used to set the number of stop bits used on the serial port Available options are 1 or 2 bits Factory setting is 1 stop bit This value must match the parity set on the communications port of the controller The number of start bits is always fiXed to 1 bit November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 4 2 11 2 VOLTAGE CURRENT CONTROL SETUP menu VOLTAGE CURRENT CONTROL SETUP VOLT PAIR 156 386 TRIP DELAY 8 185 VOLT SENSE INT 0 OUTPUT THREE Figure 4 22 VOLTAGE CURRENT CONTROL SETUP menu The VOLTAGE CURRENT CONTROL SETUP menu may be used to set output voltage and current control parameters These parameters are not frequently changed in the normal operation of the AC source and are thus located on the UTILITY rather than the PROGRAM menu The following options are av
346. ould not be confused with the REPEAT function available for individual events The event specific repeat value will cause only that event to be repeated not the entire list Moving the cursor to this field and pressing the ENTER key will cause the entire programmed transient list to be erased Be careful not to press ENTER accidentally while on this field as you will loose the programmed transient list Note that a list may be stored as part of the front panel setup in the nonvolatile memory registers November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z 4 2 7 WAVEFORMS Menu California Instruments iX Series only WAVEFORMS CLIP LEVEL 28 SINE GROUP Figure 4 17 WAVEFORMS menu The WAVEFORMS menu is available on the Series only If your unit is an i Series pressing the WAVE key on the front panel function keypad has no effect The WAVEFORMS menu allows selection of the waveshape for each phase individually or all phases at once For three phase versions of the iX Series the mode is determined by the phase coupling If only a single phase is selected in the top right corner of the display A B or 2 the selected waveshape will be applied to that phase If all phases are selected phase coupling the selected waveform will apply to all three phases For single phase versions of the iX Series the phase coupling is always set to phase A so pressing the PHASE button has no effect The following fields a
347. ower Interrupt 400 1 115V RMS 400 Hz nominal settings for 50 msec Table TVF201 2 FTVF201 400 1 360 1 115 RMS 360 Hz nominal settings for 50 msec Table TVF201 2 FTVF201 360 1 600 1 115V RMS 600 Hz nominal settings for 50 msec Table TVF201 2 FTVF201 600 1 800 1 115 RMS 800 Hz nominal settings for 50 msec Table TVF201 2 FTVF201 800 1 i Series iX Series November 2005 275 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 360 1 One Phase Power Failures for 7 seconds Table TVF602 2 A F Test No Section Subject Test Limits Comment File Ref 100V to 125V RMS 360Hz to 800 TVF301 Abnormal Steady State Limits for Voltage and Frequency 2 Apply for 30 mins FTVF301 TVF302 Abnormal Voltage Transients 400 1 400 Hz Overvoltage Transients Peak Voltage 180V RMS Table TVF302 2 A G FT VF302 400 1 400 2 400 Hz Undervoltage Transients Low Voltage 45V RMS Table TVF302 2 H N 02 400 2 400 3 400 Hz Combined Transient sv RMS to 180V RMS Table TVF302 2 O FTVF302 400 3 360 1 360 Hz Overvoltage Transients Peak Voltage 180V RMS Table TVF302 2 A G FTVF302 360 1 360 2 360 Hz Undervoltage Transients Low Voltage 45V RMS Table TVF302 2 H N FTVF302 360 2 360 3 360 Hz Combined Transient 5V RMS to 180V RMS Table TVF302 2 FTVF302 360 3 600 1 600 Hz Overvoltage Transients Peak Voltage 180V RMS Table TVF302
348. ox Function strobe Trigger Output connection break out box Provides BNC output with internal 9Vdc pull up for connection to external equipment such as oscilloscope Compatible with 3001i iX and 5001i iX Refer to section 3 6 5 TIS Function strobe break out box for systems Function strobe Trigger Output connection break out box Provides BNC output with internal 9Vdc pull up for connection to external equipment such as oscilloscope Compatible with multi chassis i iX Series configurations Refer to section 3 6 5 14 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 3 Unpacking and Installation 3 1 Unpacking Inspect the unit for any possible shipping damage immediately upon receipt If damage is evident notify the carrier DO NOT return an instrument to the factory without prior approval Do not destroy the packing container until the unit has been inspected for damage in shipment N WARNING This power source weighs 61 Ib 28kg Obtain adequate help when moving or mounting the unit 3 2 Power Requirements The 3001i iX AC Power Source has been designed to operate from a single phase 208 to 240 volt AC line The 5001i iX AC Power Source and its systems have been designed to operate from a three phase AC line voltage Three three phase input models are available for inputs of 208 240 Vi 400 440 Vu option 400 or 400 480 Vi option 400 N CAUTION Do not connect 400 480V into the 2
349. phs Note that setting changes will apply to graphs for all phases For current harmonics graphs only the absolute bar settings apply The ABD measurement screen does not display relative current harmonic bar charts but relative data is available in tabular format on the Cur Spectrum tab This button is available only if either the Waveforms or Cur Graph sub tab is selected November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 9 10 Appendix 1 ABD Switching Transients Test Window ABD0100 1 8 Appendix 1 Switching Transients gt O File Edit Run Help Start Abort B Graph preview Row 1 Output Off F Output OH User Data Tested by Comment Test Selection Figure T able no A Figure Pete Fig B Table 1 1 Unom f Fig B Table 1 2 Freq Table 2 Delay after Repeat 1 Note Delay excludes 1 sec CIGui32 overhead 104 000 110 Test department EUT Temp 25 C Hum 95 Test Site Press Figure 9 69 ABD0100 1 8 Switching Transient Control Window The ABD0100 1 8 Switching Transients screen provides a high level of control for performing AC or DC transient tests according to appendix 1 of the ABD0100 1 8 The switching transient tests are also incorporated in the ABD Table test screen but the parameters for these tests are
350. plate file named MS704 Distortion Limits ini located the ClGui32 application directory If the limits are left at 0 00 no pass fail criteria will be applied P F Pass or Fail indication A phase selection is available to the left of the graphs and table which allows each phase to be displayed one at a time Additional user controls located on the EUT Performance Measurements Tab Control Display Description Update Meas Triggers a new acquisition cycle and updates measurement data for all tabs For table SVF and TVF modes Variable Frequency data will be acquired at the frequency set by the Test Frequency Dropdown control This button is always available regardless of what sub tab is selected Settings Brings up a dialog box that allows scaling and color changes for the Waveform or Current harmonics graphs Note that setting changes will apply to graphs for all phases For current harmonics graphs only the absolute bar settings apply The 704 measurement screen does not display relative current harmonic bar charts but relative data is available in tabular format on the Cur Spectrum tab This button is available only if either the Waveforms or Cur Graph sub tab is selected 268 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 8 2 11 Test Description Files Creating Custom Tests The 704 option uses a set of configuration files that contain the
351. power load resistors will be needed PC to operate California Instruments CIGui32 6 2 The Output Calibration Screen To show the OUTPUT CALIBRATION screen for the first time press the MENU key twice to display the MENU 3 screen Press the 7 or J key several times to highlight OUTPUT CAL Press the ENTER key Type 5000 and press the ENTER key to show the OUTPUT CALIBRATION screen Press the PHASE key to select the phase to be calibrated for a 15003iX power system with one controller 6 3 The Measurement Calibration Screen To show the MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION screen follow the steps in paragraph 6 2 Select the MEASUREMENT CAL function instead of OUTPUT CAL from the MENU 2 screen If another CALIBRATION screen has been accessed since power up no password is needed If a password is needed use the value 5000 i Series iX Series November 2005 113 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 6 4 Routine Output Calibration 114 Setup Connect the test equipment to the power source as shown in Figure 6 1 If any output parameter can t be calibrated refer to the Power Source Gain Adjustment in the Non routine Output Calibration section of the manual For the AC Output Calibration either the Fluke 8506A or HP 34401A may be used If the HP 34401A is used it must be put into the slow filter mode Note For purposes of calibrating the output voltage the 135 and 150 volt ranges are the same In other words the 150 volt range can be ca
352. pping the output of the power source itself and will result in functions strobes on J22 It is possible to use the OPTION OUT on the back of the EOS a DB9 connector pin 6 The return can be either pine 2 3 or 4 The strobe is a low going level that last for only 400 to 500 nsec This strobe will coincide with drops performed by the EOS switch If the EOS is already in active mode the controlling power source will not allow its RMS current limit to be programmed above 18 5 amps The EOS 3 is similar to EOS 1 with provision for three phase operation i Series iX Series November 2005 211 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 4 6 2 9 4 6 3 212 Front Panel Controls Indicators Power Switch and Lamp power switch turns the EOS on or off A lamp above the switch illuminates when power is on Active Lamp This lamp is illuminated when the EOS is operating with the power transformer and electronic switches active for IEC1000 4 11 testing During normal power source operation the lamp is off Fault Lamp This lamp is illuminated when an overtemperature or an overcurrent condition has occurred in the EOS If a fault occurs during IEC1000 4 11 testing the FAULT lamp will be turned on and the EOS electronic switches will be turned off The next time the controlling power source attempts to change the EOS state the test will be aborted the FAULT lamp will be turned off the controlling power source will indicate an EOS err
353. problems persist try using the GPIB interface instead Requires National Instruments GPIB controller 15 Slew exceeds dwell The power source transient system was programmed to slew to a voltage and or frequency value that would take longer to accomplish than the slew time set This error can result in single step mode if the steps are executed out of order or one or more steps are skipped The voltage frequency values may no longer line up Try running the test from the first step 16 Illegal during transient A transient step is still in progress Try using the Abort button to abort any test in progress If other CIGui32 screens other than the Main GUI screen are open they may have initiated a transient which conflicts with the 704 option Try closing all other CIGui32 windows Great efforts have been made to check all test sequence files provided as part of the 704 option However due to the breadth and complexity of the 704 database an occasional error may occur while using these files If an error cannot be resolved turn on the ClGui32 bus monitor window and rerun the test that yields the error and save the bus trace to a text file using the File Save All menu in the bus monitor window This file can be emailed to support calinst com along with a description of the error Furthermore test files were developed making reasonable assumptions concerning the intent of the MIL STD 704 directive The user is free to
354. ps caused by load cable impedance To achieve the best output regulation select external sense and connect the voltage sense wires at the load The number of outputs in a multibox system with the Mode iX option can be switched between one for 15000 VA single phase and three for 5000 VA per phase three phase If the Mode iX option is not installed the number of outputs is fixed 66 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z INITIAL SETUP LIMIT SETUP CONFIGURATION ELAPSED TIME VIEWING ANGLE i Series iX Series California Instruments The initial setup menu can be used to determine the AC source settings at power up CAUTION The initial setup can be used to power up the AC source with the output on and high voltage present at the output For normal situations this is not recommended due to the potential danger to operators It is recommended that the initial voltage be set low and or the output relay be programmed to OFF for most situations The Limit menu shows the frequency voltage and current limit capabilities of the AC source Any attempt to program the output beyond these limits will result in a 222 Data Out of Range error Note that these limits are hardware determined and cannot be changed by the user They are shown for reference only UTILITY 2 The Configuration menu shows the installed options This screen is for reference only and no fields can be changed by the user The elapsed
355. put is programmed at 50 Hz a 20 ms scale would display exactly one signal period 6 Move the cursor to the TRIG MODE and select SINGLE or CONT The SINGLE mode will acquire the data once and show the result If you select CONT the data will be updated continuously 7 Move the cursor to the TRIG SOURCE field and select IMM We will cover additional trigger modes later 8 Move the cursor to the START field and press the ENTER key The display that you selected will be shown If you are in CONT trigger mode the data will be updated about once per second You can return to the HARMONICS TRACE ANALYSIS screen by pressing the ENTER key To display the data in a different format or to select voltage instead of current or current instead of voltage change to the selections you want and move the cursor to the VIEW field Pressing the ENTER key will re display the data without triggering a new acquisition This is true even if you were in CONT trigger mode To start a new acquisition you must go through the START field instead eo i Series iX Series November 2005 87 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 4 6 2 2 Analyzing waveform data waveform Trigger point is at 0 0 ms 88 The data displays available for acquired waveform data allow you to scroll through the entire acquisition buffer For waveform displays the knob can be used to scroll through the display horizontally The UP and DOWN cursor keys have no
356. quency ac 200V to 244V 360Hz to 440Hz Apply for 30 mins each test EACF230 VFEMER1P 16 5 1 1c 2 3 Phs Voltage and Frequency ac 200V to 244V 360Hz to 440Hz Apply for 30 mins each test EACF230 VFEMER3P 16 5 1 Normal Operating Conditions ac 16 5 1 2 Voltage Modulation ac Vamp 0 36V to 2 48V Mrate 1Hz to 200Hz Figure 16 1 EACF230 VMOD 16 5 1 3 Frequency Modulation ac Famp 4 9 Hz to 0 2Hz Mrate 0 014Hz to 100Hz Figure 16 2 EACF230 FMOD 16 5 1 4b Momentary Power Interruptions Table 16 1 Equipment with Digital Circuits EACF230 PINTB 16 5 1 4 Momentary Power Interruptions ac Other Equipment EACF230 PINTC 16 5 1 5 Normal Transients ac 16 5 1 5 1 Normal Voltage Surge ac 320V to 140V 400 Hz EACF230 NVSUR 16 5 1 5 2 Normal Frequency Surge 230V 350Hz to 400Hz EACF230 NFSUR 16 5 1 7 Voltage DC Content ac 16 5 1 7 1 Phs Voltage DC Content ac 0 2VDC Apply for 30 mins each test EACF230 DCOFS1P 16 5 1 7 3 Phs Voltage DC Content ac 0 2VDC for 30 mins each test EACF230 DCOFS3P 16 5 1 8 Voltage Distortion ac 8 2 0 VTHD Clipped Sine 400Hz Apply for 30 mins each test EACF230 VTHD 16 5 2 Abnormal Operating Conditions 16 5 2 1b 1 Phs Voltage 194V to 268V 400Hz Apply for 5 mins each test EACF230 VABN1P 16 5 2 1c 3 Phs Voltage ac 194V to 268V 400Hz Apply for 5 mins each test EACF230 16 5 2 1d 1 Phs Voltage and Frequency ac 200V to 244V 370Hz to 430Hz Apply for 5 m
357. quipment intended for use on aircraft electrical systems where the primary power is from wide variable frequency 360 to 800 Hz ac system A designates dc equipment intended for use on aircraft electrical systems where the dc is generated from primary power supplied from either a constant or variable frequency ac system B designates dc equipment intended for use on aircraft electrical systems supplied by engine driven alternator rectifiers or dc generators where a battery of significant capacity is floating on the dc bus at all times Z designates dc equipment that may be used on all other types of aircraft electrical systems applicable to these standards Category Z shall be acceptable for use in lieu of Category A or Category B The required steady state output settings for each power group must be selected based on the type of EUT to be tested These settings can be made from the front panel of the iX Series power source or from the main CIGui32 control screen i Series iX Series November 2005 155 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 1 2 6 CIGui32 160 Control Window 156 RTCA 00160 Test Tables Run Pile Es Pwr Output Test Selection Test Control EUT Performance Measurements NE Conventional 28V DC Conventional 28V DC 28V DC Z Other 28V DC Present Power Source Output Settings Select Airframe 00160 DBase x Pow
358. quirements uideo Ere cuite ree eR Fasaden spe 15 3 3 Mechanical 16 3 4 Input Wiring TB41 nre a A E ie Ere cete eer e ee eee Mae e rere ge ie 16 3 5 Output Power Connections T B2 retsina e nennen 16 3 6 Connectors Rear Panel et e o Rosa eet Nee omer 18 3 7 Single Phase and Three Phase Multiple Box System 26 3 8 Output Voltage Fanges 26 3 9 Functional Test aee e eerie eret ii esl cued ve ee LER EE 27 4 Front Panel Operation necne ient iet tn Tine ed oram Rn gode cuum rs ede nado 37 4T To rofthe ErontPariel sppe eterno ke Longest s 37 4 2 MENU StT ctllre ico toe kand eod Get ay ebbe Gan 42 4 3 Output Programming seie ein nett EN rtt e re RE tere RARE E ERR BE FERE 77 4 4 Waveform Management iX Series only sss nennen nennen enne nennen 78 4 5 Standard Measurements 2 1 Dee eoe Cose Ere be undae oe CEP gebe ebay dS cx 83 4 6 Advanced Measurements iX Series 1 85 4 7 Transient PROGFAM MING ei 655 Se ea har ce eda ge qo ee en dele Up
359. r 7 seconds Table SVF601 2 FSVF601 800 1 SVF602 Test Done so numbers coincide SVF603 Phase Reversal Phase reversal done physically FSVF603 Table TVF Test No Section Subject Test Limits Comment File Ref TVF101 Load and Current Harmonic Measurements 115V RMS 360 800 Hz FTVF101 TVF102 Steady State Limits for Voltage Including Unbalance and Frequenc 1 Balanced Phases 108V to 118V RMS 360 to 800 Hz Apply for 30 mins each test FTVF102 1 108V to 118V RMS 3V 2 Unbalanced Phases Unbalance Apply for 30 mins each test FTVF102 2 TVF103 Voltage Phase Difference 400 1 115V RMS 400 Hz nominal settings Phase B 116 to 124 degrees Apply for 30 mins each test 103 400 1 360 1 115 RMS 360 Hz nominal settings Phase B 116 to 124 degrees Apply for 30 mins each test FTVF103 360 1 600 1 115V RMS 600 Hz nominal settings Phase B 116 to 124 degrees Apply for 30 mins each test FTVF103 600 1 800 1 115V RMS 800 Hz nominal settings Phase B 116 to 124 degrees Apply for 30 mins each test FTVF103 800 1 TVF104 Voltage Modulation 400 1 115V RMS 400 Hz nominal settings 115V RMS 2 5 RMS mod Apply for 10 mins 104 400 1 400 2 109V RMS 400 Hz nominal settings 109V RMS 2 5V RMS mod Apply for 10 mins FTVF104 400 2 400 3 117V RMS 400 Hz nominal settings 117V RMS 2 5V RMS mod Apply for 10 mins FTVF104 400 3 360 1 115 RMS 360 Hz nominal settings 115V RMS 2 5V RMS mod Apply for 10 mins FTVF104 360 1 360 2 109V RMS 360 Hz nominal setti
360. r event The acquisition will always be triggered in this mode and data is available immediately The PHASE A source will cause the acquisition to trigger on the occurrence of a set phase angle for the voltage on phase A The trigger source is always phase A when in this mode regardless of the phase selection shown in the top right corner of the display When the acquisition is started the acquisition system waits for the specified phase angle to occur before triggering the acquisition This mode allows exact positioning of the acquisition data window with respect to the voltage waveform The SET VOLT mode causes the acquisition to trigger at the specified voltage This mode also programs the selected phase or all three phases when the measurement is started from the START field As such this trigger source selection also programs the output voltage to the selected rms level This field changes purpose depending on the trigger source selected immediately above it If the trigger source equals IMM or PHASE A this field can be used to program the trigger phase angle TRIG PHASE In IMM mode the value of this field is ignored November 2005 51 User Manual Rev Z 52 TRIG DELAY START California Instruments If the trigger source is set to SET VOLT this field can be used to specify the rms voltage to program the output to and trigger the measurement on The voltage value set here should not exceed the maximum voltage range s
361. r fields that have a resolution less than 1 The amount of resolution for each menu field is normally visible on the LCD If more digits are entered after the decimal point than can be accepted by a field the value is automatically rounded to the available resolution when the ENTER key is pressed BACKSPACE BACKSPACE lt key be used to erase one digit at a time if you make a data entry error 4 1 7 LCD Display The LCD display of the i and iX Series AC power source provides information on instrument settings and also guides the user through the various menus To ease reading of the displayed information most screens are widely spaced A sample of the main menu 1 screen that appears when the i Series AC source is powered up is shown in Figure 4 6 Due to the amount of space available on each screen some menus have been split into parts The MORE selection located at the bottom right hand side provides access to menu choices at the same level that did not fit single screen Thus to access MENU 2 the cursor should be placed on the MORE selection followed by pressing the ENTER key Alternatively the MENU key may be pressed to move to the MENU 2 screen The present cursor position is always shown with a inverse bar The cursor is located on the MORE selection in Figure 4 6 Pressing ENTER would cause MENU 2 to be displayed i Series iX Series November 2005 41 User Manual Rev Z California Instru
362. r phase in Volt RMS or DC depending on power source mode of operation Curr RMS A Displays EUT current per phase in amps RMS or DC depending on power source mode of operation App Power VA Displays the apparent power for each phase as well as the total power for all three phases For three phase EUT s any imbalance in power between the three phases is calculated by the GUI program and compared 266 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Sub Tab Description against Figure 11 of the MIL STD 704A or Figure 1 of the MIL STD 704 C F specifications The amount of imbalance is displayed in of total VA to the right of the power readings Inrush Current A Displays peak current detected per phase in Amps since last measurement was taken Power Factor Displays power factor for each phase Power factor measurement data is compared against MIL STD 704 Appendix A specification for both leading and lagging power factors When testing to rev A the category of EUT must be selected Categories are defined in the MIL STD 704A If one or more phases is outside the allowable limits a Fail indication is displayed Current Distortion Displays Total Current Distortion for each phase in percent of 96 fundamental current No limits are applied although the user can set a maximum limit for this parameter if needed in the
363. r test Firmware revision 2 37 or higher required See the appropriate sections for details on each group DWELL This field will show the dwell time in seconds for each group during the test and will allow changes to the dwell time to be made The dwell time for the Meister curve group is the dwell time for each inter harmonics This combined with the frequency step size results in a 5 minute test time per frequency decade The dwell time for the sweep group is the dwell time for each frequency decade November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 3 4 2 IEC GROUPS This section will describe the groups and parameters associated with IEC 61000 4 13 Refer to paragraph 9 3 4 1 for groups associated with the test FCURVE GROUP If the FCURVE group is selected the screen will appear as shown in Figure 9 26 The screen has the following parameters that are unique to the group Figure 9 26 IEC 61000 4 13 FCurve 1 LEVEL Set the Flat curve clip level This field can be set when the IEC 1000 4 13 is in the OFF state and the Class is set for USER class 2 PAUSE Time in seconds the test will pause prior to proceeding to the following test This field can be set at any time when the test is not running OSWING GROUP If the OSWING group is selected the screen will appear as shown in Figure 9 27 The screen has the following parameters that are unique to the group Figure 9 27 IEC 61000 4 13 OSwi
364. r the Test sequence data grid Insert Row Inserts a new blank row at the selected data grid location Delete Row Deletes the selected row from either the Test selection data grid or the Test sequence data grid The row contents are permanently discarded Run Run selected test Stop Abort test in progress Help Opens the on line help file 296 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z 9 9 7 ABD Test Selection California Instruments The Test Selections tab in the ABD tests window contains the following controls and displays Control Display Description Select Airframe This drop down control allows the operator to select from one or more libraries of test sequences grouped by airframe This allows multiple sets of test sequences to be organized by application The GUI program is supplied with generic ABD Dbase set of test sequences which conform to the ABD0100 1 8 document Power Group Test Table A library can contain up to five power group test tables numbers A through E These table letters correspond to the Power Groups identified in the ABD0100 1 8 standard Note that groups and are AC powered where as groups D and DC powered The operator cannot select group that is not supported by the present mode of operation of the power source Thus if the power source is in AC mode an error message will be display when trying to select group D or E Operating modes such as AC
365. r to the INITIAL SETUP field and press ENTER You are now in the INITIAL SETUP 1 menu Move the cursor to the MORE field at the end of this menu and press the ENTER key You are now in the INITIAL SETUP 2 menu Move the cursor to the MORE field at the end of this menu and press the ENTER key You are now in the INITIAL SETUP 3 menu Move the cursor to the WAVE GROUP field You can now use the knob or the 0 through 3 key on the front panel to select a different waveform group Press ENTER to confirm your new selection To activate your new selection YOU MUST CYCLE THE POWER so the AC source re initializes If the source is operated over the bus a IEEE 488 Device Clear or reset command RST command will have the same effect The new wave group will be active after you turn the power to the unit back on November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 4 4 5 RMS Amplitude Restrictions The output of sinewave may be programmed to the full rms value of the voltage range selected If the AC source is in the 300 V range the maximum programmable rms voltage is 300 Volt If custom waveform is used however the maximum programmable rms voltage may be less than the maximum range value The voltage range limit is based on the use of a sinewave with a 1 414 crest factor A 300 V rms sinewave has a 424 Volt peak voltage The AC source has a maximum peak voltage capability that is determined by the selected v
366. range of the sweep The STEP size can be changed when the test state is off 4 PAUSE Sets the time in seconds for which the test will pause between ranges There is only one value for the entire test The PAUSE can be set when the test is not running For the Meister curve test the pause time is normally set to 0 secs value other than 0 is entered the inter harmonics are set to 0 during the pause times 5 RESONANT This field is used to report the resonant points if any after running the Meister curve test No editing is allowed in this field When the test is completed a display of harmonics current versus frequency plot is available To view the graph select the field and press the ENTER key RUNNING THE TEST The test sequence used is a function of the EUT class The end user needs to determine the appropriate class of EUT The test protocol is document in the IEC 61000 4 13 test standard For reference the test flow charts are shown here It is assumed that the end user has a copy of the actual test standard however i Series iX Series November 2005 195 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Start Class 1 2 Determine appropriate test configuration i Perform 8 2 1 Test Harmonic combination Flatcurve and Overswing 4 Yes 4 Mei Any functional gt Class 2 MES Meister d anomalies required curve require 7 Yes No
367. rce at the end of a test run is determined by the settings in the test sequence file loaded Options This section contains additional options that can be set by the operator as needed The following options are available Auto Acquire When set this option causes the GUI program to initiate an EUT EUT Data performance data measurement sequence automatically at the after end of a test normal mode or test step single step mode execution Show Phase For three phase EUT s data for phases B and C can be B C data displayed as well In most cases the settings for all three phases are the same and there is no need to display them all as it takes up screen space However this is not the case for voltage imbalance tests This is a display feature only and has no effect on the actual test Note however that if the power source is in single phase mode settings for phase B and C will be ignored The phase mode of the power source can only be changed from the main GUI screen Test Status This area of the Test Control tab displays test execution status for each individual test step as well as the complete test The top section shows the complete test time and what part has been completed so far The bottom section shows the same information for the present test step Test Description The area at the top of the Test Control tab is used to display additional information about the selected test tab It is for information purposes only
368. re available in the WAVEFORMS menu CLIP LEVEL GROUP MODE i Series iX Series This parameter determines the amount of total harmonic distortion of the built in CLIPPED sinewave waveform The range is 0 96 through 20 THD Note that changing the distortion level of the CLIPPED sinewave while the CLIPPED sinewave is used on the output of one or more phases forces the output of the AC Source to be dropped momentarily To avoid this make sure none of the phases is using the CLIPPED sinewave function when changing the clip level The group field displays the currently selected waveform group The iX Series provides four groups of 50 user defined waveforms each for a total of 200 waveforms Only one group can be active at a time however This field only displays the selected waveform group It cannot be used to change the actual group selected Group selection must occur at power up and is done from the INITIAL SETUP 3 screen See section 4 2 11 3 for details The mode field determines the operation mode of the WAVEFORMS display screen Available options for this field are PROG This mode is used to change the programmed waveshape function on the selected phase This is also the default mode of operation November 2005 61 User Manual Rev Z SINE SQUARE 62 California Instruments VIEW T This mode can be used to display any of the available user defined waveforms in a time domain display Previewing wavefor
369. re in the HIGH voltage range as we will program a surge to 160 V rms The low range would only allow 150 V rms PROGRAM 1 VOLT RANGE CURR LIMIT Press the MENU key to bring up MENU 1 Move the cursor to the TRANSIENTS entry and press the ENTER key You are now in the TRANSIENTS menu 6 Move the cursor to the VOLT SURGE SAG entry and press the ENTER key You are now in the VOLT SURGE SAG SETUP menu 7 If you have a three phase configuration and are in the three phase mode use the PHASE key to select all three phases ABC will be displayed in the top right corner of the screen November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 The START 0 may be left at RANDOM as we are not interested in starting specific phase angle If a number is already present in this field use the BACKSPACE lt key to clear it Move the cursor to the GO TO VOLT field and enter 160 0 Move the cursor to the DUR SCALE field and set this field to TIME We will be entering delays in time rather than cycles since this example was stated in ms Move the cursor to the DURATION field and enter 0 033 seconds Be sure not to enter 33 as this field is specified in seconds not milliseconds The highest time resolution available for list transients is 1 ms or 0 001 s Move to the END VOLT field and enter 0 0 We want the voltage to return to 0
370. re operating the AC source using the front panel it helps to understand the operation of the front panel controls Specifically the operation of the knob keyboard and the menu layout are covered in the next few paragraphs 4 1 1 Front Panel Controls and Indicators The front panel can be divided in small number of functional areas e Mains circuit breaker e Status Indicator lights e Shuttle knob e LCD display e FUNCTION keypad DATA ENTRY keypad 4 1 2 Mains Circuit Breaker The circuit breaker located on the bottom left side of the front panel disconnects the AC source from the three phase Line input It will automatically trip when the input current rating of the unit is exceeded due to some component failure The contrasting black color and large size throw bar make it easy to locate in case of an emergency 4 1 3 Status Indicator Lights Four LED status indicators are located directly above the mains circuit breaker These LED s correspond to the following conditions REMOTE The REMOTE LED indicates that the unit is in remote control mode If the IEEE 488 interface is used this indicator will be lit whenever the REM line REMOTE ENABLE line is asserted by the IEEE controller If the RS232C interface is used the REMOTE state be enabled by the controller using the SYST REM command Any time the REMOTE LED is lit the front panel of the i Series unit is disabled There is no LOCAL button that allows the user to regai
371. refer to EUROCAE 14D standard Initial Setup Nominal parameters for the AC Power source are as follows Output Voltage 115V L N or 230V L N Output Frequency 360 Hz to 800 Hz Nominal parameters for the DC Power source are as follows Output Voltage 28V or 14V L N A setting outside these nominal values will disable the test and will prevent accessing to its Menu screens To access the test for the 230V L N the power source must be capable of programming 360V i Series iX Series November 2005 133 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 1 1 3 Tests Performed 9 1 1 3 1 NORMAL STATE AC Source Normal State Voltage and Frequency test Voltage unbalance test Waveform Distortion test Voltage Modulation test Frequency Modulation test Momentary Power Interrupt Undervoltage test Voltage Surge Overvoltage test o m 9 Ur o SN Frequency Transients test Group 1 only Frequency Variation test Group 2 and 3 only DC Source 1 Normal State Voltage test 2 Momentary Power Interrupt Undervoltage test 3 Voltage Surge and Under 9 1 1 3 2 EMERGENCY TEST AC Source 1 Emergency Voltage and Frequency minimum 2 Emergency Voltage and Frequency maximum 3 Voltage unbalance DC Source 1 Emergency Voltage 9 1 1 3 3 ABNORMAL TEST 134 AC Source 1 Abnormal Voltage minimum Abnormal Voltage maximum Voltage Drop Voltage Surge Frequency Transients test group 1 only C Source Abnormal Voltage mini
372. relevant test descriptions These files are contained in the MS704 Rev A F subdirectory of the CIGUI32 application directory The contents of these tables is defined by the 5704 Structure X ini configuration files located in the 5704 Rev A F directory X references the relevant table The test description files used to perform a specific test are listed in the last column labeled Test File These files must be present in the MS704 Rev A F directory or the user directory For customer created tests these file names can be renamed as needed as long as they are correctly referenced in the MS704 Structure Tbl X ini configuration files Tests can be customized as needed by editing these table configuration and test sequence files To do so create a new subdirectory under the application directory To access any new sub directory from within the 704 test window the directory name must be added to the MS704UserTestLibraries txt file located in the CIGui32 application directory This is a simple text file listing all test description directories available Example MS704UserTestLibraries txt file content MyNew DBase Dummy Dir Entry These two directories listed will now be available for selection from the AirFrame selection in the 704 Test Setup screen To facilitate creating new test directories it is easiest to create copy of the 5704 RevF directory first and rename it as required 9 8 2 12 Test Tables The t
373. rements In this case we recommend you copy the supplied DO160 RevE subdirectory and use this copy to make modifications to This will preserve the original data provided i Series iX Series November 2005 179 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 2 IEC 61000 4 11 Option 9 2 1 General The IEC1000 4 11 option is capable of performing IEC1000 4 section 11 voltage dips short interruptions and voltage variations immunity tests On three phase iX i Configurations the user can select one two or all three phases to be active during the 1000 4 11 tests in this configuration 9 2 2 Standard Revisions and EUT Classes 411 option supports both the first 1994 06 and the second edition 2004 03 of the IEC 61000 4 11 test standard as of firmware revision 2 38 Older firmware revisions only support the first edition Contact support calinst com for upgrade information If Edition 2 0 is supported the standard revision can be selected when using the Cigui32 Windows program From the front panel there is no need to select the revision but data values can be set that support either version of the standard Generic tests files are distributed with the CIGui32 program for both editions of the test standard Files applicable to Edition 2 0 have ED20 in their file name Do not mix these files as the data setup will not be correct if you do To load a test file select the Mode Dips or Vars and test standard revision first the
374. res Additional Equipment HDC104 Total Ripple Requires Additional Equipment HDC105 Normal Voltage Transients 125V to 475V DC 1 Overvoltage Transients Peak Voltage 475V DC able HDC105 1 A J BHDC105 1 2 Undervoltage Transients Low Voltage 125V DC able HDC105 1 K P BHDC105 2 3 Combined Transients 125V to 475V DC able HDC105 1 Q R BHDC105 3 4 Repetitive Normal Voltage Transient Test 215V to 315V DC Repeat transient for 30 mins BHDC105 4 HDC201 Power Interrupt OV for 50 msec able HDC201 2 A L BHDC201 HDC301 Abnormal Steady State Limits for Voltage 245V to 285V DC pply each test for 30 mins BHDC301 HDC302 Abnormal Voltage Transients 65V to 475V DC 1 Overvoltage Transients Peak Voltage 475V DC able HDC302 2 A F BHDC302 1 i Series iX Series November 2005 285 User Manual Rev 4 California Instruments Test No Section Subject Test Limits Comment File Ref 2 Undervoltage Transients Low Voltage 65V DC able HDC302 2 G L BHDC302 2 3 Combined Transients 65V to 475V DC able HDC302 2 M N BHDC302 3 HDC401 Emergency Limits for Voltage 240V to 290V DC pply each test for 30 mins BHDC401 HDC501 Starting Voltage Transients 155V to 280V DC able HDC501 2 BHDC501 HDC601 Power Failure for 7 seconds able HDC601 2 A D BHDC601 HDC602 Polarity Reversal N A to Rev B 286 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments
375. ries uses a DSP based data acquisition system to provide extensive information regarding the output of the Source This data acquisition system digitizes the voltage and current waveforms and calculates several parameters from this digitized data The result of these calcalutions is displayed series of measurement data screens The actual digitized waveforms can also be displayed by selecting the Harmonics Trace Analysis screen total of four measurement screens are used to display all this information iX series only MEASUREMENTS 1 VOLTAGE 113 SVDC FREG CURRENT 36 9R POKER PREVIOUS SCREEN Figure 4 9 MEASUREMENTS Screen single phase three phase modes The first three Measurement screens available on the iX Series are not menus in that no changes can be made anywhere Instead these three screens provide load parameter readouts The fourth measurement screen provides access to the advanced measurements and does offer several user accessible fields Series only The measurement screens be reached by successively pressing the MEAS key which will toggle to all four available screens In three phase configuration iX Series measurements are available for each phase individually To select the desired phase use the PHASE key to toggle through phase or The ABC mode displays the data for all three phases simultaneously The following parameters are available in the first three me
376. rload Operating load with too high inrush or start Consult factory for application advice up currents 7 3 6 No Output and No Lights on Front Panel CAUSE SOLUTION Input circuit breaker switched off Switch the breaker on No input power to TB3 Ensure 3 phase power is getting to TB3 Unit tripped on overvoltage or overcurrent Turn circuit breaker off wait five seconds turn circuit breaker back on 7 3 7 No Output But Power On LED on Front Panel is Lit CAUSE SOLUTION OUTPUT switch is turned off Turn OUTPUT ON switch to ON REMOTE SHUTDOWN logic line at J22 pin 36 is shorted to D COM or A COM Current limit programmed down or to zero Voltage programmed down or to zero Unit tripped on overvoltage or overcurrent Turn circuit breaker off wait five seconds turn circuit breaker back on 126 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev 2 California Instruments 7 4 Advanced Troubleshooting WARNING Do not connect 400 480V into the 208 240V unit the result could be severely damaged unit CAUTION VOLTAGES UP TO 480 VAC AND 700 VDC ARE PRESENT IN CERTAIN SECTIONS OF THIS POWER SOURCE SPP WARNING THIS EQUIPMENT GENERATES POTENTIALLY LETHAL VOLTAGES DEATH ON CONTACT MAY RESULT IF PERSONNEL FAIL TO OBSERVE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS DO NOT TOUCH ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS WHEN POWER IS APPLIED 7 4 1 Switch Off Unit Switch of the unit at the circuit breaker on the front
377. rm 2 4 0000 01000 78 Figure 4 29 Selecting waveforms for single phase or all 79 Figure 4 30 Custom waveform creation with GUI program esee eee nne 80 Figure 4 31 Waveform crest factor affects max rms 81 Figure 4 32 Waveform frequency domain view 82 Figure 4 33 Scrolling through tabular FFT 86 Figure 4 34 Scrolling through bar chart FFT 86 Figure 4 35 Scrolling through acquired waveform data emm eene 88 Figure 4 36 SET VOLT trigger source 0 emm eee rennen 90 Figure 4 37 Positive trigger delay Post trigger emen 92 Figure 4 38 Negative trigger delay Pre trigger 93 Figure 4 39 Pulse Transients eed eed Te rene 95 Figure 4 40 List Transients le ecrire are e en de epe eure xe Aeneas 96 Figure 4 41 Switching waveforms in a transient 1 99 Figure 4 42 START VIEW TRANSIENT SEQUENCE 100 Figure 5 1 AC Power System Block 101 Figure 5 2 Power Source Module Block 104
378. rom the available library of 50 user defined waveforms or the three standard waveforms The output waveshape changes upon entry into each step and remains in effect for the duration of the step The default waveshape is always the SINE sinewave This is the number of times the VOLTAGE FREQUENCY SWEEP STEP transient will repeat before it will proceed to the next event or exit the transient The number of times the transient event is generated is equal to the REPEAT 1 Leave this value at zero if only one execution of this event in the list is required November 2005 59 User Manual Rev Z EVENT California Instruments This must be the last item in the transient edit screen All data fields must be entered before inserting the EVENT The EVENT takes value from 1 to 99 The EVENT defines the order of execution of the transient events in multiple event transient It is good practice to enter spaced EVENT 5 to allow insertion of an EVENT later if needed For example space them by 5 Entry of a sequence EVENT number will cause the display to return to the TRANSIENT screen 4 2 6 5 START VIEW TRANSIENT SEQUENCE sub menu 60 REPEAT 8 15 VOLTAGE SURG SAG CLEAR SEG PREU SCREEN STRRTA UIEM TRANSIENT SEQUENCE 05 VOLTAGE SURG SAG 1 VOLTAGE SURG SAG Figure 4 16 START VIEW TRANSIENT SEQUENCE screen The START VIEW TRANSIENT SEQUENCE screen is used to control transient execution It als
379. rrect number of parameters were received Missing parameter Too few parameters Check programming manual for received for correct number of parameters requested operation 110 Command header Command header Check syntax of command error incorrect 111 header separator Invalid command Use semi colon to separate command error separator used headers 112 Program mnemonic Syntax error Check programming manual for too long correct command syntax 113 Undefined header Command not Check programming manual for recognized error correct command syntax 120 Numeric data error Data received is nota Check programming manual for number correct command syntax Invalid character in Number received Check programming manual for number contains non numeric correct command syntax character s 123 Exponent too large Exponent in number Check programming manual for exceeds limits correct parameter range Numeric data not Number received Check programming manual for allowed when number is not correct command syntax allowed November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Block data not Block data was sent Check programming manual for allowed correct command syntax Execution error Command could not Command may be inconsistent with be executed mode of operation such as programming frequency when in DC mode Invalid while in local Command issued but Put instrument in remote state b
380. rvoltage Transients Low Voltage 6V DC able LDC302 2 IALDC302 2 3 Combined Transients oV to 80V DC able LDC302 2 U V IALDC302 3 LDC401 Emergency Limits for Voltage 16V to 24V DC Apply each test for 30 mins IALDC401 LDC501 Starting Voltage Transients 16V to 28 5V DC Table LDC501 2 A IALDC501 LDC601 Power Failure for 7 seconds Table LDC601 2 A D ALDC601 LDC602 Polarity Reversal N A to rev i Series iX Series November 2005 289 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 8 2 13 704 Option Related Error Messages The CIGui32 program will monitor the power source on regular basis for any run time errors If an error is reported by the power source any test step execution will be aborted Possible errors and error sources are No Description Potential cause 2 Current Limit Fault EUT may require more current than the programmed current limit setting This is possible on constant power loads during reduced voltage low line type test steps If the power source is set to Constant Voltage CV mode the output will trip off when the current limit is exceeded and Current Limit fault is generated In Constant Current CC mode the output voltage will be reduced to reduce the current to the set limit In this case no error message will be generated 113 Undefined Header Generally caused by a communication problem between the PC and the power Source If the RS232 interface is used and these
381. ry isolation November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Figure 5 3 5001i Internal Layout i Series iX Series November 2005 107 User Manual Rev Z AMBER 24 GREEN 15 108 RED 15V PARALLEL WHEN LIT RED November 2005 California Instruments YSN NI OG b Ber 21901 ASSV Od 4661 R m s 6 4 0004 M 61 oco oo 5a oo co p DS1 FAULT GREEN BY LOGIC RED Figure 5 4 Logic Board LED s i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments There are six LED indicators on the logic board Their positions are shown in Figure 5 4 The LED functions are listed in Table 5 1 Table 5 1 Logic Board LED s LED FUNCTION COMMENTS 15V logic supply 15V logic supply 8V oscillator supply 24V supply for relays and logic PARALLEL LED should be lit when units are paralleled K1 is closed FAULT LED is lit unit normal No light indicates pwr stage failed 5 8 AC Power Board The AC power assembly takes a 250V 500V DC input and generates a 150V 300V AC direct coupled output The AC power amplifier is a full bridge inverter with three paralleled IGBT s in each leg for a total of twelve IGBT s The switching frequency of the bridge is 37 5 kHz and
382. s TRIGGER IV SUN 7000 481 1 3 4 Function Strobe Trigger Output Accessory 22 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 3 6 6 Remote Inhibit J22 36 J22 27 The Remote Inhibit input J22 pin 36 can be used to open and close the output relay of the AC power source This input overrides the state of the output relay programmed from the front panel or the bus It may be used for safety interlock purposes A logic low on this pin will cause the output voltages to be programmed to 0 0 volts and the output relays to open A logic high will cause the programmed output voltage to be restored at the output terminals A contact closure between pin J22 36 and pin J22 27 D COM will simulate a logic low state i Series iX Series November 2005 23 California Instruments User Manual Rev Z Figure 3 5 Hear Panel View for the 3001i 3001iX 383H 138 1 NOILVOIJILN3QI M3MOd 1ndino cal Hdt OL OVA 0 0 802 Q3MIM ANOIOVJ HlMAnO SVd 3n0lH10313 393VH23 anos SIAV ONIOIAM3S 380438 LINN LOANNOOSIG MOOHS 30 MSIS NOILOVO 5 ONIAON3Y 340338 S3ONnOS TWNHILX3 TV ime 193NNOOSId ET ATM3dOMd 38 ISNN aua AlddnS YIMOd 7 WWG 0 Sq339X3 gt ANIUYND 39Vv31 7 2 20 5 GE ONINSVM zez 54 noldo LAN
383. s data for phases B and C can be B C data displayed as well In most cases the settings for all three phases are the same and there is no need to display them all as it takes up screen space However this is not the case for voltage imbalance tests This is a display feature only and has no effect on the actual test Note however that if the power source is in single phase mode settings for phase B and C will be ignored The phase mode of the power source can only be changed from the main GUI screen Test Status This area of the Test Control tab displays test execution status for each individual test step as well as the complete test The top section shows the complete test time and what part has been completed so far The bottom section shows the same information for the present test step Test Description The area at the top of the Test Control tab is used to display additional information about the selected test tab It is for information purposes only and has no effect on the actual test execution Table Header The table header is shown against a yellow background and shows the table from which this test sequence was selected Test Sequence Data The test sequence data grid displays the specific parameters used to program the Grid power source This data implements the required tests The parameters are loaded for the referenced ini file in the test table on the Test Selection tab It is possible to edit this information if needed which a
384. s determined by the Execution Options setting The same can be accomplished using the Run menu entries When operating in Single Step or Loop mode make sure the desired test step is selected in the test sequence table at the bottom of this tab as this will be the one used by the program Execution Options The execution options determine the mode of operation when the Start button is clicked Available execution modes and settings are Execute all In this mode all steps in the test sequence will be executed steps sequentially until the end of the table is reached Single Step Runs only the selected test step When operating in Single Step mode make sure the desired test step is selected in the test sequence table at the bottom of this tab before clicking on the Start button Loop on Step In this mode the same step will be executed repeatedly until the operator clicks on the Abort button In this mode the Complete test progress status bar may run past its maximum and will no longer update as the total test time is i Series iX Series November 2005 263 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Control Display Description determined by the operator now and not the program Revert to When selected the output of the power source will be set back to Steady State the steady state settings in effect before the start of the test when on Abort the operator aborts a test Normally the output of the sou
385. s field will report the instantaneous power in KW gt PK CURR This field will report the peak current and will hold the maximum reading i Series iX Series November 2005 319 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments HATT HOUR METER Is TUR HATT HR 2 933KWH ETIME 21 28 34 POWER 2 288 PREVIOUS SCREEN CURR 16 866A Figure 9 72 WH Meter Screen With Function Active Note Changing from stop to start will stop the measurement and will maintain the last data record for the watt hour meter To restart the measurements the field is toggled to the stop position from the start position and the previous data will be reset to zeros WATT HR POWER and PK CURR will display the data for the phase selected with the phase key If the phase is selected for all phases in a two or three phase system the WATT HR and POWER fields will show the sum of all phases PK CURR will remain at the last selected phase Note Changing Mode of operation from single phase to three phases while the Watt hour meter is in the active state will generate an error Input buffer full This error will halt the measurements To clear the error the Watt hour meter must be switched to the stopped state It is advised that the Watt hour meter should be set to the stop state before changing the mode of operation 320 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 10 4 Remote PROGRAMMING
386. s may be selected for each phase The number of custom waveforms from which to select remains 50 but each phase can be assigned a different custom or standard waveform The specific output phase for which the waveshape is programmed is selected with the PHASE key on the front panel The selected phase is always shown in the top right hand corner of the WAVEFORMS display To select the same wave shape for all three phases in a three phase configuration press the PHASE key until the ABC annunciator appears in the top right corner of the WAVEFORMS menu Waveform selections made in this mode will apply to all three phases 4 4 3 Creating Custom Waveforms The iX Series provides four groups of 50 custom defined waveforms each for a total of 200 waveforms in addition to the 3 standard waveforms Of these four groups one may be active at a time The active group is selected in the INITIAL SETUP menu Custom waveforms cannot be created from the front panel of the iX Series Rather they have to be downloaded through the IEEE 488 or RS232C interface A Windows based program is included with the iX Series that allows waveforms to be created and downloaded easily This Graphical User Interface program allows waveforms to be created by specifying harmonic amplitudes and phase angles with respect to the fundamental It also offers an arbitrary waveform data entry mode that allows individual data points to be specified i Series iX Series November 2005 79
387. s the transient event is generated is equal to the REPEAT 1 Leave this value at zero if only one execution of this event in the list is required This must be the last item in the transient edit screen All data fields must be entered before inserting the EVENT The EVENT takes a value from 1 to 99 The EVENT defines the order of execution of the transient events in a multiple event transient It is a good practice to enter spaced EVENT s to allow insertion of an EVENT later if needed For example space them by 5 Entry of a sequence EVENT number will cause the display to return to the TRANSIENT screen November 2005 55 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 4 2 6 2 VOLTAGE SWEEP STEP sub menu VOLTAGE SHEEP STEP SETUP RANDOM END DELAY 8 8815 FUNCT SINE ION Figure 4 13 VOLTAGE SWEEP STEP SETUP screen The Voltage sweep and step screen shown in Figure 4 13 can be reached from the transient screen as follows 1 Scroll to the VOLT SWEEP STEP entry using the up and down keys 2 Press the ENTER key to bring up the VOLTAGE SWEEP STEP screen The VOLTAGE SWEEP STEP screen has several data fields All data fields that are blank to the right of the equal sign must be filled or an error message will occur when trying to leave this screen The EVENT is the last data field to be filled Entering the event data field will cause the display to return to the TRANSIENT screen where new selection can be made
388. se mode the voltage lists are phase selectable You can set up a different voltage list for each phase To do this use the PHASE key to choose the desired phase as described in the example Note that fields common to all phases such as DURATION END DELAY and REPEAT always apply to all three phases in three phase mode When the cursor is moved to any of these fields the phase annunciator in the top right hand corner always reverts to 2 Frequency transients are identical to voltage transients except they apply to all three phases at all times in a three phase configuration 4 7 6 Programming Slew Rates 98 As shown in the previous examples there are a number of ways that you can generate custom waveforms Programmable slew rates provide additional flexibility when customizing waveforms Slew rates determine how fast the voltage or frequency is changed by the controller when a step pulse or list transient is triggered Slew rates cannot be programmed from the front panel and are always set to their maximum values at power on To use programmable slew rates the AC source must be programmed over the bus Refer to the SCPI Programming Manual for more information about programming slew rates November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 4 7 7 Switching Waveforms The FUNCTION field available in each transient list event setup menu may be used to dynamically switch waveforms during transient execution
389. set low and or the output relay be programmed to OFF for most situations The following fields are provided in the INITIAL SETUP menus Entry Description INITIAL SETUP 1 VOLTAGE Sets the power on AC voltage for AC and AC DC modes or the DC voltage for DC mode CURR LIMIT Sets the power on current limit value FREQ Sets the power on frequency value PHASE Sets the power on frequency for phase with respect to an external sync signal If the internal oscillator is used default this setting has no effect INITIAL SETUP 2 VOLT RANGE Sets the power on voltage range value The available choices are determined by the VOLT PAIR selected in the VOLTAGE CURRENT CONTROL SETUP menu VOLT MODE Sets the power on voltage mode Available settings are AC mode DC mode or AC DC mode iX Series only OL MODE Sets the power on overload mode Available settings are Constant Current CC or Constant Voltage CV mode OUTPUT RELAY Sets the power on state of the output relay Available settings are ON or OFF November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z VOLT SENSE WAVE GROUP CLOCK MODE NO OUTPUT i Series iX Series California Instruments INITIAL SETUP 3 Sets the power on state of the voltage sense mode Available settings are Internal INT or External EXT Series only Sets the user defined waveform group that will be loaded at power on Available groups are 0 1 2 and 3 Each group can contain up to
390. ss Ready 2 Figure 9 16 160 Option EUT Measurement Data Screen The EUT Performance Measurements tab in the 160 tests window provides measurement data taken by the power source s data acquisition system This tab contains four sub tabs that each present different aspects of the EUT measurement data Additional user controls for measurement updates and graph scaling are provided right next to the four sub tabs The following sub tabs are available for selection Sub Tab Description Parameters i Series iX Series This tab displays the parametric measurement data in tabular form This includes voltage current power power factor distortion etc For three phase EUT s data is shown for all three phases For single phase EUT data is shown for phase A only as long as the power source is in single phase mode The top half of the Parameters tab displays all parametric measurement data The following data is available Volt RMS V Displays source voltage per phase in Volt RMS or DC depending on power source mode of operation Curr RMS A Displays EUT current per phase in amps RMS or DC depending on power source mode of operation App Power VA Displays the apparent power for each phase as well as the total power for all three phases For three phase EUT s any imbalance in power between the three phases is calculated by the GUI The amount of imbalance is displayed in 9o of total V
391. ssages Error messages are displayed in the upper left hand corner of the LCD display They are also stored in the error message queue from which they can be queried using the SYST ERR Query The error queue has a finite depth If more error messages are generated than can be held in the queue queue overflow message will be put in the last queue location To empty the queue use the error query until the No Error result is received Errors appearing on the LCD will generally remain visible until the user moves to another screen If multiple error messages are generated in succession only the last message will be visible as there is only space for one error message on the LCD display The same area of the display is also used to display status messages While error messages always have a negative error number status messages have a positive number The table below displays a list of possible error and status messages along with their possible cause and remedy woemr 100 Command error Unable to complete Unit may be in a mode inconsistent requested operation with request 102 Syntax error Command syntax Misspelled or unsupported command incorrect 103 Invalid separator SCPI separator not See SCPI section of programming recognized manual 104 Data type error Data type invaled Check command for supported data types 108 Parameter not One or more Check programming manual for allowed additional parameters co
392. st be set before starting the test The following is description of these parameters REDUCE The lowest voltage level as percentage of the nominal voltage Thus 0 is 0 TO Volts 100 is full nominal voltage FALL TIME The time in seconds it will take the output to reach the REDUCE TO voltage Values must be entered in seconds 0 000 sec time be used for abrupt voltage drops instead of voltage sweeps to support Edition 2 0 of the test standard This requires firmware 2 38 or higher however HOLD TIME The time in seconds the output will hold at the REDUCE TO voltage Values must be entered in seconds RISE TIME The time in seconds the output will reach the NOMINAL voltage from the REDUCE TO voltage Values must be entered in seconds The timing of voltage variations is different between editions 1 0 and 2 0 of the IEC 61000 4 11 test standard While the original standard used voltage ramps on both sides of the variation test level the Edition 2 0 standard calls out abrupt drop to the test level followed by voltage ramp back to the nominal voltage Thus for Edition 2 0 the fall time must be set to 0 000 seconds This requires firmware revision 2 38 or higher Older firmware revision will not accept 0 000 sec for fall time The shortest allowable fall time for older revision firmware is 0 02 sec Furthermore where under Edition 1 0 rise and fall times were specified in seconds they are specified in number of cycles
393. step of the transient sequence Each step can use different waveshape from the available library of 50 user defined waveforms or the three standard waveforms The output waveshape changes upon entry into each step and remains in effect for the duration of the step The default waveshape is always the SINE sinewave 56 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z REPEAT EVENT i Series iX Series California Instruments This is the number of times the VOLTAGE SWEEP STEP transient event will repeat before it will proceed to the next event or exit the transient program Note that the number of times the transient event is generated is equal to the REPEAT 1 Leave this value at zero if only one execution of this event in the list is required This must be the last item in the transient edit screen All data fields must be entered before inserting the EVENT The EVENT takes a value from 1 to 99 The EVENT defines the order of execution of the transient events in multiple event transient It is a good practice to enter spaced EVENT s to allow insertion of an EVENT later if needed For example space them by 5 Entry of a sequence EVENT number will cause the display to return to the TRANSIENT screen November 2005 57 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 4 2 6 3 FREQUENCY SWEEP STEP sub menu 58 FREQUENCY 5 5 SETUP 0 0815 END DELAY 8 8815 FUNCTION SINE EPEAT
394. sweep The STEP size can be changed when the test state is off This field shows the current inter harmonic frequency when the test is running An inter harmonic frequency can be selected with the shuttle To run an inter harmonic frequency without sweeping through the entire range RUN POINT must be selected Sets the time in seconds for which the test will pause between inter harmonic frequencies There is only one value for the entire test The PAUSE can be set when the test is not running November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 3 4 3 MEISTER CURVE GROUP If the Meister curve group is selected the screen will appear as shown in Figure 9 31 The screen has the following parameters that are unique to the group 1000 4 15 TESTS r STATE 0FF LL LEVEL A wA 1 20 PREVIOUS SCREEN Figure 9 31 IEC 61000 4 13 Meister Curve 1 LEVEL Sets the percentage level of the inter harmonics relative to the fundamental The level is fixed for the entire frequency range defined by FRANGE To change levels the test state must be off and user class must be selected 2 FRANGE The range is selected by rotating the shuttle The range selection is required to change the level An individual range step can be run by selecting the desired range followed by RUN RANGE from the RUN field 3 STEP The step size defines the inter harmonics sweep points This step size is fixed for the entire
395. t Low 0 150 V High 0 250 V Programming Resolution AC DC Mode DC Offset 0 01 V 0 5V 0 1 V 0 6 25V 1V gt 25V 0 5 of range 16 to 400 0 5 of range 16 to 400 Hz Hz 0 5 of range 0 5 of range DC offset 5 of range 0 1 VDC lt 25VDC AC DC mode 5 of range 1 VDC gt 25VDC Voltage Distortion 1 max THD at 50 60 Hz 1 max THD at 50 60 Hz linear load 2 max THD at 400 Hz 2 max THD at 400 Hz Load Regulation 0 5 DC to 100 Hz 0 5 DC to 100 Hz 2 2 to 500 Hz 135 range 2 2 to 500 Hz 135 150 range 0 6 to 500 Hz 270 range 0 6 to 500 Hz 270 300 range Line Regulation 0 1 for 10 input line 0 1 for 10 input line change change Power per phase either range at full scale voltage 3001 9003i iX 3000 VA 2100 W DC 3000 VA 2100 W DC 5001 15003i iX 5000 VA 3500 W DC 5000 VA 3500 W DC 1 The distortion specification for the 30011 and is valid for an input voltage range of 197 264 V i Series iX Series November 2005 3 User Manual Rev Z Output Parameter Current maximum rms amps per phase 5001 15003i iX 37 0 135 VAC range per phase 10001i iX 1000 1i iX 10000 VA AG 7000 W DC 1500 1i iX 15000 10500 W DC Current maximum rms amps per phase 300 1i iX 22 2 135 range 11 1 270 range 15 5 135 VDC range 7 77 270 VDC range 18 5 270 VAC range 25 0 135 VDC range 11 7 270 VDC ra
396. t R38 just to the point the output current is on 103 above the programmed value MODEL mmRG ISET R LOAD ohms Table 6 5 Current Limit Calibration Repeat this adjustment for the Phase B and Phase C power sources of a 15003 power system 120 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 6 6 3 Output Impedance Calibration 3001iX 5001iX 9003iX and 15003iX models only For the output impedance calibration two HP 34401A DMMSs or equivalent must be used The following modes must be programmed 6 digits AC Filter slow 3 Hz and 6 digits One DMM is used to measure the output voltage one to measure the load current using suitable CT The calibration should be done for each phase individually Furthermore an accurate phase meter with at least 0 01 resolution is needed See equipment list section 6 1 The reference input of the phase meter must be connected to the LOCK output of the controller at the rear panel of the master 5001iX chassis This is a square wave TTL signal Select Square wave input on the phase meter The other input of the phase meter must be connected at the AC source output of the phase being calibrated Select Sine wave input on the phase meter for this input Note that this is a 230 Vrms signal so the Phase Meter must have sufficient input range on this input The phase meter is used to determine the phase shift between no load and full load conditions Connect the
397. t iso DO160 E2P0 NORMVSURGE 1 7 2 2 Normal Transients 35V for 200ms 16 5 2 4 b Use specified limit iso DO160 E2P0 NORMVSURGE2 8 2 3 Normal Transients 34V for 300ms 16 5 2 4 b Use specified limit iso DO160 E2P0 NORMVSURGE3 9 2 4 Normal Transients 18 5V for 5 secs 16 5 2 4 b Use specified limit iso DO160 E2P0 NORMVSURGE4 10 3 Voltage Surge Figure 13 11 3 1 Abnormal Transients 36V for 1 sec 16 5 4 4 Apply also Appendix 3 test E3P0 ABNVSURGE1 12 3 2 Abnormal Transients 33V for 3 sec 16 5 4 4 Apply also Appendix 3 test E3P0 ABNVSURGE2 13 3 3 Abnormal Transients OV for 5 secs 16 5 4 3 b Apply also Appendix 3 test E3P0 ABNVSURGE3 14 3 4 Abnormal Transients Disconnects for 5 secs n a Appendix 3 tests for multiple power E3P3 APPENDIX3 input equipment 15 4 Voltage Spikes Fig 3 C Peak voltage 600V 17 4 Requires additional equipment 16 5 Switching Transients Appendix 1 n a Appendix 1 DC Switching Transients 17 5 1 Cf Figure A Table 1 2 T1 gt 3 n a E5PO APP1TransientsA msec 18 5 2 1 Cf Figure B Table 1 2 N21 n a E5PO APP1TransientsB 1 19 5 2 2 Cf Figure B Table 1 2 N22 n a E5PO APP1TransientsB 2 20 5 2 3 Cf Figure Table 1 2 N23 n a E5PO APP1TransientsB N3 21 5 2 4 Table 1 2 N24 n a E5PO APP1TransientsB 4 22 5 2 5 Cf Figure B Table 1 2 5 n a E5PO APP1TransientsB 5 23 Ripple Voltage Figure 8 16 5 2 2 and Figure 18 2 Requires additional equipment 24 Starting inrush
398. tap to connect to the EOS output When IEC1000 4 11 testing is not active the controlling power source puts the EOS 1 into bypass mode shunting the EOS input terminals directly to the output terminals All control of the EOS 1 is performed automatically by the California Instruments power source The control signals are sent from the power source to the EOS via the option interface cable Refer to Section 9 2 for instructions regarding performing IEC1000 4 11 tests with this equipment The rated operating current for the EOS in active mode is 18 5 amps If the controlling power source is set for an RMS current limit greater than 18 5 amps it will not activate the EOS unit An attempt to do so will indicate Error 222 Data out of range IEC 1000 4 11 tests may still be run but in pre compliance mode with the EOS unit bypassed Note that while the EOS is engaged there is no Function Strobe output Normally the function strobe outside the transient system is associated with any output voltage change When the EOS is in use however the function strobe is generated only when the EOS is engaged This is because the output is programmed down during relay activation These strobes are meaningless and are not related to any output drops occurring through the EOS During the EOS transients that use any of the available EOS drop levels there are no function strobes Voltage drops that do not use one of the available fixed drop levels are done by dro
399. tate Limits for Voltage 22V to 29V DC Apply for 30 mins BLDC102 LDC103 Voltage Distortion Spectrum Requires Additional Equipment LDC104 Total Ripple Requires Additional Equipment LDC105 Normal Voltage Transients 18V to 50V DC 1 Overvoltage Transients Peak Voltage 50V DC Table LDC105 3 AA JJ BLDC105 1 2 Undervoltage Transients Low Voltage 18V DC Table LDC105 3 BLDC105 2 3 Combined Transients 18V to 50V DC Table LDC105 3 QQ RR BLDC105 3 4 Repetitive Normal Voltage Transient Test 18V to 45V DC Repeat transient for 30 mins BLDC105 4 LDC201 Power Interrupt OV for 50 msec Table LDC201 2 A L BLDC201 LDC301 Abnormal Steady State Limits for Voltage 20V to 31 5V DC Apply each test for 30 mins BLDC301 LDC302 Abnormal Voltage Transients ZV to 50V DC 1 Overvoltage Transients Peak Voltage 50V DC able LDC302 3 AA FF BLDC302 1 2 Undervoltage Transients Low Voltage 7V DC Table LDC302 3 GG LL BLDC302 2 3 Combined Transients ZV to 50V DC Table LDC302 3 MM NN BLDC302 3 LDC401 Emergency Limits for Voltage 18V to 29V DC Apply each test for 30 mins BLDC401 LDC501 Starting Voltage Transients 16V to 30V DC Table LDC501 2 A BLDC501 LDC601 Power Failure for 7 seconds Table LDC601 2 A D BLDC601 LDC602 Polarity Reversal N A to Rev B Table Test No Section Subject Test Limits Comment File Ref HDC101 Load Measurements 270V DC BHDC101 HDC102 Steady State Limits for Voltage 250V to 280V DC pply for 30 mins BHDC102 HDC103 Voltage Distortion Spectrum Requi
400. tching power groups Present Power Source Output Settings This section displays the programmed steady state settings that are in effect This information is updated each time the 160 form regains focus The mode of operation AC DC or AC DC is displayed for reference but cannot be changed from this screen When in DC mode the frequency setting will show DC Note that changes in steady state settings can only be made from the main GUI screen The operator can toggle between the main screen and the 160 screen for this purpose as needed Table Header The table header is shown against a blue background and contains the table reference designator and a description of the selected power group Test Table Display 158 The data grid at the bottom of the tab displays the selected power group test table It is also used to select the specific test section and number to be executed Thus every test starts by selecting the desired test step from this table Clicking on the desired ROW does this The selected row will be highlighted and the associated file shown in the File Ref Field will be loaded in the Test Control tab For better readability the user can adjust the column widths by dragging the dividers between columns If the window is too small to display all rows and columns scroll bars will appear at the bottom and or right of the data grid The following fields are displayed in the test data tables
401. te The test will be repeated on three phase systems to include all three phases if the coupling is set to all The lt key backspace will terminate the test at any time PHASE DIFFERENCE This test applies to three phase systems only The phase angle for the selected phase will change relative to phase A in the following sequence If phase B is selected e 236 for 1 minute e 244 for 1 minute e 240 for 1 minute If phase C is selected e 116 for 1 minute e 124 for 1 minute e 120 for 1 minute VOLTAGE MODULATION This test will vary the output voltage by 2 5V rms over period of one second The test will last for 2 minutes The lt key backspace will terminate the test at any time FREQUENCY MODULATION This test will vary the output frequency by 4Hz over period of one minute The test will last for 4 minutes The lt key backspace will terminate the test at any time WAVEFORM DISTORTION This test will generate a 5 THD voltage distortion on the output voltage waveform The distortion is caused by using a clipped sinewave The test will last for 1 minute The lt key backspace will terminate the test at any time i Series iX Series November 2005 245 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 8 1 7 2 TRANSIENT TEST From the MIL704 main menu Figure 9 53 scroll to the TRANSIENT AC entry using the up and down cursor keys Press the ENTER key to select the TRANSIENT screens The screen wil
402. ters LIST causes the output to sequence through a number of values as determined by points entered in the List menu FIXED disables transient operation for the selected function 4 7 3 Step Transients 94 Step transients let you specify an alternate or triggered voltage level that the AC source will apply to the output when it receives a trigger Because the default transient voltage level is zero volts you must first enter a triggered voltage before you can trigger the AC source to change the output amplitude Step transients can only be programmed through the bus not the front panel Refer to the SCPI Programming Manual for more information about programming Step transients and triggers November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 4 7 4 Pulse Transients Pulse transients let you program the output to specified value for predetermined amount of time At the end of the Pulse transient the output voltage returns to its previous value Parameters required to set up Pulse transient include the pulse count pulse period and pulse duty cycle An example of Pulse transient is shown Figure 4 39 In this case the count is 4 the pulse period is 16 6 ms or 60 Hz and the duty cycle is 33 Figure 4 39 Pulse Transients Note that Pulse transients can only be programmed over the bus not the front panel Refer to the SCPI Programming Manual for more information about programmin
403. test For some of these tests numeric data entry may be required to define the test number or the modulation rate Pi qw VOLT MIN Standard Categories A andZ B 28V 14V RTCA 22 0 22 0 11 0 EUROCAE 22 0 25 1 12 5 Table 9 13 Normal Voltage Minimum This test will change the output voltage from 28V or 14V to 22V or 11V The test will last for 30 minutes The lt backspace will terminate the test at any time 146 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments VOLT MAX Standard Categories AandZ B 28V 14V RTCA 30 3 30 3 15 1 EUROCAE 30 3 29 3 14 6 VOLT UNDER Table 9 14 Normal Voltage Maximum This test will change the output voltage from 28V or 14V to 30 3V or 15 1V The test will last for 30 minutes The lt backspace will terminate the test at any time This test applies to category Z and 28 volt category B equipment The output voltage will drop to 10 volts and will ramp up at a rate of 0 15 volt sec for the US standard and at a rate of 0 30 volt sec for EUROCAE standard for 30 seconds before it returns to nominal value VOLT SURGE This test will surge and sag the voltage to a level and duration specified Table 9 15 with 5 seconds between transients The test is repeated three times RTCA Surge Sap Dwell msec Dwell msec A 30 3 15 7 f s gt gt Table 9 1
404. test equipment required as shown in Figure 6 2 If the DMM and phase meter have an IEEE GPIB interface it is possible to use the 16 bit version of the CIGUI program version 3 18 or higher supplied on the CD ROM that came with the iX Series to operate the test equipment The 16 bit CIGUI requires a Windows 98 PC This function is not included in the 32 bit Cigui32 program however The calibration for impedance can be found in the Calibration Menu on the main CIGUI screen In this case the GPIB interface must be connected to the PC the DMM s and the Phase meter The GPIB addresses for the DMM s and Phase meter expected by the CIGUI program are shown in the table below Instrument Address iX AC Power Source Set in CIGUI Interface screen Do not use 4 5 or 6 for AC source and Utility Menu on iX controller DMM1 Used for voltage measurement 4 DMM2 Used for current measurement 5 Phase Meter Used for phase measurement 6 Table 6 6 GPIB addresses for impedance calibration Note that the CIGUI32 32 bit version does not support computer aided impedance calibration Instead the readings from the DMM s and Phase meter can be made manually and written down In that case a calculator may be used to calculate the R and L portions of the impedance using the formulas shown in Table 6 8 To verify or adjust the programmable impedance function proceed as follows for each phase 1 Program the power source to 230 0VAC a
405. the PROGRAM menus Entry Description PROGRAM 1 VOLTAGE Programs the output voltage in rms when in AC mode or absolute voltage when in DC mode In DC mode negative values can be entered FREQ Programs the output frequency when in AC mode If the unit is in DC mode the value for FREQ will be set to DC and cannot be changed until AC mode is selected When in AC mode the frequency can be changed from 16 Hz to 500 Hz Values entered that fall outside this range will generate a 200 RANGE ERROR and will not be accepted VOLT RANGE Selects 135 150V or 270 300V voltage range The actual range values may be different depending on the configuration The value of this field can only be changed with the shuttle or the key Note that the voltage range is coupled with the output relay state on all AC sources with firmware revision 2 39 or higher If the output relay is closed OUTPUT ON the voltage range cannot be changed CURR LIMIT Sets the current limit value for the current detection system When the load current value exceeds the set current limit a fault condition is generated The actual response of the AC Source to a current limit fault is determined by the protection mode selected in the CONFIGURATION menu CC Constant Current CV Constant Voltage 46 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z PHASE CLOCK MODE VOLT MODE DC OFFSET START i Series iX Series California Instruments
406. the Print button or use File Print to print a test report for this test Return to step 8 as needed The following chapters provide details on the various screens menus displays and controls available to the operator to manage the test process 154 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 1 2 5 Initial Setup The 160 option supports both and DC modes of operation The correct mode is function of the EUT to be tested and the operator must select the corresponding operating mode first This can be done from the front panel if needed or using the CIGui32 program Use of the CIGui32 program for all settings will be assumed for the remainder of this chapter The following twelve power groups are covered in the RTCA DO 160 directive Category reference For ac equipment A CF A NF A WF Fordc equipment B Z AC tests can be performed at 115V nominal or 230V nominal except A NF and A CF which can only be done at 115V nominal All AC line voltage shown are L N DC tests can be performed at 28V nominal or 14V nominal Definitions A CF designates ac equipment intended for use on aircraft electrical systems where the primary power is from constant frequency 400 Hz ac system A NF designates ac equipment intended for use on aircraft electrical systems where the primary power is from narrow variable frequency 360 to 650 Hz ac system A WF designates ac e
407. the deviation is shown in the last column Vnom Test Std requirement Actual setting Reason 230VAC IA NF No Tests Performed Max output voltage limitation 230VAC IA WF No Tests Performed Max output voltage limitation 115VAC 16 5 1 2 115 18 Vrms 115 2 Vrms Resolution 115 16 5 1 2 115 18 Vrms 115 2 Vrms Resolution 115VAC WF 16 5 1 2 115 18 Vrms 115 2 Vrms Resolution 115 16 5 1 2 115 1 24 Vrms 115 1 2 Vrms Resolution 115VAC 16 5 1 2 115 1 24 Vrms 115 1 2 Vrms Resolution 115 A WF 16 5 1 2 115 1 24 Vrms 115 1 2 Vrms Resolution 230VAC IA CF 16 5 1 2 230 36 Vrms 230 4 Vrms Resolution 230VAC 16 5 1 2 230 2 48 Vrms 230 2 5 Vrms Resolution 115VAC 16 5 1 3 400Hz mod by 75Hz 400 2 mod by 8Hz Resolution 115VAC 16 5 1 3 360Hz mod by 75Hz 360 2 mod by 8Hz Resolution 115VAC 16 5 1 3 650Hz mod by 75Hz 650 2 mod by 8Hz Resolution 115VAC A WF 16 5 1 3 360Hz mod by 75Hz 360 2 mod by 8Hz Resolution 115 A WF 16 5 1 3 800 2 mod by 75Hz 800 2 mod by 8Hz Resolution 230VAC CF 16 5 1 3 400Hz mod by 75Hz 400 2 mod by 8Hz Resolution 230VAC CF 16 5 1 5 1 320V Transient Test skipped Requires additional equipment 230VAC CF 16 5 2 3 1 360V Transient Test skipped Requires addi
408. the maximum negative trigger delay value equals 312 0 ms The value may be entered directly from the keyboard or using the knob i Series iX Series November 2005 93 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 4 7 Transient Programming 4 7 1 Introduction Transient programming provides precise timing control over output voltage and frequency changes This mode of operation can be used to test a product for susceptibility to common AC line conditions such as surges sags brownouts and spikes By combining transient programming with custom waveforms Series only virtually any AC condition can be simulated on the output of the AC source The default voltage mode is FIXED which means the output voltage is constant and remains at the level set by the user Changes made to the output voltage made from the PROGRAM 1 menu take effect immediately In front panel operation mode the voltage and frequency slew rates rate of change are always at their maximum of 1E9 V s and 1E9 Hz s Slew rate programming is only possible over the IEEE 488 or RS232C bus On power up the AC source always reverts to the maximum slew rate for both voltage and frequency 4 7 2 Using Transient Modes The voltage can be programmed in the following transient operating modes STEP causes the output to permanently change to its triggered value PULSE causes the output to change to its triggered value for a specific time as determined by the Pulse menu parame
409. tings Save power on settings again to could not be recalled overwrite old content 324 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual i Series iX Series RevZ California Instruments Hardware configuration settings lost Limit memory lost Contact service department at support calinst com to obtain instructions on restoring configuration data System memory lost Memory corrupted Recycle power Calibration memory Calibration data lost lost Start angle must be first sequence Start phase angle in wrong place Contact Cl service department at support calinst com to obtain instructions on restoring calibration data or recalibrate unit Start phase angles can only programmed at the start of a transient list Once a transient is in progress phase angle cannot be changed Illegal for DC Operation not Switch to AC or AC DC mode in DC mode 11 Duplicate sequence sequence ae Pree Missing list parameter list parameters missing Voltage peak error Peak voltage exceeds internal bus voltage Time needed to slew to final value is less than dwell time Slew time exceed dwell Illegal during transient Operation requested not available while transient is running Output relay must be closed Operation not possible with open relay One or more transient Check programmed lists This error may occur when selecting user defined wave s
410. tion screens for each phase These parameters are password protected and can only be changed after the calibration password has been entered Refer to the calibration section in this manual for details on performing a calibration The following calibration factors are available from this menu Entry Description VOLT FS Full scale voltage measurement calibration factor VOLT 0 Zero offset voltage measurement calibration factor VOLT FS HT Temperature compensated full scale voltage measurement calibration factor VOLT 0 HT Temperature compensated zero offset voltage measurement calibration factor CURR FS Full scale current measurement calibration factor CURR 0 Zero offset current measurement calibration factor CURR FS HT Temperature compensated full scale current measurement calibration factor CURROHT Temperature compensated zero offset current measurement calibration factor i Series iX Series November 2005 75 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 4 2 14 OUTPUT CAL FACTORS Menu OUTPUT CAL FACTORS IMP REAL FS IMP REACT FS 11 IMP REAL MIN 1 8 IMP 2 5 1 2 1 3 3 38 Figure 4 27 OUTPUT CAL FACTORS menu The OUTPUT CAL FACTORS menu provides access to the output calibration parameters These parameters are password protected and can only be changed after the calibration password has been entered For three phase configurations the PHASE keys toggle between the thr
411. tional equipment 14VDC DC 16 6 1 1 15 15 V nom 15 2 V nom Resolution 14VDC BDC 16 6 1 1 15 15 V nom 15 2 V nom Resolution 14VDC DC 16 6 1 1 15 15 V nom 15 2 V nom Resolution 28VDC IADC 16 6 1 2 gt 5 kHz ripple voltage Test skipped Requires additional equipment 28VDC BDC 16 6 1 2 gt 5 kHz ripple voltage Test skipped Requires additional equipment 28VDC ZDC 16 6 1 2 gt 5 kHz ripple voltage skipped Requires additional equipment 14VDC IADC 16 6 1 2 gt 5 kHz ripple voltage skipped Requires additional equipment 14VDC BDC 16 6 1 2 gt 5 kHz ripple voltage Test skipped Requires additional equipment 14VDC ZDC 16 6 1 2 gt 5 kHz ripple voltage skipped Requires additional equipment 14VDC ADC 16 6 2 1 10 25 V nom 10 3 V nom Resolution 14VDC BDC 16 6 2 1 10 25 V nom 10 3 V nom Resolution 14VDC DC 16 6 2 1 10 25 V nom 10 3 V nom Resolution 14VDC ADC 16 6 2 4 23 15V in transient 23 2V in transient Resolution i Series iX Series November 2005 153 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 1 2 4 General Test Procedure Generally the following steps are needed to perform 160 test an EUT 1 2 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Connect the EUT to the power source Select the correct mode of operation for the EUT AC or DC mode single or three phase mode Program the relevant nominal voltage and frequency using the ClGui32 main screen Apply power by closing the output r
412. to a user specified end value at a specified rate of change A voltage step on the other hand is an instantaneous change in output voltage The new value will be held for the duration period specified by the user The final output voltage value of a sweep and a step transient step should be different than the value at the start of the transient step or no change in output value will occur FREQ SWEEP STEP This transient type is similar to a voltage sweep step except it affects the frequency Refer to the previous paragraph VOLT FREQ SWEEP STEP This transient type combines the previous two types into a single step The effect is that of changing the output voltage and frequency simultaneously Note While this transient is programmed as a single transient step two list entries are required to store this information As such every VOLT FREQ SWEEP STEP used will consume two list entries at a time START VIEW SEQUENCE This entry allows the user to switch to the transient execution menu This menu provides a list of all available transient list steps and their sequence numbers From this menu transient list execution can be started The same menu can be used to view or edit any available transient list step or erase a step using the backspace key i Series iX Series November 2005 53 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 4 2 6 1 VOLT SURGE SAG sub menu VOLTAGE SURGE SAG SETUP RANDOM END VOLT END DELAY 8 8815
413. to the 300 volt range Close the output relay Program the output to 240 volts and 60 Hz Go to the MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION screen Enter the actual AC output voltage for the VOLT FS parameter and press the ENTER key AC Current Full scale Apply a load to the output Refer to Table 6 2 Program the output to 150 volts on the 150 volt range and 60 Hz Observe the actual output current and enter this value for the CURR FS parameter Press the ENTER key For the following calibration steps put the external Digital Multimeter into the DC mode DC Volt Zero Go to the PROGRAM 2 screen and program the DC mode Go the PROGRAM screen and program the 300 range and 2 0 volts Go to the MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION screen and enter the value displayed on the external meter for the VOLT ZERO parameter DC Volt Full scale Program the output to 240 volts Go to the MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION screen Enter the actual DC output voltage displayed on the external multimeter for the VOLT FS parameter and press the ENTER key DC Current Zero Program the 150 volt range and 0 volts Apply a 67 ohm 270 watt load to the output This resistor will represent approximately a 2 amp load Program the output to 135 volts Enter the actual DC load current for the CURR ZERO parameter in the MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION screen and press the ENTER key If this adjustment can t be successfully made perform the Current Monitor Offset Adjustment in paragraph 6 6 DC Current F
414. tor To check the oscillator output turn off the unit at the main breaker Set the DVM to AC volts and connect the meter to Test Point 2 TP2 with the return on TP1 See Figure 5 4 TP2 is in the center of the AC logic board and TP1 is at the top left Turn the breaker back on There should be a reading on the meter which can be varied from 0 to 5 volts by programming the output from zero to 300V If no reading is present check the output at the CPU Phase A Board Check the signal between TP29 and TP1 return on the CPU Phase A Board Switch power to the unit off before relocating probes If a signal is present at the CPU Phase A Board but not at the AC Logic Board then the fault is in the wiring or the current limit board Check the continuity of cables from the oscillator to the AC logic board If there is no signal at TP29 then recheck the inhibit at paragraph 7 3 7 or replace the oscillator assembly The presence of the oscillator signal at the AC logic board would indicate a fault in the output relay or output wiring See Figure 5 2 AC output Switch unit off Check that P1 on the AC power board is making good contact with its mating half and J8 the output to the AC smoothing inductors is firmly engaged Switch the unit back on and operate the power on off switch on the front panel Listen to hear if the relay operates If the relay does not operate replace the input output board If it does check the continuity of the output wiring If th
415. ts The user may select the desired input voltage using the range selector within the input module To change the input voltage range pry open the cover to the input module Remove the fuse carrier Install the correct fuses in the carrier Reinstall the carrier into the input module so that the desired voltage range appears in the module cover window Close the cover Note that attempting to operate the EOS from an input range that does not match the actual AC power voltage may cause permanent damage to the unit The line power source to the EOS must provide protective earth grounding Mechanical Installation The 5 1 and EOS 3 have been designed for rack mounting in a standard 19 inch rack The unit should be supported from the bottom with a shelf track or supported from the sides with optional rack slides RMS option The cooling fan at the rear of the unit must be free of any obstructions that would interfere with the flow of air A 2 5 inch clearance should be maintained between the rear panel of the EOS unit and the rear panel of the mounting cabinet Also the air intake holes on the sides of the power chassis must not be obstructed i Series iX Series November 2005 205 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 4 5 4 Output Wiring 206 The EOS 1 or EOS 3 is wired in series with the output of specified California Instruments power systems The EOS terminal block marked SOURCE should be wired to the output of the power
416. ts available on the iX Series only This screen is not available on the i Series The Harmonics Trace Analysis measurement screen is a true menu screen offering several user accessible fields These fields are used to select the desired acquisition trigger and display mode The actual data is displayed whenever the ENTER key is pressed while the cursor is on the VIEW or START field The following fields are available on this menu HARMONICS TRACE ANALYSIS FUNCTION VOLT TRIG MODE SINGLE 2 ns ELAY PREVIOUS SCREEN S DATA MODE HES G PHASE SCALE TRIG D Figure 4 10 HARMONICS TRACE ANALYSIS screen Entry Description FUNCTION Selects Voltage Current or Both parameters for display VIEW Available display modes are TABLE BAR and TRACE TABLE mode displays the first 50 harmonics in a tabular text format BAR mode displays the first 50 harmonics in a graphical bar chart display CURRENT TRACE mode displays the selected Function in a time domain waveform graphical display 50 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z DATA MODE SCALE TRIG MODE TRIG SOURCE TRIG PHASE SET VOLT i Series iX Series California Instruments Selects absolute or relative harmonics display for TABLE and BAR view modes In relative mode all harmonics are shown in a percentage of the fundamental which is normalized at 100 In absolute mode the
417. ts der for 30ms 17V for 16 5 2 4 b Replace DO160 28V with 28 8V D3PO NORMVSURGE1 ms 10 3 2 Normal Transients 39V for 50ms 19 5V 16 5 2 4 b Replace DO160 28V with 28 8V D3P0 NORMVSURGE2 for 30ms 11 3 3 Normal Transients rahe for 100ms 21V for 16 5 2 4 b Replace DO160 28V with 28 8V D3P0_NORMVSURGE3 50ms 12 3 4 Normal Transients 35V for 200ms 23 5V 16 5 2 4 b Replace DO160 28V with 28 8V D3P0_NORMVSURGE4 100ms 13 4 Voltage Surge Fig 2 14 4 1 Abnormal Transients 46V for 100ms 38 16 5 4 4 Apply also Appendix 3 test D4P0 ABNVSURGE1 for 1 sec 15 4 2 Abnormal Transients OV for 5 secs 16 5 4 3 b Apply also Appendix 3 test D4P0 ABNVSURGE2 16 4 3 Abnormal Transients Disconnects for 5 secs n a Appendix 3 tests for multiple power D4P3 APPENDIX3 input equipment 17 5 Voltage Spike Fig 3 Peak voltage 600V 17 4 Requires additional equipment 18 6 Switching Transients Appendix 1 n a Appendix 1 DC Switching Transients 19 6 1 Cf Figure Table 1 1 T1 gt 10 n a D6PO APP1TransientsA msec 20 6 2 1 Cf Figure B Table 1 1 N 1 n a D6PO APP1TransientsB 1 21 6 2 2 Table 1 1 N 2 n a D6P0 APP1TransientsB N2 22 6 2 3 Cf Figure B Table 1 1 N 3 n a D6PO APP1TransientsB N3 23 6 2 4 Cf Figure B Table 1 1 N 4 n a D6PO APP1TransientsB 4 24 6 2 5 Cf Figure B Table 1 1 N 5 n a D6PO APP1TransientsB 5 25 6 2 6 Cf Figure B Table 1 1 N 6 n a D6P0 APP1TransientsB 6 26 6 2 7 Cf Figure B Table 1 1 N 7 n a D6P0 APP1TransientsB N7 27 6 2
418. ul for slewing output values such as voltage and frequency and observing the effect on the load When the SET key located in the FUNCTION keypad is pressed changes made with the shuttle to any output parameter will not take effect until the ENTER key is pressed In this mode any changes made to a setup menu will be blinking to indicate the pending change condition This mode allows changes to be made to all output parameters and executing them all at once by pressing the ENTER key The function keypad provides access to all menus and measurement screens The following keys are located in the FUNCTION keypad 38 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z KEY MENU PROG WAVE MEAS OUTPUT ON OFF i Series iX Series California Instruments FUNCTION MENU 1 PROG 1 WAVE I MEAS osx 1 h PHASE 4 2 FUNCTION DESCRIPTION The top level menu is accessed by pressing the MENU key Three shortcut keys are used to provide direct access to the PROGRAM WAVEFORM and MEASUREMENT screens as these are among the most frequently used screens Thus instead of going through the main menu to reach the PROGRAM WAVEFORM and MEASUREMENT screens they can be accessed directly by pressing the PROG WAVE and MEAS keys respectively A map of the Main menus is provided on the next few pages There are three top level menus in the i iX Series The PROG
419. ull scale Program the output to O volts on the 150 range Apply load resistor to the output Refer to Table 5 Program 135 volts Enter the actual output current for the CURR FS parameter in the MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION screen The value indicated by the External DVM is called Vac or Voc The current measured by the current shunt is called lac or Ipc TITLE PROGRAM LOAD PARAMETERS PARAMETER ADJUST TO AC Volt Full scale 240 VAC 60 Hz VOLT FS AC Current Full scale 150 Range 150 VAC full load CURR FS DC Volt Zero 300 Range 2 0 VDC VOLT ZERO DC Volt Full scale 240 VDC VOLT FS DC Current Zero 150 Range 135 VDC 67 ohm load CURR ZERO DC Current Full scale 150 Range 135 VDC full load CURR FS Table 6 3 Measurement Calibration Table For a multi phase power system that uses one controller 15003iX repeat paragraph 6 5 for each phase Move the external test equipment to the phase that is being calibrated Refer to Figure 6 2 While viewing the calibration screen press the PHASE key to select the respective phase i Series iX Series November 2005 119 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 6 6 Non Routine Calibration The non routine calibration involves removing the top cover from the power source Remove the line power from the power source before removing the top cover Most of the adjustments are on the Current Limit Assembly One adjustment is on Board Assembly Refer to Figure 6 3 for the location of the adjust
420. ully performed adjust the Current Measurement Pot This adjustment is described in the Non routine Calibration section of this manual If the DC current measurement displays more than 70 counts on the display perform the non routine current monitor adjustment Connect the load to the output Use the 10 milliohm current shunt in series with the load to measure the AC and DC load current When programming a DC load always program the output voltage to 0 volts before changing the output load This will prevent load switch contacts from being damaged To calibrate all measurement functions the desired value for the measurement value of current or voltage must be entered for the corresponding calibration value Make the indicated adjustments by typing in the desired display value This should be the value indicated by the external DVM If a 10 milliohm current shunt is used for current 300 millivolts represents 30 amps The Measurement Calibration Table is a summary of the measurement calibration procedure The following text is a detailed explanation of the procedure PARAMETER POWER SYSTEM 5001 15001 15003 AC Current Full Scale 4 10 5KW 2 10 10KW 1 350 15KW DC Current Full Scale 13 50 1 5KW 80 2 5KW 40 5KW 2 70 7 5KW Table 6 2 Calibration Load For Each Phase i Series iX Series November 2005 117 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments Figure 6 2 Test Equipment Hook up for Measurement Calibration
421. up and comes into regulation This feature ensures a smooth start up The output of the DC converter is automatically selected for 250 VDC or 500 VDC output depending on whether the low range output 135 150 Vac or high range output 270 300 Vac is selected The 250 500 VDC range selection is made by a relay that selects one of two taps on the DC output transformer The converter is fully protected with input current limit and overvoltage protection When the output of the DC converter is up and in regulation the LED on the input output board will be lit The LED can only be seen by looking directly down between the large storage capacitors and the input output board See Figure 5 3 5 7 AC Control Logic 106 The main function of the control board A4 is to generate the gate drive signals for the AC power stage This board also includes the circuit for the current limit and when two or three units are operated in parallel the load sharing circuit See Figure 5 6 The signal from the oscillator is fed through a low pass filter circuit and sent to the reference input of the error amplifier The voltage output of the unit is differentially sensed and fed back to the error amplifier thereby completing the control loop The output of the error amplifier drives a 37 5 kHz pulse width modulator The modulator output is sent to four gate drivers which drive the IGBT s on the AC power board after going through opto couplers that provide the necessa
422. urces with one controller in the Phase A power 9003iX 15003lx source The one controller controls all three outputs 15003iX LKM LKS Three power sources each with a controller for 3 phase output 704 Mil Std 704D amp E test firmware Mil Std 704A B C amp F test software Note Requires use of CIGui32 Windows application software provided on CD ROM 496 RTCA DO 160C test firmware IEC 1000 4 11 test firmware IEC 1000 4 13 test firmware Airbus ABD0100 1 8 Test firmware Note Requires use ofCIGui32 Windows application software provided on CD CIC496 Line sync option to synchronize output frequency to input mains line frequency Available for 9003iX and 15003iX configurations only Switches output configurations between single phase and three phase mode of operation Note that programmable impedance function on systems with MODE iX option is only available when in phase mode Rack mount slides OMNI 1 18i Single phase lumped reference impedance network of IEC1000 3 3 Flicker test OMNI 1 37i Single phase lumped reference impedance network of IEC1000 3 3 Flicker test High current i Series iX Series November 2005 13 User Manual Rev Z California Instruments OMNI 3 18i Three phase lumped reference impedance network of IEC1000 3 3 Flicker test OMNI 3 37i Three phase lumped reference impedance network of IEC1000 3 3 Flicker test High current TI Function strobe break out b
423. value that would take longer to accomplish than the slew time set This error can result in single step mode if the steps are executed out of order or one or more steps are skipped The voltage frequency values may no longer line up Try running the test from the first step 16 Illegal during transient A transient step is still in progress Try using the Abort button to abort any test in progress If other CIGui32 screens other than the Main GUI screen are open they may have initiated a transient which conflicts with the ABD option Try closing all other CIGui32 windows Great efforts have been made to check all test sequence files provided as part of the ABD option However due to the breath and complexity of the ABD database an occasional error may occur while using these files If an error cannot be resolved turn on the ClGui32 bus monitor window and rerun the test that yields the error and save the bus trace to a text file using the File Save All menu in the bus monitor window This file can be emailed to support Qcalinst com along with a description of the error Furthermore test files were developed making reasonable assumptions concerning the intent of the Airbus ABD0100 directive The user is free to modify edit revise or otherwise update any of these tests to match his her own requirements In this case we recommend you copy the supplied ABD Dbase subdirectory and use this copy to make modifications to This wil
424. w is too small to display all rows and columns scroll bars will appear at the bottom and or right of the data grid The following fields are displayed in the test data tables Test Number of the test from the MIL STD 704 standard For sub sections of a test number this field will be blank Section Test section Some tests may only have one section in which case this field is blank Subject Description of the type of test Test Limits A summary of the test limits that will be applied by this test Comment Comments concerning this test or its parameters File The test sequence file that is used to implement this test section on Reference the power source User Data The area at the bottom of this tab may be used to enter general information i Series iX Series November 2005 261 User Manual Rev Z 262 California Instruments Control Display Description regarding the unit under test the test location and operator and environmental conditions in effect during the test This information will be incorporated in the test reports generated by the GUI November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 8 2 9 704 Test Control E Mil Std 704 Test Tables Iof xi File Edit Run Help Pwr Output Test Selection Test Control EUT Performance Measurements EN Test Step Description Execution Controls Off MIL STD 70
425. ware limit DC range i iX HDC302 H75VDC 300VDC limit test written but will not run Hardware limit DC range i iX SAC105 1 75 2 modulation 2Hz modulation Resolution SAC105 0 85 2 modulation 0 9Hz modulation Resolution SAC105 0 58 2 modulation 0 6Hz modulation Resolution TAC105 1 75 2 modulation 2Hz modulation Resolution TAC105 0 85 2 modulation 0 9Hz modulation Resolution TAC105 0 58 2 modulation 0 6Hz modulation Resolution Note To perform MIL STD 704F tests HDC105 1 3 and HDC302 1 3 it is advised to use the firmware revision E tests TRANSIENT and ABNORMAL respectively The 704 firmware implementation overrides the DC voltage range hardware limit making it possible for these tests to be performed See section 9 8 1 8 The same does not apply to the equivalent rev B or rev C tests which require 475VDC The 475 VDC level is not supported on the i iX Series 256 November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 9 8 2 4 General Test Procedure Generally the following steps are needed to perform 704 test on an EUT 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 Connect the EUT to the power source Select the correct mode of operation for the EUT AC or DC mode single or three phase mode Program the relevant nominal voltage an
426. with AC or DC output iX Series also offers AC DC output mode i Series iX Series November 2005 1 User Manual Rev Z 2 Specifications California Instruments All specifications are for single i or iX series chassis and 25 5 sine wave output with resistive load unless noted otherwise 2 1 Electrical 2 1 1 Input Parameter Line Voltage Line VA Line Current Line Frequency Efficiency Power Factor Inrush Current Hold Up Time Isolation Voltage 3001i amp Ix 5001i amp iX 208 240 10 VAC single phase 208 240 Vi 10 Standard 400 440 Vi 10 400 400 480 Vi 10 400 3 phase 3 wire ground 25 A RMS max Per Box 23 ARMS max at 208 240 VAC 12 ARMS max at 400 440 VAC and 400 480 VAC Per Box 50 60 Hz 10 80 typical depending on line and load 0 7 typical 0 9 typical 100 for 100 us 100 for 100 us at 208 240V 50 Ay for 100 us at 400 440 VAC and 400 480 VAC 2200 input to output 1350 input to chassis November 2005 i Series iX Series User Manual Rev Z California Instruments 2 1 2 Output ALL SPECIFICATIONS ARE FOR AC AND DC UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE Voltage me Mode Low 0 135 VAC High 0 270 VAC 0 150 VAC High 0 300 VAC DC Mode Low 0 135 VDC High 0 270 VDC 0 150 VDC High 0 300 VDC AC DC Mode AC Low 0 150 V High 0 300 V iX Models only DC Offse
427. zed by application The GUI program is supplied with generic 5704 RevX set of test sequences where X is the rev of the standard being tested to which conform to the MIL STD 704 document Power Group Test A library can contain up to seven power group test tables labeled SAC TAC Table SVF TVF SXF LDC or HDC These table names correspond to the Power Groups identified in the MIL STD 704 standard Note that groups SAC TAC SVF TVF and SXF are AC powered where as groups LDC and HDC are DC powered The operator cannot select a group that is not supported by the present mode of operation of the power source Thus if the power source is in AC mode an error message will be display when trying to select group D or E Operating modes such as AC or DC must be changed from the main GUI screen The 704 Screen can remain open while switching back to the main screen Upon return to the 704 screen the relevant power groups can be selected Available power groups are Table SAC Single Phase 115V 400 Hz AC Power tests Table TAC Three Phase 115V 400 Hz CF AC Power tests Table SVF Single Phase 115V 360 to 800 Hz VF AC Power tests Table TVF Three Phase 115V 360 to 800 Hz VF AC Power tests Table SXF Single Phase 115V 60 Hz AC Power tests Table LDC 28 VDC Power tests Table HDC 270 VDC Power tests The operator needs to determine what the relevant power group selection is for the unit under test EUT When

i / iX Series User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents